1 A network administrator has captured a data frame in the network with the destination MAC address of 01-00-5E-A0-BI-

C3. The correct statement about this MAC address s Q.

❑ A It is a unicast MAC address
❑ B. It is a broadcast MAC address
❑ C. It is a multicast MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. It is an illegal MAC address

2. Which of the following is not the working principle of CSMNCD?

❑ A. Listen While Talk
❑ B. RRetransmission after a fixed time delay (Right Answers)
❑ C. Conflict suspension
❑ ITh Retransmission after random delay
❑ E. Listen Before Talk

Answer: B

3. The1Py4 address of the host is 200_200_200_201/30_ Which host with the following IPv4 address and its
communication do not need to be forwarded by the muter?
❑ A 200200200.1
❑ B. 200200200_202 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 200200200200
❑ O. 200200200203

Answer: B

4_ If the Ethernet data frame is Lengthaype=0x0806, which of the ft:Mowing statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. This data frame is an Ethernet H frame. (Right Answers)
❑ B. This data frame is an IEEE 802.3 frame
❑ C. The source MAC address of this data frame must not be FFFF-FFFF-FFFFF (Right Answers)
❑ D The destination MAC address of this data frame must be FFFF-FFFF-FFFFF.

Answer: AC

5. When a router enabled with Proxy ARP function receives an ARP request not its own, what actions are performed?
packet and finds that the requested IP addr
❑ A If there is a route to the destination address, send its own MAC address to (Multiple Choice)
the ARP requester (Right Answers )
❑ B. Discard the message
❑ C. Broadcast ARP request message
❑ D. Find if there is a route to the destination address or not (Right Answers )

Answer: AD

6. Which of the fallowing storage media are commonly used by Huawei routers? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. SDRAM (Right Answers)
❑ B. NVRAM (Right Answers)
❑ C_ Flash (Right Answers )
❑ D_ Hard Disk
❑ E. SD Card (Right Answers )

Answer: ABCE

7 The Vag operating system commands are droded into four access nanMnro Innl. canaqurasan Wan and management level. Much level can run
various busirress configurabon commands but cannot operate te file system ,
▪ Access level
D a. Mantonere level
coDevratian 'Teo might Answers)
❑ D. Management level

/NSW C
 8 On the VRP interface, you cannot use the command delete or unreserved vrpcfg zip to delete files. You must empty them in
the recycle bin to delete files comretely. OA. TRUE
OB FALSE (Right

Answers) Answer: F

9 The switch MAC address table is existing as follows. which of the following statements is correct? (fluawei>ictim mac-
address
RACaddresstableofslot0:

*AC Address VLAM/ PtVLAN CEVLAN Port

VS1/SI Type (17R
Ilk7.•1tn1-!
SON -0811-0b49 I - Eth0/0/3 stati.
Totalamtchiasitemsonslot0displayed=

*AC address table of slot C:

*AC Akira: VLAN/ PEVLM Cf YLMI Port Type LSP/LSR-ID

VSI/SI RAC-Tunnel
5489-989d-ld30 Ith0/0/1 *amid 0/-
548.5-9895-18a6 I - Eth0/0/2 dynamic 0/-
-
total watching Item on slot 0 displayed c 7'
E A The MAC address 5489-9885-1838 is manually configured by the administrator.
E 13_ The MAC address 5489-9811-0b49 is manually configured by the administrator (Right Answers)
E C. The MAC address 5489-3891-1450 is manually configured by the administrator. E D. After
the switch is restarted, all MAC addresses need to be re-learned.

Answer: 13

10 As shown in the figure below, the switch starts the STP protocol. When the network is stable, which of the following
statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A SWB is the root bridge in this network

❑ B SWA is the root bridge in this network (Right Answers)
❑ C Both ports of SWB are in Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑D Both ports of SWC are in

Forwarding state_ Answer: BC

11 The STP protocol is enabled on both switches shown in the figure below_ An engineer made the following conclusions on this
network_ Do you think what is the correct conclusion? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A The GO/0/2 port of SWB is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers )
❑ B The GO/N2 port of SWA is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑ C Both pods of SWB are designated pods_
❑ D The GO/0/3 part of SWA is stable in the Forwarding state (Right Answers )
❑ E Both pods of MA are designated pods (Right Answers)
Answer: ABDE
12. Compared to STP protocol, which kind of port role is added in RSTP protocol? (Multiple Choice) El A. Alternate port
(Right Answers)
I=1 B. Backup port (Right Answers)
I=1 C. Root port
❑D. Designated port

Answer: AB

13 As shown in the figure, the two switches use the defaut parameters to run STP On Switch A the configuration command SIP root
primary is used. On the switch B the configuration command SIP priority 0 is used. Which of the following ports will be blocked,

5WA HUB SWEI

E0
EO 0 3 GO 0 1

GO 0 1
MAC 00e0-ft00-0001 mac:wee-mama
❑ A GO/0/2 of switch A (Right Answers)
❑ B. GO/0/1 of switch B
❑ C GO/0/1 of switch A

❑ D E0/0/3

of HUB

Answer:

14. Which of the following parameters does not the configuration BPDU packet of the STP protocol?
❑ A. Port ID I=1 B.
Bridge ID
❑ C. VLAN ID (Right Answers)
❑D. Root ED

Answer: C

15. By default, how many seconds are the Forward Delay of STP protocol? I=1 A. 20
I=1 B. 15 (Right Answers )
El C. 10
1=1 D. 5

Answer: B

16. Which of the following parameters are used in the switched network that runs the STP protocol when performing spanning tree
calculations? (Multiple Choice) 7 A. Root path cost (Right Answers)
❑ B. Port ID (Right Answers)
O C. Bridge ED (Right
Answers) E D. Forward
Delay

Answer: ABC

17. In the STP protocol, assume that at switches are configured with the same piton-Ey. The MAC address of switch 1 s 0.0-en-fc-
0600-40, and the MAC address of switch 2 is 011.04,00-00-10, the MAC address of switch 3 e. 00-e0-fc-00-00- 20, and the MAC
address of switch 4 is 00-e0-fc-00-00-80, then the root switch sheuM be ()
17 A. Switch 1
❑ 13_ Switch 2

(Right Answers)
El C. Switch
El a

Switch 4
Answer:

B
18, The network shown in the figure below, the MAC address of the switch has been marked Enter the command sip root
secondary on the SW0 switch. Which of the following switches become the root bridge of this network,
SWA SWB
00-01-02-03-04-AA 00-01-02-03-04-BB

00-01 02 03 00-01-02-03-04-OD
04-CC
❑ A SWA
❑ 13 SWB
▪ SWC
❑ 0 SW0
(Right
Answers)

Answer: 0

19. Both the two switches shown in the following figure have SIP enabled. Which port will eventually be in the Blocking state?

SWA SWB
4096 00-01-02-03-04-AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-BB
G 0/0/3

G 0/0/2

❑ A. GO/0/2 port of SWA

❑ B. GO/0/3 port of SWA
❑ C. GO/0/2 port of SWB
❑ D. G0/0/3 port of SWB (Right Answers )

Answer: ❑

20 The network as shown in the following figure, after the OSPF protocol is stable, what is the neighbor status of Router A
and Router B?

Router A Router B
Router ID 10.0.1,1 Router ID 10.0.2.2
Priority=255 Priority=0

Router C
Router ID 10.0.3.3
Priority=0
❑ A 2-way
❑ B. Down
❑ C FuiE (Right Answers )
❑ D. Attempt

Answer:
C
21. In
the network shown below, which of the following commands can be entered in the router to enable Host A to ping
through Host B? (Multiple Choice)

GO/0/1
16.612.2/30

OST A Rou r A
Gl
11.0.12.1/30 immiumml
10.0i.1.1/30 0
W:10.0.12.2

1-Lavin°
G0/0/2
10.0 1

HOST B
the 10.0.12.5/

O A. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.1 Router B : ip route-static 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.252

11.0.12.2
O B. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.1 Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.2
I=1 C. Router A : ip route-static 10.0.12.5 255.255.255.252 11.0.12.2 Router B : ip route-static 10.0.12.1255.255.255.252
11.0.12.1 (Right Answers ) O D. Router A : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0 11.0.12.2 Router B : ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0
11.0.12.1 (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

22. The network as shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A. Which of the following statements
are correct? (Multiple Choice) ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.25510.0.12.2
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.21.2 preference 70

GO/0/1
0.0.12.1/24 10,012.2/24 I oopback 0
10.0.2.2/32
10.0,21.1/24 10.0.21.2/2
G0/0/2 Router B
❑ A. The NextHop that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is 10.0.12.2. (Right Answers)
O B. If the GO/0/1 port is Down, the route that Router A reaches 10.0.0.2 is changed to 10.0.21.2. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is 10.0.21.2.
0 D. If the GO/0/2 port is Down, the route that Router A reaches 10.0.0.2 is changed

to 10.0.12.2. Answer. AB

23. Which of the following OSPF versions are suitable for IPv6?
El A. OSPFv2
1:1 B. OSPFv3 (Right Answers) C] C.
OSPFv4
D D. OSPFv1

Answer: B
24 T he network as shown in the following figure, which of the following commands can enable RouterA to forward a
packet with the destination IP address of 19 00 32 (Multiple Choice)

Loopback0 10.0.2.2/32
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24

GO/0/1
Router A Router B

O
a O
nr
3.3
/33

Router C
Loopback0 10_0.3.3/32
❑ A ip route-static 10.03.3 255 255 255 255 10 0.122 (Right Answers)
❑ B ip route-static 10 0.2.2 255 255255 255 100_12 2 ip route-static 10 03 3 255255.255 255 10 0 2 2 (Right
Answers)
❑ C. ip route-static 0.0 0.0 0.0.0.0 10 0 122 (Right Answers )
❑ 0 ip route-static 10 0.33 255

255255255 1002 2 Answer: ABC

25. Which of the following about the statement of static routing are incorrect?
❑ A. Manual configuration by network administrator
❑ B. Inter-route information needs to be exchanged between routers (Right Answers)
❑ C. Can not automatically adapt to changes in network topology
❑ D. Low system performance requirements

Answer: B

26. Which of the following commands can be used to check whether OSPF has correctly established neighbor relationships?
❑ A. display ospf neighbor
❑ B. display ospf brief
❑ C. display ospf peer (Right Answers )
❑ D. display ospf interface

Answer: C

27 For multiple paths to the same destination network, the router needs to select by comparing the size of the Cost value_ If the value
of the Cost is the same, then select according to the size of the Preference value.
❑ A. True
CO.False (Right

Answers)

Answer: B
 28. As shown in the figure below ; Host A and Host B cannot communicate.

HOST A HOST B
IP: 10.0.12.1/30 IP: 10.0.12.2/24
MAC: MAC-A MAC:MAC-B

❑ A. True (Right Answers)

❑ B False

Answer: A

29 For multiple paths to the same destination network, the router needs to select by comparing the size of the Preference value_ If
the Preference is the same, then select according to the size of the Cost value.
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B False

Answer: A

30. The routing table consists of multiple elements. What is wrong with the following statement?

❑ k Proto shows to learn the routing protocol of this route

❑ B. NextHop shows the local interface address of this route (Right Answers)
❑ G. Pre shows the priority of this routing protocol
❑ D. Destination/Mask shows the address and mask length of the destination network/host

Answer: B

31 The correct description of the following is 0 (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The next hop in the routing table is redundant_ If there is an outgoing interface, the packet can be forwarded.
❑ B. Routes obtained through different routing protocols have different priorities (Right Answers)
❑ C. The metrics defined by different routing protocols are not comparable (Right Answers)
❑ D. The metrics defined by different routing protocols are comparable

Answer: BC
32. ip route-static 10_0.2.2 255255/55.25510.0.12.2 preference 20, about this command, which is the
correct statement? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The route can guide the data packets forwarding with the destination IP address of 10.0.2.2.
(Right Answers)
❑ B. The route can guide the data packets forwarding with the destination IP address 10.0.12.2.
❑ C. The priority of the route is 20 (Right Answers)
❑ D The NextHop of the route is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

33. The network as shown in the following figure, when the network administrator performs traffic

planning, it is expected that the packets sent by Host A to Host B will be connected to G0/0/3
interface between the routers. The packets sent by Host B to Host A go pass the G0/0/4 interface
between routers Which of the following commands can implement this requirement (Multiple
Choice)

0.0.122/30

HOST A
19: 10.0.12.1/30 11.0,2-1
/
OW:10.0.112

IP:
10.0
.12.
❑ A_ 5/30
Rout 10.0
er A .126
❑ B p route-static 10 0.12.5 255 255 255 252 11.0 12.2 Router B ip route-static 10.0.12
Rou
ter 1 255255255252 11012 5 (Right Answers)
A
❑ C. p route-static 0 0 0.0 0.0.0.0 11.0.12 6 Router B ip route-static 0 00 0 0.0.0.0 11 0.12.1
Rout
er A p route-static 10.0.12 5 255255255252 11 0.12_6 Router B ip route-static 10 0 12 1
❑ D. 255 255 255 252 11 0 12.1
p route-static 0 0.0 0 0 0.0 0 11.0 12 2 Router B ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
11_0.12.5 (Right Answers)
Rout

er A

Ans

wer:

AD

34. If the IP address requested by the DHCP client is already occupied, which packet will the
DHCP server use as the response?
❑ A. DHCP ACK
❑ B DHCP RELEASE
❑ G. DHCP NAK (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCP

DISCOVER

Answer: C

35. The DHCP REQUEST message must be sent in broadcast form.

❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

36. Which DHCP message does the DHCP client send when it wants to leave the network?
❑ A. DHCP DISCOVER
❑ B. DHCP RELEASE (Right Answers)
DHCP REQUEST
• DHCP ACK

Answer: B

37 Huawei devices can be managed using the Telnet protocol. Which of the following statements is
correct about this management function?
❑ A The port number used by Telnet defaultly is 22, which cannot be modified
❑ B. Telnet must enable the VTY interface, and the maximum is 15 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Telnet does not support authentication based on username and password
❑ D. Telnet does not support deploying ACLs to

increase security. Answer: B

 38 As shown, the topology and the configuration on the switch interconnect pod, you can determine that the data frame labeled
as VLAN 10 can be forwarded normally between the two switches_

GEO 1 GE 1

LSW1 LSW2

[LSWIlinterface GigatitEthemet0/0/1
[LSW1-Gigabitatiemet0/0/1]Port
link-type trunk (LSW1-
GigabitEttitunet0/0/11eort trunk
pvid vlan 20
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/111kort trunk allow-pass Nan 10

IILSW2jinterface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
ILSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/1Wort link-type trunk
f LSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/11Nart trunk
pvid vlan 10 (LSW2-
GigabitEthernet0/0/11Port trunk allow -
pass Wan 10
❑ A True
❑ B- False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

30 The output information of a port of the switch is as follows What is wrong with the following
statement?

interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port link-type trunk

port trunk pvid vlan 100
port trunk allow-pass vlan 100 200

❑ A. tithe data frame carries a VLAN TAG of 200, the switch strips the VLAN TAG and sends out
(Right Answers)
❑ B. If the port receives a data frame without VLAN TAG, the switch needs to add VLAN TAG100.
❑ C The link type of the port is Hybrid type
E D. If the data frame carries a VLAN TAG of 100, the switch strips the VLAN TAG

and sends out. Answer: A

40 Which information of the data frame is judged by the VLANIF interface to perform Layer 2 forwarding or
Layer 3 forwarding?
❑ A. Destination MAC (Right Answers)
❑ B Source IP
❑ C. Destination pod
❑ D Source MAC

Answer: A

41 Packets forwarded between two routers must not carry VLAN TAG.
❑ A True
❑ B False (Right Answers )

Answer: B

42. The Priority field in the VLAN tag identifies the priority of the data frame. What is the priority range?
❑ A. 0-15
❑ EL 0-63
❑ C. 0-7 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 0-3

Answer: C
43. What is the characteristic of port-based VLAN partition?
❑ A. Add a VLAN tag to the data frame based on the lP address carried in the packet.
❑ B. Assign the VLAN ID according to the protocol type and encapsulation format of the data frame.
❑ G. The host moving location no need to reconfigure the VLAN
❑ D. The host moving location needs to reconfigure VLAN (Right Answers)

Answer: D

44. The Protocol field in the PPP frame format is OxC223, indicating that the protocol is:
❑ A. CHAP (Right Answers )
❑ B. PAP
❑ C. NCP
❑ D. LCP

Answer:

45 The configuration information of a router is as follows. Which combination of wernarne and

password used by the peer router can enable PPP channel associated to complete authentication?

mist Password cipher teat

test service-, YPC 151,4

El A. Username: (esti Password: (esti

❑ B Llwmame: test Password: test (Right Answers)
❑ C. Username: test2 Password: test
▪ Llsername: test2 Password: test2

Answer: B

46. Which method does the PPPoE client use to send PADI packets to the Server?
❑ A. Broadcast (Right Answers)
❑ B. Unicast
❑ C. Multicast
❑ D.

Anycast

Answer: A

47 The network shown in the following figure requires the network where the host is located to access the
Internet through Easy IP. Which of the following ACL5 should be used on the 00/0/3 interface of the muter?
❑ A. ad number 2000 rub 5 permit source 10 0.13.1 0 0 0 0
❑ B. act number 2000 rub 5 permit source 10 0.120 00 0255
❑ G ad number 2000 rub 5 permit source 100 12_1 00 00
❑ B. act number 2000 rub 5 permit source 100_13 0 0 0 0 255 (Right Answers)

Answer: 0
48 The configuration information of a router is as follows Which of the following statement is correct?
(Multiple Choice)

ISOM
authent i cal ien..schtme default.
authentication-scheme huawei
authentication-mode radius
authorization-scheme default
authorisation-scheme huawei
accounting-scheme•, defnult
domain default
domain default_admin domain
huawei
authentication-schema huawei
authorization-scheme huawei
local-user huawei password cipher 1.23956
local-user huaweitthuawei password cipher GS41321.
ke
❑ N The domain which domain name is huawei does not use the accounting scheme (Right
Answers)
❑ B. if the username huawei is used for authentication, the password needs to be 654321.
❑ C. The authorization mode used by the domain which domain name is huawei is local authorization.
(Right Answers)
❑ D. The authentication mode used by the domain which domain name is huawei is local authentication.

Answer: AC
49. The IKE protocol is used to establish an SA for IPsec auto-negotiation, which can support identity
authentication when the address of the initiator of the negotiation changes dynamically
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

50. By default, in the SNMP protocol, which port number is used by the proxy process to send an
alarm message to the NMS,
❑ A 163
❑ B. 161
❑ C 162 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 164

Answer: C

51. If the result of the packet matching ACL is "reject", the packet is finally discarded.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

52. In terms of security, [Psec tunnel mode is superior to [Psec transport mode.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer:

A
53. What is the status of the OSPFv3 adjacency relationship after it is established?
❑ A. Loading
O B. 2-way
O C. Full (Right Answers)
❑ D. Down

Answer: C

54. The network as shown in the following figure, when OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces, Router A and Rcuter B cannot
establish adjacencies.

Fe80::fe03:e24f/64 Fe80::fe03:c3fb/64
30011 2:1/64 1 1
300112;1/64

Router B GO/0/1
Router A
Router ID 10.0.2.2 O
A. True (Right Answers) Router ID 10.0.2.2
0 B. False

Answer: A

55. Which of the following fields are fields that exist in both 1Pv6 and [PV4 headers? (Multiple Choice) O A. Source
Address (Right Answers)
El B. Version (Right Answers)
O C. Destination Address (Right Answers) O D.
Next Header

Answer: ABC

56. What is the destination address of the DHCPv6 request packet? O A.

FF01::1:2
LI B. FF02::1:2 (Right Answers) 111 C.
FF02::1
O D. FF02::2

Answer: B

57. By defauFt, how many seconds is the period of OSPFv3 HELLO packet sending on the Ethernet link? O A. 30
O B. 10 (Right Answers) O C.
20
El D. 40

Answer: B
58. Which of the following fields does the MPLS header include? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Label (Right Answers)
▪ EXP (Right Answers)
❑ TTL (Right Answers)
❑ Tas

Answer:

ABC

59 SR (SegmentRouting) defines a destination address prefix/node and adjacency in the network as

segments, and assigns SIDS (Segment 10s) to the segments. By performing an unordered list of Adjacency
SIDS and Prefix/Node SIDS (destination address prefixes/node segments), a forwarding path is obtained
❑ A True
❑ 11 False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

60The ARP protocol can resolve the MAC address of the target device according to the
destination IP address, thereby, to map the link layer address and the IP address
❑A True (Right Answers)
❑ B.

False

Answ

er: A

61 TheTraced diagnostic tool records the 0 of each ICMP TTL timeout message so that the user can be
provided with the IP address of the packet when it arrives at the destination_
❑ A Destination port
❑ B. Source port
❑ C Destination IP address
❑ D. Source 1F1

address (Right

Answers) Answer: D

€2. VLSM can expand any IP network segment; including Class D addresses.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right

Answers) Answer: B

63_ Which fields in the IPv4 header are related to sharding? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A_ Fragment Offset (Right Answers)
▪ Flags (Right Answers)
❑ G. Tit
❑ IT identification (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

64. The pwd and dir commands in the VRP operating platform can view the file information in the
current directory.
❑ A_ True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)
Answer: 13
65. The output information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple
Choice)

<Huawei>displaystartup
MainBoard:
Startup system software: flash:/AR2220E-V200R007COOSPC600.cc Next
startup system software: flash:/AR2220E-V200R007COOSPC600.cc Backup
systemsoftwarefornextstartup:null
Startup saved-configuration file: flash:/vrpcfg.zip Next startup saved-
configurationfile: flash:/backup.zip Startuplicensefile: null
Nextstartuplicensefile: null
Startup patch package: Null
Nextstartuppatchpackage: null
Startup voice-files: null
Next startup voice-files: null
O A. The currently used VRP version file is the same as the VRP file used for the next startup.
(Right Answers) O B. The currently used VRP version file is different from the VRP file used for
the next startup.
O C. The currently used configuration file is different from the one used for the next startup.
(Right Answers) O D. The currently used configuration file is the same as the one used for the
next startup.

Answer: AC

66. For a switch running STP, the port can be directly converted to the Disabled state in any state.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

67. Which of the following MAC addresses will not age? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Dynamic MAC address
❑ B. Black hole MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Static MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Port MAC address

Answer: BC

68. By default, the bridge priority of a switch is 32768.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
69. Which port of the following switches is blocked as shown in the following figure?

SVVA SWB
4096 00-01-02-03-04-AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-BB

SWC
32768 00-01-02-03-04-CC

❑A. GO/0/2 of SWC

❑ B. GO/0/1 of SWC (Right Answers)
❑ C GO/0/3 of SWB
❑D. GO/0/3 of SWA

Answer: B

70. As shown in the following figure, all hosts can communicate normally. What is the correct
relationship between the SWBMAC address and the port?

G 0/0/3 G 0/0/3

S A S B
G 0/0/
G /0/2 G 0/0/1

HOST A HOST B HOST C

IP: 10.1.1.1/24 IP: 10.1.1.2/24 IP: 10.1.1.3/24
MAC:MAC-A MAC:MAC-B MAC:MAC-C
❑ A. MAC-A G0/0/3 MAC-B G0/0/3 MAC-C GO/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC-A GO/0/1 MAC-B GO/0/2 MAC-C G0/0/3
❑ C. MAC-A G0/0/2 MAC-B G0/0/2 MAC-C G0/0/3
❑ D. MAC-A GO/0/1 MAC-B GO/0/1 MAC-C G0/0/3

Answer: A

71. A switch running STP protocol will send TCN BPDUs only when a port on the switch fails.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
72. How many bits of the Port ED total length in the spanning tree protocol?
El A. 16 (Right Answers)
El B. 4
El C. 2
El ID 8

Answer: A

73. As shown in the figure, the correct description about this network topology is 0.
VA

HostA Host& Host C Host D

❑ A. There are 6 collision domains in this network.
111 B. There are 6 broadcast domains in this network.
❑ C. There are 12 collision domains in this network.
El D. There are 2 broadcast domains in this network. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

74. Which of the following statements about the Backup port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
O A. Backup port as a backup of the designated port, providing another backup path from the root
bridge to the corresponding network segment (Right Answers) 0 B. Backup port not only
forwards user traffic but also learns MAC address
C C. Backup port does not forward user traffic but learns MAC address
0 D. Backup port provides another switchable path from the designated bridge

to the root as the backup port of the root port Answer: A

75. A network consisting of switches does not have STP enabled. A Layer 2 loop must occur.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
76_ When a port running the standard STP protocol receives a suboptimal BPDU, it immediately sends its own
configuration BPDU from this port_
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

77 As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF protocol_ The top of the link is
the size of the Cost value_ What is the path of the RA to the network 10 0 0 NB'?

'
1°

1
0.0.0.0/8

Router Router D

Router C

❑ A.
A-B-
D
❑ B. PA can not reach 10.0.0.018
❑ C A-D
❑ D A-C-D (Right Answers)

Answer: D

TB Which of the following statements about OSPF neighbor status is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. In the Exchange state, the routers send each other a DO packet containing the summary
of the link state information to describe the content of the local LSDB (Right Answers)
❑ B. The master-sinve relationship of OSPF is formed in the ExStarl state (Right Answers)
❑ C_ After the router LSDB is synchronized, it is converted to the Full state_ (Right Answers)
❑ D_ The serial number of the OD packet

is determined in the Exchange state_

Answer: ABC

79. On the network shown in the following figure, the administrator wants Router A to use static mutes to send
packets to Router B priority through GO/0/1 Which command can be used to meet this requirement'

GO/0/1
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12 Loopbac
2/24 k0
10.0.2.2/
10.0.21.1/24 32
10.0.21.2/
2
Router A GO/0/2 Router B
❑ A. ip mute-static 100 22 255.255.255.255 10 0.12 2 ip route-static 10.0 22 255.255.255.255 10 0212
preference 40
❑ B. ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255 255 255 10.0.122 ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.212
preference 70 Might Answers)
❑ C ip route-static 10 0 22 255.255.255.255 100_12.2 ip route-static 10 0 22 255.255.255.255 10 0212
▪ ip route-static 10 02 2 255 255 255 255 10 0.12 2

preference 70 ip route-static 10 0 2.2 255.255.255.255

10.021.2 Answer: B

80 ip route-static 10 0.12.0 255 255.255 0 192.168.1.1

The correct description about this command is 0.
❑ A. The priority of this route is 100
❑ B. This command configures a route to the 192.168.1.1 network_
❑ C This command configures a route to the 10_0 12 0 network. (Right Answers)
❑ D. if the router learns the route of the same destination network as this route through other protocols,
the router wit prefer this route. Answer: C
81 Network structure and OSPF partition as shown in the figure, except for R1, routers R2, R3 and R4
are ABR routers of OSPF.

Areal R4 Area2

❑A True
❑B. False (Right

Answers) Answer: B

82[R1] ospf
[R1-ospf-I area I
[R1-ospf-1-area-00 0 1] netted< 10 0.12 0 0 0 0255
As shown in the configuration, the administrator has configured OSPF on R1, but R1 cannot learn the
mutes of other routers. The possible reason is () (Multiple Choice)
❑ A This router is not configured with authentication, but the neighbor router is configured with
authentication (Right Answers )
❑ B The OSPF process 10 is not configured when this router is configured_
❑ C The area ID configured by this router is different from the area ID of its neighbor router (Right
Answers )
❑ B. This router does not announce the network connecting neighbors when configuring OSPF (Right
Answers)

Answer: ACID

83. Which of the following data packets is the OSPF protocol encapsulated in?
❑ A. IP (Right Answers)
❑ B. liTTP
❑ C. UDP
❑ D. TGP

Answer: A
84 Whichi of the following about the default route is correct! (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The default route can only be manually configured by the administrator.
❑ B In the routing table the default route appears as a route to the network 0 0 0 0 (the mask is also 0 0 00)
(Right Answers)
❑ C There must be a default route in the routing table of any router
❑ 0 If the destination address of the packet cannot match any destination address of the routing table, the packet
will be forwarded by selecting the default route (Right Answers)

Answer: BO

85 When configuring a static mule on a broadcast interlace, you can configure a static route by
specifying the next hop address or outbound interlace_
❑ A True
❑ B False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
86. Which of the following attributes cannot be used as a parameter to measure Cost? 111 A. Delay
111 B. sysname (Right Answers)
El C. Hop count
❑ D. Bandwidth

Answer: B

87. As shown in the following figure. Router A and Router B establish an OSPF neighbor relationship. The OSPF process
ID of Router A is 1 and the area ID is O. Which of the following methods can enable Router B to obtain the route of the
nehvork segment where Host A is located? (Multiple Choice)

10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24
GO/0/1
Rou er A Router B
is° E;

lj IP:192.168.1.1
/24
GW:192.168.
1.2
HOST A
0 A ospf t area 0.0.0.0 network
192.168.1.00.0.0.255 0 (Right
Answers) FA B ospf 1 import-route
direct 0 (Right Answers)
P C. ospf 1 area 0.0.0.0 network 192168.0.00.0.255 255 (Right Answers)
❑ D ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 192

168 1.2 0.0.0.0 0 (Right Answers )

Answer. ABCD

88. Which of the following fields does not contain in HELLO packets of OSPF protocol? El A. Neighbor
11] B. sysname (Right Answers)
CI C. Hello Interval
CI D. Network Mask

Answer: B

89. What are the roles of OSPF DR and BDR? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Reduce the number of adjacencies (Right Answers)
111 B. Reduce the type of OSPF packets
C] C. Reduce the time it takes to establish adjacency
CI D. Reduce the number of exchanges of link state information (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

90. Which of the following are routing protocols? (Multiple Choice)

CI A. BGP (Right Answers)
El B. IPX
111 C. OSPF (Right Answers)
111 D. IP Answer:

AC
91. A company network administrator wants to be able to remotely manage branch network devices. Which
of the following protocols will be used?
❑ A. VLSM
❑ B. Telnet (Right Answers)
❑ C. RSTP
❑ D.

CIDR

Answer

: B

92. Which of the following message types does DHCP contain? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. DHCP ROLLOVER
❑ B. DHCP DISCOVER (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCP REQUEST (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCP OFFER (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

93. Telnet is based on the TCP protocol.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

95. What should do when the Access port sends a data frame?
❑ A. Replace VLAN TAG forwarding
❑ B. Stripping TAG forwarding (Right Answers)
❑ C. Mark PVID forwarding
❑ D. Send a message with TAG

Answer: B

96. If the configuration information of a port on a switch is as follows, when this port sent the data frames of
which VLAN, the VLAN TAG is stripped?

interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid tagged vlan 2 to 3 100
port hybrid untagged vlan4 6

❑ A. 4,5,6
❑ B. 4,6
❑ C. 1,4,6 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 1,4,5,6

Answer: C
 97. The configuration information of a port on the switch is as follows, when the port sends the data frame of which VLAN TAG is carried, the
VLAN TAG is stripped?

*
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port
link-type trunk
port trunk pvid vlan 10
port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 20 30 90

❑ A 10 (Right Answers)
❑ B 20
❑ C. 30
❑ D. 40

Answer: A

98. When a port of the switch sends a data frame carrying the same VLAN TAG and PVID, it must strip the VLAN TAG forwarding.
❑ A. True
❑ B FaEse (Right Answers)

Answer: B

99 As shown in the following figure, Router A uses manual link aggregation and adds GO/0/1 and G0/0/2 ports to aggregation group 1 The
incorret statement about the status of Router A aggregation port 1 is:

Eth-Trunk 1 10.0.12.1/24 Eth-Trunk 1 10.0.12.2/24

Router A C0/0/2
Router
A_ Only shut down GO/0/2 of Router B, Eth-Trunk 1 protocol up
Tum off GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 portsB on Router B at the same time, Eth-Tmnk 1 protocol up (Right Answers)
❑
❑
❑ a Only shut down GO/0/1 of Router B, Eth-Trunk 1protocol up
❑ B. Turn off GO/0/1 and G0/0/2 ports on Router B at the same time, Eth-Trunk 1 protocol down

Answer: B

100. In the network shown in the figure the correct description of the following is:

5WA RTA SWB

HUB SWC
❑ A. The network between RTA and SWC is the same collision domain.
❑ B. The network between SWA and SWC is the same broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The network between SWA and SWC is the same collision domain. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The network between SWA and SWB is the same broadcast domain. Answer: BC

1 09. When NAT uses a dynamic address pool, addresses in the address pool can be reused, that is, the same IP is mapped to multiple intranet
(Ps at the same time
❑ A True
❑ 11 False (Right

Answers) Answer: B
102. Which of the following values is used in the LengthfType field of the Ethernet data frame, indicating
that the packet is in the PPPoE discovery phase?
❑ A. 0x0800
❑ B. 0x8863 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 0x8864
❑ D. 0x0806

Answer, B

103. Regarding PPP configuration and deployment; which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. PPP does not support mutual authentication
❑ B. PPP cannot modify keepalive time
❑ C. PPP cannot be used to deliver IP addresses.
❑ D. PPP supports CHAP and PAP authentication modes. (Right Answers )

Answer: D

104. On the Huawei device, if AAA authentication is used for authorization, when the remote server
does not respond, authorization can be performed from the network device side.
❑ A. True
(Right
Answers) 0 B.
False

Answer: A

105. As shown in the network, the configuration information of Router A is as follows. Which of the
following statement is wrong? acl number 2000
rule 5 deny source 200.0.12.0 0.0.0.7
rule 10 permit source 200.0.12.0 0.0.0.15

interface
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
traffic-filter outbound
acl 2000

Router A
❑A. The host with the source FP address of 200.0.12.2 cannot access the Internet.
❑ B. The host with the source EP address of 200.0.12.6 cannot access the Internet.
❑ C. The host with the source IP address of 200.0.12.8 cannot access the Internet. (Right
Answers )
❑D. The host with the source IP address of 200.0.12.4 cannot

access the Internet. Answer: C

106. Based on ACL rules, which of the following types can an ACL be classified into? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Layer 2 ACL (Right Answers)
❑ B. User ACL
❑ C. Advanced ACL (Right Answers)
❑ D. Basic ACL (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD
107. The Management Information Base MIB is a virtual database that is stored on the NMS. O
A. True
O B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

108. As shown in the following figure, what is the scope of AH protocol authentication in IPsec tunnel mode?

New IP Header IP Header ,AH Header TCP Header Data

1
2
3
4
O A. 1
O B. 2
O C. 3
O D. 4 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

109. The ACL on the AR G3 series router supports two matching sequences: configuration order and
automatic sorting. D A. True (Right Answers)
[11 B. False

Answer:

110. The requested node multicast address consists of the prefix FF02::1:FF00:0/104 and the last 24 bits of the
unicast address. 0 A. True (Right Answers)
O B. False

Answer: A

111. How many seconds is the period of the OSPFv3 HELLO packet on the P2P link by default? O
A. 10 (Right Answers)
El B. 20
O C. 30
El D. 40

Answer: A

112. The multicast address FF02::2 indicates all routers in the link-local range.
0 A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
 113. The basic header length of an IPv6 message is a fixed value.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer:

114. IPv6 address 2001: ABEF 224E: FFE2: BCCO: CDOO: DDBE 8D58 cannot be abbreviated.
❑A. True (Right Answers)
❑B. False

Answer:

115. The router Router D neighbor relationship is as follows Which of the following statement is
correct? (Multiple Choice)

(-Router D>displey osofv3 peer 10. 0, 3. 3 verbose

OSPFv3 Process (1)

Neighbor 10. 0, 3. 3 is 2-Way, interface address FE80; ;MO:FCFF :4ECS

In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface GEC/0/0
DR Priority is 1 DR is 10.0.2.2 BDR is
10.0.1.1 Options is 01000013
Dead timer due in 00:00:35
Neighbour is up for 00:00:00
Database Suaueary Packets List 0
Link State Request List 0
Link State Retransmission List 0
Neighbour Event: 2
Neighbour If Id :
❑ A. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.2.2. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.1.1.
❑ C. This router is a DROther router (Right Answers)
❑ D. This router and the router with Router-ID 10.5.3.3 cannot directly exchange link state
information. (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

116. SRGB (segment routing global block). A local label set reserved for the global segment. In MPLS and
IP,(6, SRGB is a collection of local labels reserved for global labels.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers )

Answer: B
117_ One of the reasons for the emergence of SR (Segment Routing) is that there are some factors that
restrict the devebpment of traditional LOP. What are the correct descriptions about LOP of the following?
(MullipP Choice)
❑ A. LOP calculation depends on ICP When IGP and LOP are not synchronized, it will cause black holes
and affect the service (Right Answers)
❑ B LOP itself has 11 kinds of protocol packets, which greatly increases link bandwidth consumption and
device CPU utilization. (Right Answers)
❑ C. LOP only supports IGP shortest path (minimum overhead) for path calculation, and does not support
traffic engineering. (Right Answers)
▪ LOP cannot implement

automatic label

allocation Answer:

ABC

118_ The network administrator wants to be able to effectively use the IP address of the 192 168 176_0/25
network segment_ Now the company's marketing department has 20 mainframes, it is best to assign which of the
following address segment to the marketing depadment?
❑ A. 192_168_176_160/27
❑ B. 192.168.17696/27 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 192 168 176 0/25
❑ B. 192 168 176 4W29

Answer: B

119 When using gm ping command on the VRP platform, d you need to specify an IP address as the source
address of the echo request message, which of the loemung parameters shouts be used/When using the sing
command on Ihe VRP platform, if you need lo specify an IP address as the source address of the echo request
message, which of the following parameters should he used?
ID A. -s
❑ Ei -a (Right Answers)
❑ C 4
❑ o_ -n

Answer. El
120. Which of the following types of addresses cannot be used as the IPv4 address of host?
❑ A. Class A address
❑ B. Class B address
❑ C. Class C address
❑ D. Class D address (Right Answers)

Answer: D
121. A company applies for a Class C IP address segment, but it is assigned to 6 subsidiaries. The largest
subsidiary has 26 computers. Different subsidiaries must be in different network segments. So the network
subnet mask of the largest subsidiary should be, set to 0.
C A 255 255.255.224 (Right Answers)
17 B. 255.255.255.128
C C. 255.255.255.0
E 0. 255.255.255.192

Answer, A

122. Which of the following statement about the transport layer protocol is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. UDP uses the SYN and ACK flags to request to establish a connection and confirm the connection.
❑ B. Well-known port number range is 0-1023 (Right Answers )
❑ C. UDP is suitable for transmitting delay-sensitive traffic and can be reorganized according to the sequence
number field in the message header.
❑ D. The establishment of a TCP connection is a three-way handshake process, and the termination of a TCP
connection is subject to a four-way handshake. (Right Answers)

Answer: BD

123. Which of the following commands can modify the device name to huawei?
❑ A. rename huawei
❑ B. sysname huawei (Right Answers)
❑ C. do name huawei
❑ D. hostname

huawei Answer: B

124. The administrator wants to update the VRP of the AR2200 router. The correct method is ().
(Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The administrator configures the AR2200 as a TFTP server to transmit VRP software through
TFTP.
❑ B. The administrator configures the AR2200 as a TFTP client to transmit VRP software through
TFTP. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The administrator configures the AR2200 as an FTP server to transfer VRP software through
FTP. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The administrator configures the AR2200 as an FTP client to transfer VRP software through FTP.
(Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

125. What are the command line views exsiting on the VRP operating platform?
❑ A. Interface view (Right Answers)
❑ B. User view (Right Answers)
❑ C. Protocol view (Right Answers)
❑ D. System view (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD
 126. Which bridge ID is not possible in the configuration BPDU sent by the switch?
❑ A. 4096 01-01-02-03-04-05 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 0 10-01-02-03-04-05
❑ C. 32768 06 01 02 03 04 05
❑ D. 0 00-01-02-03-04-05

Answer: A

127. In a switch networking, if a loop occurs, it may cause a broadcast storm.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer:

128. The loop protection function provided by the RSTP protocol can take effect only on the specified port.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

129. In the RSTP protocol, the edge port loses the edge port attribute when it receives the
configuration BPDU message.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

130. When STP is running on Huawei Sx7 series switches; the priority of the switch is 0 by default.
❑ A. 8192
❑ B. 32768 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 16384
❑ D. 4096

Answer: B

131. Which of the following statement about the role of the STP protocol Forward Delay is correct?
❑ A. Reduce the time interval for BPDU transmission
❑ B. Delay in the transition of Blocking state and Disabled state
❑ C. Improve the convergence speed of STP
❑ D. Improve the BPDU lifetime and ensure that the configuration BPDU can be forwarded to more switches.
❑ E. Preventing temporary loops (Right Answers)

Answer: E

132. What is the correct statement about the static MAC address table?
❑ A. The user is manually configured and delivered to each interface board. The entries cannot be aged.
(Right Answers)
❑ B. By viewing the static MAC address entry, you can determine whether there is data forwarding
between the two connected devices.
❑ C. Static MAC address entries are lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or
the interface board is reset.
❑ D. You can obtain the number of users communicating on the interface by viewing the number of

static MAC address entries. Answer: A

 133. Which parameter is used in the spanning tree protocol to erect the root bridge?
❑ A. Port ID
❑ B. The system name of the switch
❑ C. Root path cost
❑ D. Bridge ID (Right Answers)

Answer: D

134 The administrator finds that the two routers stay in the TWO-WAY state when establishing an
OSPF neighbor, the correct description of the following is ()
❑ A. The router is configured with the same zone ID
❑ B. These two routers are DR Other routers in the broadcast network. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The router is configured with the wrong router ID
❑ D The router is configured with the same process ID

Answer: B
135 An AR2200 router barns the route entries to the same network through OSPF and RIPv2 The
cost of the route learned through OSPF is 4882 The number of hops learned through 51552 is 4
The routing table of the router will have ()
❑ A OSPF and RIPv2 routing
❑ 8 OSPF routing (Right Answers)
❑ C Both do not exist

❑D

RIPv2

routing

Answe

r: B

136. When the router forwards the datagram ; the data link layer needs to be re-encapsulated every
time a data link layer passed.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

137. Which of the following network types does the OSPF protocol support? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Broadcast type (Right Answers)
❑ B. Point to point (Right Answers)
❑ C. Point-to-point type (Right Answers)
❑ D. NBMA (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

138. Which of the following are the stable states of OSPF neighbor relationships? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Down (Right Answers)
❑ B. Full (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2-way (Right Answers)
❑ D. Attempt

Answer:

ABC

139. Which of the following routing protocols are dynamic routing protocols? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. OSPF (Right Answers)
❑ B. BGP (Right Answers)
❑ C. Direct
❑ D. Static

Answer:

AB
140 As shown in the figure, all routers run OSPF protocol, and the OSPF process number i5 1 and the area
number is 0 Which of the following commands can implement this requirement on Router A? (Multiple Choice)

10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24
GO/0/1
Router A Router B
❑ A # ospf 1 area 00 0 0 network 10 0.12.1 0 0 00 # (Right Answers)
❑ B # ospf 1 area 0000 network 100.1200003#
❑ C. # ospf 1 area 0 0 0 0 network 10 0 12 0 00 0 255 # (Right Answers)
❑ 0 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 ip address 10 0 121 255 255 255 0 ospf enable 1 area 0 0 0 0 # (Right
Answers)

Answer: AGO

141. In the OSPF protocol, which of the following description of the DR is correct? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The adjacency relationship must also be established between the DR and the BDR. (Right
Answers)
❑ B. If the priority values of the two routers are equal. select the router with the large router ID as
the DR (Right Answers)
❑ C if the priority values of the two routers are different, select the router with the smaller priority value
as the DR_
❑ D By default, all routers in this broadcast network will participate in DR

elections (Right Answers) Answer: ABD

142 As shown in the figure, after the Um routers are configured with OSPF, the administrator configures
the <mlenhinterfaces0f0/1> command on the RTA. The correct description is O (Multiple Choice)

RTA RTB

SO/0/1 60/0/1

❑ A The RTA wit continue to receive and analyze the OSPF packets sent by the RTB.
❑ B_ The neighbor relationship of the two routers will be down_ (Right Answers)
❑ C_ RTA wit not send OSPF packets anymore_ (Right Answers)
❑ 0_ The neighbor relationship of

the two routers wit not be affected

Answer: BC

143. A DHCP OFFER packet can wry a DNS address, but can only carry one DNS address..
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right

Answers) Answer: B

144 As hown in the following figure, host A logs in to Router A through Telnet, and then obtains the configuration
file of Router B through FM on the remote interface_ How many TCP connections exist on Router A?

HOST A
IP
:192.168.1.2/2
GW:192.168.1.1
❑ A.1
❑ B 2
❑ C 3 (Right Answers)
❑ 0.4

Answer: C

145 At present, the company has a network administrator. The AR2200 in the company network can be for
 remote management after directly enter the password through Telnet.
The company has two new network administrators, and wants to assign all administrators their respective
usernames and passwords, as well as different permission levels. So what should doe (Multiple Choice)
❑ A When configuring each administrator's account, you need to configure different permission levels_
(Right Answers)
▪ R User authentication mode configured by Telnet must select AAA mode (Right Answers)
❑ C Configure three user names and their corresponding passwords in the AAA New. (Right Answers)
❑ CI Each administrator uses different public IP addresses of the device when running the Telnet command_

Answer: ABC
146. What is the role of the port trunk allow-pass vtan all command?
❑ A. The connected peer device can dynamically determine which VLAN IDs can pass.
❑ B. If the port default vian3 command is configured for the connected remote device, VLAN 3 between
the two devices cannot communicate.
❑ C The peer port connected to the port must be configured with port trunk permit vlan all
❑ D. Allow all data frames of the VLAN to pass through the port. (Right Answers )

Answer: D

14T_ The Hybrid port can connect to both the user host and other switches_
I=1 A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

148. The IP addresses of the VLANIF interfaces on the same switch cannot be the same.
❑ A. True (Right Answers )
❑ B. False

Answer: A

149. As shown in the following figure, the router uses the sub-interface as the gateway of the host. The P
address of the gateway is 10 0.12 2 Which of the following commands can fu II this requirement?
(Multiple Choice)

SWA 10.0.12
.2/24
Acces G 0/0/2 O
s elan Router A
20
c
t
0

HOST A
11,1 10.0.12.1/24
MAC:MAC-A
❑ A interface GigabitEthemet0/0/43 10 dotlq termination yid 10 ip address 100_122 255255 255 0 arp
broadcast enable #
❑ B. interface Gi gabitEthernot0/0/0 20 dotlq termination old 20 ip address 100_12 2 255255255 0 arp
broadcast enable # (Right Answers )
❑ G. interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0.10 dotlq termination vid 20 ip address 10.0.12.2 255.255.255.0 arp
broadcast enable # (Right Answers )
❑ a interface GigabitEthernet0/0/020 dotlq termination yid 10 ip address 10 0 12 2 255255 255 0 arp
broadcast enable M

Answer: BC

150 The network administrator creates VLAN 10 on the Layer 3 switch and configures an IP address on the
virtual interface of the VLAN_ When you use the command "<I>display ip interface brief</l,to check the
status of the interface and find that the VLANIF 10 interface is down, what operations should be taken to
restore the VLANIF 10 interface?
❑ A Use the command "undo shutdown" on the VLANIF 10 interface.
❑ B. Incorporate a physical interface whose state must be Up into VLAN 10 (Right Answers)
❑ C Incorporate any physical interface into VLAN 10
❑ 0_ Incorporate an interface whose state must be Up and must be of the Trurk type into VLAN 10

Answer: B

151 As shown in the figure, the network administrator creates VLAN 2 on the SWA and SWB, and configures the
ports connected to the host on the two switches as access ports and assigns them to VLAN 2 Configure GO/0/1
of the SA and GO/0/2 of the SWB as trunk ports to allow all VLANs to pass. To achieve normal communication
between the two hosts, he also needs 0

Hos, Host 13
VI Na VW

❑ A_ Create VLAN 2 on the SWC.

❑ B. Configure GO/0/1 on the SWC as the trunk port and allow VLAN 2 to pass.
❑ G Configure GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 on the SWC as trunk ports and allow VLAN 2 to pass.
❑ 0_ Create VLAN 2 on the SWC, configure GO/0/1 and GO/0/2 as trunk ports and alum VLAN 2 to pass (Right
Answers )

Answer:
152 As shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows_ According to
the network and configuration, which of the following statements are correct,(Multiple Choice)
Router B
interface
Senal1/0/
0 link-
protocol
ppp
ip address 10 021 1 255.255 255 0

ospf 1 router-id 10021.1

area 0000
network 10 0 21_1 0_0_0_0

Router A
interface
Senal1/0/
0 link-
protocol
ppp
ip address 10 012.1 255 255 255 0

ospf 1 router-id 100.121

area 0000
network 10 0_121 0 0 0_0

S 1/0/0
S 1/0/0
10.0.12.1/2 10.0.21.1/2
Router B
4 4
Router A

❑ A_ Router A and Router B cannot team the MAC address of the other interface. (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Router A and Router B have ARP tables_
❑ C Two routers can establish OSPF adjacency (Right Answers)
❑ El There is no OR and BOR in

the network (Right Answers)

Answer: AGO

153 The data link layer uses PPP encapsulation, and the iP addresses at both ends of the hnk may not he in
the same network segment
❑ A True (Right Answers )
❑ B. False

Answer: A

154. The command to enable CHAP authentication in PPP is: ppp chap authentication.
❑ A. True
❑ False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

155. Apply the following ACL in SNMP: which of the following is

wrong? act number 2000
rule 5 permit source 192.168.1.2 0
rule 10 permit source 192.168 1_3 0
rule 15 permit source 192.168.1.4 0

❑ A. The device with IP address 192_168_1.5 can use SNMP service. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device with IP address 192.168.1.3 can use SNMP service.
❑ C. The device with the [P address of 192.168.1.4 can use SUMP service.
❑ D. The device with IP address 192.168.1.2 can use SNMP service.

Answer: A

156. In the packet encapsulation format shown in the figure, which of the following fields will be encrypted by
the ESP protocol of IPsec VPN?

❑ A_ ESP Header, TCP Header, Data

❑ B. ESP Header, TCP Header, Data, ESP Trailer
❑ C. ESP Header, Tam Header, Data, ESP Trailer, ESP Auth
❑ D. TCP Header, Data, ESP Trailer (Right Answers )

Answer: D
 157 As shown in the figure below, what is the scope of AH protocol authentication in IPsec transmission
IP Header
mode? AH Header CP Header Data
1
2
3
4 .
1=1 A. 1
ID B. 2
CI C. 3
❑ D. 4 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

158. When the data encapsulation mode of I Psec is tunnel mode, the IP address of the intranet host is
hidden, which can protect the security of the entire original data packet.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B.

False

Answ

er: A

159. Which of the following commands configures the authentication mode to be HWTACACS
authentication?
❑ A. authorization-mode hwtacacs
❑ B. authentication-mode local
❑ C. authentication-mode none
❑ D. authentication-mode hwtacacs (Right Answers )

Answer: D

160. During the establishment of the adjacency relationship, what is the role of DD packets in
OSPFv3?
❑ A. Used to send the required LSA to the peer router
❑ B. Discover and maintain neighbor relationships
❑ C. To describe its own LSDB (Right Answers)
❑ D. Request missing LSA

Answer: C

161. ff the MAC address of an interface is OEEO-FFFE-OFEC, what is its corresponding EU1-64
address?
❑ A. 02E0-FCFF-FEEF-OFEC (Right Answers)
❑ B. OOEO-FCEF-FFFE-OFEC
❑ C. OOEO-FCFF-FFFE-OFEC
❑ D. 00E0-FCFF-FEEF-OFEC

Answer: A
162. Which field of the IPv6 header can be used for Q0S?
❑ A. Next Header
❑ B. Payload Length
❑ C. Traffic Class (Right Answers)
❑ D.

Version

Answer: C

163. The simplest form of IPv6 address 3001:0DB8:0000:0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58 is?

❑ A. 3001:0D138::0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
❑ B. 3001:DB8::346:ABCD:42BC:8D58 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 3001:DB8:0346:ABCD:42BC:81358
❑ D. 3001:0DB8:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58

Answer: B

164. The same interface of the router cannot be used as both a DHCPv6 server and a DHCPv6
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

165. Which packet is sent by the DI ICPv6 client, requesting the DI ICPv6 server to assign an IPv6
address and network configuration parameters to it?
❑ A. Solicit (Right
Answers)
❑ B. Advertise
❑ C. Discover
❑ D. Request

Answer: A

166. Segment routing (SR) is a protocol based on what idea to design for forwarding packets on the network?
❑ A. Routing strategy
❑ B. Destination routing
❑ C. Policy routing
❑ D. Source routing (Right Answers)

Answer: D

167. How many bytes are the packets using the MPLS label double-layer nesting technology more than
the original IP packets?
❑ A. 4
❑ B. 8 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 16
❑ D. 32

Answer; B
168. Which of the following subnet routes can aggregate fron the route entry 10.0.0.24/29? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 10.0.0.24130 (Right Answers )
❑ B. 10.0.0.26130
❑ C. 10.0.0.28/30 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 10.0.0.23/30

Answer: AC
164. An IPv4 packet header length field is 20B. and the Iota[ length field is 1500B then
what is the packet payload?
❑ A. 20B
❑ B_ 1520B
❑ C. 1480B (Right Answers )
❑ D. 95000

Answer: C

170. Which of the following is unlikely to be the 1l3v4 packet header length?
❑ A. 208
❑ 8. 64B (Right Answers)
❑ C. 608
❑ ❑. 328

Answer: B

171. The Ethernet optical interface can only work in the 0 mode.
❑ A. Full duplex (Right Answers)
❑ B. Half duplex
❑ C. Simplex
❑ D. Soft-negotiation

Answer: A
172 <Huawei>
Warning- Auto-Gonfig is working. Before configunng the device, stop Auto-Gonfigif you perform
configurations when Auto-Gonfig is running, the DHCP routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be
lost. Do you want to stop Auto-config, [YIN]:
The administrator found that the above message popped up on the demo_ The correct statement about
this information is (),
❑ A. If you need to enable automatic configuration, the administrator needs to choose
❑ B. If you do not need to enable automatic configuration, the administrator needs to select N
❑ G When the device is first started, the auto configuration function is enabled (Right Answers)
❑ D When the device is first started, the auto configuration function is disabled.

Answer: C

173. Which of the following commands can be used to query the configuration information of the OSPF
protocol? (Mutliple Choice)
❑ A. dis ip routing-table
❑ B. display current-configuration (Right Answers)
❑ C. display ospf peer
❑ D. In OSPF protocol view display this

(Right Answers) Answer: BD

174. The output information of a certain device is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple Choice)

<Huawei>display interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0

ailiegitEthemet0/0/0 current state : DP
Line protocol current slate 7 LIFE
Route Port, The !axiom Transmit Unit is 1000
Internet Address is 10. 0.12. 2/29
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFIT_ETHNI_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc224fff
Port lode: FORCE COPPER
Speed : 100, Loosback: NOW
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation:
DISABLE Ech : AUTO
Last 300 seconds input rate 24 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Lest 300 seconds output rate 24 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
❑ A. The MAC address of the interface is 00e0-fe22-4fff (Right Answers)
❑ B. The IP address of the interface is 10 0 122/24. (Right Answers)
❑ C The working speed of this interface is 1Gbps_
❑ D. The MTh value of this interface is 1000. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD
1 75 What is the correct statement about the black hole MAC address table? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The saved entries are not lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or the
interface board is reset (Right Answers)
❑ B. It is manually configured and delivered to each interface board. The entries cannot be aged (Right
Answers)
❑ C. After the blackhole MAC address is configured, the packet which source MAC address or the
destination MAC address is the MAC address will be discarded. (Right Answers)
❑ 0 You can filler out illegal users by configuring blackhole MAC address entries. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABC0

176. Which is the correct statement about the static MAC address table? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A After the interface is stabcaily bound to the MAC address, the other interface receives the packet
whose source MAC address is the MAG address will be discarded. (Right Answers) DB_ By viewing the
static MAC address entry, you can determine whether there is data forwarding between the two
connected devices.
❑ C. A static MAC address entry can be bound to only one outbound interface_ (Right Answers)
❑ B. The saved entries are not lost after the system is reset, the interface board is hot swapped, or the
interface board is reset. (Right Answers)

Answer: AC0

177. In the RSTP protocol, when the root port fails, 0 will he quickly converted to the new root port and immediately enter the forwarding state.
❑ A. Backup port
❑ B. Edge port
❑ C. Forwarding port
❑ D. Alternate port (Right Answers)

Answer: D

1 78. Both the Alternate port and the Backup port in RSTP cannot forward user traffic in RSTP, but can receive, process, and send BPDUs.
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
179. Al[ switches in the following figure have STP protocol enabled, if the path cost of all ports is 200_
What is the path cost value included in the configuration BPDU received by the GO/0/4 port of SWD?

SWA SWB
32768 00-01 02 03 04 AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-13E1

SWD
32168 00-01-02.03-04-CC 32768 00-01 -02-03-04-DI)

D A. 0
❑ B. 200 (Right Answers )
❑ G. 400
❑ D. €00

Answer: B

180 As shown in the figure, at four switches run SIP, and various parameters use default
values. When a port on the root switch sends a lam and fails to send configuration BPOUs ,
through the port, how bng before the bbcked port in the network enters the forwarding state
floor

hC

❑ A About 30 seconds
❑ B About 50 seconds (Right Answers)
❑ G About 15 seconds
❑ 0. About 3 seconds

Answer: B

1 81. By default, it takes at least 30 seconds for the port status in SW to be changed from ❑isabled to
forwarding.
❑A. True (Right Answers)
❑B. False

Answer:

182. There are multiple NextHops in the routing table that reach the same destination network. These routes
are called?
❑ A. Equivalent routing (Right Answers)
❑ B. ❑efault route
❑ C. Multipath routing
❑ ❑- Suboptimal routing

Answer: A
183. Which of the following network types does the OSPF protocol need to elect DR and BDR? (Multiple
Choice)
❑ A. Point-to-point type
❑ B. Broadcast type (Right Answers)
❑ C. NBMA (Right Answers)
❑ D. Point to point

Answer: BC

184. The Router ID of the OSPF process takes effect immediately after being modified.
❑ A. True
O B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

185. When configuring OSPF on a router, you must manually configure 0. (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Enable OSPF process (Right Answers)
❑ B. Create an OSPF area (Right Answers)
❑ C. Configure the router ID
❑ D. Specify the network included in each zone (Right

Answers) Answer: ABD

186. The priority of the static routing protocol cannot be specified

manually. O A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

187. Which of the following statements about direct route is correct?

❑ A. Direct route priority is lower than dynamic route
❑ B. Direct route requires the administrator to manually configure the destination network and next hop address.
❑ C. Direct route has the highest priority (Right Answers)
O D. Direct route priority is lower than static route

Answer: C

188. The router in the backbone area has all the LSDBs in all its areas.
O A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
189. Which of the following parameters does the OSPF protocol use for the master-slave relationship
election? O A. Process number of OSPF protocol
O B. Router ID (Right Answers)
O C. Sequence of startup protocols
❑ D. Interface IP address
Answer: B

190.According to the following DHCP flowchart, which statements are true? (Multiple Choice)
Client 08CP Server

DHG. oistaver
Slept

MCP
Strp2

Offer
Sre
p3 CHCP

sup&
Request

DliCP
ACK

El A. In step 1, multicast packets are sent.

111 B. In step 2 ; unicast packets are sent. (Right Answers) 111 C.
In step 3; broadcast packets are sent. (Right Answers) El D. In
step 4, unicast packets are sent. (Right Answers) El E. In step 4,
broadcast packets are sent.

Answer: BCD

191. The DHCP protocol interface address pool has a higher priority than the global address pool. OA. TRUE
(Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

192. As shown in the following figure, all links are Ethernet links, and all routers run OSPF. How many DR are
elected in the entire network?

Router
0..

0 A. 1
O B. 2
O C. 3
O D. 4 (Right Answers)

Answer: D
193.How many member ports can be added to an Eth-Trunk interface on ARG3 series router
and X7 series switch? D A. 6
❑ B. 8 (Right Answers)
D C. 10
CI D. 12

Answer; B

194. A trunk port can send both tagged data frames and unlabeled data frames. GA.
TRUE (Right Answers)
Cl B. FALSE

Answer: T

195. As shown in the figure, if host A has host B ARP cache, host A can ping through host B.

SWA Access vian Xo

G 0/0/2
Access vtan 20 SERVER
B tp 14;0 I/
ipodu 14.41A4

HOST A
IP
10.0.12.1.12
4 MAC:MAC

0 A. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

196.
Which of the following statements about one-arm routing is correct? (Multiple choice)
0 A. One physical connection per VLAN
O B. On the switch, configure the port connected to the router as a trunk port and allow the frames of
the relevant VLAN to pass. (Right Answers)
O C. Need to create a sub-interface on the router (Right Answers)
O D. Only one physical link is used between the switch and the router. (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

197. Which of the following statements about link aggregation

is correct? (Muitiple choice) 0 A. Eth-Truk interfaces cannot
be nested (Right Answers )
O B. Ensure that the modes of link aggregation on the two devices are the same when the two devices
are connected to each other_ (Right Answers)
O C. The GE interface and the FE interface cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk interface. (Right
Answers)
O D. GE electrical interfaces and GE optical interfaces cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk interface.
(Right Answers)

Answer; ABCD

198. NAPT uses the same public IP address but different port numbers to translate private IP addresses.
Which statement regarding the port number is correct? El A. It is necessary to configure port number
mapping manually.
El B. It is only necessary to configure the
port number range. El C. It is not
necessary to configure port numbers.
0 D. An access control list is needed to assign port numbers. (Right Answers)

Answer: D
 199. Refer to the graphic.

RTA NDLC RTB

Loopback 0 S1/0/1 S1/0/1
10.1.1.1132 I 10.1.1.2/24

On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command "ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0" has been
configured. Which following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)
O A. The IP address of RTA interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/24.
O B. The IP address of RTA interface serial 11011 is 10.1.1.1/32. (Right
Answers ) Ei C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in RTA's routing-table.
O D. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 does not exist in RTA's routing-table. (Right Answers)

Answer; BD

200. The data link layer is encapsulated in PPP. The IP addresses at both ends of the link cannot be in the same
network segment. OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
O B. FALSE

Answer: T

201. Which of the following parameters are identified by the SA (Security Association)? (Multiple choice) O
A. Source IP address
O B. Security Parameter Index (SPI) (Right Answers) O
C. Destination IP address (Right Answers)
O D. Security Protocol (AH or ESP) (Right Answers)

Answer; BCD

202. As shown in the following figure, IPSec uses tunnel mode. What is the scope of ESP encryption?

New IP AH ESP IP TCP ESP ESP Auth

Dat
Header Header Header Header Header a Tail Data

0 A. 1 (Right Answers)
O B. 2
O C. 3
O D. 4

Answer, A

203. The Router-ID of OSPFv3 can be automatically generated by the system. OA.
TRUE
0 B. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F
204. The following about IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration and DHCPv6,
which is correct? (Multiple choice) O A. IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration
uses RA and RS messages (Right Answers)
El B. DHCPv6 is more manageable than stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
O C. DHCPv6 can be divided into DHCPv6 stateful autoconfiguration and DHCPv6 stateless
autoconfiguration. (Right Answers)
O D. IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration and DHCPv6 can allocate related configuration

information such as DNS address to the host. Answer; ABC

205. Which of the following is the value of the IPv6 multicast address flag field indicates that the multicast
address is a temporary multicast address? O A. 0
0 B. 1 (Right Answers)
O C. 2
0 D. 3

Answer. B

206. Which of the following is the value of the IPv6 multicast address flag field indicates that the multicast
address is permanent multicast address? O A. 0 (Right Answers)
O B. 1
O C. 2
O D. 3

Answer. A

207. Based on tv1PLS labels, you can mark up to how many types of data streams with different service fevers?
❑ A. 2
❑ B. 4
El C. 8 (Right Answers)
El D. 16

Answer: C

Segment Routing encodes the segment sequence representing the forwarding path in the packet
208.

header_ As the packet is transmitted, the receiver parses the segment sequence after receiving the
packet. If the top segment identifier of the segment sequence is the local node, the identifier is
displayed, and then the next step is processed. It it is not the local node, the packet is forwarded to
the next node by using the ECMP (Equal Cost Muftiple Path) mode.
OA. TRUE
(Right
Answers )
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

209. The router interface output information is as follows; which is correct? (Multiple choice)

(1-Turragei>dispIay ipv6 interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 GigabitEthernet0/0/0

curront state : UP
11)v6 protocol current state : UP
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is Irn0::210:FCFF:FF6F:41r36
Global unicast address (es) :
2001: :12:1, subnet is 2001: : /64
Joined group address( es)
'1702: :1 :EF12:1
FF02::2 FF02::1
,
FF02::1:FF6F:4136
,
-------1--1-1--1---is1500 byt ts
O A. The global unicast address of this interface is 2001::12:1 (Right Answers)
O B. The MTU of this interface is 1500_ (Right Answers)
0 C. The link-local address of this interface is FE80: 2E0:FCFF FE6F:4F36 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The IPv6 protocol status of this interface is UP. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD
210. The output information of a router is as follows. What is the tunneling protocol used by this
interface?

tar Altilsplay interface-Tunnel 0/0/0

anns10/0/0 current state : UP
Lime protocol current state : Up
Last line protocol up time : 2019-03-06 11:03:15 11TC 0;::00
Descriptian:HUAWEI, AR Series, Tunne10/0/0 Interface
Mutes Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet Address is unnumbered. using address of Loopllack0(lu.o.1.1432)
Encapsulation is TUNNEL. ioopbnck not ■et
Tunnel source 10.0.12.1 OGisabitEthernet0/45/0. destination 10. O. 12. 2
Tunnel protacolltransport GRE/IP. key disabled
❑ A. MPLS
❑ B . I Psec
❑ C. LDP
❑ D. GRE (Right

Answers) Answer: D

211. What of the following statements is correct regarding Access Control List types and ranges?
❑ A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999.
❑ B. An advanced ACL value range from 3000-4000.
❑ C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999. (Right Answers)
❑ D. An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000.

Answer: C

212. The configuration information of router DHCP address pool is as follows. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)

ip pool test
network 192. 168. 1. 0 mask 255. 255. 255. 0
excluded-ip-address 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.254
leaseday0hour12minute0

❑ A. The address pool has 199 available IP addresses. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The lease of the IP address is 12h. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The address pool has 55 available IP addresses.
❑ D. The IP address that the DHCP client may obtain is 192.168.1.2. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD
 213. The output information of router routing table is as follows. Which is correct? (Muitip[e choice)

cle10.41mp1 1p rondo.
Route Flaws: I - rr1 Yr. 11 - download to fn.
-------- ---
MauiInc 1...O.1 c
Dime ince Iceno In Paw. tvp = $ 0

boas i nationfildeok Pro eel Ir'e I ntl- Ne.sit. r irnr,

Coal r>r ,/I
I
ice. o- o.ors rn
n
10.6. 2_ /i2 51411.. In it
r :1
/4

D A. The NextHop of this router reaching 90.0.0.1 is 10.0.21.2_

❑ B. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop of this muter reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.12.2
❑ D. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.21.2 (Right Answers)

Answer: BD

214 The following figure shows a routing table. When this router meows a packet with a destination IP address of 9.1.1.1, the router
forwards the packet based on the route 9 1_0 0/16 because the matched bit number in this route is the largest

<Fluawei>display ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, 0 - downloadto fib

Routing Tables: Public Destinations : 2 Routes:2

Destination/Mask
0.0.0.0/0 Static
Preto
60 0
Pre
0
Cost Flags NextFlop
120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
Interface
8.0.0.0/13 RIP 100 3 0 120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
9.0.0.0/g OSPF 10 50 0 20.0.0.2 Fthernet2/0/0
9.1.0.0/16 RIP 100 4 0 120.0.0.2 Seria11/0/0
11.0.0.0/8 Static 60 0 0 120.0.0.2 Seria12/0/0
20.0.0.0/g Direct 0 0 0 20.0.0.1 Fthernet2/0/0
20.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 0
127.0.0.1 loopback0 OA.
TRUE (Right Answers)
0 B FALSE

Answer: T

215. Router 1 routing table output information is as follows: which is correct? (Multiple choice)

1. p puttees-4.pm..
—.0111-r4t.pl elf
Route flat*: R - rya toy. D - download to fib

Sna Te.ble.
PeAdite : 13 Kr_mat rim . 1:1
P owe Pas e Poo toe or rasa
Prong Prc
et elearrpetteille
R , 10. IA, ThermetO/o/0
0.0.0.0/0 Slott , 14.4 Firwrnall0/0rA
O. 0.0. IVO M. 11., Fj• ▪ 1 ......0.410/1
RIP 10. 0.2- r.. F. I twrrw TQ1,Info
1.0
T.
0/24 R6 r..11
ge to
1 1, n. I '.
l
10.0.2. 2132 *Mr
10.0.12-0/24 IA rle,t r. Ii.rITI.10/
/Cc 9.12.1/92 Direc e
❑ A. There are two dynamic routing protocols in the routing table. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The mask length of the IP address of the Ethernet0/0 interface on the router is 24 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The IP address of the Etherneto/0/0 interface on the router is 10.0.12.1. (Right Answers) El D. There is a
dynamic routing protocol in the routing table.

Answer: ABC
216. Refer to the dispisy information.

CtLedwepchipley mac-address

MAC Address VIANNSI teamed-Frans Type

5439-38ec-1518 If- GE0/13(13 dynamic

Total terns displayed -1

A switch attempts to forward a frame to the MAC destination 54S9-

98eo-1011 What operation will occur on the switch?
❑ A. The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
❑ B. The switch will report that the destination is unreachable and report this to the source.
❑ C. The switch wit flood the frame via ail ports, with exception of the port on which the frame was
received. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The switch wit drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address table.

Answer: C

217 The current switch MAC address table is as follows, which is correct?

.1,4411-1D
10C-Twarl

❑ A. When the switch is resteded, the MAC address learned on pod Eth0/0/2 does not need to be
re-learned.
❑ B. When the switch is restaded, the MAC address learned on pod Eth0/0/3 needs to be re-
learned
❑ C The data frame with the source MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 and the destination MAC
address of 5489-989d-1430 is received from the pod and forwarded from Eth0/0/2_
❑ 0_ The data frame with the source MAC address of 5489-98885-18a8 and the destination MAC

address of 5489-989d-1d30 is received from the pod and forwarded from Eth0/0/1 (Right Answers)

Answer: 0

218. If the transport layer protocol is UDR the network layer Protocol field takes a value of 6_
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers )

Answer: F

219. Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. A system can determine whether conflicting EP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP
packet. (Right Answers)
❑ B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet. (Right Answers)
❑ C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address
❑ D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.

Answer:
AB

220. Which of the following flow control methods can be used in the transport layer of the OSI reference
model? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A Source suppression message (Right Answers)
❑ B. Window mechanism (Right Answers)
❑ C. Confirmation technology
❑ D Cache technology (Right Answers )

Answer:
ABD

221. The application data must carry the MAC address after being processed by the data link
layer. OA TRUE (Right Answers )
OB. FALSE

Answer: T
222. A network engineer prompts the following message when entering the command line: Error:
Unrecognized command found atw'position. Which is correct about this prompt message?
D A. The input command is incomplete
D B. No keywords found (Right
Answers) D C. Input command is
not clear
LI D. Parameter type error

Answer: B

223. By default, the root path cost of the root bridge in the STP protocol must be 0. OA. TRUE (Right
Answers)
0 B. FALSE

Answer: T

224. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which is correct?

-
0141Owei)display mac-address
MAC address table of slot 0:

MAC Address VLAN/ PEVLAN CRVLAN Port Type LSP/LSN-ID

VSI/SI MAC-Tunnel

5489-9885-18e8 blackhole -
Eth0/0/3 static -
5489-9811-0b45 1

Total matching items on slot 0 displayed - 2

O A. MAC 5489-9885-18a8 does not have corresponding port
information, the switch appears BUG 0 B. All entries in the
MAC address table are dynamically learned by the switch.
0 C. After the switch is restarted, MA C5489-9811-0b49 needs to be re-learned.
0 D. If the switch receives a data frame with a source MAC address or a destination MAC address of

5489-9885-18a8, the switch will discard the frame. (Right Answers) Answer: D

225. Refer to the graphic.

SWA

Edge Port

GO/ GO/0/2 \ GO/0/3

0/1 /

C21!

14
' 4
Host S Host C
i>1
Host A

An administrator has configured the port interface G0/0/3 of Switch A as an edge port.
The user wishes to connect multiple devices to the network and connects his own managed switch to
the network. What effect will this have on the network?
111 A. Port interface GO/0/3 of switch A will shut down, as a BPDU has been received by the edge port.
❑ B. Port interface G0/0/3 of switch A will forward the data normally and drop the BPDU sent by the
host to the switch. CI C. Switch A will receive the BPDU and recaculate the port state of GO/0/3. (Right
Answers)
0 D. Only Host A can send data out as before, the other devices linked cannot.

Answer:
C

226. Which of the following protocols can be used to avoid loops in a redundant Layer 2 network? El A. ARP
El B. STP (Right Answers) CI C.
UDP
CI D. VRRP

Answer: B
227The static MAC address table is reset in the system, after the interface board is hot swapped
or the interface board is reset, saved entries are not IosL OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
O B.FALSE

Answer: T
228 As shown in the following figure, assuming that the MAC address table of the SWA is as follows, now Host A sends
a data frame whose destination AC address is MAG-11 Which is correct,

MAC
MAC-B 0.0/0/2

S A
G GI G 0/0/3
0/0/
/0/2

[ZE
HOST HOST B
A HOST C
IP:
10.1.1.1/
24
MAC:MAC A IP: 10.1.1.2/24 IP: 10.1.1.3/24
MAC:MAC-13 MAC:MAC-C
❑ A SWA discards data frames
❑ B Forward this data frame only from the GO/0/2 pod (Right Answers)
❑ G Forward this data frame only from the GO./0/3 pod
❑ a Generalize this data frame

Answer: B

229. As shown in the figure; STP is disabled on both switches, and Host A sends an ARP Request. Which is
correct? (Multiple choice)

SWA

❑ A These two switches can achieve load balancing

O B. The CPU usage of these two switches wit be very high. (Right Answers )
O C. Repeated frames will appear in this network (Right Answers )
E D. The MAC address table of these two switches will frequently jitter (Right Answers )

Answer: BCD

230. What are the three ways for a router to establish a routing table? (Muitiple
choice) E A. Dynamic routing (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Static routing (Right Answers)
E C. Direct routing (Right Answers )
E D. Aggregate routing

Answer: ABC
231. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is wrong? (Muitiple choice)
<R1>dIsplay current-configuration configuration nspf

ospf 1 router-id 10.0.1.1

area 0.0.0.0
network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.255
N
return
<R1>display ospf peer

OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.0.12.1

Neighbors

Area 0.0.0.0 interface 10.0.12.1(GigabitEthernet0/0/0)'s neighbors Router ID: 10.0.2.2

Address:10.0.12.2
State: Full Mode:Nbr is Slave Priority: 1
DR: 10.0.12.2 BOR: 10.0.12.1 NTU: 0
Dead timer due in 30 sec Retrans
timerinterval:S Neighbor is up for
00:01:48 AuthenticationSequence:[0
1
❑ A. This router has enabled regional authentication. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device is faulty. The configured Router Id is inconsistent with the actual Router ID. (Right
Answers)
❑ C. The Router Id that is valid for this device is 10.0.12.1.
❑ D. The Router Id that is valid for this device is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

232. As shown in the figure below, which is correct?

Elm
HOST A HOST B

IP: 10.0.12.1/30 IP: 10.0.12.2/24

MAC: MAC-A MAC:MAC-B
❑ A. Host A and host B have different IP address masks, so host A and host B cannot
communicate.
❑ B. Host A and host B have the same broadcast address
❑ C. Host A and Host B can communicate only if the masks of Host A and Host B are set to be
consistent.
❑ D. Host A can ping host B (Right Answers)

Answer: D

233. In which state does OSPF determine the master-slave relationship of DD packets?
❑ A. 2-way
❑ B. Exchange
❑ C. ExStart (Right Answers)
❑ D. Full

Answer: C
234. Which of the following VRP commands can be used to enter area 0 view? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. [Huawei]ospf area 0
▪ [Huawei-ospf-l]area 0 (Right Answers)
❑ C. [Huawei-ospf-t]area 0.0.0.0 (Right Answers )
❑ D. [Huawei-ospf-I]area 0 enable

Answer: BC

235. As shown in the figure below, which is correct?

HOST A HOST B
IP: 10.0.12.1/30 MAC: MAC-A
IP: 10.0.12.2/24 MAC:MAC-B

❑ A. Host A and Host B cannot obtain the MAC address each other. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Host A ARP cache exists 10.0.12.5 MAC-B
❑ C. Host A can ping host B
❑ D. Host A and host B have the same broadcast address

Answer: A

236. All interfaces of the router running OSPF must belong to the same
area. OA. TRUE
B FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F
237. On Huawei devices, which of the following methods can be used in OSPF router ID selection? (Multiple
Choice)
❑ A. If a loopback interface is configured, the largest IP address of the loopback interface is selected as the
router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ B. If loopback interfaces are not configured, the largest IP address of an interface is selected as the
router ID. (Right Answers)
❑ C. A Huawei switch may use the largest IP address of VLANIF interfaces as the router ID. (Right
Answers)
❑ D. The default ID 127.0.0.1 is selected as the router ID.
❑ E. A valid router ID can be configured manually. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCE

238. Which of the following are the basic elements of configuring a static route? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Destination network segment (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC address of the outgoing interface
❑ C. lP address of the next hop (Right Answers )
❑ D. Outlet (Right Answers

) Answer: ACD
239. VRP operating platform, which of the following command can view the routing table?
❑ A. display ip routing-table (Right Answers)
❑ B. display current-configuration
❑ C. display ip interface brief
❑ D. display ip forwarding-table

Answer: A

240. The following two configuration commands can implement the router RTA to the primary and backup backups of the same destination
10.1.1.0: [PTA] ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 12.1.1.1 permanent
[RTA] ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 13.1.1.1
OA. TRUE
O B. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F
241. What is the default server port number used by the Telnet protocol? 1:1 A. 21
❑ B. 24
❑ C. 22
❑ D. 23 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

242. The maximum number of UTY user interfaces determines how many users can log in to the device through Telnet or STelnet. OA. TRUE
(Right Answers)
0 B. FALSE

Answer: T

243. Which of the following network parameters can the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP assign? (Muitiple choice) O A.
Operating system
O B. DNS address (Right Answers)
O C. IP address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Gateway address (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

244. According to the topology and configuration shown in the figure, an Eth-Trunk link can be set up between the two switches on which LSW2 is
the Actor.

LS LSW
W1 2
GEO/0/2
GEO/0/1 GEO/
GEO/
0/1
0/2
[LSW131acp priority 100 OA. TRUE
[LSW1Jinterface Eth- O B. FALSE (Right Answers) Answer: F
Trunk1
[LSW1-Eth-Trunkllmode
lacp-static
[LSW1-Eth-Trunklimax
active-linknumber 2 a
[LSW11interface
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
[LSW1-
GigabitEthernet0/0/11eth-
trunk 1
[LSW1-
GigabitEthernet0/0/1]1acp
priority 100

[LSW1linterface
GigabitEthernet0/0/2
ILSW1-
GigabitEthernet0/0/21eth-
trunk 1
[LSW1-
GigabitEthernet0/0/2]1acp
priority 100
[ 2]interface
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
L
[LSW2-
S GigabitEthernet0/0/1]eth-
W trunk 1 a
2 [LSW2]interface
] GigabitEthernet0/0/2
[LSW2-
l GigabitEthernet0/0/2]eth-
a trunk 1
c
p

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

2
0
0

[
L
S
W
2
]
i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

E
t
h
-
T
r
u
n
k
1
[LSW2- Eth-Trunkl]mode lacp-
static
[LSW2- Eth-Trunk1]max active-
linknumber 2

[
L
S
W
 245 Referring to the configuration of the one-arm route in the following figure, it can be judged that
even if the ARP proxy is not enabled on the sub-interface of RI, the administrative department and
the finance department can exchange visits.

LSW'
00,HautrIce,..eno/o/o.0a.no vod
ate0111G1,0,,000/0/0.1,1pacuiresa 192.168.100056
t ,77 7:01::000
7
0 00 255051.255.0
'73
ration 00110
i05.41551:011100001/0/0.411.1,05 192.160200.250 255.255.215.0
OA TRUE
GB FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

246. In the MAC address table of SWA and SWO, Ore MAC address, VLAN and port
correspondence correct,

o
G 010/3
w
n

H0
51
B

❑ A SWA_ MAC Address VLAN Pon MAC-A 10

20 GEO/013 MAC-C
100 GEOASIO GE0/006. MA -B
❑ B SWI3.
MAC Address VLAN 10
GE0/02 MACLB 20
GE010/3 MAC-C 030 GENION plight Ammar.)
D C SWA: MAC Address VLAN Port MAC-A 10
GE011111 MAC-13 20
GEO/012 MAC-C 100 GE000I) Right Ansmer0
0 0. SW13: MAC Address \ CAN BOA MAC-A 10 000/0/3
MAC-B 20
GE0/043 MAC-C11111 GE0/051

247. What is the value of the Flag field in the PPP frame
format? O A. OxFF
O B. Ox7E (Right Answers )
E C. OxEF
❑ 11. Ox8E

Answer: B

248. ICMP packets do not contain a port number. so NAPT cannot be

used. OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers )

Answer: F
249. If the network shown in the following figure requires the host A to access the Internet through Easy IP,
which of the following ACL should be used on the G0/0/3 interface of Router A2

10.0.12.2/24
Router A
1
0.0.42/24 HOST R
19; 10.0.12 1/ 24

.
1
j=

HOST A
IP;10.0.13.1/24
❑ A eel number 2000 rule 5 permit source 1111112_1 000
❑ B. acE number 2000 rule 5 pernit source 10.0.13.0 0.0 0.255# (Right Answers)
❑ G. act number 2000 rule 5 permit source 19 0_15_1 0 0_0_0
❑ fr act number 2000 rule 5 permit source 10 0 12 0 0 90 255#

Answer: B
250 As shown in the figure, the two private network hosts want to communicate with each other through the GRE
tunnel. After the GRE tunnel is established, the network administrator needs to configure a static route on the
RTA to import the traffic from host A to host B The static routing channel can meet which of the following
demand,

❑ A ip route-static 10 1.2 0 24 tunnel 0/0/1 (Right Answers)

❑ B ip route-static 10.1 2 0 24 200 1 1 1
❑ C ip route-static 10.1 2024 GmabitEthernet0/0/1
❑D route-static 10.1 2.0 24 200 2 2.1

Answer: A

251 As shown in the figure below, which of the fol[owing locations should the AH header be inserted in
the [Psec transport mode?

1 IP Header TCP Header 13 1 Dat

❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
❑ C. 3
❑ ❑. 4 (Right Answers)

Answer: ❑

252. Which of the following remote login methods is the safest?

❑ A. Telnet
❑ B. Stelnet v100
❑ C. Stelnet v2 (Right Answers)
❑ D. Steinet

vl Answer:

253. Which of the following default action business module ACL is permit?
❑ A. HTTP
❑ B. SNMP
❑ C. Telnet
❑ D. Flow strategy (Right Answers)

Answer: D
 254. What is the Solicited-node multicast address corresponding to the IPv6 address
2019..8.AB? El A. FF02::1:FF08:AB (Right Answers)
❑ B_ FF02::FF08:AB
E C. FF02 1 tE08.AB
❑ D_ FF 02:1:FF20: 19

Answer: A

255. What is the destination port number of the DHCPv6 request packet sent by the DHCPve
chant? D A. 546
E B. 548
E C. 547 (Right Answers)
D D 549

Answer: C

256. The OSPFv3 adjacency cannot be established. Which of the following reasons might be caused?
(Multiple choice) E A. Router-ID conflict (Right Answers)
E B. HELLO packet sending period is inconsistent (Right
Answers) E C. Inconsistent area numbers (Right Answers)
E D. Interface IPv6 address prefix is inconsistent

Answer: ABC

257_ Which field is added to the SNMP packet header than the IPv4 packet
header? El A. Version
El B. Flow Label (Right Answers)
El C Destination
Address LI D. Source
Address

Answer: B

258 LOP penultimate hop pop-up mechanism (PHP), which allows the label to be ejected on the penultimate hop
LS11 TThhiisscan reduce the packet processing complexity of which options, 0 A Last hop and penultimate hop
device
0 B Penultimate hop device
0 C All MPLS network equipment
0 0 Last hop device

(Right Answers)

Answer: 0

259. Which of the following MAC addresses cannot be used as the MAC address of the host NIG? (Multiple
choice) D A. 00-02-03-04-05-06
❑ E 02-03-04-05-06-07
D C. 01 02 03 04 05 06 (Right
Answers) D D. 03-04-05-06-07-08
(Right Answers )

Answer: CD

260_ Which of the following statements regarding the verification of IP connectmly are false? (Multiple
Choice)
111 A The ping 12700_1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly
inserted into the host's Ethernet port (Right Anowers
0 B ping command with the host IP address as the destination can be used to verify that the
TCPAP protocol suite is functioning correctly_ (Right Answers) 0 C. The ping command can be
used to verify connectivity between the host and the local gateway.
111 D The command "ipconfig /release" can be used to check connectivity problems
between the host and the local gateway (Right Answers) Answer: ABD
 Now there are four network segments 10.24_0_0/24, 10.24.1_0/24, 10.24.2.0/24, 1024.3.0/24_ Which of the following network
261.

segments can be summarized? (Muitiple choice) A. 10.24.0.0/23

B. 10.24.1.0/23
0 C. 10.24.0.0/22 (Right
Answers) 0 D. 1 0.24,00/21
(Right Answers)

Answer: CD

262. The administrator wants to upgrade the configuration file for the AR2200 through the USB cable. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
E A. The AR2200 does not support the use of USB to update configuration files.
E B. Connect the USB interface of the PC and AR2200 with mini USB cable.
El C. After connecting the cable; the administrator needs to install the driver for the mini USB. (Right Answers)
E D. Connect the mini USB cable of the PC and AR2200 with mini USB cable. (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

The switch receives a micas' data frame. If the destination MAC address of the data frame can be found in the
263.

MAC local table, the data frame must be forwarded from the MAC corresponding port. GA TRUE
rJ B FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer, F

264. Theoutputinformationofswitch SWportisasfollows: Whichiswrongwiththefollowingstatement?

interfaceEthernet0/0/1 Info] iiodc SIN

Diumeildisplaystp
ECISTGlobal CIST ----
Bridge : 32768.4c1f -cc46-4618
:Hello 4s NaxAge 20s FwDly 15s JUL:Hop 20
ConfigTimes Active
Times CIST Root/ERPC :Hello2s IlaxAge 20s FwDly 15s XaxHop 20
CIST RegRoot/WPC :0 . 4c1f -cci7-3214 / 200000
:32768.4c1f -cc46-4618 / 0
❑ A. The switch is not a root bridge
❑ B.Forward-delayis20s (RightAnswers)
❑ C. Configure the MaxAge of the BPDU to be 20s.
❑ D. The period for sending BPDU on this port is 2s.

Answer: B

265 The network shown in the figure below, all switches open STP. Disable the sending function of the BPDU on the G0/0/2 port of the
SWA. The GO/0/1 of the SWC re-converges to become the root port. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)
SWA SWB
4096 00 01 02 03 04 AA 32768 00-01-02-03-04-813

HOST A
10: 10 11/24
MACNIAC, SWC H
32768 00 01 02 03 04 CC

❑ A SWB sends TCN BPDUs to SWA (Right Answers)

❑ B. SWC sends TCN BPDUs to SWB (Right Answers)
❑ C. SWB sends configuration BPDU with TCA set to SWC (Right Answers)
❑ D. SWA sends TC set configuration BPDU (Right Answers)

Answer. ABCD

266. An existing switch directly connects to a designated port of peer device through a poet, but the port does not forward any
message, but can receive the BPDU to monitor the network change. The role of the port should be? CI A. Root port
O B. Designated port
0 C. Alternate port
(Right Answers) O
D. Disable Pod
Answer. C
267. The switch MAC address table is as follows, which is correct?

Dittasteildis aac-address
MAC address table of slot 0:

'AC Address WAN/ PEVLAN MILAN Type L.SP/LSR -ID

Port NAC-Tunnel
VSI/SI
b/aekbole-
5404-088S-18a8 1
5484-9811-0b491 -Etb0/0/3 static -
Total matching items on slat 0 displayed = 2

MAC address table of slat 0:

MAC Address IriAli/ PEVLAN Type LSP/LSR-ID

CEVLMI Part *AC-Tunnel
VSI/SI
5489 -18%d -2d30 - Eth0/0/1 styrtaaric 0/ -
Te401.amain,it...s on slot 0 displayed
O A. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 will be
discarded.
O B. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-9885-18a8 will
be discarded. (Right Answers) O C. The switch receives the data frame with the source MAC
address of 5489-9811-0b49 and will be discarded.
❑ D. The switch receives the data frame with the destination MAC address of 5489-989d-1d30 will be
discarded.

Answer: B

268. The device running STP will discard when it receives the configuration BPDU of RSTP.
OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

269. STP When the designated port receives a configuration BPDU that is worse than itself, it immediately
sends its own BPDU downstream. OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

270.What message is sent when the SW downstream device notifies the upstream device of
topology change? O A. TCA message
O B. TC message
O C. Configure BPDUs
O D. TGN BPDU (Right Answers)

Answer: D

271. Which flag bits of the STP protocol are not used by the Flag field in the RSTP configuration BPDU?
(Muitiple choice) O A. Agreement (Right Answers)
❑ B. TCA
❑ C. TC
O D. Proposal (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

272. The backup port in RSTP can replace the failed root port.
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F
273. As shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A. The following
statements which are correct? (Muitiple choice) ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2
ip route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.25510.0.21.2 preference 40

GO/0/1
10.0.12.1/24 10.0.12.2/24
Loopback 0
1
O0.0.2.2/32
10.0.21.1/24 10.0.21.2/24
Router A G0/0/2 Router B
0 A. If the G0/0/2 port is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is
changed to GO/0/1. (Right Answers)
D B. If the GO/0/1 port is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table
of Router A is changed to G0/0/2. 0 C. the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the
routing table of Router A is GO/0/1.
0 D. the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/0/2. (Right Answers )

Answer: AD

274. VRP supports OSPF multi-process. If no process number is specified when OSPF is
enabled, the default process number is? El A. 0
El B. 10
El C. 1 (Right Answers ) P
D. 100

Answer; C

275. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)

1 >display ospf interface verbose

OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.0.1.1

Interfaces

week: 0. 0. 0. 0 IRKS TE not enabled)

Interface: 10. 0.12, 1. (GisabilEthernet0/0/0)
=oat: 1 State: 5DR Type: Breadcast IITU: 1500
?riority: 1
Designated Router: 10.0.1.2. 2
Nackuv Designated Router:
10.0.12.1
Timers: Hello 10 Dead 40 . Poll 1.20 . Retransmit 5 , Transmit Delay 1
10 Statistics
Type Input Output
Hello 66 65
DB Description 2 3
Link-State Rto 0 1
-State Update '3 2
Link-State Mk 2 ."
MI GROUP
R GROUP
aqueId: 0 PrevState: Waiting
time cost: 1, enabled by OSP!, Protocol
1:1 A. The routing interface DR priority is 10. ID
B. Router ED is 10.0.1.1 (Right Answers)
El C. The value of this interface Cost is "I (Right Answers)
El D. This router is a BDR (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD
216. ip route-static 10.0.12.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1 1
Which statement is true regarding this command?
❑ A. The configuration represents a static route to the 192.168 1.1 network.
❑ B. The configuration represents a static route to the 10.0.12.0 network (Right Answers)
❑ C. The preference value of this configured route is 100.
❑ D. If the router has learned the same destination network via a dynamic routing protocol, the static route
will always take precedence.

Answer: B

277. Which state does OSPF use to indicate that a neighbor relationship has been established?
❑ A. 2-way (Right Answers)
❑ B. Down
❑ C. Attempt
❑ D. Full

Answer:

278. By default, the period far sending OSPF HELLO packets on the broadcast network is?
❑ A_ lOs (Right Answers)
❑ B. 40s
❑ C. 30s
❑ 13. 20s

Answer: A

279. Which of the following problems may emerge when a loop exists on a router? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. tntinite packet forwarding.
❑ B. Increased CPU usage. (Right Answers)
❑ C. increased memory usage. (Right Answers)
❑ D. Continuous change of destination LP addresses of packets.
❑ E. Increased packet size.

Answer: BC

280. What are the roles of OSPF DR and BDR? (Muitipie choice)
❑ A. Reduce the number of exchanges of fink state information (Right Answers)
❑ B. Reduce the type of OSPF packets
❑ C. Reduce the time it takes far the adjacency to establish
❑ a Reduce the number of adjacencies (Right Answers)

Answer: AD
281 The Iwo routers are interconnected through the PPP lint The administrator configures OSPF on
the Iwo routers and runs in the same area. If their router lOs are the same, which is correct?
❑ A. Two routers will establish a normal full neighbor relationship
❑ B. Two routers will not send helb information to each other
❑ C. Two routers will establish a normal full adjacency
▪ VRP will prompt the router ID conflicts of the Iwo routers. (Right Answers )

Answer: 0
282. Which of the following OSPF versions suit for IPv6?
❑ A. OSPFv1
❑ B. OSPFv3 (Right Answers )
❑ C. OSPFv4
❑ D. OSPFv2

Answer: B

283. The router R1 routing table output information is as follows, which is correct? (Muitiple choice)

<RI>display ip routing—table
Route Flags; R — seleY, D — download to fib

Routing Tables: Public-

Destinations : 13 Routes 13
nest into ion/Insk Prot o Pre Cost Flags Nestlioo Interface

0. 0. 0.0/0 Static 60 0 RD 10. 0.14. 4 Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0

10. 0. 0. 0/8 Stati c 60 0 RD 10.0.12.2 It kerne t 0/0/0
10. 0. 2. 0/24 Stat ic 00 0 RD 10. 0.13. 3 Et hernet0/0/2
10. 0. 2.. 2/32 OSPF 10 00 RD 10.0. 21. 2 Et berm t0/0/1
❑ A. The router forwards the packet with the destination network of 12.0.0.0/8. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The packet with the destination network of 12.0.0.0/8 will be forwarded from the Ethernet0/0/0 interface
of the router.
0 C. The packet with the destination network of 11.0.0.0/8 will be forwarded from the GigabitEthernet0/0/0
interface of the router. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router will drop the packet with the destination network of 11.0.0.0/8.

Answer: AC

284. The following election statement about DR and BDR, which is correct? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. If an interface has a priority of 0, the interface will not participate in the election of DR or BDR.
(Right Answers)
❑ B. DR must exist in the broadcast network (Right Answers)
❑ C. If the priorities are the same, the router ID is compared. The larger the value, the higher the
priority is elected as the DR. (Right Answers )
❑ D. BDR must exist in the broadcast network

Answer: ABC

285. A Windows host is started for the first time. If the address cannot be obtained from the DHCP server,
which of the following IP addresses may the host use?
❑ A. 127.0.0.1
0 B. 169.254.2.33 (Right Answers)
0 C. 255.255.255.255
❑ D. 0.0.0.0

Answer: B

286. What is the main role of the DHCP DISCOVER message?

❑ A. The client is used to find the DHCP server. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The DHCP server responds to the DFHCP DISCOVER packet, which carries various configuration
information.
❑ C. The server responds to the confirmation of the REQUEST message.
❑ D. The client requests configuration or renews the lease term.

Answer: A
287 As shown in the figure, the two hosts implement inter-machine communication through a single-route. When
the available GO/0/1 2 sub-interface receives the data frame sent by Host B to Host A, which of the following
operations does the RTA perform?

RIA

vlasda via.°
Gateway: 10.0_1254 Gateway. 10.0.2.254
❑ A RTA will discard the data frame
❑ fr RTA forwards the data frame directly through the GO/0/1.1 subinterface.
❑ C. After the RTA deletes the VLAN tag 20, it is sent out by the GO/0/1.1 interface_
❑ a The RTA first deletes the VLAN tag 20, then adds the VLAN tag 10, and then sends it out through the
GO/0/1.1 interface (Right Answers)

Answer: D

288. What is the role of link aggregation? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. Implement load sharing (Right Answers)
❑ B. Facilitate analysis of data
❑ C. Increase bandwidth (Right Answers)
❑ D. Improve network reliability (Right Answers )

Answer: ACD

289. Which of the following is correct about link aggregation for LACP mode?
❑ A. The number of active ports cannot be set in LAGP mode.
❑ B. All active interfaces in LACP mode participate in data forwarding and share load traffic.
❑ G. There are only up to 4 active ports in LACP mode.
❑ D. In LACP mode, devices at both ends of the [ink send LACP packets to each other. (Right
Answers )

Answer: D

290. The following statement about the Hybrid port, which is correct?
❑ A. Hybrid port does not require PVID
❑ B. Hybrid port only receives data frames with VLAN TAG
❑ C. Hybrid port must carry VLAN TAG when sending data frames.
❑ D. The Hybrid port can strip the TAG of certain VLAN frames in the outbound direction. (Right
Answers)

Answer: D

291_ In the process of establishing PPP link, which phase can be directly converted into by the Dead
phase?
❑ A. Authenticate
❑ B. Terminate
❑ C. Establish (Right Answers )
❑ D. Network

Answer: C

292_ Which of the following values is used in the LengthlType field of the Ethernet data frame, indicating
that the packet carrying the PPPoE session phase is carried?
▪ 0x8863
❑ B Ox8864 (Right Answers )
❑ C. 0x0800
❑ D. Ox0806

Answer: B
293. On theVRP platform, which command can set the encapsulation type of the data link layer of the
Serial interface to HDLC? 0 A. link-protocol hdlc (Right Answers)
O B. hdlc enable
O C. encapsulation
hdlc O D. link-
protocol ppp

Answer: A

294. SNMPvl defines five protocol

operations. GA. TRUE (Right Answers)
0 B. FALSE

Answer: T

295. How many domains can be configured when configuring AM authentication on Huawei ARG3 series routers?
❑ A. 33
O B. 31
❑ C. 32
❑ D. 30 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

296. After the GRE keepalive function is enabled, the local end of the GRE tunnel periodically sends a
keepalive packet to the peer every 10s. OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right

Answers) Answer:

A. The AAA protocol is the RADIUS

protocol. 3 A. TRUE
0 B. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

298. The router Radius information is configured as follows: Which is correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. The [13 address of the accounting server is 200.0.12.1 (Right Answers)

❑ B. The IP address of the authorization server is 200.0.12.1
❑ C. The source IP address of the router sending Radius packets is 200.0.12.2. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The IP address of the authentication server is 200.0.12.1 (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD
 299. Which of the following SNMP protocols supports encryption?
❑ A. SNMPv2c
❑ fr SNMPv3 (Right Answers)
❑ G_ SNMPv2
❑ D_

SNMPv1

Answer: B

3011 Which packets are used by the DHC1W6 client and the DHCR6 server to determine
whether the client uses DFICPv6 stolenl autoconfigurabon or DHCRe stateless
autoconfiguration7 (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DA (Right
Answers )
❑ 13 NA
❑ C. NS
❑ D. RS

(Right

Answers )

Answer:

AD

301. What is the destination port number of the DHCPv6 ADVERTISE packet sent by the DHGR/6
server?
❑ A. 548
❑ B. 547
❑ C. 549
❑ D. 546 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

302. When the DHCPv6 client receives the value of the 0 flag and the 0 flag in the RA message sent by the
DHCP,e6 server, the DHCPN6 client uses the DHCP),6 stateful auto configuration to obtain the IPM address
and other configuration information
10
O B 11
(Right
Answers)
El C. 1
O B.0

Answer: B

303_ 1/128 is the 1Pv6 Eoopbeck address.

CA. TRUE (Right Answers)
▪ Ili_ FALSE

Answer:

304. On the network shown in the following figure, if the static route is configured on the RouterB, the
NextHop corresponding to 2001::1/128 is in the routing table of RouterB.
ipv6 route•-static 2001::1 128 3001:12:1
❑ A. 3001::12:2
❑ B, Te80:1903:c3fb
❑ C. 3002::12:1
❑ D. 30011:12:1
(Right Answers)

Answer: D

305. SR (Segment Routing) is attracting more and more attention as a new anemative MPLS tunneling
technology_ Many users hope to introduce SR technology to simplify network deployment and management and
reduce CAPEX (Capital Expenditure). As the current mainstream tunneling technology, SR is widely used in
bearer networks.
OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE

(Right

Answers)

Answer. F
306. The broadcast address is a special address in the network address where the host bits are all set to
1. It can also be used as a host address. OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers )

Answer: F

307. As shown in the figure, if the administrator wants to improve the performance of this network, which of
the following is the most appropriate?

❑ A. Use a switch to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to full duplex. (Right
Answers )
❑ B. Use the Hub to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to half duplex.
❑ C. Use the Hub to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to full duplex.
❑ D. Use a switch to connect each host and change the working mode of each host to half duplex.

Answer: A

308. If the command is executed on the router: user-interface maximum-vty 0, the following statement which
is correct?
❑ A. Support up to 4 users to access through VTY at the same time
❑ B. Support up to 15 users to access through VTY at the same time
❑ C. No user can log in to the router through Telnet or SSH. (Right Answers)
❑ D. Support up to 5 users to access through VTY at the same time

Answer: C

309. On the VRP operating platform, what is the command to display the current interface configuration in the
interface view?
❑ A. display users
❑ B. display this (Right Answers)
❑ C. display ip interface brief
❑ D. display version

Answer: B

310. Regarding the conflict domain and the broadcast domain, the description which is correct?
(Multiple choice)
❑A. The device connected to a HUB belongs to a broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device connected to a switch belongs to a conflict domain.
❑ C. The device connected to a switch belongs to a broadcast domain. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The device connected to a router belongs to a broadcast domain.
❑E. The device connected to a HUB belongs to a conflict domain. (Right

Answers ) Answer: ACE

311. What is the priority of the bridge priority in the IEEE 802.1D standard?
❑ A. 8 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 4
O C. 16
❑ D. 2

Answer: A

312. In RSTP mode, interfaces in the Discarding state discard received data frames but maintain the MAC
address table based on received data frames. OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right

Answers) Answer: F

313. As shown in the figure below, which port of the following switch will become the designated port?

❑ A. SWC G01012
❑ B. SWB GO/0/3
❑ C. SWC GO/0/1
❑ D. SVVA GO/013 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

314. The device port running STP is in the Forwarding state. Which is correct?
❑ A. The port only receives and processes BPDU and does not forward user
traffic. O B. The port forwards both user traffic and BPDU. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The port does not process BPDU and does not forward user traffic.
❑ D. The port will build a MAC address table based on the received user traffic but will not forward user traffic.

Answer: B
315 As shown in the network below, the host has an ARP cache which is correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ k The router needs to be configured with static routes, otherwise Host A and Host B cannot
communicate in both directions.
❑ B. Host A has the following entries in the ARP cache. 1110.12.2 MAC-C (Right Answers)
❑ C Host A has the following entries in the ARP cache_ 11_0_12 1 MAC-8
❑ D. Host A and Host B can communicate in both directions (Right Answers)

Answer: BD
316 In the network shown in the following figure, all routers run the OSPF protocol, and the top of the link
is the value of the Cost value_ What is the Cost value of the RA) routing table that reaches the network
100m 0/87

❑ A 70
❑ B 20
❑ C.60 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 100

Answer: C

317. As shown in the following figure, host A does not have a gateway configured. Host B has a
gateway ARP cache. Which is correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. When the ARP proxy is enabled on G0/0/1 of the router, host A can communicate with host B.
❑ B. Host A and Host B cannot communicate in both directions (Right Answers)
❑ G Host B sends a packet with the destination IP address of 10 0 12 1 to he forwarded to host A
(Right Answers)
❑ D Host A sends a packet with the destination IP address of

11_0 12 1 to be forwarded to host B Answer: BC

318. In Huawei AR routers, by default, the value of the RIP priority is?
❑ A. 60
n B. 120
❑ C. 100 (Right
Answers) O D. 0

Answer: C
319. When OSPF establishes adjacency, which of the following must be consistent? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Router Priority
❑ B. Router ID
❑ C. Router Dead Interval (Right Answers)
❑ D. Area ID (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

320. What are the advantages of the OSPF protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. OSPF supports load balancing for equal-cost routes. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Supporting the division of regions (Right Answers)
❑ C. OSPF supports untyped inter-domain routing (CIDR) (Right Answers)
❑ D. OSPF supports packet authentication (Right Answers)

Answer; ABCD

321. What is the destination IP address of the DI-ICP DISCOVER packet?

❑ A. 224.0.0.2
❑ B. 127.0.0.1
❑ C. 224.0.0.1
❑ D. 255.255.255.255 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

322. If an Ethernet data frame has LengthiType=0x8100, then the payload of this data frame cannot
be? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. ARP response packet
❑ B. OSPF packet
❑ C. RSTP data frame (Right Answers )
❑ D. STP data frame (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

323. The configuration information of an interface of a router is as follows. Which port can receive the data
packets of this VLAN?

❑ A. 100 (Right Answers)

❑ B. 20
❑ C. 30
❑ D. 1

Answer: A
324. What should I do when the trunk port sends a data frame?
❑ A. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, the data frame is discarded.
❑ B. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, replace it with PVID forwarding.
❑ C. When the VLAN ID is different from the PVID of the port, strip the TAG forwarding
❑ D. When the VLAN ID is the same as the PVID of the port and the VLAN ID is allowed to pass through the
port, the tag is removed and the packet is sent. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

325. Which of the following features does HDLC have? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. HDLC protocol supports point-to-point links (Right Answers)
❑ B. HDLC protocol does not support FP address negotiation. (Right Answers)
❑ C. HDLC protocol supports point-to-multipoint links
❑ D. HDLC protocol does not support authentication (Right Answers )

Answer: ABD

326. The output information of a router is as follows. Which is correct? (Muitiple choice)

❑ A. This interface is a synchronous interface (Right Answers)

❑ B. The IP address of the interface is 10.0.12.1124_ (Right Answers)
❑ C. The protocol used by the data link layer is PPP. (Right Answers)
❑ D. When the packet forwarded by this interface exceeds 1400 Byte, the packet needs to be fragmented.

Answer: ABC

327. The Protocol field in the PPP frame format is 0xCO23, indicating that the protocol is?
❑ A. PAP (Right Answers)
O B. LCP
❑ C. CHAP
❑ D. NCP

Answer: A
 328. What is the default ACL step size on the G3 series
routers? 0 A. 15
❑ B_ 10 (Right Answers)
❑ G. 10
❑ D. 20

Answer: 8

329. What is the range of advanced ACL?

❑ A. 6000-6031
❑ B. 4000-4999
❑ C. 3000-3999 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 2000-2999

Answer: C

330. Which of the following protocols is the IPsec VPN architecture?

❑ A. GRE
❑ B. ESP (Right Answers)
❑ C. IKE (Right Answers)
❑ ❑. AH (Right Answers)

Answer: BGD

About the matching mechanism of ACL, which is correct? (Multiple choice)

331.
❑ A. If the ACL does not exist the result of returning the ACL is: no match (Right Answers)
❑ B. If the last rule is found and the packet still does not match, the ACL matching resuli is mismatch (Right
Answers)
❑ C. Regardless of whether the result of the packet matching ACL is 'mismatch', "allow° or "roper, the
packet is finally allowed to pass or refuse to pass, which is actually determined by each service module
applying the ACL (Right Answers)
❑ B. By default, the rule with the lowest number in the ACL stags searching. Once the rule is matched, the
subsequent rule is stopped. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

332.The network management workstation manages the network device through the SNMP protocol. When
the managed device has an abnormality, what kind of SNMP packet will the network management
workstation receive?
❑ A. get-response message
❑ B trap message (Right Answers )
❑ C. set-request message
❑ D. get-

request

message

Answer. B

333_ The router does not need to re-encapsulate the data link layer when forwarding [RE packets.
0A. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

334 There are 4 routers in a broadcast network, and all 4 routers run OSPFv3 protocol If all router DR
priorities are not 0, how many adjacencies are there in the network?
❑ A. 6
❑ B.4
❑ C. 5 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 3
Answer: C
 335. Which of the following statements about the Prefix Segment is wrong?
❑A. Prefix Segment can be automatically assigned by IGP (Right Answers)
❑ B. Prefix Segment is spread to other network element through the IGP protocol. It is globally
visible and globally valid.
❑ C. Prefix Segment requires manual configuration
❑D. Prefix Segment is used to identify a destination address

prefix in the network. Answer: A

336. About the TTL field in the IPv4 header, which is correct?
❑ A. When a route has a loop, the TTL value can be used to prevent the packet from being forwarded
indefinitely. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The TTL value is reduced by 1 for each Layer 3 device. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The TTL value is 8 bits long. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The range of TTL values is 0-255 (Right Answers )

Answer: ABCD

337. What is the value range of the DSCP field in the IPv4 header?
El A. 0-15
❑ B. 0-63 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 0-31
❑ D. 0-7

Answer: B

338. UDP is connectionless and must use which to provide the reliability of the transmission?
❑ A. Network layer protocol
❑ B. Application layer protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Transmission Control Protocol
❑ D. Internet Protocol

Answer: B

339. Because the TCP protocol uses three-way handshake mechanism when establishing and
closing connections, TCP supports reliable transmission. OA. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

340. Which method VRP does not support to configure the router?
❑ A. Configure the router through Telnet
❑ B. Configure the router through the mini USB port
❑ C. Configure the router through the console port.
❑ D. Configure the router through FTP (Right Answers)

Answer: D
341. In which view can the administrator modify the device name for the router?
❑ A. Protocol-view
❑ B. System-view (Right Answers)
❑ C. User-view
❑ D. Interface-view

Answer: B

342. Which of the following states does the STP protocol elect to perform port roles?
❑ A. Blocking
❑ B. Disabled
❑ C. Learning
❑ D. Listening (Right Answers)

Answer; D

343. What is the total length of the Rag field in the RSTP BPDU message?
❑ A. 6
❑ B. 4
❑ C. 8 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 2

Answer: C

344. Which of the following is not the reason that RSTP can improve the convergence speed?
❑ A. Introduction of edge ports
❑ B. Canceled Forward Delay (Right Answers)
❑ C. Fast switching of the root port
❑ D. PIA mechanism

Answer: B

345. Which of the following statements about the edge port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
❑ A. The edge port can be directly transferred from the Disable state to the Forwarding state. (Right
Answers)
❑ B. The ports interconnected between the switches need to be set as edge ports.
❑ C. The edge pert discards the received configuration BPDU packet.
❑ D. Edge port participates in RSTP

operation Answer: A
 346. A switch running STP can be converted to the Forwarding state after waiting for the forwarding delay
in the Learning state. OA. TRUE (Right Answers )
B FALSE

Answer: T

347. In Huawei AR routers, what is the priority of the static routing protocol by default?
❑ A. 60 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 100
❑ C. 120
❑ D0

Answer: A

348. As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. Which device ABR?

❑ A. Router D
❑ 11 Router C
❑ C. Router A (Right Answers )
❑ D. Router B (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

349 As shown in the following figure, if the host has an ARP cache and host A sends a packet to host B,
what is the destination MAC address and destination P address of the packet?

❑ A MAC-C 10 0 12 2
❑ B. MAC-A 11 0.12 1
❑ C MAC-C 11 0 12 1 (Right Answers)
❑ B. MAC-B 11 0.12.1

Answer: C
350. What types of networks are supported by the OSPF protocol? (Muitiple choice)
❑ A. Point-to-Multipoint (Right Answers)
0 B. Non-Broadcast Multi-Access (Right Answers)
❑ C. Point-to-Point (Right Answers)
❑ D. Broadcast (Right Answers)

Answer: ABM

351. How many types of OSPF packets are there? O

A. 3
❑ B. 4
❑ C. 5 (Right Answers)
O D. 2

Answer: C

352. When upgrading the router software using the FTP protocol, which transfer mode should be selected?
❑ A. Text mode
❑ B. Byte mode
❑ G. Streaming byte mode
❑ D. Binary mode (Right Answers)

Answer: D

353. Which message does the DHCP server use to confirm that the host can use the IP address?
❑ A. DHCP ACK (Right Answers)
❑ B. DHCP DISCOVER
❑C. DHCP REQUEST
❑D. DHCP OFFER

Answer: A

354. A Windows host is started for the first time. If the IP address is obtained by DHCP, what is the source IP address of the first
packet sent by this host?
❑ A. 127.0.0.1
❑ B. 255.255.255.255
❑ C. 0.0.0.0 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 169.254.2.33

Answer: C
 355. What is the range of VLAN [Ds that users can use?
❑ A. 0-4096
❑ B. 1-4096
❑ C. 1-4094 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 0-4095

Answer: C

356 if a port has the following configuration information, which port does the VLAN TAG carry when
transmitting data frames of the VLAN7

❑ A. 1,2,3,100
❑ B. 2,3,4,6,100
❑ C 2,3,100 (Right Answers)
❑ D 1,2,3,4,6,100

Answer: C

357. The load balancing modes of the two ends of the Eth-Trunk can be
inconsistent. OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

358. For the network shown in the fotowing figure, the switch uses the sub-interface pair of the
machine interface and the router. Which of the following configurations can fulfill this
requirement?

❑ A. interface 10 ip address 10 0.12.1 255255255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type

hybrid pod hybrid untag Nan 10 #
❑ B. interface Mandl 0 ip address 10 0.12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-
type trunk pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 # (Right Answers )
❑ C. interface Menai() ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 pod link-
type access port default Nan 10 #
❑ 0. interface Vlanif10 ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255 255 0 # interface

GigabitEthemet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod trunk paid 10 pod trunk allow-pass

Nan 10 # Answer: B

359. In the following options, which is the necessary technology to enable a host with an IP address
of 10 0 0 1 to access the Internet?
❑ A. Dynamic routing
❑ B. NAT (Right Answers)
❑ C. Route introduction
❑ D Static

routing
Answer: B
360 As shown in the following figure, from the perspective of the security corner, Router A refuses to receive
OSPF packets, GRE packets and IGMP packets received from GO/0/1 Which of the following commands can
fulfill this requirement? (Multiple choice)

❑ A act number 3000 rule 5 deny ere rule 10 deny ospf rule 15 deny icmp # interface GmabilEthemet0/0/1
traffic-filter inbound act 3000 # (Right Answers)
❑ B act number 3000 rule 5 deny gre rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny icmp # interface GmabilEthernelf1/0/1 traffic-
filter inbound act 3000 # (Right Answers)
❑ a eel number 2000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/1 traffic-
filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑ 13_ acl number 3000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabrtEthernet0/0/1 traffic-
filter inbound ad 3000 # (Right Answers)

Answer: ABO

361_ As shown Ingle following figure, which of the folbwing configurations can be used Io preyentfiles1 A from
accessing Host B HTTP service. Host B can not access which service of Host A HP? (Multiple choice)

❑ A acl number 3000 ride 5 deny top source 100.0.12 CI 0 GO 255 s.rec-port act woe destination
1030_1311 0 0.0 255# acInonter 3001 rule 5 deny top source 100.01300/0255 source-parrot( fto dean..
100 0 12 0 0.00.255# aderface GgabilEthemetll0/1 traffic-51er outbound act 30004 interface
GgabitEtherrieffir002 trafrinffitar outbound ark 31031 a
▪ 10 eat number 2000 rule S deny tap source 180.0.13.0 0 0 0.255 desk rmtmn 160 O.12 0 0 0.6.255
deslinatontporl. votwe a ad number 31101 rule 5 deny tcp source 1130.0 12 6 (1,0..0 255 clesfinalion 100.0.13 0
0 0.0.255 dEshrehon-port eq
Ira M traerface GigabilEtheineignOM traPfic-filler inbound 1113000# interface GigabilEtheme100.2 tarts-film
inbound eel 3001 # (Right Answers)
❑ G_ act number 3000 rule 5 deny.? rescue 100 0.13 000.055 doshnohon 103.0120 0 00 255 destioabon-
pad. www # acl number 3001 rule 5 deny lop source 100 0 )2,0 000.255 d.briatorr 100.0 13 00 0.225555
d.bnalon-porl aq
ftp if interface GigularlEthame10/0,1 beffic-Stier oulbconcl 101 3000 0 inlerface GigubitElharne100/2 traffic-filler
outbound acl 3001 to
❑ D. scl number 3000 rule 5 deny leo source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255 source-poll op wino destination 100.0.13.0
0.0.0.255# ecl number 3001 nile 5 deny Hp source 100.0.13.0 0.0.0.255 source-port ei ftp destination
100.0.12.0 0.0.0.2550 Interface OlgerbilEthernet0/0 1 traffic-filter intbound 5013000#Interface
GfigabilEthemat0 02 traffic-filter inbound eel 30015 (Right Artawars)

Answer, HD

362. 0 packets are carried over

TCP. ()A. TRUE
OB. FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer: F

363. The multicast address FF02:.1 represents all nodes in the link-focal
range. OA TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

365. In the estabFishment of adjacency relationship : what is the role of OD packets in OSPFv37
❑ A. Request missing LSA
❑ B. Used to send the required LSA to the peer router
❑ a Discover and maintain neighbor relationships
❑ ❑. To describe your own LSDB (Right Answers)

Answer: D
366. The simplest form of IPv6 address 3001: ODB8: 0000: 0000: 0346: ABCD: 42BC: 8D58 is?
❑ A. 3001:0DB8::0000:0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58
❑ B. 3001: DB8::0346: ABCD: 42BC: 8058
❑ C_ 3001: D68::346: ABCD: 4260: 8058 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 3001:0DB8::0346:ABCD:42BC:8D58

Answer: C

367. When the host adopts DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration, which DHCPv6 message is sent by the host
to request configuration information?
❑ A. Information-Request (Right Answers)
❑ B. CONFIRM
❑ C. SOLICIT
❑ D.

REBIND

Answer:

368. What is the length of the IPv6 multicast address flag field?
❑ A. 3
❑ B. 2
❑ C. 4 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 5

Answer: C

36g. Which of the following statements about the Node Segment is wrong?
❑ A. The Node SID cannot be the same as the node Prefix SID. (Right Answers )
❑ B. Node Segment is used to identify a specific node
❑ C. Configure the IP address as the prefix on the loopback interface of the node. The Prefix SID of
this node is actually the Node SID.
❑ D. Node Segment is a special

Prefix Segment Answer: A

370. Which of the following are the actions of the MPLS (Multiple choice)
❑ A. pop (Right Answers)
❑ B. switch
❑ C. swap (Right Answers)
❑ D. puch (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

371. If two Huawei S5710 switches are interconnected using a 10 Gigabit optical module, the working mode of
the interconnect port defaults to full duplex. OA. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T
372. On the Huawei ARG3 router, the -i parameter of the Ping command in the VRP is used to set ?
❑ A. Interface for sending Echo Request packets (Right Answers )
❑ B. Source IP address for sending Echo Request packets
❑ C. Interface for receiving Echo Reply packets
❑ D. Destination IP address of receiving Echo Reply packets

Answer: A

373. The following statement about the TTL field in the IP packet header, which is correct?
❑ A. TTL defines the number of packets that the source host can send.
❑ B. Whenever a packet passes through a router, its TTL value is decremented by 1. (Right Answers )
❑ C. TTL defines the time interval at which the source host can send packets.
❑ D. Whenever a packet passes through a router; its TTL value will be increased by 1.

Answer: B

374. Which of the following statements about ICMP messages is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The length of the Type field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The length of the Checksum field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits.
❑ C. The value of the ICMP packet in the first protocol type field of IPv4 is 1. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The length of the Code field in the ICMP packet format is 8 bits. (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

375. How does the VRP platform represent the third slot of the router, the sub-card No. 0 and the GE port No. 2.
❑ A. interface GigabitEthernet 3/2/0
❑ B. interface Ethernet 3/0/2
❑ C. interface XGigabitEthernet 3/0/2
❑ D. interface GigabitEthernet 3/012 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

376. Which of the following statements about the Spanning Tree Protocol Root Bridge election is correct?
❑ A. When the bridge priority is the same, the device with the large MAC address becomes the root bridge.
❑ B. When the bridge priority is the same, the device with a large number of ports becomes the root bridge.
❑ C. The device with a smaller bridge priority value becomes the root bridge. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The bridge with a higher priority value becomes the root bridge.

Answer: C
377. In standard STP mode, which of the following ports on non-root switches forward the BPDUs with
TC bits set generated by the root switch?
❑ A. Root port.
❑ B. Backup port.
❑ C. Provisioning port
❑ D. Designated port (Right Answers)

Answer: D

378. The Message Age in the configuration BPDU sent by the root bridge in the STP protocol is 0.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

37g. Which of the following parameters should be considered when electing a root port in STP? (Multiple
choice)
❑ A. Duplex mode of the port
❑ B. Port priority (Right Answers)
❑ C. the cost of the port reaches the root switch (Right Answers)
❑ D. MAC address of the port
❑ E. Port slot number, such as GO/0/1 (Right Answers)

Answer; BCE

380. As shown in the following figure, assume that all routers run OSPF at the same time. Which
kind of router is BDR in this network?

O A. Router A (Right Answers)

❑ B. Router B
❑ C. Router C
❑ D. Router

Answer:

A
381. The routing table shown below, which of the following statement is correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. The NextHop of the destination network 10.0.3.3/32 is not directly connected, so the router will not
forward the packet with the destination IP address of 10.0.0.3.
❑ B. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.2.2 from Ethernet0/010.
(Right Answers)
❑ C. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.12.1 from Ethernet0/0/0.
❑ D. The router forwards the packet with the destination IP address 10.0.0.3 from Ethernet0/0/0.
(Right Answers)

Answer: BD

382.As shown in the figure below, which network device can Host A and Host B use to communicate?

❑ A. Router (Right Answers)

❑ B. Hub
❑ C. HUB
❑ II Layer 2 switch

Answer: A
383. The router output information is as follows, which of the following statement is wrong?

❑ A. The MTU value of the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 1480. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The physical link of Ethernet0/0/0 is normal.
❑ C. The broadcast address corresponding to the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 10.0.12.255.
❑ D. The IP address of the Ethernet0/0/0 interface is 10.0.12.1/24.

Answer: A

384. Which of the following is not included in the routing table?

❑ A. Next hop
O B. Routing cost
❑ C. Source address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Target network

Answer: C

385. Which of the following statement about the OSPF backbone area is correct?
❑ A. Area 0 is the backbone area. (Right Answers)
O B. All areas can be backbone areas
❑ C. The backbone area must be deployed when the number of routers running OSPF exceeds two.
❑ D. All routers in the backbone area are ABR

Answer: A

386. What are the advantages of the OSPF protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. OSPF supports load balancing for equal-cost routes. (Right Answers)
❑ B. OSPF supports Classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) (Right Answers)
❑ C. OSPF supports packet authentication (Right Answers)
❑ D. Supporting the division of areas (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD
387 A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An administrator
discovers however that some hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the DHCP servers
address pool. What are the possible reasons for this? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A Alf addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned. (Right Answers)
0 B. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the
169.254.0.0 address range. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is aliocating IP addresses to
hosts that happen to be within a closer proximity than the authorized DHCP server
(Right Answers ) o D. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and
therefore generated their own address in the 127.254.0.0 address range.

Answer: ABC

388.[Huawei]user-interface vty 0 14
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] acl 2000 inbound
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] user privilege level
3
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14] authentication-mode password
Please configure the login password (maximum length 16): Huawei
The configuration of vty is as shown above, and the user privilege level is set to level 3.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

389. The aggregation port of the router can be configured with a routing subinterface.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer:

390. Which VLAN partitioning method is most appropriate when the host frequently moves the location?
❑ A. Based on IP subnetting
❑ B. Based on NIAC address division (Right Answers)
❑ C. Basic strategy division
❑ D. Port-based

partitioning Answer: B

391. On the VRP platform, the role of the command "interface vlan <vlan-id>" is 0.
❑ A. Create or enter the VLAN virtual interface view. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Create a VLAN
❑ C. No such command
❑ D. Configure a VLAN for a

port Answer: A
 392_ NAPT distinguishes the [P addresses of different users by protocol numbers in TCP or UDP or IP
packets.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

393. Which message need to send when needing to terminate a PPPoE session?
❑ A. PADR
❑ B. PADT (Right Answers )
❑ G. PADO
❑ D. PADI

Answer:

394. Which of the following are the advantages of the PPP protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. PPP protocol supports negotiation of link layer parameters (Right Answers)
❑ B. PPP protocol supports negotiation of network layer parameters (Right Answers)
❑ C. PPP protocol supports both synchronous transmission and asynchronous transmission. (Right
Answers)
❑ D. PPP protocol supports authentication (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

395 The network shown below. Which of the following configurations enables all hosts to
communicate with Host C, but Host A and Host B cannot communicate?

❑ A. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination mac 5439-93ea-4010 source•-mac 5489-9843-104d
# interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound acl 4000 #
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98e8-4c7c source-mac 5489-98d3-
104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound act 4000 #
❑ C. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5439-98ca-4c7c source-mac 5489-9300-550e
# interface GigabitEtherne10/0/1 traffic-filter inbound act 4000 # (Right Answers)
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-983a-400 source-mac

5489-98c0-550e # interface GigahltEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound acl 4000#

Answer: C

396. As hown in the figure: IPsec VPN is used to transfer data between two hosts. In order to hide the real IP address and
ensure the security of data as high as possible, which mode and protocol of IPsec VPN is better, (Multiple choice)
❑ A. All
❑ B Tunnel mode (Right Answers)
❑ a Transmission mode
❑ B. ESP (Right Answers)

Answer: BD
397. Apply the following ACL in Telnet: which of the following statement is correct'?
acl number 2000
rule 5 deny source 172.16.105.30
rule 10 deny source 172.16.105.40
rule 15 deny source 172.16.105.50
rule 20 permit

❑ A. The device with IP address 172.16.105.6 can use the Telnet service. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The device with IP address 172.16.105.3 can use the Telnet service.
❑ C. The device with IP address 172.16.105.5 can use the Telnet service.
❑ D. The device with IP address 172.16.105.4 can use the Telnet service.

Answer: A

398. Which of the following lPv6 addresses is a link-local address?

❑ A. FC00::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ B. FE80::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2000::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ D. FF02::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC

Answer: B

399. Which field in the Fv6 header acts like the TTL field in the IPv4 header?
❑ A. Version
❑ B. Traffic Class
❑ C. Hop Limit (Right Answers)
❑ D. Next Header

Answer: C

400. What are the three main roles in the DHCPv6 basic protocol architecture? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DHCPv6 switch
❑ B. DHCPv6 relay (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCPv6 client (Right Answers)
❑ D. DHCPv6 server (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

401. The value of the MO flag in the RA message sent by the DHCPv6 service is 01. Which of the following
methods does the host use to automatically configure the address?
❑ A. Value does not make any
sense
❑ B. DHCPv6 stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
❑ C. DHCPv6 stateful
autoconfiguration
❑ D. Stateless

autoconfiguration

Answer: B
402. Which of the following statements about the S field in the MPLS packet header is correct? (Multiple
choice)
❑ A. Is there any other label after marking this label, 1 means yes, 0 means no
❑ B. The S bit exists in each MPLS packet header. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Is there any other label after marking this label, 0 means yes. 1 means no (Right Answers)
❑ D. S bit has only 1 bit in frame mode and 2 bits in cell mode.

Answer: BC

403.<Huawei>reset saved-configuration
Warning: The action will delete the saved
configuration in the device. The configuration, will
be erased to reconfi gure. Continue? [YIN]:
The administrator configured the above on the AR2200, and which of the following description about
the configuration information is correct?
❑ A. The saved configuration file will be replaced by the running configuration file.
❑ B. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should select "Y" (Right Answers)
❑ C. If the user wants to clear the saved configuration file, he should select "N"
❑ D. The configuration file will be retained when the device starts up.

Answer: B

404. On the VRP interface, use the command startup saved-configuration backup.ofg to configure the
backup.cfg file for the next startup.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B.

False

Answer

: A

405. Which of the following states is the STP port converted between exist Forward Delay? (Multiple
choice)
❑ A. Forwarding-Disabled
❑ B. Blocking-Listening
❑ C. Disabled-Blocking
❑ D. Listening-Learning (Right Answers)
❑ E. Learning-Forwarding (Right Answers)

Answer: DE

406. Which of the following parameters should be considered when electing a root port in STP? (Multiple
choice)
❑ A. Duplex mode of the port
❑ B. Port slot number, such as GO/0/1
❑ C. Port MAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Port priority (Right Answers)
❑ E. the cost of the port reaches the root switch (Right Answers)

Answer: CDE

407. Which of the following port states does not the RSTP protocol include?
❑ A. Blocking (Right Answers)
❑ B. Forwarding
❑ C. Discarding
❑ D. Learning
Answer: A
 408. Which router is the BDR in this network, as shown in the figure below?

❑ A. Router B
❑ B. Router A
❑ C. no BDR (Right Answers)
❑ D. Router C

Answer: C

409. It is known that the routing table of a router has the following two entries:

If the router wants to forward a message with a destination address of 9.1.4.5, which of the following
statement is correct?
❑ A. Select the second item as the best match because Ethernet is faster than Serialo
❑ B. Select the first item as the best match because the OSPF protocol has a higher priority value.
❑ G. Select the second item as the best match because the RIP protocol has a lower generation value.
❑ D. Select the second term as the best match because the route is a mare accurate match than the
destination address of 9.1.4.5 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

410. The following is the routing table of router R1. If R1 sends a packet with the destination IP address of
10.0.2.2, which interface does it need to send from?

❑ A. Ethernet0/0/2
❑ B. Ethernet0/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ethernet0/0/0
❑ D. GigabitEthernet0/0/0

Answer: B
411. When routers are running in the same OSPF area, which of the following description of their LSDB and
routing table is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The link state database obtained by each router is different.
❑ B. The routing table cf each router is different. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The link state database obtained by all routers is the same (Right Answers)
❑ D. The routing tables obtained by all routers are the same.

Answer: BC

412. Which of the following elements are included in the routing table? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Interface (Right Answers)
❑ B. Protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Destination/Mask (Right Answers)
❑ D. Cost (Right Answers)
❑ E. NextHop (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCDE

413. The output information of a router routing table is as follows. Which of the following statement is
correct? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.21.2.

❑ B. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.21.2. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.0.1 is 10.0.12.2. (Right Answers )
❑ D. The NextHop of this router reaching 10.0.2.2 is 10.0.12.2.

Answer; BC

414. By default, how long is the lease time of the lP address assigned by the DHCP server? O A. 1 h
❑ B. 24h (Right Answers)
❑ C. 12h O
D. 18h

Answer: B

415. Which of the following applications is based on the TCP protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. FTP (Right Answers)
❑ B. HTTP (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ping
❑ D. TFTP

Answer: AB
416 The DHCP server function is enabled on an interface of the router. Which of the following [P
addresses may the DHCP client obtain? interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
ip address 11 0 1 1 255
255.255.0 dhcp select
interface
dhcp server excluded-ip-address 11 0 1 2 11 0 1.127

❑ A 11 0 1 1
❑ B. 11.0.1.100
❑ C 11.0.1 254 (Right Answers )
❑ D. 11.0.1.255

Answer: C

417. ❑n the switch. which VLANs can be deleted by using the undo command? (MuttiNe choice)
❑ A. v[an 4094 (Right Answers)
❑ B. vian 1
❑ C. vlan 2 (Right Answers)
❑ D_ elan 1024 (Right Answers)

Answer: AGD

418 In the network shown in the following figure, the output information of switch A is as follows_ In the
current MAC address table of itch A, which interlace dues the C address of host B correspond to'

❑ A GigabitEthernet0/0/2
❑ B. Eth-Trunk I (Right Answers)
❑ C GigabitEthemet0/0/1
❑ B. GigabitEthemet0/0/3

Answer: B
419. As shown in the following figure, the router configuration information is as follows. Which of the
following statement is correct?
Router A interface
GigabitEthernet0/0/0.100 dotlq
termination vid 200
ip address 10.0.12.1 255.255.255.0
arp broadcast enable

Router B
interface
GigabitEthernet0/0/0.200
dotlq termination vid 200
ip address 10.0.12.2 255.255.255.0
arp broadcast enable

❑ A. 10.0.12.1 can ping 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)

❑ B. The sub-interface of Router A cannot learn the MAC address of the sub-interface of Router B.
❑ C. The sub-interface of Router B cannot learn the MAC address of the sub-interface of Router A.
❑ D. Router A and Router B cannot communicate because the sub-interface numbers of Router A and
Router B are inconsistent.

Answer: A

420. Which of the following parameters does the LCP negotiation use to detect link loops and other
anomalies?
❑ A. CHAP
❑ B.
MRU El
C. PAP
❑ D. Magic word (Right Answers)

Answer; D

421. Static NAT can only implement one-to-one mapping between private addresses and public addresses.
❑ A. True (Right Answers )
❑ B. False

Answer: A

422. Which of the following does AAA not include?

❑ A. Accounting
❑ B. Authorization
❑ C. Audit (Right Answers)
❑ D. Authentication

Answer: C
423. Which authorization modes does W support on Huawei ARG3 series routers? (Multiple
choice)
❑ A. HWTACACS authorization (Right Answers )
❑ B. Nat authorized (Right Answers )
❑ C. Authorization after successful RADIUS authentication (Right Answers)
❑ D. Local authorization (Right Answers )

Answer: ABCD

424. Which of the following about the function of the AH protocol in IPsec VPN is wrong?
❑ A. Support data integrity check
❑ B. Support anti-message playback
❑ C. Support packet encryption (Right Answers)
❑ D. Support data source verification

Answer: C

425 As hown in the following figure, the router functions as the DHCPy6 relay agent and Router B
functions as the DHCPy6 server. Which of the following parameters must be configured on Router
B? (Multiple choice)

❑ A Enable RA on port GO/0/1 of Router B

❑ B IPv6 address of the DHCPW relay
❑ C DHCR/6 DUD (Right Answers)
❑ D DHCPy6

address pool (Right

Answers) Answer:

CD

426. How many times is the total length of an IPv6 address the length of an IPv4 address?
❑ A. 4 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 3
❑ C. 5
LI D. 2

Answer: A

427. Which of the following extended headers are supported by IPv6 packets? {Multiple choice)
❑ A. VLAN extension header
❑ B. hop-by-hop option extension header (Right Answers )
❑ C. Destination option extension header (Right Answers )
❑ D. Slice extension header (Right Answers)
Answer: BCD
 428. Which packet does the DHCPv6 server use to reply to Solicit packets?
❑ A. Request
❑ B. Advertise (Right Answers)
❑ C. Offer
❑ D. Reply

Answer: B

429. The MPLS architecture consists of a Control Plane and a Forwarding Plane. The forwarding plane
mainly performs label switching and packet forwarding.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B.

False

Answe

r: A

430. What is the length of the Ethernet_ll frame that contains the Ethernet header?
❑ A. 64-15188 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 60-1560B
❑ C. 64-1500B
❑ D. 46-1500B

Answer: A

431. The Tracert diagnostic tool in Huawei routers uses UDP to encapsulate trace data.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

432. The broadcast address of the subnet 192.168.1.0125 is 192.168.1.128.

❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

433. Which memory saved configuration is used to select VRP version file when the device starts up?
❑ A. NVRAM (Right Answers)
❑ B. SD Card
❑ C. Flash
❑ D. USB

Answer: A
434. Which of the following parameter settings for terminal emulation are correct when configuring
a router through the Console port?
❑ A.9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware flow control.
❑ B.19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control.
❑ C.4800bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no flow control.
❑ D.9600bps; 8 data bits, 1 stop bits; no parity check ; and no flow control. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

435. Which layer of the OSI reference model does the switch work on?
❑ A. Network layer
❑ B. Transport layer
❑ C. Data link layer (Right Answers)
❑ D. Physical layer

Answer: C

436. Which of the following statements about the Alternate port in the RSTP protocol is correct?
❑ A. The Alternate port serves as a backup for the specified port and provides another backup path from the
root bridge to the corresponding network segment.
❑ B. Alternate port forwards user traffic and learns MAC address
❑ C. Alternate port does not forward user traffic but learns MAC address
❑ D. Alternate port provides another switchable path from the designated bridge to the root as the backup port
of the root port (Right Answers )

Answer: D

437. Which of the following port states does the RSTP protocol not include?
❑ A. Discarding
❑ B. Blocking (Right Answers)
❑ C. Learning
❑ D. Forwarding

Answer: B

438. In the RSTP standard, in order to improve the convergence speed, the port directly connected to the
terminal by the switch can be defined as 0.
❑ A. Fast
port O B.
Root port
O C. Edge port (Right
Answers ) O D. Backup
port

Answer: C

439. VRP operating platform, which of the following commands can only view static routes?
❑ A. display ip routing-table verbose
❑ B. display ip routing-table statistics
❑ C. display ip routing-table protocol static (Right Answers)
❑ D. display ip routing-table

Answer: C
 440. Which layer of the OSE reference model does the router work on?
❑ A. Data link layer
❑ B. Network layer (Right Answers)
❑ C. Application layer
❑ D. Transport

layer Answer: B

441. Which of the following description of static and dynamic routing is wrong?
❑ A. Dynamic routing protocols take up more system resources than static routes
❑ B. Static routing is simple to configure and easy to manage when applied in an enterprise.
❑ C. After a link fails, static routes can automatically complete network convergence. (Right Answers )
❑ D. After administrators deploy dynamic routing protocols in the enterprise network, post-maintenance

and expansion can be more convenient. Answer; C

442. Which of the following features does the OSPF protocol have?
❑ A. Easy to generate routing loops
❑ B. Calculate the shortest path in hops
❑ C_ Supporting the division of regions (Right Answers)
❑ D. Poor scalability

Answer: C

443. A router runs OSPF and does not specify a router ID. The P address of all interfaces is as follows. What is
the router ID of the router OSPF protocol?

❑ A. 10.0.12.1
❑ B. 10.0.1.2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 10.0.21.1
❑ D. 10.0.1.1

Answer: B

444. What port number is used by the FTP protocol to control plane?
❑ A. 22
❑ B. 21 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 24
❑ D. 23

Answer: B
445_ An administrator cannot log in to the AR22013 router through Te!net However, other administrators
can log in normally_ Which of the following are possible causes') (Multiple choice)
❑A. The admin user account has been deleted (Right Answers )
❑ B. The admin user account has been disabled (Right Answers)
❑ C The privilege level of the admin user account has been modified to 0
❑0 The Telnet service of the AR2200

router has been disabled. Answer:

AB

446 The Eth-Truk port in manual link aggregation mode, whose transmission rate is related to 0
(Multiple choice)
❑ A. Bandwidth of member ports (Right Answers )
❑ B. Is the member port on the public or private network?
❑ C. is the IP address configured on the member port?
▪ Number of member ports (Right Answers )

Answer: AD

447. As shown in the followteg tigers the ports connected to De host of Switch A and Switch B belong to 10 end
VLAN IC respectively. late port Ape of the switch Is Trunk and the PV1D is to and OIL Which on ale tolowing
statements are 000- 13C,(Mubpla cuotuei

❑ A Host A and host B boke lodifrononl VANS ate cannot ping each cater
❑ e Hoc A and Host B can pas (Right Answers)
❑c Host AS ARP ragtag Gavot ha -forwarded to host B
D. The switch does nce carry as VLMI TAG when forwerding tea frames sent by the host Wight Answer.)

Answo BD

448 The authentication scheme, authorization scheme, accounting scheme, HWTACAGS, or RADIUS server
template created on the AR router can take effect only after it is applied in the domain.
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B.

Fals

Ans

wer:

449. The router can assign a specified INC address to the host through a stateless address
autoconfiguration scheme.
❑ A True
❑ B False (Right Answers)
 Answer: B

450_ Which multicast address is used in OSPFv3 to represent all routers?

❑ A. FF02: 6
❑ B. FF02:.8
❑ C. FF02:5 (Right Answers)
❑ D. FF02:1

Answer: C
451_ The OSPFv3 adjacency can be established only after the IP& address prefixes of the two ends are
the same.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

452. Which of the following IPv6 addresses has a Solicited-node mutticast address of FF02::1 :FF12:12
❑ A. 2020::1200:1
❑ 2019::12:1 (Right Answers )
❑ 201g:112:1000
❑ a 2020:112ABI1

Answer: B

453. Which of the following statements about the Adjacency Segment is wrong?
❑ A. Adjacency Segment is used to identify a certain adjacency of a node in the network_
❑ B. Adjacency Segment is identified by Adjacency Segment ID (STD)
❑ G. Adjacency Sesnent spreads to other network elements through the IGP protocol, which is
globally visible and valid locally.
❑ D. Adjacency Segment must be manually configured (Right Answers)

Answer: ❑

454. What levels are not included in the TCPIIPv4 model? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Session layer (Right Answers )
❑ B. Presentation layer (Right Answers )
❑ C. Network layer
❑ D. Transport layer
❑ E. Application

layer Answer: AB

455. In the OSI reference model, which of the following has the ability to perform end-to-end error
detection and flow control?
❑ A. Physical layer
❑ B. Data link layer
❑ G. Network layer
❑ ID_ Transport layer (Right Answers )

Answer: ❑

456 As shown in the figure, after the network administrator completes the Telnet configuration on the
router, it is found that the host cannot establish a connection with the router through Telnet. Which of
the following options can help solve this problem? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. Check if the switch has a default gateway address configured_

❑ B Use Ping to check the IP connectivity between the host and the router GO/0/0 interface (Right
Answers)
❑ C Check if the Telnet configuration on the router is correct (Right Answers)

❑ 0_ Check if the
host's ARP cache

table overflows

Answer: BC
457. After receiving the BREW set by the TC, the switch running the RSTP protocol clears the MAC address learned
by all ports.
❑ A. True
O B. False (Right

Answers) Answer: B

458. In the RSTP protocol, when the topology is stable, which port roles are in the Discarding state?
(Multiple choice)
❑ A. Backup part (Right Answers)
❑ B. Designated part
❑ C. Alternate port (Right Answers)
❑ D. Root port

Answer: AC

459. Which of the following statement about STP messages is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. During the initialization process; each switch that enables STP protocol actively sends configuration BPDUs.
(Right Answers)
❑ B. When the port is enabled with STP, the switch periodically sends TCN BPDUs from the specified port.
❑ C. The BPDU packet is encapsulated in an Ethernet data frame, and the destination MAC address is a multicast MAC
address. (Right Answers)
❑ D. There are two types of packets in the STP protocol, configure BPDUs and TCN BPDUs. (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

460. What is the value of the Type field in the RSTP configuration BPDUs?
❑ A. Ox01
❑ B. 0x03
❑ C. Ox00
❑ D. 0x02 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

461. Which of the following cases will the switch running RSTP generate a configuration BPDU with TO set?
❑ A. A non-edge port migrates to the Forwarding state (Right Answers)
❑ B. Backup port down
❑ C. Edge port migrates to Forwarding state
❑ D. Edge port migrates to Discarding state

Answer: A

462. Which of the following routing protocols can generate a default route? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. OSPFv3 (Right Answers)
❑ B. Direct
❑ C. OSPF (Right Answers)
❑ D. Static (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD
 463. The router running OSPF first reaches the FULL state, and then performs LSDB synchronization.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

464. As the network shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. The top of the link is the value of
the Cost. What is the path of the RA to the network 10.0.0.8/8?

0 A. 70
0 B. 100
0 60 (Right
Answers)
C.
20
0
D.
Answer: C

465. Which packet does OSPF use to acknowledge received LSU packets?
❑ A. LSACK (Right Answers)
❑ B. LSA
El C.
LSR
❑ D. LSU

Answer: A

466 if the Proto of a routing information in the routing table is OSPF, the priority of this route must be 10.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

467. On the serial interface ; you can configure a static route by specifying the next hop address or
outbound interface.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B.

False

Answer:

A
468 If the network shown in the folbwmg figure is used to make the 1opbacko communication between
Router A and Router B through static routes, which of the folbwing command need to enter on Router A?

❑ A p route-static 1002 2 32 GigabitEthemet 0/0/0

❑ 13_ ip route-static 1002 2 255255 255255 100 12 1
❑a ip route-static 10 02 2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12 2 (Right
Answers)
ip route-static 100220

GigebitEthemet 0/0/0

Answer: C

469. TFTP is based on the TCP protocol.

❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

470. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which of the following statement is correct?
(Multiple choice)

❑ A. The user manually created 4 VLANs. (Right Answers)

❑ B. When the GE0/0/1 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 10, it does not carry the
VLAN TAG_ (Right Answers )
❑ C. When the GEO/0/2 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 20, it carries the VLAN TAG.
❑ D. When the GEO/0/1 port of the switch sends the data frame of VLAN 20, it does

not carry the VLAN TAG. Answer: AB

471. A trunk part and a Hybrid port are handled in the same way when receiving data frames.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer:

A
 472. Which of the following PPPoE messages are sent non-unicast?
❑ A. PADS
❑ B. PADI (Right Answers)
❑ C. PADO
❑ ❑. PADR

Answer:

473. Which of the following fields does the HDLC frame consist of? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Control field (C) (Right Answers)
❑ B. Frame Check Sequence Field (FCS) (Right Answers)
❑ C. Address field (A) (Right Answers)
❑ ❑_ Flag field (F) (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

474_ The following figure shows the encapsulation formal of the data packet n IPsec VPN_ Which
formal is the type of data packet used toencapsulate in IPsec V1417

❑ A. Tunnel mode (Right Answers )

❑ B. Universal mode
❑ C. Transmission mode
❑ ID_ This encapsulation is error

Answer: A

475. Which of the following SNMP messages is sent to the NMS by the agent on the managed device?
❑ A. Gel-Next-Request
❑ B Get-Request
❑ C. Set-Request
❑ ❑. Response (Right Answers)

Answer: ❑
476 The AOL does not filter the traffic that the device itself generates to access other devices. Only the
forwarded traffic is fiItered The forwarded traffic ncludes traffic that other devices access the device.
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B False

Answer: A

477. What is the number range of the Layer 2 ACL?

❑ A. 4000-4999 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 6000-6031
❑ C. 2000-2999
❑ ❑. 3000-3999

Answer: A
 478. Which of the following statement about ilpv6 address configuration is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. IPv6 address supports multiple ways of automatic configuration (Right Answers)
❑ B. IPv6 supports DHCPv6 format for address configuration (Right Answers)
❑ C. IPv6 addresses can only be manually configured.
❑ D. IPv6 supports stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

479. The OSPFv3 protocol itself does not provide authentication.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

480. The Flow Label Field, Source Address Field, and Destination Address field in IPv6 together
specify a forwarding path in the network for a particular data stream. 0 A. True (Right Answers)
D B. False

Answer:

481. Which of the following IPv6 addresses is a multicast address?

❑ A. FF02::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC (Right Answers)
❑ B. FE80::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ C. 2000::2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC
❑ D. FC00.:2E0: FCFF: FEEF: FEC

Answer: A

482. Which technology does the shared medium network use for data forwarding?
❑ A. CDMAtCD (Right Answers)
❑ B. CSMAIAC
❑ C. TDMA/CD
❑ D. CSMA1CD

Answer: A

483. Which of the following IPv4 addresses is a Class A address?

❑ A. 100.1.1.1
❑ B. 172.16.1.1
❑ C. 121.1.1.1 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 192.168.1.1

Answer: C
 484. How many ways does VRP support to configure router? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Configure the router through Telnet (Right Answers)
❑ B. Configure the router through FTP
❑ C. Configure the router through the mini USB port (Right Answers)
❑ D. Configure the router through the console port. (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

485.

The above is the display startup information of the AR2200 router. For this information, which of the
following statements is wrong?
❑ A. The running configuration file is not saved
❑ B. The system file used for starting the device is ar22204200r003c0Ospc200.cc
❑ C. The system file of the next startup of the device can be modified by using the command "startup
system software <atartup-software-name>".
❑ D. The system file cannot be modified when the device starts next time. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

486. In the VRP system, which of the following functions does the Ctrl +Z combination key have?
(Multiple choice)
❑ A. Exit the console interface view.
❑ B. Return to the user view from the system view (Right Answers)
❑ C. Exit interface view
❑ D. Return to the user view from arty view (Right Answers)
❑ E. Exit the current

view Answer: BD

487. Which of the following description of the Forwarding state in the spanning tree protocol is wrong?
❑ A. port in Forwarding state can send BPDUs.
❑ B port in Forwarding state does not learn the source MAC address of the packet. (Right Answers)
❑ C. port in Forwarding state can forward data packets
❑ D. port in Forwarding state can receive BPDUs.

Answer: B

488. The bridge ID of the STP protocol in the switching network is as follows. Which of the following bridge ID
❑ A. 32768
owned by00-01-02 -03
switch -04-AA
will become the root bridge?
❑ B. 32768 00-01-02 -03 -04-BB
❑ C. 32768 00-01-02 -03-04-CC

❑ D. 4096 00-01-02-03-04-DD (Right Answers)

Answer: D
489. The RSTP protocol uses the PIA mechanism to speed up the speed at which the upstream port goes to the
Forwarding state, but the loop is not available, what is the reason?
❑ A. Introduced edge ports
❑ B. Shortened the time of Forward Delay
❑ C. Ensure that loops do not occur by blocking its own non-root ports (Right Answers)
❑ D. Speed up the port role election

Answer: C

490. Which of the following statement about the dynamic MAC address table is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The interface learns by using the source MAC address in the packet. The entry
can be aged. (Right Answers) CI B. Dynamic entries are lost after system reset, hot
swappable interface board, or interface board reset
❑ C. can obtain the number of users communicating on the interface by viewing the number of
dynamic MAC address entries. (Right Answers) O D. The saved entries are not lost after the system
reset, hot swappable interface board, or interface board reset. (Right Answers)

Answer, ACD

491. Which of the following protocols is dynamic IGP routing protocol?

❑A. Static
❑ B. BGP
❑ C. OSPF (Right Answers)
❑ D. Direct

Answer:

492. The router needs to modify the destination IP address in the data packet when forwarding the data
packet.
❑ A. True
El B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

493. route-static 10.0.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.0.12.2 preference 20, which of the following
statement about this command is correct?
❑ A. The route must appear in the routing table.
❑ B. The destination network of the route is 10.0.12.2/32
❑ C. The priority of this route is 100.
❑ ID. The mask length of the route destination network is 32 bits. (Right Answers)

Answer:

494. Which of the following statement about the OSPF protocol DR is correct?
❑ A. DR must be the highest priority device in the network
❑ B. DR election is preemptive
❑ C. Router ID. The larger the value, the higher the priority is elected as DR.
❑ D. An interface priority is 0, and then the interface cannot be a DR (Right Answers )

Answer: D
 495_ Which of the following statement about the priority of static routes in Huawei devices is incorrect?
❑ A. The default value of static route priority is 60.
❑ B. The priority value of the static route is 255, indicating that the route is unavailable.
❑ G. The static route priority value ranges from 0 to 255. (Right Answers)
❑ 0. The priority of static routes is divided into internal priority and external priority. Administrators

can modify external priority Answer: C

496_ The router starts the FTP service_ The username and password are both huawei, and the root
directory of the FTP is set to flash,/dhcp/. Which of the following commands must be configured?
(Multiple choice)
❑ A. local-user huawei password cipher huawei (Right Answers)
❑ B. lip sewer enable (Right Answers)
❑ G. local-user huawei service-type lip (Right Answers)
❑ B_ focal-user huawei flp-

directory flash:/dhcp/ (Right

Answers ) Answer: ABCD

497 The priority of the LAGP protocol is as shown in the figure. Switch A and Switch B adopt link aggregation
in LAGP mode, and all interfaces loin the link aggregation group. The maximum number of active ports is set
to 3. Which port of
switch A is not the active port?

❑ A. G0/0/2
❑11 GO/0/3 (Right Answers)
❑ a GO/0/0
❑ D. GO/0/1

Answer: B

498. If an Ethernet data frame has LengthiType=0x8100, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. This data frame must carry VLAN TAG (Right Answers)
❑ B. The TCP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.
❑ C. The UDP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.
❑ ❑. The IP header must exist in the upper layer of this data frame.

Answer: A

49.9. Which of the fat/owing description about the trunk port and the Access port is correct?
❑ A. The Trunk port can only send tagged frames.
❑ B. The Trunk port can only send untagged frames.
❑ C- The Access port can only send tagged frames.
❑ ❑- The Access part can only send untagged frames. (Right

Answers) Answer: ❑

500 As shown In the following figure, Switch A -and Router Aare connected through two Inks_ The two links ere in
the manual ead balancing made The a/minimal ion pert number is I, and the data is forwarded through the
aggregation {ink which needs to carry VLAN TAG 100, which configuration does Router A need to use? (Mottfpla
choice)

❑ A interlace Elh-Tuenskl port tune, pert trunk Wow-pass vlan 100$ interface GigabilEllownatCgatt
athttrunk 1 g interlace Gigab0Elharnet0.0/2 athdrunk 1 a
❑ B. interlace Eth-Trunkl undo ponswitch # interface Elh-Trunki.100 dolgiemitnation red 100 to address
10.0.12.2255.255.255 0 arp broadcast enable -et (Right An...re 7
El C. inlerfeee Eds.Trunkl mode lamp-sleet port tinkeype trued( port think eked
pass vtan 1004 tri.rface GtgabdEthanialtlf0f1 att,lrunk 1 u interface
GgebilEthernetc/0,2 ath.lrunk I a Et G. interface 0mabilEtheroato221 ant-trunk t
0 Interlace GigabrtElhernet0312 elh-trunk I tl (Right Answers)

Answer. BB
501_ Which of the following functions are supported by the LCP protocol in the PPP protocol? {Multiple
choice)
❑ A. Negotiate the maximum receiving unit MRU (Right Answers )
❑ B. Negotiate the authentication protocol (Right Answers)
❑ C. Negotiate the network layer address
❑ D. Detect link loops (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD
502 A company has 50 private IP addresses. The administrator uses NAT technology to connect the company
network to the public network_ However, the company has only one public network address_ Which of the
following NAT conversion methods meets the requirements,
❑ A easy-ip (Right Answers)
❑ NAPT
❑ G Dynamic conversion
❑ a Static conversion)

Answer: A

503 As shown in the figure, there is a Web server in the private network that needs to provide HTTP services to
public network users. Therefore, the network administrator needs to configure NAT on the gateway muter RTA
to implement the requirements. Which of the following configuration can meet the requirements,

❑ A [RTA-Serm11/0/1Inat server protocol top gbbal 202 10.101 wnw inside 192.168.1.1 8080 (Right Answers)
❑ [RTA-Senal1/0/1]na1 server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 20210_101 8080
❑ G [RTA-Gmabitetherne10/0/1]nat server protocol top global 20210.101 WNW inside 192_168 1_1 8080
❑ El_ [RTA-Gmabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol top global 192168_11 anew inside 20210101 8080

Answer: A

504 When deploying an ACL on a Huawei device, which of the following description is correct? (Whale
choice)
❑ k When AGLs define rules, they can only be advanced in the order of 10, 20, and 30
❑ B. The same ACL can be calked under mufti& interfaces (Right Answers)
❑ C. Can only be applied to the outbound direction when the ACL is called an the interface.
❑ D. AGLs cannot be used to filter OSPF traffic because OSPF traffic is not encapsulated using UDP
protocol.
❑ E. The AGL can match the TGP/UDP port number of the packet, and can specify the range of the port
number. (Right Answers)

Answer: BE

505. Which of the following message types does RADIUS use t❑ indicate authentication rejection?
❑ A. Access-Reject (Right Answers)
❑ B. Access-Request
❑ G. Access-Challenge
❑ D. Access-

Accept Answer:

506. Which authentication modes does AAA support on Huawei AR G3 series routers? (Multiple
choice)
❑ A. 802.1x
❑ B. None (Right Answers)
❑ C. HWTACACS (Right Answers )
❑ D. Local (Right

Answers ) Answer: BCD

507 if the maximum number in Ihe ACL rule is 12, by default, when the user configures a
new rule without specifying a number, what is the number assigned In the new rule by the
system?
❑ A 14
❑ B. 16
❑ C. 15 (Right Answers)

❑ D. 13

Answer: C
508. If two IPsec VPN peers want to use both AH and ESP to ensure secure communication, how many SAs
(Security Associations) do the two peers need to build?
❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
0 C. 3
❑ D. 4 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

509. DHCPve belongs to a stateful address autoconfiguration protocol.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
O B. False

Answer: A

510. The DHCPv6 server includes the management address configuration flag (M) in the RA message. If the
value is 1, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A. Indicates that the client enables DHCPv6 stateful address configuration. (Right Answers )
❑ B. Indicates that the client needs to obtain other network configuration parameters through stateless DHCPv6.
❑ C. Indicates that the client enables IPv6 stateless address automatic allocation scheme
❑ D. Indicates that the client needs to cbtain other network configuration parameters through stateful DHCPv6.

Answer: A

511. In the OSI reference model, which of the following has the ability to perform end-to-end error detection and
flow control?
❑ A. Transport layer (Right Answers)
❑ B. Network layer
❑ C. Data link
layer O D.
Physical layer

Answer: A

512. After application data is processed through the data link layer, what does it call?
❑ A. Segment
❑ B. PDU
❑ C. Frame (Right Answers )
❑ D. Packet

Answer:

513.<Huawei>system-view
[Huawei] user-interface
console 0
[Huawei-ui-console0] history-command max-size 20
Regarding the above configuration, which of the following statement is correct?
O A. history-command max-size 20 is to adjust the size of the history command cache to 20 (Right
Answers)
❑ B. The default size of the history command cache is 5
❑ C. The default size of the history command cache is 5 bytes.
❑ D. After the above configuration is completed, the history command cache can save 20 bytes

of commands. Answer: A
514. What is the destination MAC address of the BPDU in the STP protocol?
❑ A. 01-80-C2-04-05-06
❑ B. FF -F-F- -F
- -F- -F-F- -F-F
- - FF
❑ C. 00-80-C2-00-00-00
❑ D. 01 -8-0- -C-2
- -0
- -0- -0-0- 00 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

515. As shown in the figure, if the switch runs STP with default parameters, which of the following ports will be
elected as the designated port?

El

O A. GO/0/1 port of Switch A (Right Answers)

❑ B. G0/0/2 port of switch A
❑ C. HUB's E0/0/2 port
❑ D. HUB's E0/0/1 port

Answer: A

516. The router has the longest matching principle when looking up the routing table. Which of the
following parameter is the length?
❑ A. The size of the NextHoplP address
❑ B. Priority of the routing protocol
❑ C. Cost
❑ D. The length of the mask (Right Answers)

Answer: D

517. Which packet does OSPF use to describe its own LSDB?
❑ A. LSR
❑ B. HELLO
❑ C. DD (Right Answers)
❑ D. LSU

Answer:

518. HhaweiGigabitEthernet0/011 ] port link-type

access [Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] port default
vlan 10 [Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] port link-type
trunk
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/012] port trunk allow-pass vlan 10
According to the command shown above, which of the following descriptions is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/2 port is 1. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The PVID of GigabitEthernet010/2 port is 10
❑ C. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port is 1.
❑ D. The PVID of GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port is 10. (Right Answers)

Answer: AD
519 As shown in the foleiving gap-AM. Nye switches are connected through four links COPPER refers mine
efectneall interfacs, and FISH refers m the optical interlace. Which oil the foilanng Iva interfaces can implement
link aggregation,

Lff A1001013 and FEC/I0I3

El 0 0010 3 and 00/13/2
❑ C 001012 end FE0/0/3
n 0. 0010:2 and

001011 (Right

gnawers)

Answer. Li

520 if a rmsanys network administrator wants to divide users who frequently change office locations and °flan
access different nahvorks from tie conch to be cotporata nalwisair to MANIC, which of the following methods
should Ice used to diridaVLAkts?
'LI A drvide MAN based on protocol
:11 d. dads ?DUI based on
MAC address (Right
Answers) D C divide
VLAN based on Port
71 0 diode WAN

based an grlanals

Answer= ft

521. Which two stages can the PPPoE session establishment process be divided into? (Multiple
choice) O A. PPP connecting stage
❑ B. Discovery stage (Right Answers)
O C. PPPoE Session stage (Right Answers)
O D. DHCP stage

Answer: BC

522 IOTA] aaa

IRTA-aaal domain Huawei
[RTA-aaa-domain-Huawei] authentication-scheme alt
]RTA-aaa-domain-Huawei] authentication-scheme au2
The network administrator performs the above configuration on the Huawei router RTA. If a
user needs to be authenticated in the authentication domain "Huawei", which of the following
description is correct? CI A will use "authentication-scheme all" authentication, if "aul" is
deleted, "au2" authentication will be used
❑ B will use "authentication-scheme au2" authentication, if "au2" is deleted, "aul" authentication will
be used
❑ C Will use the "authentication-

scheme 002" authentication (Right

Answers ) CI B. Will use the
"authentication-scheme out"
authentication

Answer: C

523. Huawei ARG3 series routers enable all versions of SNMP (SNMPvl, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3) by
default. O A. True (Right Answers)
El B. False
 Answer: A

524. Which of the following encapsulation modes does lPsec VPN support? (Multiple
choice) O A. Tunnel mode (Right Answers)
O B. Exchange mode
O C. Transmission mode (Right Answers)
O D. Routing mode

Answer: AC

525 Two authentication domains "Area I" and "Area 2" are configured on a router Mel serves as the
authentication server. FM:tit.er arrgentrealm wrIf the correct usemamelivatwer" and passauml "heir Wrieh
authunlicalon Wraith wig the 0...signed to?
D A. Authentication domain 'Areal"
▪ 0 Aurvenhcalion domain 'Area?"
❑ C Authenticalsn domain 1default_admin domain"
❑ 0 Authentication Minim "defaull domain" (Right Answers)

Maw, 0
526. If the EUI-64 address 78BC-FEFF-FFFE-EFAB is calculated based on the MAC address, what should its corresponding
MAC address be?
❑ A. 7ABC-FEFE-EFAB (Right Answers)
❑ B. 78BC-FFFE-EFAB
❑ C. 7ABC-FFFE-EFAB
❑ D. 78BC-FEFE-EFAB

Answer: A

527. The DHCPv6 client must obtain both IPv6 addresses and another configuration information from
the DHCPv6 server.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

528. When the network device sends the IPv6 packet, the packet length is compared with the NTU
value. If the value is greater than the MTU value, the packet is directly discarded.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

529. The output information of the router interface is as follows. Which mufticast address data can the interface receive?
(Multiple choice)

❑ A. FF02::2 (Right Answers)

❑ B. FF02::1: FF12:1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. FF02::1: FF6FAF36 (Right Answers)
❑ D. FF02::1 (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

530. Which of the following statement about the IPv6 anycast address is correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. The packet whose destination address is anycast address will be sent to the network interface in the meaning of the
route. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Implement load sharing of services (Right Answers)
❑ C. Provide redundancy for services (Right Answers)
❑ D. Anycast address and unicast address use the same address space (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

531. The MPLS label header is encapsulated between the data link layer header and the network layer
header of the message.
❑ A. True (Right Answers )
❑ B. False

Answer: A
532. When using the Traced program to test the path through which the target node passes, the
default TTL value for Traceroute is measured 0 times.
❑ A.3 (Right Answers)
❑ fr 8
❑ fr 6
❑ D.4

Answer: A

533. Which of the following description of the role of the free ARP message is wrong?
❑ A Used to advertise the active/standby switchover in the VRRP backup group.
❑ B Used to advertise a new current AC address_ The sender replaces the NIC and the AC address
changes. In order to notify all hosts before the AP entry ages, the sender can send a free ARP_
❑ G Used to check duplicate IP addresses. Nommlly, no ARP response will be received. If received, it
indicates that there is an address in the network that is duplicated with its own IP address.
❑ 0 Free ARP packets are used to keep active with the gateway device when the host is idle. (Right
Answers )

Answer: 0

534. Which of the following statement about the ARP message is wrong?
❑ A. The ARP reply message is sent by the unicast party.
❑ B. Any network device needs to obtain the data link layer identifier by sending ARP packets. (Right
Answers)
❑ C. ARP request message is sent by broadcast
❑ ID ARP packets cannot traverse the router and cannot be forwarded to other broadcast domains.

Answer: B

535. Using the command mkdir test in the VRP operating platform, the system will create a folder
named test.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

536 When the switch receives a unicast data frame, it will look up the destination MAC address in the
MAC table. Which of the following statement is wrong?

❑ A. If the MAC address is found, and the corresponding port of the MAC address in the MAC address
table is not the one that enters the switch, the switch performs the forwarding operation
❑ B If the MAC address is found, and the corresponding port of the MAC address in the MAC
address table is the port that the frame enters the switch, the switch performs the discard
operation
❑ C. If the MAC address is not found, the switch performs the flooding operation_
❑ D. tf the MAC address is not found, the switch

performs the discard operation. (Right Answers)

Answer: 0

537. The default route can be derived from (). (Multiple choice)
❑ A Manua[ configuration (Right Answers)
❑ B. Dynamic routing protccof generation (Right Answers)
❑ G. The router itself has
❑ a Link layer protocol

generation Answer: AB
538. Which of the following packets belong to the OSPF protocol? (Multiple choice)
❑A. LSU (Right Answers)
❑ B. LSA
❑ C. LSR (Right Answers)
❑D. HELLO (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

539. On the broadcast network, both the DR and the BDR use the mutticast address 224.0.0.6 to
receive the link status update packet. 0 A. True (Right Answers)
0 B. False

Answer:

540. As shown in the following figure, all routers run OSPF. Which device is ABR? (Multiple choice)

❑ A. Router B (Right Answers)

❑ B. Router D
❑ C. Router C
❑ D. Router A (Right

Answers) Answer: AD
541. The output information of a switch is as follows. Which of the following interfaces can forward
data frames with a VLAN ID of 40 and does not carry labels when forwarding?

❑ A. GEO/0/4
❑ B. GEO/0/2
❑ C. GEO/0/3
❑ D. GEO/0/5

(Right Answers)

Answer: D

542. As shown in the figure, which of the following configuration of the VLAN on the Huawei switch is correct?
(Multiple choice)

❑ A. Clientl belongs to VLAN 10, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct. (Right
Answers)
❑ B. Client2 belongs to VLAN 20, and the command for dividing VLAN based on MAC address on the switch
is correct. (Right Answers)
❑ C. Client3 belongs to VLAN 30, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct.
❑ D. Client4 belongs to VLAN 40, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is correct.
❑ E. Client4 does not belong to VLAN 40, and the command for dividing VLAN on the switch is incorrect.
(Right Answers)

Answer: ABE

543. In the link aggregation technology, which parameters can the Eth-Trunk use to implement load
balancing? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. Same source IP address or destination IP address (Right Answers)
❑ B. Same source port number or destination port number
❑ C. Same source MAC address or destination MAC address (Right Answers )
❑ D. The same protocol type
Answer: AC
 544. The Truk port can allow multiple VLANs to pass, including VLAN4096.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

545 As shown in the figure, the administrator wants all hosts to access the Tnternet from 8.00 to
17- 00 every day. In the interface configuration of GO/0/l, h h AGL rule should be bound to traffic-
filter outbound?

❑A time-range am9topm5 08- 00 to 11:00 working-day # acl number 2003 rule 5 deny time-range
am9topm5
❑ B time-range am91opm5 08:00 to 17:00 daily # acl number 2002 rule 5 permit time-range an-
e1opm5 #
❑ C. lime-range amgtopm5 08_00 to 17:00 daily # acl number 2001 rule 5 deny time-range
am9topm5 # (Right Answers )
❑D. time-range am9topm5 08:00 to 17-00 off-day

# acl number 2004 rule 5 permit time-range

am91opm5 Answer: C

546. The router output information is as follows. What is the IPv6 address obtained by this interface?

❑ A. 3000::3000/64
❑ B. 3000::1/64
❑ C_ 3000::2/64 (Right Answers)
❑ D_ 2000::1/64

Answer: C

54T Which of the following features is no longer supported by ❑SPFv3 on an EPv6 network?
❑ A. Router-1D
❑ B. Multi-regional division
❑ C_ Authentication function (Right Answers )
❑ D_ Send protocol packets in mutticast

mode Answer: C
 548. Which packet is sent by the DHCF've client in response to the Advertise packet sent by the DHCPv€
sewer?
❑ A. Offer
❑ B. Request (Right Answers)
❑ G. Reply
❑ D Advertise

Answer:
B

549 The configuration information of a routers [MGM address pool is as folbws if the host adopts [MGM
doleful autoconfiguration, which IPM addresses can the host obtain? (Multiple choice) dhcps6 pod test
address prefix 3000:164
excluded-address 3000:1
dns-server 2000:1
dns-domain-name huawei dns-domain-name huawercom

❑A 30002/64 (Right Answers)

❑ 13- 30900/64
❑ C 3000.3000/64 (Right Answers)
❑ 0 2000- 1/64

Answer: AC

550 Segment Routing (SR) is a protocol for extending the existing IGla protocol, based on the MPLS
protocol, using source routing technology to forward data packets on the network_
❑ A_ True (Right Answers)

▪ False

Answ

er: A

551 if the routers Ethernet interface needs to forward a 1600B packet, which of the fallowing statement is
correct? (Multiple choice)
❑ A The value of the Flags field of the first packet is 1 (Right Answers )
❑ B The first message contains the payload 14808 (Right Answers )
❑ G The slice offset field value of the second fragmented packet is 1480 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The value of the Flags field of the second packet is a

Answer: ABC

552. There is a TTL field in the header of the 1P packet. Which of the following statement about this field is
correct?
❑ A. This field is used to indicate the priority of the packet.
❑ B. The length of this field is 7 digits.
❑ C. This field is used for packet anti-ring. (Right Answers)
❑ D. This field is used for packet fragmentation.

Answer:
C

553. After the network administrator uses the TracedRoute function on the router device, what is the
value of the Protocol field of the IPv4 header in the data packet sent by the router?
❑ A 6
❑ B.1 (Right Answers)
❑ C.17
▪ 2

Answer:
554 As shown in the following figure, host C is ony required to communicate with one of host A or host B_
Then, which Gourmand can be configured to implement the requirement under the G0/013 port of SWB?

❑ A mtu 2000
❑ B port link-type trunk
❑ C speed 100
▪ mac-limit maximum 1

(Right Answers)

Answer: 0

555_ As shown in the following figure, the MAC address table of the SWA is as follows. The h can
never learn the MAC address of the HOST A Which of the following reasons not possible,

❑ A HOST A did not send any data frames

❑B The GO/0/1 port of the switch is set to ACCESS mode (Right
Answers )
❑ C_ The MAC address learning function is disabled on GO/0/1 of the
switch.
❑0. Turn off the MAC address learning

function of the LAN to which HOST A

belongs. Answer. B

556 The network administrator finds that a port on the switch has learned the MAC address,
but cannot forward the data frame. Which of the following working states is the port in?
❑ A Disabled
❑ B Blocking
❑ C Listening
❑ D Learning

(Right

Answers)

Answer,

557_ As shown in the following figure, host A does not have a gateway configured_ Host B has a gateway
ARP cache. In host A, the command ping 110 12_1 is used. Which of the following statement is correct?

❑ A The destination MAC address of the data frame sent by Host A is MAC-
B.
❑ B The destination MAC address of the
data frame sent by Host A is MAC-A. 0
C_ The destination IP address of the
packet sent by host A is 11 0.12.1.
❑ 0_ No packets will be sent from host A (Right Answers)

Answer: 0

558. In Huawei AR routers, what is the default OSPF priority value?

❑ A. 20
❑ B. 10 (Right Answers )
❑ a 30
❑ ❑_ 0

Answer: B
559. When configuring a static route on a broadcast interface, you must specify the next hop address.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

560. In the OSPF broadcast network, which routers do the DR other routers exchange link state
information with? (Multiple choice)
❑ A. DR (Right Answers)
❑ B. BDR (Right Answers)
❑ C. All OSPF neighbors
❑ D. DR Other

Answer, AB

561. What is the value of the direct routing protocol priority?

❑ A. 0 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 30
❑ C. 10
❑ D. 20

Answer: A

562. The configuration information of the GO/0/1 port of the switch is as follows. Which VLAN data frame
does the switch forward not carry the VLAN TAG? interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port link-type
trunk port
trunk pvid vlan
10
port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 20 30 40

❑ A. 10 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 30
0 C. 40
❑ D. 20

Answer: A

563. Referring to the following topology and configuration. routers Ri and R2 are connected through a Serial low-
speed cable, and the data link layer encapsulation uses PPP. When the Holdtimes of Ri and R2 are inconsistent,
PPP negotiation fails and communication cannot be performed.

C A True
C B False

(Right

Answers)
Answer: B
564. PPP is more secure and reliable than HDLC because PPP supports (). (Multiple choice)
❑ A. SSH B. PAP C. MD5 D.

CHAP Answer: BD

565. The configuration information of GO/0/1 interface of Router A is as follows. Which of the following
statements are correct? (Multiple Choice) acl number 3000
rule 5 deny 17
rule 10 deny 89
rule 15 deny 6

interface
GigabitEthernet0/0/1
traffic-filter inbound
acl 3000

❑ A. This interface does not forward ICMP packets.

❑ B. This interface does not forward received SNMP packets. (Right Answers)
❑ C. This interface does not forward received FTP packets. (Right Answers)
❑ D. This interface can establish OSPF neighbor relationships with other routers.

Answer: BC

566. Layer 2 ACL can match source MAC, destination MAC, source IP; and destination IP, etc. information.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

567. What is the value of the protocol type field in the FP packet, indicating that the protocol is GRE?
❑ A. 47 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 48
❑ C. 2
❑ D. 1

Answer: A

568. OSPFv2 supports lPv6 by adding new types of LSAs.

❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
569. Which of the following parts does the global unicast address consist of? (Multiple
Choice) El A. Protocol ID
❑ B. Interface ID (Right Answers)
❑ C. Subnet ID (Right Answers)
❑ D. Global Routing Prefix (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

570. The output information of Router C is as follows. How many global unicast address prefixes does Router C
advertise?

❑ A. 1
❑ B. 2
❑ C. 3 (Right Answers)
❑ D. 4

Answer: C

571. What are the values of the currently used IPv6 multicast address flag field (Flag)? (Multiple
Choice)
❑ A. 0 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2
❑ D. 3

Answer: AB

572. Which of the following statements about the TTL field in the IP packet header is correct?
❑ A. Whenever a IP packet passes through a router, its TTL value is decremented by 1. (Right
Answers)
❑ B. Whenever a IP packet passes through a router, its TTL value will be increased by 1.
❑ C. TTL defines the time interval at which the source host can send packets.
❑ D. TTL defines the number of packets that the source host can

send. Answer: A
 573. Which of the following is not included in the VRP system login method?
❑ A. Telnet
❑ B. SSH
❑ C_ Netstream (Right Answers)
❑ D. Web

Answer:

574. Which of the following information is used to prompt by the VRP operating platform for incomplete
input commands?
❑ A. Error: Wrong parameter found at w position
❑ B. Error: Incomplete command found at wposition (Right Answers)
❑ G_ Error. Too many parameters found at w position
❑ D. Error Ambiguous command found at "'position

Answer: B

575. Which of the following descriptions about the specified port of the spanning tree is correct?
❑ A. The part en the root switch must not be the designated port.
❑ B. The designated port can forward configuration BPDUs to the network segment connected to it.
(Right Answers)
❑ G. Each switch has only one designated purl
❑ D. Specify the porno forward configuration BPDUs from this switch to the root switch.

Answer: B

576 Which of the following statements about the handling of RSTP configuration BPDU are correct? (Multiple
Choice)
❑ A After the topology is stable, the non-root bodge device sends configuration BPDUs at the interval
specified by the Hello timer, regardless of whether the configuration BPDUs are received from the root
bodge_ (Right Answers)
❑ B After the topology is stable, the non-root bridge demo sends the configuration BPDU after receiving the
configuration BPDU sent by the upstream device.
❑ C The root port must wait for the BPDU Max Age timeout to re-top the topology calculation.
❑ 0 When a port receives a sub-optimal RST BPDU from the upstream designated bridge, the port
immediately responds to its stored RST BPDU, (Right Answers )

Answer: AD

577. Which of the following statements are incorrect? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. By default, the order of route priorities is that direct routes are higher than OSPF.
❑ B. In VRP, the greater the priority value of the routing protocol, the higher the priority of the route_
(Right Answers )
❑ C. The priority of each static route can be different
❑ D. If the cost of the route is larger, the higher the priority of the route. (Right Answers )

Answer: BD

578 Which of the following descriptions are incorrect about the OSPF Router ID? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The prerequisite for the normal operation of OSPF protocol is that the router has a router ID_
❑ B. The router ID must be the LP address of an interface of the router. (Right Answers)
❑ G. The router ID must be specified by manual configuration. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router Ins must be the same in the same area. The router Ins in different areas can be
different. (Right Answers )

Answer: BCD

579 When a router forwards a packet, if it does not match the corresponding detail route and there is
no default route, the router will discard the packet directly.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B.

False

Answ

er: A
580 After the administrator successfully logs in to the router through Telnet, it is found that the IP address of
the interface can not be configured on the muter. So what is the possible reason?
❑ A SNMP parameter configuration error
❑ B The Telnet terminal software used by the administrator prohibits the corresponding operation.
❑ C The Telnet user level is incorrectly configured (Right Answers)
❑ 0 The authentication mode of the Telnet user is incorrectly configured.

Answer: C

581 In the network shown in the following figure, the switch uses the VLANIF interface to connect to the sub-
interface of the muter. Which of the following configurations can fulfill this requirement?

111

❑ A interface Mandl° ip address 100 12 1 255255 255 0 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type hybrid
pod hybrid untag Nan 10 #
❑ B interface Vbnif10 ip address 100.121 255 255 255.0 # interface GigabitEtherneto/0/2 pod link-type access
pod default Nan 10 #
❑ C interface Vlanifl D ip address 10 0 12 1 255 255.255.0 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk
pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 # (Right Answers)
❑ 0 interface Vbnif10 ip address 10 a12:1 255 255 2550 # interface GigabilEthernet0/0/2 pod link-type trunk pod
trunk pvid 10 pod trunk allow-pass Nan 10 #

Answer: C

582. If an Ethernet data frame Lengthrrype=0)(8100, which of the following ports might this data
frame be sent from? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Switch Hybrid type port (Right Answers)
❑ B. Switch Access type port
❑ C. Serial interface of the router
❑ D. Switch Trunk type port (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

583 As shown in the figure, the two ports of switch GE0/0/1 and GEO/0/2 perform different Hybrid
configurations. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑A. The data frame sent by the finance department carries the tag in the switch as VLAN20. (Right
Answers)
❑ B. The administrative department and the finance department cannot visit each other because the
VLANs belonging to the two depadments are different.
❑ C. If both ports GEO/0/1 and GEO/0/2 of the switch are modified to be trunk pods, the two
departments can communicate normally.
❑ 0 The data frame sent by the administrative department carries the tag in the switch as VLAN20
❑E The switch here can be a Layer 2 switch or a Layer 3 switch because

communication does not need to go through a Layer 3 gateway (Right Answers)

Answer: AE

584 In the LPP negotiation phase of lhe PPP protocol, if the parameters sent by the other
party are completely accepted, which of the following packet will be sent?
❑ Configure-Reject
❑ B. Configure-Ark (Right Answers )
❑ C. Configure-Request
❑ Configure-
Nak

Answer:

B
585 As shown in the following figure, which of the following configurations can be used to make Host
A and Host B unable to communicate with each other? (Multiple Choice)

▪ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100 0 12_0 0 0 0255 # interface GmabitEthernet0.10/3
traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑ B_ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100.0.120 0.0 0255 # interface GigabitEthemet0/0/1
traffic-filter outbound net 2000 # (Right Answers )
❑ C_ acl number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100 0.12 0 0.0.0255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 #
❑fr act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000.120 0.0.0_255 # interface

GigabitEthernet0/0/2 traffic-liter inbound eel 2000 # (Right Answers) Answer:

BB

586. The output information of Router C is as follows: what is the source IPv6 address of Router C sending
OSPFv3 LSU packets?

111

❑ A. 2603:1/64
❑ B. FE80::2E0:FGFEFE48:4EC8 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2005: 1/64
❑ 0. 2009-1/64

Answer: B

587. Which of the following message types is used for the RA message that is used for IPv6 stateless
autoconfiguration?
❑ A. IGIv1Pv6
❑ El I Clv1Pv5 (Right Answers)
❑ C. UPv5
❑ D.

TCPv6

Answer:
 B

588 The FEC (Forwarding Equivalence Class) is a set of data streams with but cannot be divided according to
certain commonalities; the FEC can be divided according to the add
❑ A True the service type, CloS, etc.
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
589 Which statement is correct about the function of the network layer in the 081 reference model?
111 A. The closest layer to the user in the OSI reference model, providing network services for
applications
❑ B Transmit bitstreams between devices, specifying levels, speed, and cable pins
O C. Provide connection-oriented or non-connection-oriented
data transfer and error detection before retransmission 0 a
Provide a logical address for the router to determine the path
(Right Answers)
❑ E. Combine the bits into bytes, combine the bytes into frames, use the link layer address (the
Ethernet uses the MAC address) to access the medium, and perform error detection.

Answer: D

590 UDP does not guarantee the reliability of data transmission_ It does not provide functions such as packet
sorting and flow control. It is suitable for traffic with low transmission reliability requirements but high
transmission speed and delay. El A True (Right Answers)
❑ B False

Answer: A

591. If the application layer protocol is Millet; what is the value of the Protocol field in the IPA
header?
❑ A. 17
❑ B. 67
E C. 53
❑ D. 6 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

592. The MAC address table of the existing switch is as follows. The switch receives a data frame with a
source MAC address of 5489-9811-0b49 and a destination MAC address of 5489-989d-I d30. Which of the
following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

111

0 A. If this data frame is received from

Eth0/0/1, the switch will discard this data
frame (Right Answers) 0 B If the data frame is
received from Eth0/0/1, the switch forwards
the data frame from the Eth0/0/3 port. 0 C If
the data frame is meowed from Eth0/0/1, the
switch floods the data frame.
❑ D If the data frame is received from the Eth0/0/3 pod, the switch forwards the data frame from the
Eth0/01 port (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

593. SWA and SWB run the RSTP protocol. Which of the fo[lowing statements are correct? (Muth*
Choice)
❑ A. The G01013 port of SWA is the designated port. (Right Answers )
❑ B. The GO/0/3 port of SWB is the alternate port. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The G0/0/3 port of SWB is the Backup part.
❑ D. The G01012 part of SWA is the designated part. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD
594. On the VRP platform, what is the order of the default protocol priorities of direct route, static route,
RIP, and OSPF from high to low?
❑ A. Direct route, OSPF, static route, RIP (Right Answers)
❑ B. Direct route, OSPF, RIP, static route
❑ C. Direct route, RIP, static route, OSPF
❑ D. Direct route, static route,

RIP, OSPF Answer: A

595. As shown in the following figure, assume that all routers run OSPF at the same time. Which
router is the DR in this network?

❑ A. Router A
❑ B. Router B (Right Answers )
❑ C. Router C
❑D. Router

ID

Answer:

596. The OSPF router ID must be the same as the IP address of an interface on the router.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right

Answers) Answer: B

597. What are the functions of OSPF hello packets? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Publish parameter information such as Router ED and Router Priority. (Right Answers)
❑ B. Synchronous router LSDB
❑ C. Neighbor discovery (Right Answers)
❑ D. Maintaining neighbor relationships (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD
 598. By default, what is the OSPF protocol Deadtime on the broadcast network?
❑ A. 20s
❑ B. 40s (Right Answers)
❑ C. lOs
❑ D. 30s

Answer: B

599. When two OSPF routers form a TWO-WAY neighbor relationship, the LSDB has completed
synchronization, but the SPF algorithm has not been run.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right

Answers)

Answer: B

600. Which of the following protocol does not belong to the File Transfer protocol?
❑ A. TFTP
❑ B. HTTP (Right Answers)
❑ C. FTP
❑ D. SFTP

Answer: B

601. Which of the following is correct about the VLANIF interface?

❑ A. The VLANIF interface does not need to learn the MAC address.
❑ B. Different VLANIF interfaces can use the same IP address.
❑ C. The VLANIF interface does not have a MAC address.
❑ D. The VLANIF interface is a Layer 3 interface. (Right Answers)

Answer: D

602. The rule for creating a VLAN on a Huawei switch is that VLAN4095 cannot be created and VLAN
1 cannot be deleted.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
603. As shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows. Which of the
following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice) interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 20
port hybrid untagged vlan 10 20

interface
GigabitEtherneto/0/2
port hybrid pvid vlan
10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10 20

❑ A. Host A and Host B can ping each other. (Right Answers)

❑ B. Data frames on both links do not contain VLAN TAG (Right Answers)
❑ C. Host A and Host B cannot ping
❑ D. The PVID of the port GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 is 20 (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

604. Which of the following protocol does the PPP protocol consist of? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Certification Agreement (Right Answers)
❑ B. NCP (Right Answers)
❑ C. LCP (Right Answers)
❑ D. PPPOE

Answer: ABC

605. Which of the following value is used in the Protocol field in the PPP frame to indicate that the
core is an IP packet?
❑ A. 0x8821
❑ B. 0x0021 (Right Answers)
❑ C. Ox8021
❑ D. 0x8863

Answer: B
606 As shown in the following figure, ail the hosts can communicate
with host C through which of the following configuration? But host A
and host B cannot communicate.

❑ A_ acl number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98d3-104d #

interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter inbound eel 4000
❑ B. eel number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-93ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98c0-550e #
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filler inbound eel 4000 4 (Right Answers)
❑ C act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-98c0-550e #
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound eel 4000
❑ B. act number 4000 rule 5 deny destination-mac 5489-98ea-4c7c source-mac 5489-

98d3-104d # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filter outbound act 4000 Answer: B

607. As shown in the following figure, which of the following configurations can be used to make Host A
and Host B unable to communicate with each other? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A_ act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000_12 0 00 0 255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-
filter inbound ad 2000 It
❑ B lad number 2000 rub 5 deny source 100 0.12 0 00 0255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/3 traffic-
filter inbound eel 2000 4
❑ C. act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 1000.12 0 0.0.0.255 # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic -
finer outbound eel 2000 4 (Right Answers)
❑ D. act number 2000 rule 5 deny source 100.0.12.0 0.0.0.255 # interface

GigabitEthemet 0/0/2 traffic-filter inbound eel 2000 # (Right Answers) Answer:

CD

608. As shown in the following figure, the administrator wants that all the hosts cannot access the Web service (port number is 80)
and other services are accessed normally, what AGL rule should be bound to traffic-filter outbound in the interface configuration of
GO/0/1,

El

❑ A. act number 3001 rule 5 deny udp destination-port eq www rule 10 porn,'
❑ B act number 3003 rule 5 permit ip rule 10 deny udp destination-port eq www #
❑ G act number 3000 rule 5 deny top clestmation-port eq www rule 10 permit ip # (Right Answers)
❑ act number 3002 rule 5 permit ip rule 10 deny tcp destination-port eq www #

Answer, C

609. What is the decimal value of the OSPFv3 packet in the Protocol field in the IPv6 packet header?
❑ A. 69
❑ B. 89 (Right Answers)
❑ G. 92
❑ D. 59

Answer: B
 610. Which of the following ll3v6 address Solicited-node mudicast addresses are
F02:1:FFAB:FECA? (Multiple Choice) 0 A. 2030::BBAB:FECA (Right Answers)
I=1 B. 2020::EEAB:FECA (Right Answers)
El C. 2020::FFAB:FECA (Right Answers)
❑ D.

2020::FFBA:FECA

Answer: ABC

.
611. Which of the following IPv6 addresses are link-wide multicast addresses? (Multiple Choice) El A. FF02 :2
(Right Answers)
CI B. FF02::1 (Right Answers) El C.
FF12::1 (Right Answers) CI ID_
FF12::2 (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

612. What is the total length of the interface identifier of the link-local unicast address? CI A. 48bit
I=1 B. 32bit
CI C. 64bit (Right Answers)
1:1 D. 96bit Answer: C

613. The LER in the MPLS domain is called the Label Egress Router.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

614. If the value of the Type/Length field of an Ethernet data frame is 0x0800, the header length of
the upper packet carried by the data frame ranges from 20 to 60B. El A. True (Right Answers)
0 B. False

Answer:

615. On the VRP platform, which of the following methods can you access the previous history
command? (Multiple Choice) O A. Left cursor
O B. Ctrl+U
El C. Ctrl+P (Right Answers)
El D. Upper cursor (Right Answers)

Answer: CD
 616. What is the full name of VRP?
❑ A. Virtual Routing Platform
❑ B. Versatile Redundancy Platform
❑ C. Versatile Routing Protocol
❑ D. Versatile Routing Platform (Right Answers)

Answer: D

617 As shown. the figure, three Layer 2 switches ere interconnected wrgi one HUB, and the switch is enabled
web SIP. For the budge ID setting of the switch SIP, refer to the following Figure_ Others ere default
configurations. Which of the foaming statement is wrong?

❑A After the bridge 10 comparison, LSWI is the mat bridge

❑ 130/0/1 purl of LSW3. is an PP port and is blocked
Li C Both pods of LSW1era designated ports and are in Ina forwarding
state Might Answer)
11 D. poll of

LSW1 is blacked_

Answer, C

618 As shown in the following figure, all switches run the SIP protocol_ After the topology is stable, modify the
sending period of the configuration BPDU on which of following switch can affect the sending period of the SWD
configuration BPDU?

❑ A SWD
❑ B_ SWG
❑ a SWB
❑ D SWA (Right Answers)

Answer:

619. As shown in the network below, the MAC address of the switch is marked. Enter the command
stp root secondary on the SWD switch. Which of the following switche will be the root bridge of this
network?
 ❑ A SWD (Right Answers)
❑ B SWB
❑ C SWC
▪ SWA

Answer: A

62D. The company has users who report !hal when using SIss network to transfer files, the speed is very taw.
The administrator uses Wireshark software to capture packets m the nelerork and hods some Ouphcale frames.
Which of 11e honosiiing descrkhion is correct ebonite reason or solution?
❑ A The switching equipment of he company network must be upgraded
❑ B. The network nos a loop on the second floor (flight Answers)
ci a No PLAN is configured In the network
❑ D. When the switch fennel find the destination MAC address of the data frame
in the MAC address tribe, the swath wIt Rood the dais frame.

Answer, 0
 621. Dynamic routing protocols can automatically adapt to changes in network topology.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ 11 False

Answer: A

622. The output information of the router R1 routing table is as follows. Which of the following statements
are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.2.2 is forwarded through Ethernet0/0/1. (Right
Answers)
❑ B. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.1.1 is forwarded through the Ethernet0/0/0
interface. (Right Answers)
❑ C. The packet with the destination address of 10.1.1.1 is forwarded through the GigabitEthernet0/0/0
interface.
❑ D. The packet with the destination address of 10.0.2.1 is forwarded through the Ethernet0/0/2
interface. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

623. All interfaces of the router belong to the same broadcast domain.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

624. Which of the following is correct about the command configured for the default route?
❑ A. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.11 (Right Answers )
❑ B. [Huawei-Serial0] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
❑ C. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 192.168.1.1
❑ D. [Huawei] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.00.0.0.0

Answer: A

625. What are the advantages of using DHCP to allocate IP addresses using Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Can achieve IP address reuse (Right Answers)
❑ B. Avoid IP address conflicts (Right Answers)
❑ C. Heavy workload and poor management
❑ D. The configuration information changes (such as DNS), only the administrator needs to modify it on the
DHCP server to facilitate unified management. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD
626_ As shown in the following figure, Router A has passed the IP address 10 0_122 Telnet Router B In the
current interface, which of the following operations will cause the Telnet session of the router to be interrupted
with router, (Multiple Choice)

❑ A Close GO/0/1 interface (Right Answers)

❑ B Modify the IP address of GO/0/1 interface (Right Answers)
❑ C Enable OSPF protocol on GO/0/1 interface
❑ D Configure static router

Answer: AB

627. When a port of a switch receives a non-carried VLAN TAG data frame, it must add a PVID.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer:

628_ Which of the following parameter cannot be used for advanced access control lists?
❑ A. Physical interface (Right Answers)
❑ B. Time range
❑ C. Destination port number
❑ D. Agreement

number Answer: A

629 The AGL does not filter the traffic that the device itself generates to access other devices.
Only the forwarded traffic is filtered. The forwarded traffic includes traffic that other devices
access the device.
❑ A True (Right Answers)
❑ B.

Fals

Ans

wer:

630. An AGL rule is as foIlows: Which of the following IP addresses can be matched by the
permit rule? (Multiple Choice) Rule 5 permit ip source 10.9.1.0 255.0.254.255
❑ A. 7_1.2.1
❑ B_ 6.1.3_1 (Right Answers)
❑a 8.2.2_1
❑ D_ 9.9_1_1 (Right Answers)

Answer: BD
631. The router output information is as follows. Which IPv6 address is obtained by this interface?

❑ A. 2000..1/64
❑ B. 3000::2/64 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 3000::3000164
❑ D. 3000::1/64

Answer: B

632. The router's Router ID neighbor relationship is as follows. Which of the following statements are
correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The router and the router with Router-ID 10.5.3.3 cannot exchange the link status information.
(Right Answers)
❑ B. This router is a DR Other router (Right Answers)
❑ C. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The router-ID of the DR router is 10.0.0.2. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

633. Which area number does OSPFv3 use to identify the backbone area?
❑ A. 0 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 3
❑ C. 1
❑ D. 2

Answer: A
 634. A router OSPFv3 adjacency relationship is as follows. The router is an ABR.

❑ A. True (Right Answers )

❑ B. False

Answer:

635. Which of the following type of addresses are not included in the IPv6 address?
• A. Anycast address
O B. Broadcast address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Multicast
address O D. Unicast
address

Answer: B

636. If the network address of a network is 10.1.1.0/30, what is its broadcast

address? O A. 10.1.1.4
O B. 10.1.1.2
❑ C. 10. 1. 1.3 (Right
Answers) O D. 10.1.1.1

Answer: C

637. If the network address of a network is 192.168.1.0, then its broadcast address must be
192.168.1.255.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
638. Which of the following are correct about the analysis of ICMP packets? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. ICMP packets are encapsulated in IP packets and are not encapsulated in the transport layer.
(Right Answers )
❑ B. ICMP packets cannot be used to detect MTUs in a path.
❑ C. ICMP messages can record time, including original time, receiving time, and sending time. (Right
Answers)
❑ D. ICMP protocol does not support redirection function
❑ E. ICMP packets contain ICMP error packets, control packets, request/response packets, and refresh
packets.

Answer: AC

639. When the router is powered on, the configuration file is read from the default storage path for
initialization of the router. If there is no configuration file in the default storage path, what does the router use
for initialization?
❑ A. Current
configuration O B.
New configuration
O C. Default parameters (Right
Answers) O D. Initial configuration

Answer: C

640. In the STP protocol, which of the following factors will affect the election of the root switch? (Multiple
Choice)
❑ A. Switch interface ID
O B. Switch interface bandwidth
❑ C. IP address of the switch
O D_ The current MAC address of the switch (Right Answers)
❑ E. Switch priority (Right Answers )

Answer: DE

641. As shown in the following figure, all switches run STP, when the topology is stable.
The SWA device is powered off. Which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple
Choice)

Cl

❑A. SWB still periodically sends configuration BPDUs from port GO/0/1.
❑ B. The SWC sends configuration BPDUs from port GO/0/1 after the current Max Age time.
❑ C. SWC immediately sends TC-BPDUs from port GO/0/1 (Right Answers)
❑D. SWC and SWB immediately re-elected the root bridge (Right

Answers) Answer: CD
642. As shown in the figure, all four switches run STP, and each parameter adopts the default value.
When a port on the root switch is blocked and cannot be sent through the port, how long will the port in
the network enter the forwarding state?

❑ A. About 15 seconds
❑ B. About 50 seconds (Right Answers)
❑ C. About 30 seconds
❑ D. About 3 seconds

Answer: B

643. Which of the following port states does the RSTP protocol include? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Forwarding (Right Answers)
❑ B. Discarding (Right Answers)
❑ C. Listening
❑ D. Learning (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

644. As shown in the figure below, all hosts can communicate normally. Which of the following
statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. SWB's 301013 learned 2 MAC addresses (Right Answers)

❑ B. SWA's G01013 learned 3 MAC addresses
❑ C. SWA's G010/3 learned 1 lvlAC address (Right Answers)
❑ D. SWA's GO/0/3 learns 2 MAC addresses

Answer; AC

645 The Layer 2 switch belongs to the data link layer device and can identify the MAC address information in
the data frame, forward the data according to the MAC address, and record the MAC address and the
corresponding pod information in its own internal MAC address table.
JA True
(Right
Answers)
rl B. False

Answer, A
646. Which of the following description is wrong about the Layer 2 Ethernet switch?
❑ A. Layer 2 Ethernet switch works at the data link layer
❑ Et. Ability to learn MAC address
❑ C_ Forward according to the Layer 2 header information of the Ethernet frame
❑ fr It is necessary to make certain modifications to the three-layer header of the forwarded

message, and then forward it_ (Right Answers ) Answer: D

647_ if the network shown in the folbwmg figure is used to enable loopback 0 communication between Router
A and Router B through static routes, which of the following command should be entered in Router A?

❑ A_ ip route-static 10 0 22 32 GmabitEthemet 0/0/0

❑l Et_ ip route-static 10 0 22 0 GmabitEthernet 0/0/0
❑ C ip route-static 10 0 2 2 255 255 255 255100 12 2 (Right Answers)
❑ a ip route-static 10 02 2 255 255 255 255100 12 1

Answer: C

648_ As shown in the figure, regarding OSPF topology and configuration, which of the folbwing
statement is correct?

❑ A Compared RI with R2, R2 has a better chance of becoming a OR because its interface OR priority
value is smaller
❑ B RI and R2 can establish stable neighbor relationships as long as the interface network type of RI is
restored to the default broadcast type.
❑ C_ As long as the interface network type of RI is restored to the default broadcast type, and the hello
time is adjusted to 10s, RI and R2 can establish a stable neighbor relationship (Right Answers)
❑ CI RI and R2 can establish stable OSPF neighbor relationships

Answer: C

E49 As shown in the following figure, the following configurations exist on the Router A Which of the
following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice) ip mute-static 10 02 2 255 255.255 25510 0.12 2
ip route-static 10_0 22 255 255 255 255 10 0 21 2 preference 40

❑ A. if the port GO/0/1 is Down, the interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of Router A is
changed to GO/0/2.
❑ B_ if the GO/0/2 port is Down, the interface that reaches 100 22 in the routing table of Router A is
changed to GO/0/1_ (Right Answers)
❑ C_ The interface that reaches 10 02 2 in the routing table of Router A is GO/0/1
❑ D. The interface that reaches 10.0.2.2 in the routing table of

Router A is GO/012. (Right Answers ) Answer: BD

650 As shown in the broadcast network, OSPF mns on four routers and in the same area and on the same
network segment. OSPF automatically elects a OR Multiple BORs to achieve better backup results.
❑ A True
❑ B_ False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
 651. When logging in to the router through Telnet, which authentication methods can choose? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. AAA local authentication (Right Answers)
❑ B. Not certified
❑ C. password authentication (Right Answers)
❑ MD5 ciphertext authentication

Answer: AC

652. The packet that the DHCP server responds to the client must be a unicast packet.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

653. Link aggregation is a common technique in enterprise nehvorks. Which of the following descriptions are the advantages of link
aggregation technology? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A Improve reliability (Right Answers)
❑ B Improve safety
❑ C. Increase bandwidth (Right Answers)
❑ D Implement load sharing (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

654 A switch receives a data frame with a VLAN tag, tut finds that the destination MAC address of, the data frame is not
queried in its MAC address table which is the processing behavior of the switch for the data frame
❑ A The switch will drop this data frame
❑ B The switch broadcasts this data frame to all Access ports.
❑ C The switch broadcasts this data frame to all ports (except the receiving part) in the VLAN that belongs to the data frame
(Right Answers)
❑ El The switch broadcasts

the data frame to all ports

Answer: C

655 In order to check whether the serial port SO/D/1 on the router is a DTE interface or a BCE interface, which of the
following commands should he used?
❑ A. display interface 80/0/1 (Right Answers )
❑ B. display current-config
❑ C. display saved-config
❑ D display controller

serial Answer: A

656. Which of the following types of ACLs can match the transport layer port number?
❑A. Intermediate ACL
❑ B. Advanced ACL (Right Answers)
❑ C. Layer 2 ACL
❑D. Basic ACL

Answer: B

657. What is the total length of an 1Pv€ address?

❑ A. 32
❑ B. 64
❑ C. 128 (Right Answers) I=1
D. 96

Answer: C
658. Which protocol packet is required to bear for DHCPv6
packets? O A. FTP
O B. TCP
O C. UDP (Right Answers)
O Di_ HTTP

Answer: C

659. Which statements are correct about IPv6 address configuration? (Multiple
Choice) O A. FRC addresses can only be manually configured.
O B. IPv6 supports DHCPv6 format for address configuration (Right Answers)
I=1 C. fPv6 supports stateless autoconfiguration (Right Answers)
O D. [Pv6 address supports multiple ways of automatic configuration (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

660. The multicast address of the requested node corresponding to 2001. •12:1 is
FF02::1:FF12:1. O A. True (Right Answers)
E B. False

Answer: A

661 The client has an error accessing the FTP server. Checking that there is no problem with
the connectiviy between the server and the client is it possibly caused by which of the following
server ports are blocked? (Multiple Choice) El A 21 (Right Answers)
❑ B 20 (Right Answers)
❑ C 50049
❑ D 80

Answer: AB

662. Which fields are not included in the network layer header
format? D A. TTL
LI B. Source IPv4 Address
LI C. Sequence Number (Right Answers)
❑ D_ Destination IPv4

Address Answer: C

663. Which of the following descriptions are correct if en AR2200 router needs to be restored to its
initial configuration? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Re-specify the configuration file to be
loaded next time 171 B. Reset the saved
configuration (Right Answers)
171 C. Clear current configuration
171 D. Restart the AR2200 muter (Right Answers)

Answer: BD
664. The administrator wants to completely delete the old device configuration file config.zip›, then
which of the following command is correct?
❑ A. delete /unreserved config.zip (Right Answers)
❑ B. delete /force config.zip
❑ C. clear config.zip
❑ D. reset config.zip

Answer: A

665. In which of the folowing cases does the switch generate configuration BPDUs? (Multiple
Choice) A. During the initialization process, as tong as the port is enabled with STP, the
configuration BPDU wit be sent from the designated port according to the interval specified by the
Heto Time timer B. When the root port receives the configuration BPDU, the device where the root
port resides sends configuration BPOUs from each of its designated ports. C. When a non-
designated port receives a configuration BPDU that is worse then itself, it immediately sends its
own BPDU to the downstream device. D. When the designated port receives a configuration BPDU
that is worse then itself, it will immediately send its own BPDU to the downstream device.
Answer ABD
❑ A.select this to commit (Right Answers)

Answer. A

666The port cost calculated by STP has a certain relationship with the port bandwidth, that is, the
larger the bandwidth, the () the overhead.
❑ A. Consistent
❑ B. Not necessarily
❑ C. bigger
❑ D. smaller (Right Answers)

Answer: D

667. In the RSTP protocol, the PIA mechanism requires that the link between two switching devices
be in point-to-point full-duplex mode.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B.

False

Answer

: A

668. The output information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct?
(Multiple Choice)

❑ A. This router is DR (Right Answers)

❑ 13. Router Router ID is 10.0.1.1
❑ C. Router Router ID is 10.0.2.2 (Right Answers)
❑ D. The interface address of this router is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)

Answer: ACID
669. Which of the following commands can enable the DHCP relay function of the router interface?
❑ A. dhcp select server
❑ B. dhcp select global
❑ C. dhcp select interface
❑ dhcp select relay (Right Answers)

Answer: DI
670 As shown in the following figure, Switch A and Router A are;connected through two link, The two links are in
the manual load balancing mode_ The aggregation port number is 1, and the aggregation link needs to forward
data. Carrying VLAN TAG 100, which configuration does Router A need to use? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. interface Eth-Trunkl port ImIk-type trunk port trunk allow-pass Nan 100 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/1 eth-
trunk 1 #
❑ El_ interface GmabilEtherneta/0/1 eth-trunk 1 4 interface GmabilEthernet0/0/2 eth-trunk 1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. interface Eth-Trunkl mode lacp-static port link-type trunk port trunk allow-pass
Nan 100 4 interface GmabilEthernell)/0/1 eth-trunk 1 # interface GmabilEthernet0/0/2
eth-trunk 1 4 0 B. interface Eth-Trunkl undo portswitch # interface Eth-Trurnkl
_100 doll q termination vrd 100 ip address 10 0 122 255 255 2550 arp broadcast
enable # (Right Answers)

Answer: B0

071 As shown in the figure, the network administrator creates VLAN 2 on the SWA and SWB, and configures the
pods connected to the hosts on the two switches es access ports and assigns them to VLAN 2 Configure 60/0/1 of
SWA and 61:11012 of SWB as trunk pods to allow ail VLANs to pass_ To achieve normal cornmunIcehon between
the two hosts, what do you need led do,

A. ConTguro G0011 On the SWC as the monk pad and

Way VI AII 2 1a pass. GArO1porl is se,as the amass pal

and PVID 2 0 13. Create VLAN 2 on the SWC, configure
60.10/1 arid G0 012 as trunk pods, and alp," VLAN 210
pass. Might Amax.)
0 C. Create VLAN2 on the SWC.
D Configure .30.311 on the SWC as

the trunk port and aBow VLAN 2 to

pass. Answer , B

672 If the Authenticator sends the wrong username and password to the Authenticator
during The PPP authentication process, what type of message will the Authenticator send
to the Authenticator? 0 A Authenticate-Reject
0 B. Authenticate-Ack
0 G. Authenticate-Nak
0 D. Authenticate-Reply

673. An ACL is a packet filter. The ACL is applied to the service module. The ACL takes effect_
1=I A. True (Right Answers )
I=1 B. False

Answer: A

674. An ACL rule is as follows: Which of the following iP addresses can be matched by the permit
rule? (Multiple Choice) rub 5 permit ip source 10.0.1.0 0.0.254.255
❑ A. 10.0.4.5
El B. 10_0.3.4 (Right
Answers) 0 C_ 10_0_1 2
(Right Answers)
El D. 10.0.2.3

Answer: BC
675. When an iPv6 interface receives a packet whose Hop Limit class has a value of 1, the
packet is not forwarded. 0 A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
676_ By default; how many seconds is the ❑SPFv3 adjacency Deadtime on a P2P link?
❑ A. 40 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 10
❑ C. 20
❑ D. 30

Answer: A

677 An explicit path can be easily defined by SR (Segment Routing), and nodes in the network
only need to maintain Seament Routing information. It can respond to the real-time rapid
development of business. What are the following characteristics of Segment Routing? (Multiple
Choice)
❑A Support both the centralized control mode of the controller and the distributed control mode of
the repeater. Provides a balance between centralized control and distributed control (Right
Answers)
❑ B SR (Segment Routing) uses IP forwarding without additional maintenance of another label
forwarding table.
❑ C A better smooth evolution of existing networks by extending existing protocols such as IGP
(Right Answers)
❑D Using source routing technology to provide rapid

interaction between the network and upper-layer

applications (Right Answers) Answer: ACD

678. Which of the following statement about MPLS Label tags is wrong?
❑ A. The tag is encapsulated between the network layer and the data link layer (Right Answers)
❑ B. The label is used to uniquely identify the forwarding equivalence class FEC burned by a packet.
❑ C. The label is carried by the header of the packet and does not contain topology information.
❑ D_ The tag is a short identifier with a fixed length and only local significance.

Answer: A

679. Which statement is correct about the VRP operating platform shortcuts? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. CTRL+Z returns to the user view (Right Answers)
❑ B. CTRL+C stops the running of the current command (Right Answers)
❑ C. Move the left cursor key (<--) to the left by one. (Right Answers)
❑ D. TAB prompts for the most recently entered command

Answer: ABC

680.<Huawei>system-view
[Huaweiluser-interface
console 0
[Huawei-ui-console0] user privilege level
15 [Huawei-ui-consoleOlauthentication-
mode password
[huawei-ui-console0] set authentication password cipher
huawei2012 [Huawei-ui-consoleO]guit
Which statement is wrong about the above configuration command?
❑ A. The user who logs in to the device through the console has the highest user prMlege level.
❑ B. The administrator wants to log in and manage the device through the console port.
❑ C. After the configuration is completed, the administrator cannot implement device management
through remote login.
❑ ❑The password of the user who logs in to the device through the console is cipher huawei2012
(Right Answers)
Answer:
 681. In the switch, which of the following is the technology of port and MAC binding?
❑ A. SEP
❑ B. NAT
❑ C. ACL
❑ D. Port Security (Right Answers)

Answer: D

682. Which of the following information does the switch MAC address table not include?
❑ A. MAC address
❑ B. Port number
❑ C. IP address (Right Answers)
❑ D. VLAN

Answer: C

683. What port states might exist on a switch with standard STP protocol enabled? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. Discarding
❑ B. Listening (Right Answers)
❑ C. Disabled (Right Answers)
❑ D. Forwarding (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD

684. Which of the following routing protocols has the highest priority?
❑ A. Direct (Right Answers)
❑ B. RIP
❑ C. OSPF
❑ D. Static

Answer: A
685. Referring to the output result shown in the figure, it can be judged that the routing table of the
router is composed of a direct route and a static route.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)

❑ B.

False

Answe

r: A

686. Which of the following description is correct about the display information?

❑ A. GigabitEthemet 0/010 interface was manually closed by the administrator. (Right Answers)
❑ B. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface is not configured with an lP address.
❑ C. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface does not enable dynamic routing protocol
❑ D. GigabitEthernet 0/0/0 interface is connected with a wrong

cable. Answer: A

687. The output information of a link aggregation port of a switch is as follows. If you want to delete Eth-
Trunk 1, which of the following command is correct?

❑ A. undo interface Eth-Trun< 1

❑ B. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 undo eth-trunk quit undo interface Eth-Trunk 1 (Right Answers)
❑ C. inte GigabitEthernet 0/01 undo eth-trunk quit inte GigabitEthernet 0/0/2 undo eth-trunk quit undo
 interface Eth-Trunk!
❑ D. inte GigabitEthernet 0/0;2 undo eth-trunk quit undo interface Eth-Trunk 1

Answer: B
 688. If an Ethernet data frame Length/Tyme=0z8100, which may be the payload of this data frame?
(Multiple Choice)
❑ A. TCP data segment (Right Answers)
❑ B. UDP data (Right Answers)
❑ C. ICMP packet (Right Answers)
❑ D. ARP packet (Right Answers)

Answer: ABCD

689. As shown in the figure, a static NAT command is deployed on the router R1. When the PC accesses
the Internet, the destination address in the packet will not change.

0 A. True
(Right Answers) 0
B. False

Answer: A

690. What level of encapsulation format is defined by the PPP protocol in the OBI reference model?
❑ A. Network layer
❑ B. Data link layer (Right Answers )
❑ C. Presentation layer
❑ D. Application layer

Answer: B

691. Which of the following authentication methods does not require to input a username and password?
❑ A. authorization-mode hwtacacs
❑ B. authentication-mode local
❑ C. authentication-mode hwtacacs
❑ D. authentication-mode none (Right Answers)

Answer: D

692. When forwarding a IPv6 packet, the router needs to find the routing table based on the source FP
address of the [P6 packet.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

693. Which order is the 081 reference model from the upper layer to the lower layer?
❑ A. Application layer, session layer, presentation layer, transport layer, network layer, data link layer,
physical layer
❑ B. Application layer, transport layer, network layer, data link layer, physical layer
❑ C. Application layer; presentation layer, session layer ; transport layer ; network layer, data link layer,
physical layer (Right Answers)
❑ D. Application layer, presentation layer, session layer, network layer, transport layer, data link layer,
physical layer

Answer: C
694. Network administrators use Ping to test network connectivity. Which of the following protocols
might he used in the process? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A ARP (Right Answers)
❑ B. TCP
❑ C ICMP (Right Answers)
❑ D.

UDP

Answer

: AC

695. As shown in the figure, it can be judged that 00e0-fc99-999 is a specific host MAC address learned by
the switch through ARP, and the host has changed the IP address three times.

❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

696.<Huawei>system-view [Huaweilcommand-privilege level 3 view user

save Which statement is correct about the above configuration command?
❑ A. Modify the user view command to a permission level of 3. and save the configuration.
❑ B_ Modify the users permission level to 3, and save the configuration.
❑ C. Modify the permission level of the save command in the user view to 3. (Right Answers)
❑ D_ Modify the permission level of the save command used by a user to

3 Answer: C

697. Which of the following OSPF protocol packets can ensure the reliability of the LSA update?
❑ A. [SACK (Right
Answers) ID B. LSR
❑ C. DD
❑ D. LSU

Answer:

698 Which of the following protocols does not belong to the file transfer protocol?
❑ A. SFTP
❑ B TFTP
❑ C. FTP
❑ D. HTTP (Right Answers)

Answer: 0
699. Apply the following ACL to
Telnet: Aci number 2000
Rure 5 permit source 172.16.105.20

Only devices with an IP address of 172.16.105.2 are allowed to log in remotely.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

700.[RTA] ac12002
[RTA-acl-basic-2002] rule deny source 172.16.1.1 0.0.0.0
[RTA-acl-basic-2002] rule deny source 172.16.0.0 0 255.0.0
Using the ACL matching route entry shown above on the router RTA, which of the following entries will
be matched? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 192.17.0.0/24
❑ B. 172.16.1.1/32 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 172.16.1.0/24
❑ D. 172.48.0.0/16 (Right Answers)

Answer: BD

701. Which type of ACL does the following command belong to?
rule permit 8021p 7
❑ A. Layer 2 ACL (Right
Answers) D B. Basic ACL
❑ C. Advanced ACL
❑ D. Intermediate ACL

Answer; A

702. How many bits does the total length of an IPv6 address increase over IPv4?
❑ A. 32
❑ B. 96 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 64
❑ D. 128

Answer: B

703. What kind of IPv6 address is FE80::2E0:FCFF:FE6F:4F36?

❑ A. Multicast address
❑ B. Anycast address
❑ C. Link-local address (Right Answers)
❑ D. Global unicast

address Answer; C
 704. If the 1171v6 host wants to send packets up to 10 routers, which parameter should be modified
in the Pve header?
❑ A. Next Header
❑ B. Version
❑ C. Hop Limit (Right Answers )
❑ D. Traffic Class

Answer: C
705_ There are two routers RTA and RTB between the source device and the destination device. Use the
Traced command to detect the path. When the first hop RTA is detected, the source device sends a UDP packet
with a TTL of 1 to a larger port of the destination device. When the packet reaches the RTB, the TTL becomes
0, and the RTA responds to the source device. ICMP message.
A Echo Request
B. Port Unreachable
o C. Time

Exceeded (Right
Answers) LI D.
Echo Reply

Answer: C

706. This is the three packets that the administrator has captured on the network. Which of the following
statements is incorrect?

❑ A. These three packets represent the three-way handshake process of TCP.

❑ B. Application layer data is not included in all three packets
D C. The IP address of the Telnet server is 10.0.12.1; and the IP address of the Telnet client is 10.0.12.2.
(Right Answers)
❑ D. The Telnet client uses the 50190 port to establish a connection with the server.

Answer: C

707. The administrator needs to configure the IP address on the G0f0/0 interface of the router. Which of the
following address is correct to use?
❑ A. 145.4.2.55/26 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 237.6.1.2124
❑ C. 127.3.1.4128
❑ D. 192.168.10.112130

Answer: A

708. The subnet mask of a network segment 150.25.0.0 is 255.255.224.0, then which is the valid host address
in the network segment? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. 150.25.2.24 (Right Answers)
❑ B. 150.15.3.30
❑ C. 150.25.0.0
❑ D. 150.25.1.255 (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

709. How many port states does the RICMP protocol have? O A. 2
O B. 4
❑ C. 3 (Right Answers) O
D. 1

Answer: C

710. A router running OSPF can reach the FULL state after completing the LSDB synchronization.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A
 711. Which of the following is not included in the routing table?
❑ A. MAC (Right
Answers)
❑ B. Destination/Mask
❑ C. Cost
❑ D.

NextHop

Answer: A

/12. Which descriptions are correct about DD packets and LSA in OSPF? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The head of the LSA can uniquely identify an LSA. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The DO packet contains only the header information of the LSA. (Right Answers)
❑ C. DO packet contains LSA details
❑ D. LSA head is only a small part of the LSA (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

713. As shown in the figure, the network administrator wants to manually aggregate the two physical
links between SWA and SWB into one Eth-trunk link; which of the following description is correct?

❑ A.Cannot be aggregated
(Right Answers)
❑ B It works normally after
aggregation
❑ C. It can be aggregated. Only GE ports can send and receive data after aggregation
❑ 0. It can be aggregated_ Only Ethernet ports

can send and receive data after aggregation_

Answer: A

114. Which descriptions are correct about the Ethernet subinterface? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A. The subinterface cannot be configured with an IP address.
❑ B. A subinterface can be bound to multiple VLANs (Right Answers)
❑ C. The [P address of the sub-interface cannot belong to the same network segment. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The subinterface ID should be the same as the VLAN 10

Answer: BC

115. Ethernet frames are processed and forwarded in the form of ULAN TAGs inside the switch.
❑ A. True (Right
Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer:

A
716_ As shown in the following figure, from the security point of new, Router A refuses to receive OSPF
packets, GE packets, IGMP packets from G0/0/1 Which of the following command can funl this requirement?

❑ A act number 3000 mle 5 deny are rule 10 deny 89 rulc15 deny icmp # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-
fitter inbound act 3000 #
❑ B acl number 2000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-filler
inbound act 2000 # (Right Answers)
❑ G acl number 3000 rule 5 deny 47 rule 10 deny 89 rule 15 deny 1 # interface GmabitEthernet0/0/1 traffic-
fitter inbound acl 3000 #
❑ B. acl number 3000 rule 5 deny are rule 10 deny ospf rule 15 deny icmp # interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
traffic-fitter inbound acl 3000 #

Answer: B

117. What is the length of the Traffic Class field in the [Pv€ packet
header? O A. 4
❑ B. 8 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 2
❑ D.6

Answer: B

718. How many ways to generate a DHCP device unique identifier DUID?
❑ A. 3
❑ B. 2 (Right Answers)
❑ C. 4
❑ D_ 1

Answer: B

719 Which of the following descriptions are correct about IPv6? Choice)
❑ A. IPv6 address length is 128 bits. (Right Answers)
❑ B. !RC address length is 64 bits
❑ C. When an IPA packet has multiple extension headers the extension header must appear in an
orderly manner (Right Answers)
❑ a When an IPv6 packet has multiple extension headers, the extension

header can appear randomly Answer: AC-

720 The packet capture tool captures an Ethernet frame and finds that the value of the Type/Length field of
the frame is 0x0800 Which of the following descriptions are correct about the frame? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A The frame carves an IPX message.
❑ B The frame carries an IP packet (Right Answers)
❑ G The frame structure of the frame is the Ethernet_11 format (Right Answers)
❑ B. The frame structure of the frame is 802 3 format

Answer: BC

721 The MAC address table of a switch is as follows lithe switch receives a data frame with the
destination AC of 5489-985-I8a 8 from the EthO/0/2 port, which of the following statement is correct?
❑ A Forward this data frame front the Eth0/0/2 port
❑ B Forward this data frame from the Eth0/0/1 pert_
❑ C Discard this data frame (Right Answers)
❑ D Flood

this data

frame out

Answer: C
 722. The administrator plans to implement a route backup by configuring a static floating route. Which is the
correct implementation method?
❑ A. The administrator needs to configure different protocol priority values for the primary static route and
the alternate static route. (Right Answers)
❑ B. The administrator needs to configure different metrics for the primary static route and the standby static
route.
❑ C. The administrator needs to configure different TAGs for the primary static route and the standby static
route.
❑ D. The administrator only needs to configure two static routes.

Answer: A

723. Regarding the main function of the router; which of the following statements are wrong? (Multiple
Choice)
❑ A. Establish routing tables through multiple protocols
❑ B. Guide data forwarding according to the routing table
❑ C. Forward according to the source IP address of the received packet (Right Answers)
❑ D. Realize communication between devices on the same network segment (Right Answers)

Answer: CD

724. The administrator finds that the file cannot be transferred to the Huawei AR200 router
through TFTP. What is the possible cause? 0 A. TCP port 69 of the TFTP server is disabled
❑ B. The username on the TFTP server does not exist.
O C. The username and password on the TFTP
server have been modified. O D. UDP port 69 of the
TFTP server is disabled (Right Answers)

Answer: D

725. As shown in the following figure, the switch configuration information is as follows. Which of the following
statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. Host B and host C can ping each other (Right Answers)

❑ B. Host A and Host B cannot ping (Right Answers)
❑ C. Host A and Host C can ping each other (Right Answers)
❑ D. All hosts can ping each other

Answer: ABC
726. Which of the following descriptions are correct about the PPP? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A PPP supports bundling multiple physical links into logical links to increase bandwidth (Right Answers)
❑ B. PPP supports plaintext and ciphertext authentication (Right Answers)
❑ C. PPP is not scalable and cannot be deployed on an Ethernet link.
❑ 0. For the physical layer, PPP supports asynchronous links and synchronous links. (Right Answers)
❑ E. PPP supports multiple network layer protocols such as 'PCP and IPXCP. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABDE

727. The PPPoE client sends a PADI message to the server, and the server replies with a PADO
message. What frame is the PADO packet?
❑ A. Multicast
❑ B. Broadcast (Right Answers)
❑ C. Unicast
❑ D.

Anycast

Answer:

728. The following rules exist in an ACL of the router: rule deny tcp source 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
destination 172.16.10.1 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 21 Which of the following statement is
correct?
o A. The source IP address is 192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.1, and all TCP packets
with the destination port number 21 match this rule. (Right Answers) o B. The source IP address is
192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.2, and all TCP packets with the destination port number of
21 match this rule.
o C. The source IP address is 192.168.1.1, the destination IP address is 172.16.10.3, and all TCP
packets with the destination port number 21 match this rule. o D. The type of ACL is basic ACL.

Answer: A

729. Which of the following IPv6 extension headers can appear twice?
❑ A. Destination option extension header (Right Answers)
❑ B. Fragment extension header
❑ C. Upper layer protocol data message
❑ D. hop-by-hop option extension header

Answer: A

730. When the host uses the stateless address autoconfiguration scheme to obtain an IPv6
address, the DNS server address information cannot be obtained.
❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer. A

731 Which of the following packets is sent by the DHCPv6 client before sending a request packet to the DHCPv6 server? P
A RA
❑ 6 RS (Right Answers)
❑ C. NA
❑ 0. NS

Answer: B
732. Which type does the IPv6 address FE80::2E0TCFF:FE6F:4F36 belong to?
❑ A. Multicast address
❑ B. Link-local address (Right Answers)
❑ C. Global unicast address
❑ D. Anycast

address Answer: B

733. In the DHCPv6 stateless automatic allocation scheme, the host does not need to send any DHCPv6
packets.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer, B

734. The last option field of IPv4 is variable length optional information. What is the maximum Length of
this field?
❑ A. 40B (Right Answers)
❑ B. 20B
❑ C. 60B
O D. 10B

Answer: A

735. Regarding the role of ARP protocol and packet encapsulation, which description is correct?
❑ A. The MAC address of the destination and the address of the UUID can be obtained through the ARP
protocol.
❑ B. ARP protocol supports deployment on PPP links and HDLC links.
❑ C. ARP protocol is based on Ethernet encapsulation (Right Answers)
❑ D. Inverse ARP in ARP is used to resolve device names

Answer: C

736. The STP root switch is elected based on the priority of the switch. In RSTP, the switch priority and MAC
address are compared at the same time.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

737. Which of the following statement is correct?

❑ A. The switch works at the network layer.
❑ B. The router works at the physical layer.
❑ C. The switch works at the physical layer
❑ D. The router works at the network layer. (Right Answers)

Answer:
738. A router learns routes to the same destination address through RIP, OSPF, and static routes. By
default, VRP will ultimately choose which protocol to learn the route through?
❑ A. The routes learned by the three protocols are selected.
❑ B. Static routing
❑ C. OSPF (Right Answers)
❑ D. RIP

Answer: C

739. If the network administrator does not configure a backbone area, the router automatically creates a
backbone area.
❑ A. True
❑ B. False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

740. What modes does device link aggregation support? (Multiple Choice)
❑ A_ Mixed mode (Right Answers)
❑ B_ Manual load sharing mode (Right Answers )
❑ C. Manual master mode
❑ D. LACP mode

Answer: AB

741. The output information of a sub-interface of a router aggregation port 1 is as follows. According to
this information, which of the following statements are correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The sub-interface of the aggregation port carries the VLAN TAG 100 when forwarding the data frame.
❑ B. The IP address of the subinterface of the aggregation port is 10.0.12.2/24. (Right Answers)
❑ C. There are two links in the aggregation port. (Right Answers)
❑ D. The subinterface number of the aggregation port is 100. (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD
742. As shown in the figure, the RTA uses NAT technology and implements a many-to-many non-NAPT address
translation by defining an address pool, so that hosts on the private network can access the public network.
Assume that Mere are only two public IP addresses in the address pool, and the addresses have been assigned
to hosts A and B. If host C also wants to access the public network, which of the following description is correct?

- I A RTA assigns the last public network address to host C. and host B is kicked off the line.
0 B. Al hosts can use the public network address in turn to access the public nehvork.
0 C Host C cannot be assigned to the public network
address and cannot access the public network. (Right
Answers ) 0 D. RTA assigns the first public network
address to host C, and host A is kicked off the line.

Answer. C
743. The OSPFv3 interface information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statements are
correct? (Multiple Choice)

❑ A. The network type of this interface is P2P. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The Router-ID of this interface is 10.0.0.6. (Right Answers )
❑ C. The interface does not establish an adjacency relationship.
❑ D. The interface area number is 1 (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD

744. Which type of network does OSPFv3 need to elect DR?

❑ A. P2P network
❑ B. P2MP network
❑ C. CLNP Network
❑ D. Broadcast network (Right Answers)

Answer: D

745. Compared to IPv4; there is no IHL field in the IPv6 header.

❑ A. True (Right Answers)
❑ B. False

Answer: A

746. The output information of a router is as follows. Which of the following statements are correct?
(Multiple Choice)

❑ A. OSPFv3 process number is 1. (Right Answers)

❑ B. The DR priority of this router is 1. (Right Answers)
❑ C. This router is BDR
❑ D. The router-ID of the neighboring router is 10.0.1.1. (Right Answers)

Answer: ABD
 747 A company applying for a Class C IP address segment needs to be evenly distributed to 8
subsidiaries. The largest subsidiary h. 14 computers. Different subsidiaries must be in different
network segments. What should the subnet mask be set to,
❑ A 255 255 255 240
❑ B 255 255 255.192
❑ C 255 255 255 0
❑ D 255 255 255

128 (Right

Answers) Answer:

748. Which of the following commands can be used to check the session status of a PPPoE client?
❑ A. display ip interface brief
❑ B. display pppoe-client session packet (Right Answers)
❑ C. display pppoe-client session summary
❑ ❑. display current-configuration

Answer: B

749. Which of the following configurations belong to Layer 2 ACL?

❑A. rule 10 permit 12-protacol arp (Right Answers)
❑ B. rule 25 permit source 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0
❑ C. rule 20 permit source-mac 0203-0405-0607
❑❑. rule 15 permit vlan-id 100

Answer: A

750. The MPLS label header is encapsulated between the data link layer header of the message and the
network layer header.
❑A. True (Right Answers)
❑B. False

Answer: A

1. Which of the following statements is false about OSPF area partition?

A. Area 0 is the backbone area, and other areas must be connected to this area.
B. OSPF area partition can reduce the LSDB size of the router.
C. The link state databases (LSDBs) of routers are the same in the same OSPF area.
D. Only area border routers (ABRs) can function as the autonomous system boundary routers (ASBRs)

(Answer: B)

2. Which of the following description regarding the TTL field of the IP packet is correct?
A. The TTL value will increment by 1 each time the packet is routed.
B. The TTL defines how many packets the source can send.
C. The TTL value will decrement by 1 each time the packet is routed.
D. The TTL defines the duration during which the source can send packets.

(Answer: C)

3. A host has established a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0. Which of the following statements are
correct?
 A. The destination MAC address of a frame sent by the host will be MAC address of the router interface G0/0/0.
B. The destination port number in a segment header will have a value of 80.
C. The destination IP address of a packet sent by the host will be the IP address of the Router interface g0/0/0.
D. The destination MAC address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of the switch.

(Answer: D)

4. If the network mask is 255.255.240.0, which of the following are valid network address?
A. 150.150.0.8
B. 150.150.0.0
C. 150.150.8.0
D. 150.150.16.0

(Answer: D)

5. Which of the following IPv4 addresses cannot be used by a host to access the Internet?
A. 10.1.1.1
B. 200.1.1.1
C. 50.1.1.1
D. 100.1.1.1

(Answer: A)

6. Which of the following statements is true about functions at the network layer of the OSI reference model?
A. Combine bits into bytes, combine bytes into frames, use the link-layer address (MAC addresses used by the Ethernet) to
access media, and perform error detection.
B. Provide logical addresses for routers to determine paths.
C. In the OSI reference model, the network layer is closest to users and provides network services for the application program.
D. Provide connection-oriented or connectionless data transfer and error detection before retransmission.
E. Transmit bit streams between devices, and define the level, speed, and cable pins.

(Answer: B)

7. Which of the following methods is not used for logging in to the VRP system?
A. SSH
B. Telnet
C. Netstream
D. Web

(Answer: C)

8. When a network engineer enters a command, the following information is displayed:

Error: Unrecognized command found at ‘^’ position. Which of the following statements is true about such information?
A. The entered parameter is not specified.
B. The parameter type is incorrect.
C. No keyword is found.
D. The entered command is incomplete.

(Answer: B)
9. When the “delete vrpcfg.zip” command is run on the user interface of the VRP, the file can be permanently deleted only after it is
cleared from the recycle bin.
A. True
B. False

(Answer: B)

10. If the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is disabled on the network consisting of switches, a Layer 2 loop will definitely occur.
A. True
B. False

(Answer: A)

11. The MAC address table of a switch is as follows. If the switch receives a data frame whose destination MAC address is 5489-9811-
0b49 from Eth0/0/2, which of the following statements is true?

A. The data frame is forwarded through Eth0/0/3.

B. The data frame is discarded.
C. The data frame is forwarded through Eth0/0/2.
D. The data frame is flooded.

(Answer: A)

12. Which of the following port roles are added to RSTP compared with STP?
A. Alternate port
B. Backup port
C. Root port
D. Designated port

(Answer: A, B)

13. What is the value of the Type field in RSTP configuration BPDUs?
A. 0x01
B. 0x03
C. 0x00
D. 0x02

(Answer: C)

14. The command output in a switch is as follows. Which of the following statements is true?
<Huawei> display mac-address
MAC address table of slot 0:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MAC Address VLAN/ PEVLAN CEVLAN PORT Type LSP/LSR-ID
VSI/SI
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5489-9885-18a8 1 - - - blackhole -
5489-9811-0b49 1 - - Eth0/0/3 static -
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total matching items on slot 0 displayed = 2

A. After receiving a data frame whose source or destination MAC address is 5489-9885-18a8, switch discards the frame.
B. All entries in the MAC address table are dynamically learned by the switch.
C. There is no port information corresponding to MAC address 5489-9885-18a8, and a bug occurs on the switch.
D. After the switch restarts, the MAC address 5489-9811-0b49 needs to be learned again.
(Answer: A)

15. Refer to the graphic. What will happen in this figure if the STP protocol is disabled on both switches?

A. Load balancing will occur in this topology.

B. Duplicate frames exist in this network.
C. CPU usage will be very high on S1 and S2 due to a broadcast floods.
D. The MAC address of host B can be found in the MAC address table of both switches.

(Answer: C)

16. As shown in the figure, STP is enabled on both switches. Which port is in Blocking state?

A. G0/0/3 of SWA
B. G0/0/2 of SWB
C. G0/0/2 of SWA
D. G0/0/3 of SWB

(Answer: D)

17. In standard STP mode, which of the following ports on non-root switches forward the BPDUs with TC bits set generated by the root
switch?
A. Designated port
B. Backup port
C. Root port
D. Alternate port

(Answer: A)

18. Which of the following statements are true about STP BPDUs?
A. STP has two types of packets: configuration BPDU and TCN BPDU.
B. After STP is enabled on a port, the switch periodically sends TCN BPDUs through the designated port.
C. During initialization, each switch enabled with STP proactively sends configuration BPDUs.
 D. BPDUs are encapsulated in Ethernet frames and the destination MAC address is a multicast MAC address.

(Answer: A, D )

19. Which of the following packets are OSPF packets?

A. Hello
B. LSA
C. LSR
D. LSU

(Answer: all;)
(Hello, Database Description, Link State Request, Lick State Update, Link State Acknowledge)

20. Refer the graphic. Four switches are operating using STP. One of the port interfaces on ROOT has failed. How long will it take for
the ‘blocked’ interface to change to a state of forwarding?

A. 50 seconds
B. 3 seconds
C. 15 seconds
D. 30 seconds

(Answer: D)
(When a link fails, STP calculation is triggered and the spanning tree structure changes. However, new configuration BPDUs cannot be
immediately spread over the entire network. The newly selected root port and designated port must wait for two Forward Delay
intervals before transitioning to the Forwarding state. The default Forward Delay timer value is 15 seconds. This means that the port
stays in Listening state for 15 seconds and then stays in Learning state for another 15 seconds before transitioning to the Forwarding
state. The port is blocked when it is in Listening or Learning state, effectively preventing transient loops)

21. On the network shown in the figure, no gateway is configured for host A, and host B has the ARP cache entries corresponding to
the gateway. If the “ping 11.0.12.1” command is run on host A, which of the following statements is true?
 A. No data packet is sent from host A.
B. The destination MAC address of data frames sent by host A is MAC-C.
C. The destination IP address of data packets sent by host A is 11.0.12.1
D. The destination MAC address of data sent by host A is MAC-B.

(Answer: B, C)

22. When a two-way neighbor relationship is set up between two OSPF-enabled routers, it means the LSDB synchronization has been
completed, but the SPF algorithm has not been performed yet.
A. True
B. False

(Answer: A)

23. Which of the following must be consistent at both ends of an OSPF adjacency relationship to be established?
A. Router ID
B. Router Dead Interval
C. Router Priority
D. Area ID

(Answer: B, D)

24. Which of the following states indicates that the OSPF neighbor relationship has been established?
A. 2-way
B. Down
C. Attempt
D. Full

(Answer: A, D)
• Down: This is the initial state of a neighbor session. This state occurs when a device does not receive any Hello packets from its
neighbors within a dead interval. Only OSPF routers on an NBMA network send Hello packets to neighbors at each poll interval,
including the neighbors in Down state.
• Attempt: This state is only used on NBMA networks where neighbors are manually configured. When the neighbor relationship is in
Attempt state, an OSPF router sends a Hello packet to its manually configured neighbors at each Hello interval, trying to establish a
neighbor relationship.
• Init: This state occurs after the router has received a Hello packet from its neighbor but has not established a two-way session. In
this state, the neighbor does not receive any Hello packet from this router, and the neighbor list in the received Hello packet does not
contain the router ID of the local router.
• 2-Way: This state occurs when a router and its neighbor receive Hello packets containing their own router IDs from each other and
establish an OSPF neighbor relationship. If no adjacency needs to be established, the two neighbors remain in the 2-way state. If
 adjacencies need to be established, the neighbors enter the Exstart state. The DR and BDR are elected only when the neighbor
state is the 2-way state or higher.
• ExStart: This state occurs when the two neighbors start to negotiate the master/slave status and determine the sequence numbers
of DD packets. Exstart is the first step in creating an adjacency.
• Exchange: This state occurs when the two neighbors start to exchange DD packets. DD packets contain LSDB information.
• Loading: This state occurs when the two neighbors are synchronizing their LSDBs. The two devices send LSR packets to request
LSAs from each other to synchronize their LSDBs.
• Full: This state occurs when the two neighbors establish an adjacency after their LSDB synchronization is completed.

25. As shown in the figure, host A and host B cannot communicate with each other.

A. True
B. False

(Answer: True)

26. What is the default priority of direct routers?

A. 20
B. 30
C. 10
D. 0

(Answer: D)

Routing Protocol or Route Type Route Priority

Direct 0

OSPF 10

IS-IS 15

Static 60

RIP 100

OSPF ASE 150

OSPF NSSA 150

IBGP 255

EBGP 255

27. What is the default priority of RIP routes on a Huawei AR router?

A. 0
B. 120
C. 60
D. 100
(Answer: D)

28. On the network shown in the figure, the router receives a data packet with the destination IP address 11.0.12.1 from host A. After
the packet is forwarded by the router, which of the following are destination MAC address and destination IP address of data
packet?

A. MAC-D, 11.0.12.1
B. MAC-D, 10.0.12.2
C. MAC-B, 11.0.12.1
D. MAC-C, 11.0.12.1

(Answer: C)

29. Which of the following is not included in the routing table?

A. Cost
B. Next-hop address
C. MAC
D. Destination/Mask

(Answer: C)
A routing table contains the following key data for each IP packet:

• Destination: identifies the destination IP address or destination network address of an IP packet.

• Mask: supplements the destination address to specially identify the address of the network segment where the destination host or
router resides.

• Proto: indicates the protocol through which routes are learned.

• Pre: indicates the routing protocol preference of a route. There may be multiple routes to the same destination, leading to different
next hops and outbound interfaces.
• Cost: indicates the route cost. When multiple routes to the same destination have the same preference, the route with the lowest
cost is selected as the optimal route.

• NextHop: indicates the IP address of the next device that an IP packet passes through.

• Interface: indicates the outbound interface through which an IP packet is forwarded.

30. Which of the following commands can be used to view the routing table on the VRP?
A. display ip interface brief
B. display current-configuration
C. display ip forwarding-table
D. display ip routing-table

(Answer: D)

31. All interfaces on a router OSPF must belong to the same area.
A. True
B. False

(Answer: A)

Router Type Description

Internal router All interfaces on an internal router belong to the same OSPF area.

Area Border Router (ABR) An ABR belongs to two or more areas, one of which must be a backbone area.
 Router Type Description

An ABR is used to connect the backbone area and non-backbone areas. It can be
physically or logically connected to a backbone area.

Backbone router One or more interfaces on a backbone router belong to a backbone area.
Internal routers in Area 0 and all ABRs are backbone routers.

ASBR (AS Boundary Router) An ASBR exchanges routing information with other ASs.
An ASBR is not required to reside on the border of an AS. It may be an internal router or
an ABR. An OSPF device that has imported external routing information becomes an
ASBR.

32. The output of the “display current-configuration configuration ospf” command on a router is as follows. Which of the following
statements are false?

<R1>display current-configuration configuration ospf

#
ospf 1 router-id 10.0.1.1
area 0.0.0.0
network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.3
network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.255
#
Return
<R1>display ospf peer

OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 10.0.12.1

Neighbors

Area 0.0.0.0 interface 10.0.12.1 (GigabitEthernet0/0/0)’s neighbors

Router ID: 10.0.2.2 Address: 10.0.12.2
State: Full Mode: Nbr is Slave Priority: 1
DR: 10.0.12.2 BDR: 10.0.12.1 MTU: 0
Dead timer due in 30 sec
Retrans timer interval: 5
Neighbor is up for 00:01:48
Authentication Sequence: [ 0 ]

A. The local device is faulty, and the configured Router ID is different from the actual one.
B. The Router ID that takes effect on the local device is 10.0.1.1
C. Area authentication is enabled on the router.
D. The router ID that takes effect on the local device is 10.0.12.1.

(Answer: A)
33. What is the main function of the DNS protocol?
A. Remote access
B. Email transmission
C. Domain name resolution
D. File transfer

(Answer: C)

34. As shown in the figure, router A has successfully telneted to router B using 10.0.12.2. Which of the following operations will interrupt
the Telnet session between router A and router B?

A. Configure a static route.

B. Change the IP address of G0/0/1
 C. Disable G0/0/1
D. Enable OSPF on G0/0/1

(Answer: C)

35. The packets returned by the DHCP server to the DHCP client must be unicast packets.
A. True
B. False

(Answer: A)

36. What is the advantages of using DHCP to allocate IP address?

A. If the configuration information changes, for example, the DNS server address changes, the administrator only needs to modify
the configuration information on the DHCP server, facilitating unified management.
B. DHCP provides heavy workload and is difficult to manage.
C. IP address can be reused.
D. DHCP can prevent IP address conflicts.

(Answer: A, C, D)

37. If an Ethernet data frame carries Length/Type = 0x8100, which of the following ports may send the data frame?
A. Hybrid port of the switch
B. Trunk port of the switch
C. Serial interface of the router
D. Access port of the switch

(Answer: A, B)
The value 0x8100 indicates an 802.1Q-tagged frame.
After the 802.1Q defines VLAN frames, ports can be classified into four types:
• Access port on a switch connects to the port on a host. The access port can only connect to an access link. Only the VLAN whose ID
is the same as the default VLAN ID is allowed on the access port. Ethernet frames sent from the access port are untagged frames.

• Trunk port on a switch connects to another switch. It can only connect to a trunk link. Multiple tagged VLAN frames are allowed on
the trunk port.

• Hybrid port on a switch can connect either to a host or to another switch. A hybrid port can connect either to an access link or to a
trunk link. The hybrid port allows multiple VLAN frames and removes tags from some VLAN frames on the outbound port.

• QinQ port are enabled with the IEEE 802.1 QinQ protocol. A QinQ port adds a tag to a single-tagged frame and supports a maximum
of 4094 x 4094 VLAN tags, which meets the requirement for the VLAN quantity.

38. According to the topology and configuration shown in the figure, an Eth-Trunk link can be set up between the two switches on which
LSW2 is the Actor.
[LSW1] lacp priority 100
[LSW1] interface Eth-trunk 1
[LSW1-Eth-Trunk1] mode lacp-static
[LSW1-Eth-Trunk1] max active-linknumber 2
#
[LSW1] interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] eth-trunk 1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] lacp priority 100
#
[LSW1] interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] eth-trunk 1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] lacp priority 100

[LSW2] lacp priority 200

[LSW2] interface Eth-trunk 1
[LSW2-Eth-Trunk1] mode lacp-static
[LSW2-Eth-Trunk1] max active-linknumber 2
#
[LSW2] interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
[LSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] eth-trunk 1
#
[LSW2] interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2
[LSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/2] eth-trunk 1
 A. True
B. False

(Answer: B)
The end with a smaller priority value functions as the Actor. If the two ends have the same priority, the end with a smaller MAC address
functions as the Actor.

39. Which of the following statements is true about link aggregation in manual load balancing mode?
A. The number of active interfaces can be set in manual load balancing mode.
B. In manual load balancing mode, devices at both ends of a link send LACPDUs to each other.
C. In manual load balancing mode, all active interfaces forward data and load balance traffic.
D. A maximum of four active interfaces can be configured in manual load balancing mode.

(Answer: A)

40. Refer the graphic, which of the following statements are true about VLAN configuration on Huawei switches?

A. Client4 belongs to VLAN 40, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
B. Client1 belongs to VLAN 10, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
C. Client4 does not belongs to VLAN 40, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is incorrect.
D. Client2 belongs to VLAN 20, and the MAC address-based VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.
E. Client3 is in VLAN 30, and the VLAN assignment command on LSW1 is correct.

(Answer: A, B, D, E)

41. Which of the following is the feature of port-based VLAN assignment?

A. VLAN IDs are allocated based on the protocol type and encapsulation format of data frames.
B. The VLAN needs to be configured again when hosts move.
C. The VLAN does not need to be configured again when hosts move.
D. The VLAN tag is added to data frames on the IP address carried in the frames.

(Answer: B)

42. As shown in the figure, if host A has the ARP cache of host B, host A can ping host B.
 A. True
B. False

(Answer: A)

43. A configured internal host of a private network wishes to access the Internet. What must be configured on the enterprise network
egress router in order to achieve this?
A. NAT Easy IP
B. BGP
C. DHCP
D. Default route

(Answer: A, D)

44. ICMP packet do not contain port numbers. Therefore, NAPT cannot be used.
A. True
B. False

(Answer: B)
NAT and NAPT can translate only the address in the IP packet header and the port information in the TCP/UDP header. For some
protocols such as ICMP and FTP, the data in the packets may contain the IP address or port information. Such contents cannot be
translated through NAT. ALG is used to solve the preceding problem.

45. Which of the following authentication method is more secure for PPP?
A. MD5
B. CHAP
C. PAP
D. SSH

(Answer: B)

46. Which type of ACL does the following command configure?

Rule permit 8021p 7
A. Basic ACL
B. Intermediate ACL
C. Layer 2 ACL
D. Advanced ACL

(Answer: C)

47. After the keepalive function is enabled for a GRE tunnel, the local end of the GRE tunnel sends a keepalive packet to the remote end
every 10s.
A. True
B. False

(Answer: F)

The Keepalive function is unidirectional, you have to enable the function at both ends of the GRE tunnel. The Keepalive configuration
takes effect at one end even if the function is disabled at the other end. By default, the interval for sending Keepalive packets is 5 seconds
and retry-times to 3. With the default settings, the GRE tunnel goes down if a device does not receive any Keepalive packets within 15
seconds.

48. The ACL is essentially a packet filter. An ACL takes only after it is applied to the service module.
 A. True
B. False
(Answer: A)
49. SNMPv1 defines five protocol operations.
A. True
B. False

(Answer: A)
SNMP defines five types of Protocol Data Units (PDUs), namely, SNMP packets, to be exchanged between the management process and
the agent process.

• get-request: indicates that the management process reads one or more parameter values from the MIB of the agent process.

• get-next-request: indicates that the management process reads the next parameter value in the lexicographic order from the MIB of the
agent process.

• set-request: indicates that the management process sets one or more parameter values in the MIB of the agent process.

• get-response: returns one or more parameter values. This operation is performed by the agent process. It is the response to the
preceding three operations.

• trap: is actively sent by the agent process to inform the management process of some important events.

50. Which of the following statements is true about the alternate port in RSTP?
A. The alternate port does not forward user traffic but learns MAC address.
B. An alternate port acts as a backup of the designated port and provides a backup path from the root to the related network
segment.
C. An alternate port acts as a backup of the root port and provides an alternate path from the designated bridge to the root bridge.
D. The alternate port forwards user traffic and learns MAC address.

(Answer: C)

▪ From the perspective of configuration BPDU transmission:

▪ An alternate port is blocked after learning a configuration BPDU sent from another bridge.

▪ A backup port is blocked after learning a configuration BPDU sent from itself.

▪ From the perspective of user traffic:

▪ An alternate port acts as a backup of the root port and provides an alternate path from the designated bridge to the root bridge.

▪ A backup port acts as a backup of the designated port and provides a backup path from the root bridge to the related network
segment.

51. How many DUIDs can each DHCPv6 client have?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4

(Answer: C)

DUIDs can be generated in the following modes:

▪ DUID Based on Link-layer Address Plus Time (DUID-LLT)

In DUID-LLT mode, DUIDs are generated for DHCPv6 devices based on link-layer addresses and the time.

▪ DUID Assigned by Vendor Based on Enterprise Number (DUID-EN)

In DUID-EN mode, DUIDs are generated for DHCPv6 devices based on the enterprise numbers registered with the Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority (IANA).

▪ DUID Based on Link-layer Address (DUID-LL)

In DUID-LL mode, DUIDs are generated for DHCPv6 devices based on link-layer addresses.
52. What is the decimal value of the “Protocol” field in the IPv6 packet header of OSPFv3 packets?
A. 69
B. 89
C. 92
D. 59

(Answer: B)
 Page No | 1

53. One of the reasons that segment routing (SR) is introduced is that traditional LDP has some restrictions. Which of the following
statements about LDP restrictions are true?
A. LDP has 11 types of protocol packets, which greatly increases link bandwidth consumption and device CPU usage.
B. LDP does not support automatic label allocation.
C. LDP path computation depends on an IGP. If the IGP and LDP are not synchronized, black holes are generated, affecting
services.
D. LDP supports path computation only based on IGP SPF (minimum cost), not based on traffic engineering.

(Answer: B)

Huawei

H12-211 PRACTICE EXAM

HCNA-HNTD (Huawei Certified Network Associate - Huawei Network
Technology and Device)

________________________________________________________________________________________________

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 2

Product Question: 233

Question 1

An administrator currently manages AR2200 devices in the network through a single password, however the company
wishes to introduce another two administrators and provide unique user credentals and privilege levels for telnet
access to the network devices. What acton can be taken? (Choose three)

A. Confgure three users under the AAA-view, and assign each a diferent password.
B. The authentcaton mode must be changed to AAA
C. Each administrator must be assigned a privilege level.
D. A public IP address must be assigned to each user for telnet access

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 2

Which of the following authentcaton methods are supported for Telnet users? (Choose three)

A. Password authentcaton
B. AAA local authentcaton
C. MD5 authentcaton
D. No authentcaton

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 3

Which authentcaton modes does AAA support? (Choose three).

A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 4

[RTA]aaa
[RTA-aaa]domain huawei
[RTA-aaa-domain-huawei]authentcaton-scheme au1
[RTA-aaa-domain-huawei]authentcaton-scheme au2
Refer to the confguraton output. RTA has been confgured using AAA as shown, and associated with the “huawei”
domain. For users in the huawei domain, which authentcaton-scheme will be used

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 3

A. au1
B. au2
C. au1 will be used. When au1 is deleted, users will use au2
D. au2 will be used. When au2 is deleted, users will use au1

Aoswern B

Question 5
A user accesses a server supportng AAA, for which the authorizaton mode on the AAA server has been confgured
using the command “authorizaton-mode hwtacacs if-authentcated”. Which of the following statements regarding
this command are true? (Choose three).

A. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authentcated using local authentcaton.
B. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authentcated using remote authentcaton.
C. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will bypass authentcaton.
D. The hwtacacs server will authorize the user.

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 6

Which of the following descriptons regarding eSight is not correct?

A. eSight is used to monitor and manage enterprise networks.

B. eSight supports only Huawei devices
C. eSight supports WLAN management and monitoring of hotspot coverage.
D. eSight supports the backup of confguraton fles and network trafc analysis.

Aoswern B

Question 7

What of the following statements is correct regarding access control list types and ranges?

A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999

B. An advanced ACL value ranges from 3000-4000
C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999
D. An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000

Aoswern C

Question 8

Which of the following parameters is not used by Advanced ACL?

A. Source interface
B. Destnaton port number

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 4

C. Protocol number
D. Time-range

Aoswern A

Question 9
[RTA]acl 2001
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule permit source 10.0.1.0 0.0.0.255
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 10.0.1.0 0.0.0.255
Refer to the confguraton output. Which of the following statements regarding ACL 2001 is correct?

A. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be denied.

B. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be permited.
C. Packets destned for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets destned for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be permited.

Aoswern B

Question 10

[RTA]acl 2002
[RTA-acl-basic-2002]rule permit source 20.1.1.1 0
[RTA-acl-basic-2002]rule permit source 30.1.1.1 0
Refer to the confguraton output. A network administrator confgured the ACL on router RTA, as shown. Which of the
following statements regarding the rule order are correct? (Choose two).

A. The rule-number of the frst rule is 1

B. The rule-number of the frst rule is 5
C. The rule-number of the second rule is 2
D. The rule-number of the second rule is 10

Aoswern B, D

Question 11

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator has confgured ACL 2000 to flter packets on RTA, as shown.
Which of following statements regarding the subsequent behavior are correct? (Choose two).

A. RTA will forward packets received from Host A

B. RTA will drop packets received from Host A
C. RTA will forward packets received from Host B
D. RTA will drop packets received from Host B

Aoswern B, C

Question 12

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator wishes to deny Host A access to the HTTP server but allow access to

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 5

all other servers. Which of the following ACL rules will achieve this?

A. Rule deny tcp source 10.1.1.1 0 destnaton 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destnaton-port eq 21

B. Rule deny tcp source 10.1.1.1 0 destnaton 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destnaton-port eq 80
C. Rule deny udp source 10.1.1.1 0 destnaton 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destnaton-port eq 21
D. Rule deny udp source 10.1.1.1 0 destnaton 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destnaton-port eq 80

Aoswern B

Question 13
Following a failure of services in the network, an administrator discovered that the confguraton in one of the
enterprise routers had been changed. What actons can be taken by the administrator to prevent further changes?
(Choose three)

A. The administrator should limit access by setng the login privilege of users to 0.
B. The administrator should confgure AAA to manage user authorizaton on the router.
C. The administrator should confgure an ACL to allow only the administrator to manage the router.
D. The administrator should confgure port-security on the router

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 14

[RTA]acl 2001
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 20 permit source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 10 deny source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
Refer to the confguraton output. Which of the following statements is correct regarding the confguraton of the ACL
on RTA?

A. Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be denied.

B. Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be permited.
C. Packets destned for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets destned for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be permited.

Aoswern A

Question 15

[RTA]acl 2001
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 172.16.1.1 0.0.0.0
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 172.16.0.0 0.255.0.0
Refer to the confguraton output. Which of the following statements are correct regarding the confguraton of the
ACL on RTA? (Choose two).

A. Packets from network 172.16.1.1/32 will be denied.

B. Packets from network 172.16.1.0/24 will be denied
C. Packets from network 172.17.1.0/24 will be denied
D. Packets from network 172.18.0.0/16 will be denied.

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 6

Aoswern A, D

Question 16
The network administrator wants to improve the performance of network transmission, what steps can the
administrator take? (Choose two)

A. Change the work mode to full duplex of each end staton.

B. Link the end statons together using a switch.
C. Change the work mode to half duplex of each end staton.
D. Link the end statons together using a hub.

Aoswern A, B

Question 17

On Huawei switch, which of the following commands can be used to set port duplex mode as "auto negotaton"?
(Choose two)

A. duplex negotaton auto

B. duplex auto-negotaton
C. duplex auto
D. undo duplex

Aoswern C, D

Question 18

The network administrator wishes to transmit data between two end statons. The network interface cards of both
devices operates at 100Mbps however one supports half duplex while the other uses full duplex mode.
What will occur as a result?

A. The end statons cannot communicate.

B. The end statons can communicate, but data may be lost during transmission of large amounts of trafc.
C. The end statons will operate normally
D. The end statons can communicate, but speed is diferent during transmission of large amounts of trafc.

Aoswern B

Question 19

An Ethernet port can work one of three duplex modes, whereas an Optcal Ethernet port only supports one single
mode. Which of the following represents this mode?

A. Full-duplex
B. Half-duplex
C. Auto-negotaton
D. Simplex

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 7

Aoswern A

Question 20
While inspectng packets in the network, a network administrator discovers a frame with the destnaton MAC address
of 01-00-5E-A0-B1-C3. What can the administrator determine from this?

A. The MAC address is a unicast address.

B. The MAC address is a broadcast address
C. The MAC address is a multcast address.
D. The MAC address is incorrect

Aoswern C

Question 21

According to OSI reference model, which layer is responsible for end to end error checking and fow control?

A. Physical layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer

Aoswern D

Question 22

Which of the following mechanisms are used for fow control? (Choose three)

A. Acknowledgement
B. Bufering
C. Source quench messages
D. Windowing

Aoswern B, C, D

Question 23

Source Destnaton Protocol Info

10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [SYN] Seq=0 Win=8192 Len=0 MSS=1460
10.0.12.2 10.0.12.1 TCP telnet> 50190 [SYN, ACK] Seq=0 Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=0 MSS=1460
10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [ACK] Seq=1 Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=0
Refer to the capture output.The administrator has captured three packets in the network. Which statement regarding
the capured packets is incorrect?

A. This packets represent a TCP three-way handshake process.

B. 10.0.12.1 is the telnet server, while 10.0.12.2 is the telnet client.
C. The three packets contain no applicaton data.

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 8

D. 10.0.12.1 uses port 50190 to buid the telnet connecton.

Aoswern B

Question 24
An Ethernet frame is captured by network protocol analyzer tool and the value of Type/Length feld is 0x0800. Which
of the following statements about the frame are correct? (Choose two)

A. The frame structure of the frame is Ethernet_II

B. The frame structure of the frame is 802.3
C. Its upper layer protocol is IP
D. Its upper layer protocol is IPX

Aoswern A, C

Question 25

Which of the following descriptons regarding the TTL feld of the IP packet is correct?

A. The TTL defnes how many packets the source can send.
B. The TTL defnes the duraton during which the source can send packets.
C. The TTL value will decrement by 1 each tme the packet is routed.
D. The TTL value will increment by 1 each tme the packet is routed.

Aoswern C

Question 26

Which of the following statements are correct about TTL feld in IP packet? (Choose two)
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

A. The maximum value of TTL is 65535

B. Normally, it's impossible for a router to receive a packet whose TTL is zero.
C. The main purpose of TTL is to prevent IP packets from circulatng endlessly in a network which can consume a lot of
bandwidth
D. TTL value will be decremented as a packet is passed through the network devices such as hub, LAN switch and
router.

Aoswern B, C

Question 27

In the case of Huawei router, what is the "-i" parameter in a Ping command issued on a VRP operatng system used to
set?

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 9

A. Interface for sending an Echo Request packet

B. Source IP address for sending an Echo Request packet
C. Interface for receiving an Echo Reply packet
D. Destnaton IP address for receiving an Echo Reply packet

Aoswern A

Question 28
To provide the informaton about the IP addresses that a user packet traverses along the path to the destnaton,
which of the following does Tracert record in each expired ICMP TTL packet?

A. Destnaton port
B. Source port
C. Destnaton address
D. Source address

Aoswern D

Question 29

Which of the following statements regarding the verifcaton of IP connectvity are false? (Choose three)

A. The ping 127.0.0.1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly inserted into the host’s
Ethernet port.
B. The ping command with the host IP address as the destnaton can be used to verify that the TCP/IP protocol suite is
functoning correctly.
C. The ping command can be used to verify connectvity between the host and the local gateway.
D. The command “ipconfg /release” can be used to check connectvity problems between the host and the local
gateway.

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 30

A network administrator uses the ping command to check for points of failure in the network. Which protocols will be
used during this process? (Choose two)
<choice ident=“A”>
<choice ident=“B”>
<choice ident=“C”>
<choice ident=“D”>

A. ICMP
B. TCP
C. ARP
D. UDP

Aoswern A, C

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 10

Question 31

A network administrator recently used tracert to trace the path to the destnaton IP address of an external website,
however the trace path displayed only a tmeout result. Which of the following statements correctly explains the
reason for this? (Choose two)

A. The source router had shutdown the ICMP functon.

B. This destnaton IP address does not exist.
C. The gateway canot fnd a route to the destnaton.
D. This is a normal phenomenon.

Aoswern B, C

Question 32

Ping 10.0.0.2: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break

Reply from 10.0.0.2: bytes=800 Sequence=1 tl=255 tme=2 ms
Reply from 10.0.0.2: bytes=800 Sequence=2 tl=255 tme=10 ms
--- 10.0.0.2 ping statstcs ---
2 packet(s) transmited
2 packet(s) received
0.00% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 2/6/10 ms
A network administrator uses the ping command to test connectvity to the destnaton 10.0.0.2 on a Huawei AR
series router. Which statement regarding the output is correct?

A. The network administrator used the command ping -c 2 -s 800 10.0.0.2

B. The network administrator used the command ping -a 2 -v 800 10.0.0.2
C. The path between the source and destnaton is not OK.
D. The network administrator changed the default TTL value.

Aoswern A

Question 33

Which of the following statements explains the behavior of the ICMP redirect functon? (Choose two)

A. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the source is on
the same segment as the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the source.
B. When a router receives data on an interface, and the router’s IP address matches the destnaton IP of the data, an
ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the source.
C. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the source is on
the same segment as the next hop, an ICMP Redirect message will be sent by the source to the router.
D. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the source is on
a diferent segment from the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the source

Aoswern A, D

Question 34

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 11

Host A wishes to send data to host C, and generates an ARP request to obtain the destnaton MAC address.
Which statement is true?

A. The destnaton IP address of the ARP request is Host C

B. The destnaton MAC address of this ARP request is Host C
C. The destnaton IP address for the ARP request is a broadcast IP address.
D. The destnaton MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of G0/0/0 on RTA

Aoswern A

Question 35

An ARP request is sent by host A to obtain the destnaton MAC address of host D, Which statement is true about
regarding the ARP reply?

A. The destnaton MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Switch A
B. The destnaton IP address of this packet is the VLANIF1 IP address of Switch A
C. The destnaton MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Host A
D. The destnaton IP address of this packet is a broadcast IP address.

Aoswern C

Question 36

Which of the following applicatons can be used to detect the path along which the data packets are transmited from
the source to the destnaton?
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

A. Route
B. Netstat
C. Tracert
D. Send

Aoswern C

Question 37

How many probe packets are sent for each TTL value by default when "tracert" is used to detect the path along which
packet is sent from source to destnaton?

A. 3
B. 4
C. 6
D. 8

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 12

Aoswern A

Question 38
Which of the following types can ICMP packets be classifed into? (Choose two)

A. ICMP transport packet

B. ICMP error reportng packet
C. ICMP query packet
D. ICMP applicaton packet

Aoswern B, C

Question 39
On VRP platorm, which of the following parameters can be used together with the "ping" command to specify the
source address of an echo request message?

A. A
B. S
C. D
D. N

Aoswern A

Question 40

A router functoning as a Proxy receives an ARP request packet, but fnds that the destnaton address in the packet is
not intended for itself. In this case, what will the router do? (Choose two)

A. Discard the packet.

B. Check for a route that matches the destnaton address.
C. Forward its MAC address to the ARP request sender afer fnding that a route to the destnaton address is available.
D. Broadcast the ARP request packet.

Aoswern B, C

Question 41

Two end statons in a point-to-point network perform address resoluton. Which of the following statements is
correct?

A. The destnaton address of an ARP request from each staton will be a unicast MAC address.
B. The destnaton address of an ARP request from each staton will be a broadcast IP address.
C. The destnaton address of an ARP reply from each staton will be a unicast MAC address
D. The destnaton address of an ARP reply from each staton will be a broadcast MAC address.

Aoswern C

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 13

Question 42

What will the destnaton MAC address be at the moment a frame is transmited by the host, when the router is the IP
destnaton?

A. The MAC address of the switch.

B. The MAC address of the router interface G0/0/0.
C. The MAC address of the host.
D. The destnaton MAC address will be a broadcast MAC address.

Aoswern D

Question 43

Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Choose two)

A. A system can determine whether confictng IP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP packet
B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet.
C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address.
D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.

Aoswern A, B

Question 44

UDP is connectonless oriented, which of the following must be used in order to ensure reliability?

A. Internet Protocol
B. Applicaton Layer Protocol
C. Network Layer Protocol
D. Transmission Control Protocol

Aoswern B

Question 45

The administrator has confgured an IP address for Host A and Host B, but had forgoten to confgure a default
gateway. What efect will this have on the hosts?

A. Neither host will be afected, and therefore will be able to communicate with the peer.
B. Host A will be unable to connect to the router’s G0/0/0 interface.
C. Hosts will be unable to comminicate unless arp-proxy is enabled on the router.
D. The host will be unable to reach neither the local nor remote network destnatons .

Aoswern C

Question 46

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 14

A host has established a telnet connecton with the router atached to interface G0/0/0. Which of the following
statements are correct? (Choose two)

A. The destnaton address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of the router interface.
B. The destnaton address of a frame will be the MAC address of the switch interface.
C. The destnaton port number in a segment header will have a value of 80.
D. The destnaton IP address of a packet will be the IP address of the network interface of the router.

Aoswern A, D

Question 47

The administrator uses the ping command on the host to test connectvity to the website www.huawei.com.
The command line shows a request tme out. The administrator displays the ARP entries for the host.
Which entry will be found in the ARP cache table of the host?

A. The MAC address of the destnaton www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
B. The MAC address of the switch will exist in the ARP cache.
C. The IP address of the destnaton www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
D. The MAC address of router interface G0/0/0, will exist in the ARP cache.

Aoswern D

Question 48

When R2 forwards data to R3 from R1, which of the following items will change? (Choose two)

A. The source MAC address

B. The destnaton MAC address
C. The source IP address
D. The destnaton IP address

Aoswern A, B

Question 49

If Host B also confgured the IP address as “192.168.1.1/24”, an IP address confct will occur. What will happen as a
result?

A. Host B will send an ICMP request to the destnaton with the confgured IP address. If a reply is received, the host
will notfy of an address confict.
B. Host A will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destnaton 192.168.1.1, for which
Host B will reply.
C. Host B will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destnaton 192.168.1.1, for which Host
A will reply.
D. Host A will ignore any received ARP request intended for destnaton 192.168.1.1.

Aoswern C

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 15

Question 50

<Quidway>display mac-address
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MAC Address VLAN/VSI Learned-From Type
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5489-98ec-f018 1/- GE0/0/13 dynamic
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total items displayed = 1
Refer to the graphic. A switch atempts to forward a frame to the MAC destnaton 5489-98ec-f01. What operaton will
occur on the switch?

A. The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
B. The switch will report that the destnaton is unreachable and report this to the source.
C. The switch will food the frame via all ports, with excepton of the port on which the frame was received.
D. The switch will drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address table.

Aoswern C

Question 51

Host A has been connected to switch A and confgured with an IP address. When Host A initally forwards a frame,
what acton will be taken by Switch A?

A. Switch A will drop this frame.

B. Switch A will atempt to food the frame to all ports except for the G0/0/1 interface.
C. Switch A will forward the frame via ports G0/0/1, G0/0/2 and G0/0/3.
D. Switch will receive this frame before returning the frame to G0/0/1.

Aoswern B

Question 52

Which of the following statements describes the network shown? (Choose two)

A. There are 6 collision domains in the network.

B. There are 2 broadcast domains in the network.
C. There are 4 collision domains in the network.
D. There are 6 broadcast domains in the network.

Aoswern B, C

Question 53

A server is linked to port interface G0/0/1 of a switch. The administrator wishes to allow only this server to be linked
to this interface on the switch. Which method can be used to achieve this?

A. Confgure a statc ARP entry using the server’s IP address and MAC address in the switch.

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 16

B. Confgure a statc MAC address binding entry of the server’s MAC address and the interface in the switch.
C. Confgure the default gateway of the switch to be the same as the server’s IP address.
D. It is not possible to enable a single device to be associated with an interface.

Aoswern B

Question 54

An administrator connects two switches together in a local enterprise network. The ports of one switch support Fast
Ethernet, while the ports of the other switch support Gigabit Ethernet. Hosts connected to one switch are able to
communicate, however communicaton between the two switches fails. What is the possible reason for this?

A. The ports have disabled auto-negotaton.

B. One port is supportng auto-negotaton, while auto-negotaton is disabled on the port of the other switch.
C. The port of one switch is operatng using half duplex mode, while the port of the other switch is using full duplex
mode.
D. A Fast Ethernet port cannot communicate directly with a Gigabit Ethernet port.

Aoswern A

Question 55

A layer 2 LAN switch generates CAM table entries according to the ( ) of the received frame.

A. Source MAC address

B. Destnaton MAC address
C. Source IP address
D. Destnaton IP address

Aoswern A

Question 56

Which of the following statements about collision domains and broadcast domains are correct? (Choose three)

A. Devices connected to the same hub form a collision domain

B. Devices connected to the same hub form a broadcast domain
C. Devices connected to the same bridge form a collision domain
D. Devices connected to the same bridge form a broadcast domain
E. Devices connected to the same router form a broadcast domain

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 57

Which of the following statements regarding layer-2 switch is incorrect?

A. The switch learns MAC addresses automatcally

B. The layer-3 header is modifed before the received packet is transmited

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 17

C. The layer-2 header is modifed before the received packet is transmited.

D. The layer-2 LAN switch operates at data link layer

Aoswern B

Question 58
[R1]display interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0
GigabitEthernet0/0/0 current state : Administratvely DOWN
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Refer to the display output. What can be determined based on the output of the display command?

A. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is connected to a wrong cable

B. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with an IP address
C. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with a dynamically defned route.
D. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 has been manually shut down by an administrator.

Aoswern D

Question 59

Which of the following statements regarding statc and dynamic routng is incorrect?

A. The statc route can be easily confgured and managed on the enterprise network.
B. The use of dynamic routng is more convenient for the administrator to manage the network following network
convergence.
C. The statc route can automatcally recover when a link failure is encountered.
D. Dynamic routng will use more resources than statc routes.

Aoswern C

Question 60

Which of the following are routed protocols? (Choose two)

A. IP
B. OSPF
C. BGP
D. IPX

Aoswern A, D

Question 61

Which of the following statements regarding the routng table are correct? (Choose two)

A. The next hop in the routng table is redundant because the outgoing interface can be used for packet forwarding.
B. The routes from generated by diferent protocols have diferent preferences.
C. The metrics of diferent routng protocols are comparable.

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 18

D. The metrics of diferent routng protocols are not comparable

Aoswern B, D

Question 62
Which of the following commands can be used to display the routng table on a Quidway router?

A. display ip path
B. display ip routng-table
C. display interface
D. display current-confguraton

Aoswern B

Question 63
Which of the following entries is not included in the routng table?

A. source address
B. next hop
C. destnaton address
D. cost

Aoswern A

Question 64
Which of the following problems are caused by routng loops? (Choose three)

A. Slow convergence
B. Packets circulate between routers
C. Router restartng
D. Inconsistency of routng informaton

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 65
An administrator wishes to manage the router in the remote branch ofce, which method can be used?

A. Telnet
B. FTP
C. Console Connecton
D. DHCP

Aoswern A

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 19

Question 66

The network administrator has confgured the router as shown. Which statement is false?

A. The confguraton manages the user login through the console interface.
B. The user login through vty 0 has the privilege to run level 2 commands.
C. The user login through telnet has the privilege to run level 2 commands.
D. The confguraton manages the telnet user login.

Aoswern A

Question 67
The administrator cannot use telnet to manage the AR2200. The administrator is able to verify connectvity to the
router and has been informed that other administrators have no difcultes using telnet. Which statements describe
the possible reasons for this problem? (Choose two)

A. The user’s status has been blocked

B. The user’s priviledge level has been changed to 0.
C. The user has been deleted.
D. The telnet service in the AR2200 router has been disabled.

Aoswern A, C

Question 68

A user logged into a VRP supported device through telnet, but when atemptng to confgure the device, found that he
is unable to use the sytem-view command to enter the system-view. What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose
two)

A. The device’s VTY interface only provides permission for some telnet users to run the sytem-view command.
B. The user’s telnet sofware restricts use of this command.
C. The user’s privilege level is lower than the level associated with the system-view command.
D. The system-view command privilege level is lower than the level associated with the user.

Aoswern A, C

Question 69

The users who log on the router through Telnet are not permited to confgure IP address. What is the possible
reason?

A. Communicaton failures occur between the user and the router.

B. The authentcaton mode of Telnet is set incorrectly.
C. Privilege level of Telnet is set incorrectly.
D. SNMP parameters are set incorrectly.

Aoswern C

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 20

Question 70

Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two)

A. A single collision domain exists between RTA and SWC.

B. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWB.
C. A single collision domain exists between SWA and SWC.
D. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWC.

Aoswern C, D

Question 71
On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command “ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0” has been
confgured. Which following statements are correct? (Choose two).

A. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/24

B. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/32
C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in RTA’s routng-table
D. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 does not exist in RTA’s routng-table

Aoswern B, D

Question 72

Refer to the graphic. The host has a problem establishing a telnet connecton with the router atached to interface
G0/0/0. Which of the following steps can be used to help the administrator identfy the problem? (Choose two)
<choice ident=“A”>
<choice ident=“B”>
<choice ident=“C”>
<choice ident=“D”>

A. Check whether the host has confgured the gateway IP address.

B. Check whether the switch has confgured the gateway IP address.
C. Use the ping tool to check connectvity between host and router.
D. Check the telnet server confguraton is right on the router.

Aoswern C, D

Question 73

Which of the following methods are supported by VRP platorm to confgure the router? (Choose three)

A. Through the Console port

B. Through Telnet
C. Through the AUX port
D. Through FTP

Aoswern A, B, C

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 21

Question 74

The administrator wishes to update the confguraton fle of an AR2200 router using a USB cable. How can this be
achieved? (Choose two)

A. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the mini USB port of the AR2200 router.
B. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the USB port of the AR2200 router.
C. The AR2200 router cannot support confguraton updates through a USB cable.
D. The administrator should install the mini USB drivers on the terminal afer connectng the USB.

Aoswern A, D

Question 75

The administrator wishes to manage a network through telnet from a user's terminal to a router. How can this be
achieved?

A. A connecton should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the console port of the router.
B. A connecton should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the ethernet port of the router.
C. A connecton should be established between the console port of the terminal and the ethernet port of the
router.use console cable connect pc’s ethernet port and router’s console port.
D. A connecton should be established between the COM port of the terminal and the console port of the router.

Aoswern B

Question 76

Whilst confguring a device, an administrator experiences trouble remembering certain commands. Which of the
following will help support the administrator? (Choose two)

A. TAB
B. queston mark
C. ctrl+b
D. ctrl+c

Aoswern A, B

Question 77

<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei] user-interface console 0
[Huawei-ui-console0] user privilege level 15
[Huawei-ui-console0] authentcaton-mode password
[Huawei-ui-console0] set authentcaton password cipher huawei2012
[Huawei-ui-console0] quit
Refer to the confguraton output. The administrator confgured the device using the commands in the confguraton
output. Regarding these commands, which statement is false?

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 22

A. The administrator wishes to enable management through the console interface.

B. Following confguraton, the administrator cannot manage the device remotely.
C. A user that logs-in through the console interface is assigned the highest privilege level.
D. The password of a user logged in through console is ‘cipher huawei2012’

Aoswern D

Question 78
Which of the following is abbreviaton of VRP?

A. Versatle Routne Platorm

B. Virtual Routng Platorm
C. Virtual Routng Plane
D. Versatle Routng Platorm

Aoswern D

Question 79
Which of the following must be used to establish the confguraton environment when a router is powered on for the
frst tme?

A. SSL
B. SSH
C. Console port
D. Telnet

Aoswern C

Question 80

Which of the following parameter setngs for terminal emulaton are correct when confguring a Huawei router
through the Console port?

A. 4800bps, 8 data bits,1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no fow control
B. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no fow control
C. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware fow control
D. 19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no fow control

Aoswern B

Question 81

Which of the following commands is used to enter the system-view from the user view on a Huawei router?

A. system-view
B. enable
C. confgure terminal

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 23

D. interface system

Aoswern A

Question 82
On VRP platorm, the command lines are classifed into four levels in increasing priority: Visit level, Monitoring level,
Confguraton level, and Management level. At which level, the operator is permited to confgure service but is not
permited to operate the fle system?

A. Visit level
B. Monitoring level
C. Confguraton level
D. Management level

Aoswern C

Question 83

On Huawei VRP platorm, which of the following can be used to invoke the history command saved by the command
line interface? (Choose two)
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

A. Up cursor key < >

B. Lef cursor key < >
C. Ctrl+P
D. Ctrl+U

Aoswern A, C

Question 84

Which of the following commands can be used to view the current confguratons on a Huawei router?

A. display current-confguraton
B. display saved-confguraton
C. view saved-confguraton
D. show startup-confguraton

Aoswern A

Question 85

The administrator wishes to change name of the router. Under which view should the administrator be in order to
achieve this?

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 24

A. User-view
B. System-view
C. Interface-view
D. Protocol-view

Aoswern B

Question 86
<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei]command-privilege level 3 view user save
Refer to the command output. What is the result of the shown command?

A. The command adjusts the save command of a user to privilege level 3.

B. The command adjusts the save command in the user view to privilege level 3.
C. The command adjusts the user view command privilege level to 3, and saves the confguraton.
D. The command adjusts the privilege level of a user to 3, and saves the confguraton.

Aoswern B

Question 87

<Huawei>system-view
[Huawei]history-command max-size 20
Refer to the command output. Which statements regarding the shown command are true? (Choose two)

A. The command is used to adjust the size of the history command bufer
B. The default value of the history command bufer is 5.
C. The command should be confgured in the user-interface view.
D. Once confgured, commands totalling up to 20 bytes can be saved in the bufer.

Aoswern A, C

Question 88

An AR2200 router is required to be reconfgured from scratch. Which steps are needed to achieve this? (Choose two)

A. Reset the saved confguraton

B. Clear the current confguraton
C. Reboot the AR2200.
D. Assign the confguraton fle to be used at next startup.

Aoswern A, C

Question 89

An adminstrator has been requested to replace the confguraton fle of a router in the network. The administrator has
been instructed that afer logging into the router, he must frst permenantly erase the current confguraton fle
confg.zip from the system. Which command should he use to achieve this?

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 25

A. delete /force confg.zip

B. delete /unreserved confg.zip
C. reset confg.zip
D. clear confg.zip

Aoswern B

Question 90
Which of the following commands can switch a view from the system view to the user view?

A. System-view
B. Router
C. Quit
D. User-view

Aoswern C

Question 91
Which of the following storage devices are supported by Huawei router? (Select 4 Answers)

A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. Hard Disk
E. CF Card

Aoswern A, B, C, E

Question 92
Which of the following storage devices is used to store the startup confguraton fles in a router?
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. BootROM

Aoswern B

Question 93
<Huawei>reset saved-confguraton

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 26

Warning: The acton will delete the saved confguraton in the device.
The confguraton will be erased to reconfgure. Contnue? [Y/N]:
Refer to the confguraton output. Which of the following statements are true? (Select two answers)

A. A user should enter ‘Y’ when wishing to clear the saved confguraton fle.
B. The saved-confguraton fle that the device starts with can be erased.
C. The saved-confguraton will be deleted afer typing N
D. The saved-confguraton fle will be replaced with the current-confguraton.

Aoswern A, B

Question 94

When a router is powered on, the router reads the confguraton fle saved in the default save directory to get itself
initalized. If the confguraton fle does not exist in the default save directory, what does the router use to initalize
itself?

A. New confguraton fle

B. Inital confguraton fle
C. Default parameters
D. Current confguraton fle

Aoswern C

Question 95

<Huawei>display startup
MainBoard:
Startup system sofware: sd1:/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
Next startup system sofware: sd1:/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
Backup system sofware for next startup: null
Startup saved-confguraton fle: null
Next startup saved-confguraton fle: null
Startup license fle: null
Next startup license fle: null
Startup patch package: null
Next startup patch package: null
Startup voice-fles: null
Next startup voice-fles: null
Refer to the display output. Which statement is false?

A. The current confguraton fle has not been saved.

B. The current startup system sofware is ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
C. The next startup system sofware cannot be changed.
D. The next startup system sofware can be changed by using the “startup system sofware <startup-
sofwarename>.cc” command.

Aoswern C

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 27

Question 96

<Huawei>
Warning: Auto-Confg is working. Before confguring the device, stop Auto-Confg. If you perform confguratons when
Auto-Confg is running, the DHCP, routng, DNS, and VTY confguratons will be lost. Do you want to stop Auto-Confg?
[y/n]:
When an administrator frst initalizes the router, a warning is displayed. Which statement regarding this warning is
correct?

A. If Auto-Confg is required, the administrator should select ‘y’

B. If Auto-Confg is not required, the administrator should select ‘n’, for which subsequent confguraton of the
DHCP server, routng, DNS server and VTY user confguraton is lost
C. When a device is started for the frst tme, the Auto-Confg functon is actve.
D. When a device is started for the frst tme, the Auto-Confg functon is inactve.

Aoswern C

Question 97

An AR2200 router in the company network cannot boot. In order to resolve this, the administrator wishes to update
the VRP sofware. What should he/she do?

A. The administrator should use a console cable to connect the router and host, and directly upgrade the device.
B. The administrator should use FTP to transfer the VRP sofware, by confguring the AR2200 router as an FTP client.
C. The administrator should use DHCP to boot the AR2200, and then use the AR2200 router as a TFTP client to
download the VRP sofware from the server.
D. The administrator should use the telnet command on the client to remote access the device, and upgrade the VRP
sofware.

Aoswern B

Question 98

<Huawei>
Warning: Auto-Confg is working. Before confguring the device, stop Auto-Confg. If you perform confguratons when
Auto-Confg is running, the DHCP, routng, DNS, and VTY confguratons will be lost. Do you want to stop Auto-Confg?
[y/n]:
Refer to the output. When the administrator frst starts the router, a system notce is displayed, however afer
rebootng this router, the notce disappeared. What is the reason for this? (Choose two)

A. This notce only appears during the very frst device startup.
B. The administrator has confgured the device and saved the confguraton, causing the notce to disappear.
C. The administrator selected ‘n’ and did not save the confguraton
D. The administrator selected ‘y’ and saved the confguraton.

Aoswern B, D

Question 99

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 28

An end system is unable to communicate with a DHCP server following the startup process. Which IP address may be
used by the client?

A. 0.0.0.0
B. 127.0.0.1
C. 169.254.2.33
D. 255.255.255.255

Aoswern C

Question 100

[Huawei]ip pool pool1

Info: It's successful to create an IP address pool.
[Huawei-ip-pool-pool1]network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Huawei-ip-pool-pool1]gateway-list 10.10.10.1
Refer to the confguraton output. The administrator wishes to confgure the DHCP server pool in order to assign an IP
address to the customer’s terminal device.
Which command should be included in the confguraton to provide the minimal lease period for IP addresses?

A. dhcp select relay

B. lease day 1
C. lease 24
D. lease 0

Aoswern B

Question 101

A DHCP server has been established in the enterprise network. Afer the client has obtained an IP address from the
DHCP server, the user decided to modify the IP address manually. In what way may this afect the enterprise network?
(Choose two).

A. The client may experience an IP address confict.

B. The client may access the network normally.
C. The client’s interface connecton will shutdown.
D. The client will associate with another DHCP server.

Aoswern A, B

Question 102

Refer to the graphic. Two switches have been connected as shown and both support STP. The administrator has
confgured switch A as a DHCP server and set interface VLANIF1 of switch B to obtain an IP address from switch A, A
link failure occurs on port interface G0/0/1 of switch B, What acton will occur as a result?

A. The two switches will be unable to communicate.

B. Switch B will send a DHCP Discovery message to obtain a new IP address.
C. Swich B will contnue to use the IP address obtained from Switch A

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 29

D. Switch B will send a DHCP Release message to release the IP address.

Aoswern C

Question 103
A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An administrator discovers
however that some hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the DHCP server’s address pool. What are
the possible reasons for this? (Choose three).

A. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is allocatng IP addresses to hosts that happen to be within a closer
proximity than the authorized DHCP server
B. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the
169.254.0.0 address range.
C. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the
127.254.0.0 address range.
D. All addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 104

Router] ip pool pool1

[Router-ip-pool-pool1] network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-pool1] gateway-list 10.10.10.1
[Router-ip-pool-pool1] quit
[Router] ip pool pool2
[Router-ip-pool-pool2] network 10.20.20.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-pool2] gateway-list 10.20.20.1
[Router-ip-pool-pool2] quit
[Router] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[Router-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ip address 10.10.10.1 24
[Router-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] dhcp select global
Refer to the confguraton output. Following confguraton, a host is connected to the interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1
of the router. Which IP address will the client obtain?
<choice ident=“A”>
<choice ident=“B”>
<choice ident=“C”>
<choice ident=“D”>

A. An IP address from network 10.10.10.0/24 will be assigned.

B. An IP address from network 10.20.20.0/24 will be assigned.
C. The host will be unable to obtain an IP address.
D. An IP address may be assigned from either 10.10.10.0/24 or 10.20.20.0/24.

Aoswern A

Question 105

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 30

The IP addresses of clients in the network are deployed via a DHCP server. When a host reboots, which message will
the host frst send to the DHCP server?

A. DHCP DISCOVER
B. DHCP REQUEST
C. DHCP OFFER
D. DHCP ACK

Aoswern B

Question 106

A DHCP Unique Identfer (DUID) in DHCPv6 can be confgured in VRP using which formats? (Choose two).

A. DUID-LL
B. DUID-LLT
C. DUID-EN
D. DUID-LLC

Aoswern A, B

Question 107

Which of the following statements about the informaton contained in a Database Descripton packet are true?
(Choose three)

A. A Database Descripton packet contains all informaton about each LSA

B. A Database Descripton packet contains only the header of an LSA
C. The header of an LSA is the unique identfer of the LSA
D. The header of an LSA is only a small porton of all the data of the LSA

Aoswern B, C, D

Question 108

What is the default authentcaton mode for the default_admin domain?

A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X

Aoswern B

Question 109

How many domains can be confgured on a Huawei router?

A. 30

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 31

B. 31
C. 32
D. 33

Aoswern A

Question 110
An authentcator router has been confgured with two domains named “Area1” and “Area2”, following which a user is
created with the username “huawei” and the password ”hello” for authentcaton. Which domain does this user
belongs to?
<choice ident=“A”>
<choice ident=“B”>
<choice ident=“C”>
<choice ident=“D”>

A. Area1 domain
B. Area2 domain
C. default domain
D. default_admin domain

Aoswern C

Question 111

In order to check if the interface serial 1/0/0 is working in either DCE or DTE mode, command ( ) is used.

A. display mode serial 1/0/0

B. display controller
C. display interface serial 1/0/0
D. display current-confg

Aoswern C

Question 112

How is mapping performed on a DTE device in a Frame Relay network?

A. The local DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

B. The local IP address is mapped to a remote DLCI number.
C. The local DLCI number is mapped to a local IP address.
D. The remote DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

Aoswern A

Question 113

If Frame Relay implements dynamic address mapping for the PVC, which protocol will be used?

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 32

A. LMI protocol.
B. ARP protocol.
C. RARP protocol.
D. InARP protocol

Aoswern D

Question 114
Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements correctly describe the Frame Relay devices? (Choose two)

A. RTA is a DTE device.

B. FRA is a DTE device.
C. FRB is a DCE device.
D. The interface on RTA is a DCE interface

Aoswern A, C

Question 115

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are connected over a Frame Relay network using a DLCI, as shown. Statc mapping is
required on RTA, Which of the following commands will achieve this?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.1.1 30

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.1.1 31
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.2.1 30
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.2.1 31

Aoswern C

Question 116

Refer to the graphic. RTA is a DTE device connected to a Frame Relay switch, and uses dynamic address mapping to
establish the PVC. With regards to the confguraton, which of the following commands are not necessary? (Choose
two).

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]ip address 172.16.1.1 24

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]link-protocol FR
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr interface-type dte
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr inarp

Aoswern C, D

Question 117

Which command should be used to check the mapping between protocol addresses and frame relay addresses?

A. display fr interface
B. display fr map-info

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 33

C. display fr inarp-info
D. display interface brief

Aoswern B

Question 118
Which of the following protocols is used in Frame Relay to map the address to DLCI dynamically?
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

A. ARP protocol
B. RARP protocol
C. InARP protocol
D. Map protocol

Aoswern C

Question 119
Which of the following parameters must be specifed when confguring statc mapping for Frame Relay network?
(Choose two)

A. Local DLCI
B. Remote DLCI
C. Local network layer protocol address
D. Remote network layer protocol address

Aoswern A, D

Question 120

Which of the following regarding Frame Relay DLCI are correct? (Choose three)

A. DLCI is locally signifcant

B. DLCI is allocated by DTE
C. The range of DLCI value that can be used is from 16-1007
D. The same DLCI can be confgured on diferent physical interfaces

Aoswern A, C, D

Question 121

Which of the following commands is used to enable dynamic address mapping protocol in the interface encapsulated
with Frame Relay?

A. fr inarp

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 34

B. fr reverse-arp
C. inverse-arp
D. reverse-arp

Aoswern A

Question 122
What is the meaning of 200 in the command "fr map ip 10.1.1.2 200"?

A. remote logical channel ID

B. local DLCI
C. remote interface ID
D. remote node ID

Aoswern B

Question 123
Refer to the graphic.RTA and RTB connect to a Frame Relay switch and use dynamic address mapping. The command
“fr map ip 10.0.1.1 32” is then confgured on RTB, without using the undo inarp command. What will occur as a
result? (Choose two).

A. RTB will be unable to communicate with RTA

B. 10.0.1.1 will stll be mapped to DLCI 31 on RTB
C. 10.0.1.1 will stll be mapped to DLCI 32 on RTB
D. DLCI 32 will be actvated on RTB

Aoswern A, C

Question 124

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are connected to the same Frame Relay switch and use same DLCI number, which
following is correct? (Choose two).

A. RTA and RTB must be associated with the same PVC

B. RTA and RTB can be associated with diferent PVC’s
C. The DLCI on the diferent physical interfaces can be the same
D. The DLCI on the diferent physical interfaces cannot be the same

Aoswern B, C

Question 125

Which of the following commands can be used to display mapping relatonship between network address and DLCI?

A. display fr interface
B. display fr
C. display fr map-info

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 35

D. display fr brief

Aoswern C

Question 126
Which of following may be the reasons that cause Frame Relay PVC to work abnormally? (Choose three)

A. Same DLCI number is confgured on the same router

B. LMI type mismatch
C. Frame Relay encapsulaton type mismatch
D. Incorrect confguraton of the DLCI number

Aoswern B, C, D

Question 127

An administrator wishes to update the VRP sofware of company’s AR2200 router. How can this be achieved? (Choose
three)

A. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP sofware, with the AR2200 router as the FTP client.
B. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP sofware, with the AR2200 router as the FTP server.
C. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP sofware, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP server.
D. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP sofware, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP client.

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 128

An administrator wishes to implement new features in the network, but the VRP version of one AR2200 router is out
of date. The administrator needs to upgrade the VRP sofware. Which of the following optons regarding fle transfer is
false?

A. The AR2200 router can functon as a TFTP client to support the upgrade.
B. The AR2200 router can functon as the TFTP server to support the upgrade.
C. The AR2200 router can functon as the FTP server to support the upgrade.
D. The AR2200 router can functon as an FTP client to support the upgrade.

Aoswern B

Question 129

FTP and TFTP can be used to update the system fle on Huawei routers. Which of the following statements are
correct? (Choose three)
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 36

A. Huawei router can be confgured as FTP Client

B. Huawei router can be confgured as FTP Server
C. Huawei router can be confgured as TFTP Client
D. Huawei router can be confgured as TFTP Server

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 130
An administrator discovered he/she was unable to use TFTP to transfer fles to the router. Which of the following
describes the likely reason for this?

A. The TFTP service had been disabled on the router.

B. TCP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
C. UDP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
D. The username and password had been modifed.

Aoswern C

Question 131

FTP may be used to upgrade a router's VRP image. Which of the following transmission modes should be used to
achieve this?

A. binary mode
B. ASCII mode
C. byte mode
D. leter mode

Aoswern A

Question 132

A client failed to transfer a fle to the FTP server, but found the IP connectvity was without problem. The client
assumed that the problem was with the port confguraton. The blocking of which ports would likely cause this
problem? (Choose two)

A. 21
B. 80
C. 20
D. 50649

Aoswern A, C

Question 133

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB have established a GRE tunnel, but only RTA has enabled the keepalive functon.
When RTB receive a keepalive message from RTA, how will RTB respond?

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 37

A. RTB will discard the keepalive message.

B. RTB willl record receipt of the keepalive message but won’t reply
C. RTB will send a keepalive in response.
D. RTB will send a keepalive reply and begin to actvely send keepalive messages.

Aoswern C

Question 134
Refer to the graphic. Two hosts communicate through a GRE tunnel. When the GRE tunnel is up, the network
administrator confgures a statc route on RTA to route packets to Host B, Which of the following commands will
achieve this?

A. ip route-statc 10.1.2.0 24 GigabitEthernet0/0/1

B. ip route-statc 10.1.2.0 24 200.2.2.1
C. ip route-statc 10.1.2.0 24 200.1.1.1
D. ip route-statc 10.1.2.0 24 tunnel 0/0/1

Aoswern D

Question 135

When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to confgure the data link layer encapsulaton type of a
serial interface as HDLC?

A. encapsulaton hdlc
B. link-protocol hdlc
C. hdlc enable
D. link-protocol ppp

Aoswern B

Question 136

Refer to the graphic. Packet encapsulaton in the IPsec architecture is performed as shown. Which IPsec mode is being
used to encapsulate the packet?

A. normal mode
B. transport mode
C. tunnel mode
D. this encapsulaton is wrong

Aoswern C

Question 137

Refer to the graphic. IPsec VPN uses ESP to encrypt which felds?

A. TCP, Data and ESP Trailer

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 38

B. ESP, TCP and Data

C. ESP, TCP, Data and ESP Trailer
D. ESP, TCP, Data, ESP Trailer and ESP Auth

Aoswern A

Question 138
Refer to the graphic. In order to improve security, the two hosts use IPsec VPN to transmit data. Which IPsec mode
and protocol can be used to hide the host’s IP address? (Choose two).

A. AH
B. transport mode
C. tunnel mode
D. ESP

Aoswern C, D

Question 139

If AH and ESP are both required to protect data streams between IPsec peers, how many Security Associatons (SA)
are required in total?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4

Aoswern D

Question 140

Refer to the graphic. The data is transmited using IPsec tunnel mode. The felds of which headers will be
authentcated?

A. TCP and Data

B. Origin IP, TCP and Data
C. AH, Origin IP, TCP and Data
D. The felds of all headers

Aoswern C

Question 141

Two routers establish an IPsec tunnel, which of the following does not need to be the same on both peering devices?

A. Encapsulaton mode
B. Transform mode
C. Proposal name

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 39

D. authentcaton algorithm

Aoswern C

Question 142
Which of the following formats represent an accurate condensing of the IPv6 address
2031:0000:720C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:130B? (Choose two).

A. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E0:839A:130B
B. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B
C. 2031::720C::9E0:839A:130B
D. 2031:0:720C::9E0:839A:130B

Aoswern A, D

Question 143

Which of the following IPv6 addresses can be confgured on a router’s interface? (Choose two).

A. fe80:13dc::1/64
B. f00:8a3c::9b/64
C. ::1/128
D. 2001:12e3:1b02::21/64

Aoswern A, D

Question 144

The IPv6 address achitecture does not include which of the following address types?

A. unicast
B. multcast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Aoswern C

Question 145

Which of the following descriptons regarding IPv6 addresses are correct? (Choose two)

A. IPv6 addresses are 64 bits in length.

B. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits in length.
C. IPv6 extension headers are processed in order.
D. IPv6 extension headers are processed randomly.

Aoswern B, C

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 40

Question 146

Interface G0/0/1 on RTA contains a MAC address of 00e0-fc03-aa73 and is confgured with the IPv6 address
2001::2E0:FCFF:FE03:AA73. Which method is most likely to have been used to confgure the interface IPv6 address?

A. DHCPv6
B. Auto-link
C. ARP
D. EUI-64

Aoswern D

Question 147

In a small network suppportng IPv6, a network administrator wishes implement RIPng. Which of the following
commands should be used to enable this protocol?

A. [RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]ripng 1 enable
B. [RTA]ripng 1 enable
C. <RTA>ripng 1 enable
D. [RTA-ripng-1]ripng 1 enable

Aoswern A

Question 148

In a network supportng IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

A. multple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentcaton
D. multcast updates

Aoswern C

Question 149

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB have established an IPv6 network for which an IPv6 address has been confgured
only on the G0/0/1 interface. RTA is unable to ping RTB. The administrator then confgures v3 along with a router-id
on both routers, and enables OSPFv3 on G0/0/1 of both RTA and RTB. Which of the following statements are correct?
(Choose two).

A. RTA and RTB can establish an OSPFv3 neighbor relatonship.

B. RTA and RTB cannot establish an OSPFv3 neighbor relatonship.
C. RTA can ping RTB.
D. RTA cannot ping RTB.

Aoswern A, D

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 41

Question 150

The network administrator has decided to confgure link aggregaton in the enterprise network. Which of the
following represent advantages of link aggregaton? (Choose three)

A. Load balancing.
B. Improved bandwidth.
C. Enhanced reliability.
D. Improved security.

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 151

In port aggregaton, “multple” ports are aggregated to form a port aggregaton group so that all the member ports in
the group share the outgoing/incoming load. At which layer is port aggregaton implemented?

A. Physical Layer
B. Data Link Layer
C. Network Layer
D. Transport Layer

Aoswern B

Question 152

What benefts does port aggregaton yield? (Choose three)

A. Improves link bandwidth

B. Implements load sharing
C. Improves network reliability
D. Facilitates data copy for analysis

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 153

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator wishes to aggregate the two links as member interfaces of Ethtrunk
Which statement is correct?

A. The interfaces will be aggregated with load balancing.

B. The interfaces will be aggregated, but only interface GE0/0/1 will send data fow.
C. The interfaces will be aggregated, but the Eth-trunk will not be actve.
D. The interfaces cannot be aggregated.

Aoswern D

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 42

Question 154

What is the maximum number of member interfaces supported by a single Eth-Trunk?

A. 6.
B. 8.
C. 10
D. 12.

Aoswern B

Question 155
The Eth-Trunk frame forwarding mechanism used to prevent changes in the data sequence forwards frames based on
which of the following parameters?

A. The same source or destnaton IP address

B. The same source or destnaton MAC address.
C. The same protocol type.
D. The same source or destnaton port number.

Aoswern A, B

Question 156

In Layer 2 mode, the transmission rate of an Eth-Trunk interface is determined by which of the following?

A. Maximum number of Up member links

B. Minimum number of Up member links
C. Number of Up member interfaces
D. Number of interfaces.

Aoswern A, C

Question 157

The network administrator wishes to forward data over an Eth-trunk, however associated member interfaces operate
at diferent rates. In terms of the resultng behavior, which of the following is true?

A. The two switches will not be able to communicate.

B. The higher rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.
C. The Eth-Trunk will work normally.
D. The lower rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.

Aoswern D

Question 158

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 43

The network administrator atempts to add interface G0/0/1 on Switch A to Eth-trunk 1, however the command fails.
Which of the following may cause this?

A. The interface is operatng in half-duplex mode.

B. The interface has been shutdown.
C. The interface is already associated with another Eth-trunk.
D. The interface is an access port.

Aoswern C, D

Question 159

A network requires a soluton to allow 50 private IP addresses to be translated, however only a single public address
is available for use. Which translaton method can be used to support this requirement?

A. Statc NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT

Aoswern C

Question 160

NAPT allows for multple internal addresses to be mapped to a single public address. How does NAT distnguish
between the diferent private addresses when mapping to the same public address?

A. The source MAC address is used.

B. The destnaton MAC address is used.
C. The source port number is used.
D. The destnaton port number is used.

Aoswern C

Question 161

Refer to the graphic. Host A is located in a private network. It is required that Host A not only be capable of routng
trafc over the public network, but also that public users are able to actvely communicate with Host A,
Which NAT translaton method should be confgured on the gateway?

A. Statc NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT

Aoswern A

Question 162

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 44

Refer to the graphic. In the private network, RTA dynamically assigns a public address from the address pool to hosts
without port translaton. Host C wishes to access the public network while pool addresses are assigned to Host A and
Host B, What will occur as a result?

A. The frst public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host A will be forced ofine.
B. The last public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host B will be forced ofine.
C. Host C will be unable to forward trafc over the public network.
D. All hosts will have access to the public network through pool address swapping.

Aoswern C

Question 163

A web server in a private network is required to provide HTTP services to public users. The network administrator is
required to confgure NAT on RTA, Which confguraton should be used?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
B. [RTA-Serial0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080
C. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
D. [RTA- Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080

Aoswern A

Question 164

The network administrator needs to confgure statc NAT on RTA, in order to allow Host A to communicate with Host
C. Which command is correct?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat outbound 200.1.1.10

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat statc global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.0
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat statc global 192.168.1.1 inside 200.1.1.10
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat statc global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.1

Aoswern D

Question 165

[RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]nat outbound 2000 address-group 1

Refer to the confguraton output. What does the value “2000” refer to?

A. It represents the ACL number.

B. It represents the NAT number.
C. It represents the translated port number.
D. It represents the number of bytes that can be translated before the address is returned to the public address pool.

Aoswern A

Question 166

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 45

NAPT uses the same public address but diferent port numbers to translate private addresses. Which statement
regarding the port number is correct?

A. It is necessary to confgure port number mapping manually.

B. It is only necessary to confgure the port number range.
C. It is not necessary to confgure port numbers.
D. An access control list is needed to assign port numbers.

Aoswern C

Question 167

A confgured internal host of a private network wishes to access the internet. What must be confgured on the
enterprise network’s edge router in order to achieve this? (Choose two)

A. NAT EasyIP
B. DHCP
C. BGP
D. Default route

Aoswern A, D

Question 168

Which of the following statements are correct about NAT? (Choose three)

A. NAT is the abbreviaton for "Network Address Translaton"

B. NAT is used for translaton between private and public network addresss.
C. When hosts inside a private network access the outside network, NAT is not required.
D. NAT provides an efectve way to solve the problem of insufcient IP addresses.

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 169

Which of the following technologies can allow a host with IP address 10.0.0.1 to access the internet?

A. Statc route
B. Dynamic route
C. Route import
D. NAT

Aoswern D

Question 170

Which of the following items can be translated by NAPT?

A. MAC address + port number

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 46

B. IP address + port number

C. Only MAC address
D. Only IP address

Aoswern B

Question 171
Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multcast mode are true? (Choose three)

A. The port receives only RIPv2 multcast packets.

B. The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
D. The port receives only RIPv1 multcast packets.

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 172

Which of the following statements regarding the router ID in OSPF are incorrect? (Choose three)

A. The router IDs of OSPF routers in the same area must be the same, but can be diferent in diferent areas.
B. The router ID must be the IP address of an OSPF router interface.
C. The router ID must be confgured manually.
D. A router running OSPF must have a router ID for it to operate properly.

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 173

Which of the following statements regarding Designated Routers in OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

A. DR is elected by all the routers in the same network segment.

B. If the priorites of two routers are diferent, the router with the lower priority will be elected as DR.
C. If the priorites of two routers are equal, the router with the higher Router ID will be elected as DR.
D. DR and BDR must be adjacent.

Aoswern A, C, D

Question 174

On the VRP platorm, which of the following commands is used to confgure the Router ID of a router as 1.1.1.1?

A. <Huawei>router id 1.1.1.1
B. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1
C. [Huawei]router-id 1.1.1.1
D. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 47

Aoswern B

Question 175
Which of the following OSPF versions is specifc to IPv6?

A. OSPFv1
B. OSPFv2
C. OSPFv3
D. OSPFv4

Aoswern C

Question 176
The administrator wishes to confgure OSPF on a router in the network however the router has no loopback interface.
Which value will be used as the router ID?

A. The lowest IP address of the router’s actve interfaces.

B. The highest IP address of the router’s actve interfaces.
C. The IP address of the management interface
D. The priority value of the router.

Aoswern B

Question 177

An administrator of a company supportng a large enterprise network wishes to implement OSPF on the network as
opposed to RIP. Which of the following points should the administrator use to support his reasoning for this change?
(Choose three)

A. OSPF has no hop count limitaton

B. OSPF has a lower routng update overhead
C. OSPF has a simpler confguraton.
D. OSPF supports faster convergence.

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 178

Which of the following statements regarding single area OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

A. An IP address needs to be confgured on a loopback interface of each router before confguring an OSPF area.
B. The value of an area can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
C. A single area can be confgured using any supported area number.
D. All of the links of the network need to be advertsed in Area 0.

Aoswern B, C, D

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 48

Question 179

10.0.1.0/24 O_ASE 150 2 D 10.0.23.3 Serial2/0/0

Refer to the display output. Which of the following statements regarding route shown are true? (Choose two)

A. The address 10.0.23.3 has been confgured on the peer’s serial 2/0/0 interface.
B. The route preference has been changed by the adminstrator.
C. The metric for the route 10.0.1.0 indicates that two hops are needed.
D. The route has been learned via the OSPF protocol.

Aoswern A, D

Question 180

Which of the following statements regarding link-state database and routng-table of a “single” OSPF area are correct?
(Choose two)

A. The link-state databases that all routers build are identcal.

B. The link-state databases that all routers build are diferent.
C. The routng-tables that all routers calculate are diferent.
D. The routng-tables that all routers calculate are identcal.

Aoswern A, C

Question 181

Which of the following steps are necessary to confgure OSPF on a Huawei router? (Choose three)

A. Confguraton of a router ID
B. Enabling of an OSPF process
C. Specifying an OSPF area
D. Confguraton of the network segments within each area

Aoswern B, C, D

Question 182

Which of the following statements regarding the DR in an OSPF network are correct? (Choose two)

A. There must be at least one DR in an OSPF area.

B. A DR must be elected among the routers through the negotatons that are defned by OSPF protocol.
C. Only the router with highest priority will be elected as DR.
D. Only NBMA or Broadcast networks need to elect DR

Aoswern B, D

Question 183

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 49

Which of the following VRP commands can be used to enter area 0 view? (Choose two)

A. [Huawei]ospf area 0
B. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0
C. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0.0.0.0
D. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0 enable

Aoswern B, C

Question 184
Which of the following commands is used to display the OSPF neighbor relatonship establishment?

A. display ospf neighbor

B. display ospf brief
C. display ospf peer
D. display ospf interface

Aoswern C

Question 185

With what kind of routers does a DRother router exchange link state informaton and route informaton? (Choose two)

A. DR
B. BDR
C. DRother
D. All OSPF neighbors

Aoswern A, B

Question 186

An OSPF area is a collecton of a group of routers and networks. OSPF defnes that routers that have the same ( )
belong to the same OSPF area.

A. neighbors
B. LSDB
C. LSA
D. adjacency

Aoswern B

Question 187

Which of the following statements about router IDs are true? (Choose two)

A. The routers contained in the same LSDB have the same router ID

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 50

B. Each router in an OSPF network must have a unique router ID

C. Two routers in diferent OSPF areas can have the same router ID
D. A router ID is expressed in a 32-bit doted decimal format.

Aoswern B, D

Question 188
OSPF allows for “multple” processes. By default, OSPF selects a process whose number is ( ).

A. 0
B. 1
C. 10
D. 100

Aoswern B

Question 189
In a network supportng IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

A. multple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentcaton
D. multcast updates

Aoswern C

Question 190
Two routers are confgured with OSPFv3. OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces of each router. Which of the following is
true in the event that the network administrator does not confgure a Router-ID?

A. The IP address of the loopback 0 interface will be used as the router ID

B. The IP address of the loopback 1 interface will be used as the router ID
C. The IP address of interface G0/0/0 will be used as the router ID
D. No router ID will be assigned to the router.

Aoswern D

Question 191

Destnaton/Mask protocol pre Cost Nexthop Interface

9.0.0.0/8 OSPF 10 50 1.1.1.1 Serial 1/0/0
9.1.0.0/16 RIP 100 5 2.2.2.2 Ethernet 0/0/1
Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements is correct when this router forwards the packet to the
destnaton host 9.1.4.5?

A. The router selects the frst entry to match the destnaton address of the packet because the preference of OSPF is

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 51

higher than the preference of RIP.

B. The router selects the second entry to match the destnaton address of the packet because the cost of RIP is lower
than that of OSPF.
C. The router selects the second entry to match the destnaton address of the packet because the outgoing interface
is an Ethernet interface. The forwarding speed of an Ethernet interface is faster than the forwarding speed of a serial
interface
D. The router selects the second entry to match the destnaton address of the packet because the router will match
the most specifc address.

Aoswern D

Question 192

According to the default value of route preference on the VRP platorm, which of the following represent the correct
sequence for direct route, statc route, RIP and OSPF if they are listed from high preference to low preference?

A. Direct, Statc, RIP, OSPF

B. Direct, OSPF, Statc, RIP
C. Direct, OSPF, RIP, Statc
D. Direct, RIP, Statc, OSPF

Aoswern B

Question 193

A router has learned two routes for the same network with the same prefx. One route has been learned via OSPF
with a metric of 4882, while the other route has been learned via RIPv2 with a metric of 4. Which route (s) will be
found in the routng table?

A. The RIPv2 route.

B. The OSPF and RIPv2 routes.
C. The OSPF route.
D. Neither of these routes will be found in the routng table.

Aoswern C

Question 194

Assume that the router has learnt the best route to the same destnaton by using RIP, OSPF and Statc Route
respectvely. By default, the Huawei router will select the route learnt via ( ) as the best route.

A. RIP
B. OSPF
C. RIPv2
D. Statc route

Aoswern B

Question 195

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 52

Afer checking the OSPF neighbor state, the administrator discovers that the router has established a TWOWAY state
with the peering router. What can be understood from this informaton? (Choose two)

A. The routers are confgured using the same process ID

B. The routers are confgured using the same area ID
C. The routers are confgured using wrong router ID
D. The routers are considered DROthers in a broadcast network

Aoswern D

Question 196

Refer to the graphic. An administrator has confgured OSPF on the two routers, following which he then implements
the command silent-interface s0/0/1 on RTA, What efect will this command have on the network? (Choose two)

A. The link informaton advertsed by RTB will be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA
B. The OSPF neighbor relatonship will fail between two routers.
C. The confguraton will not afect the OSPF neighbor relatonship between the two routers.
D. The link informaton advertsed by RTB will no longer be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA

Aoswern B, D

Question 197

Refer to the graphic. Which statements correctly explains the forwarding behavior between RTA and RTE? (Choose
two)

A. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0
B. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0.
C. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path from via E0/0/1.
D. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S2/0/0.

Aoswern B, C

Question 198

What functons does a Hello packet of OSPF implement? (Choose two)

A. Neighbor discovery
B. Deleton of unreachable neighbors.
C. Maintaining of neighbor relatonships.
D. Negotaton of parameters among adjacent ports.

Aoswern A, C

Question 199

Refer to the graphic. The link between RTA and RTB is encapsulated using PPP. The IP addresses of serial 1/0/1 of RTA

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 53

and serial 1/0/1 of RTB are in diferent network segments. Which following is correct? (Choose two)

A. RTA can ping 10.1.1.2 successfully

B. RTA cannot ping 10.1.1.2
C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in the routng-table of RTA
D. The route entry 10.1.1.2/32 exists in the routng-table of RTA

Aoswern A, D

Question 200

Two routers are connected through serial interfaces and support PPP encapsulaton. Which parameters must be
negotated to establish the PPP connecton? (Choose three).

A. MRU
B. Authentcaton password
C. Magic-Number
D. IP address

Aoswern A, C, D

Question 201

What are the three protocol components defned by PPP? (Choose three).

A. Data encapsulaton.
B. LCP
C. NCP
D. IPCP

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 202

Two routers are connected via serial interfaces, for which the link-protocol is PPP. The network administrator wishes
to confgure PPP authentcaton to improve security on this link. Which PPP authentcaton method provides a more
secure soluton?

A. CHAP
B. PAP
C. MD5
D. SSH

Aoswern A

Question 203

If PPP authentcaton fails, which type of packet will be sent to the authentcated peer by the authentcator?

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 54

A. Authentcate-Ack
B. Authentcate-Nak
C. Authentcate-Reject
D. Authentcate-Reply

Aoswern B

Question 204
Two routers are connected via serial interfaces and the link-protocol is PPP, but the MRU of two serial interface’s are
diferent, in PPP LCP negotated stage, what will happen?

A. LCP negotaton will fail

B. Negotaton will use the smaller value
C. Negotaton will use the larger value
D. Negotaton will use 1500

Aoswern B

Question 205

PPP is more secure than HDLC because PPP supports authentcaton protocols such as ( ). (Choose two)

A. PAP
B. MD5
C. CHAP
D. SSH

Aoswern A, C

Question 206

When both ends running PPP protocol detect that the physical link is actve, the link state will transit from dead to
establish. Which of the following protocols is used to negotate the link parameters during this phase?

A. IP
B. DHCP
C. LCP
D. NCP

Aoswern C

Question 207

A serial interface of a Huawei router currently using HDLC needs to assign PPP as the encapsulaton protocol.
Which of the following commands is required to be confgured at the serial interface view?

A. link-protocol ppp
B. encapsulaton ppp

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 55

C. enable ppp
D. address ppp

Aoswern A

Question 208
When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to confgure the PPP authentcaton method as PAP?

A. ppp pap
B. ppp authentcaton-pap
C. ppp authentcaton-mode pap
D. ppp pap-authentcaton

Aoswern C

Question 209

When confguring the PPP authentcaton method as PAP, which of the following operatons are necessary? (Choose
three)

A. Add the user name and password of the authentcated party to the local user list
B. Confgure the encapsulaton type of the interface connected to the peer as PPP.
C. Confgure PPP authentcaton method as CHAP
D. On the authentcated party end, confgure the user name and password that are sent to authentcator

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 210

In the PPP protocol, which of the following encrypton algorithms is used by CHAP?

A. DES
B. MD5
C. AES
D. None

Aoswern B

Question 211

What is the functon of the “ip address ppp-negotate” command?

A. Enables the functon of requestng for an IP address from the peer device.
B. Enables the functon of acceptng the request for an IP address from the remote device.
C. Enables the functon of statcally allocatng IP addresses to the peer.
D. None of the above

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 56

Aoswern A

Question 212
Two routers have established a point-to-point network using PPP. The administrator has confgured the routers to run
OSPF in the same area with the same router ID, what will behavior will occur as a result of the confguraton?

A. The routers will build a neighbor relatonship even though both routers are using the same router ID.
B. VRP will notfy of a router ID confict between the two routers.
C. The routers will build an adjacency even though both routers are using the same router ID
D. The routers will not send hello packets to each other because they are using the same router ID

Aoswern B

Question 213

The PPPoE session establishment process can be divided into which stages? (Choose two).

A. Discovery stage
B. DHCP stage
C. PPPoE Session stage
D. PPP connectng stage.

Aoswern A, C

Question 214

To establish multple PPP point-to-point connectons in the Ethernet network, a PPPoE server establishes connectons
with multple PPPoE clients on one Ethernet port. How does PPPoE diferentate between each connecton?

A. MAC address.
B. IP address and MAC address
C. MAC address and ppp-id
D. MAC address and session-id

Aoswern D

Question 215

When confguring a router as a PPPoE client, which confguraton is not necessary?

A. Confguraton of the dialer-rule

B. Confguraton of the dialer interface
C. Confguraton of an IP address on the dialer interface
D. Confguraton of a password on the dialer interface

Aoswern C

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 57

Question 216

Refer to the graphic. RTA is a PPPoE client, and sends PADI packets to Server A, Which distributon method is used for
sending PADI packets?

A. unicast
B. multcast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Aoswern C

Question 217

Refer to the graphic. RTA is a PPPoE client, and following transmission of PADI, Server A responds with PADO packets
to RTA, Which distributon method is used for sending PADO packets?

A. unicast
B. multcast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Aoswern A

Question 218

In the PPPoE discovery stage, the PPPoE server assigns a session-id to the PPPoE client in which packet?

A. PADI
B. PADO
C. PADR
D. PADS

Aoswern D

Question 219

Which command can be used to check the PPPoE client session status?

A. display ip interface brief

B. display current-confguraton
C. display pppoe-client session packet
D. display pppoe-client session summary

Aoswern D

Question 220

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 58

[Huawei]rip 1
[Huawei-rip-1]version 2
Refer to the command output. An administrator wishes to confgure RIP. Which other command needs to confgured
for RIP routes to be advertsed?

A. import-route GigabitEthernet 0/0/1

B. network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
C. network GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
D. network 192.168.1.0

Aoswern D

Question 221

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are running RIPv1. RTA has advertsed 10.0.0.0 and 192.168.1.0 to the RIP network.
Which routes will exist in the IP routng table of RTB? (Choose two)

A. 10.0.0.0/8
B. 192.168.1.1/32
C. 10.1.12.1/32
D. 192.168.1.0/24

Aoswern C, D

Question 222

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv1 to advertse its routes, while RTB is using
RIPv2. What efect will this have on learned routes?

A. RTA and RTB will both learn the routes advertsed by RIP.
B. RTA will learn the RIP route advertsed by RTB, however RTB is unable to learn the route advertsed by RTA
C. RTB will learn the RIP route advertsed by RTA, however RTA is unable to learn the route advertsed by RTB
D. Neither RTA nor RTB are able to learn the RIP routes advertsed by the peer.

Aoswern B

Question 223

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv1 to advertse its routes, while RTB is using
RIPv2 to advertse the route 1.1.1.1/32. How will the route 1.1.1.1/32 appear in the IP routng table of RTA?

A. This route will not appear in the IP routng table of RTA

B. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/8.
C. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/24.
D. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/32.

Aoswern D

Question 224

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 59

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv2 to advertse its routes, while RTB is using
RIPv1 to advertse the route 1.1.1.1/32. The administrator confgures “RIP version 2 multcast” for interface G0/0/1 of
RTB. How will the route 1.1.1.1/32 appear in the the IP routng table of RTA?

A. This route will not appear in the IP routng table of RTA

B. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/8.
C. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/24.
D. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/32.

Aoswern D

Question 225

A RIP router receives the routng update informaton from its neighbor. Which of the following statements regarding
routng update are correct? (Choose three)

A. The received route that is not in the routng table will be added only when its hop count value is less than 16.
B. The received route that already exists in the routng table will be updated only when the next hop is the router's
neighbor and the cost value is smaller.
C. The received route that already exists in the routng table will be updated only when the next hop is not the
router's neighbor and the cost value is smaller.
D. The received route that already exists in the routng table will be updated only when the next hop is the router's
neighbor and the cost value has been changed.

Aoswern A, C, D

Question 226

Which of the following commands is used to display the current running state and confguraton of RIP?

A. display protocol rip

B. show rip
C. display rip
D. display this rip

Aoswern C

Question 227

A user can view the informaton for the RIP protocol on a router. What does “Age tme” in the returned result of the
command mean?

A. The interval of updatng an RIP packet

B. The aging tme of an RIP route
C. The suppression tme of an RIP route
D. The tme spent on switching between RIP routes

Aoswern B

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 60

Question 228

Afer a command for displaying RIP route informaton is entered on a router, peer 192.168.1.2 on Serial1/0/0 is
displayed in the returned result. What does 192.168.1.2 stand for?

A. Address of a RIP neighbor

B. Address of the port with the RIP protocol enabled
C. Next hop address of the RIP route
D. Transmission address of the RIP protocol

Aoswern A

Question 229

Refer to the grapic. An administrator has confgured RIPv2 on the two routers, following which he implements the
command silent-interface s0/0/1 on RTA, What efect will this command have on the network? (Two Answers)

A. RTA will contnue to learn routes from RTB

B. RTB will contnue to learn routes from RTA
C. RTA will have no neighbor relatonship with RTB
D. RTB will have no adjacency relatonship with RTA

Aoswern A, D

Question 230

Refer to the graphic. R1, R2 and R3 are running RIPv1. R1 and R3 both advertse 172.16.0.0 to the RIP network. How
will this afect R2?

A. R2 will not have a route to the networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 172.16.2.0/24

B. R2 will only have a route to 172.16.1.0/24
C. R2 will only have a route to 172.16.2.0/24
D. R2 will have a route to both networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 172.16.2.0/24, but some packets for these destnatons
will be lost.

Aoswern D

Question 231

<R2>debugging rip 1
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.1-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13414: RIP 1: Receiving v1 response on GigabitEthernet0/0/0
from 10.0.12.1 with 1 RTE
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.2-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13465: RIP 1: Receive response from 10.0.12.1 on
GigabitEthernet0/0/0
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.3-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13476: Packet: Version 1, Cmd response, Length 24
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.4-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13527: Dest 1.0.0.0, Cost 1
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.5-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 2688: RIP 1: Ignoring packet. This version is not confgured.
Refer to the debug output. Following confguraton of R2, the administrator discovers that the behavior is not as

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 61

expected and performs debugging. Based on the output from the debug, what is the source of the problem?

A. R2 has confgured an ACL to block the route to network 1.0.0.0

B. R2 has enabled split horizon.
C. R1 is using authentcaton, however R2 is not.
D. R2 is operatng using RIPv2, while R1 is using RIPv1.

Aoswern D

https://www. pass4sures.com/
 Page No | 62

Question 232

Refer to the graphic. An administrator has confged RIPv2 in the two routers shows in the fgure. What will happen
afer confguring the following commands? (Choose two)
[RTA-Serial0/0/1]rip output
[RTA-rip-1]silent-interface s0/0/1

A. RTA will have the route learned from the RTB

B. RTB will have the route learn from the RTA
C. RTA will have no neighbor relatonship with RTB
D. RTB will have no neighbor relatonship with RTB

Aoswern A, D

Question 233

Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multcast mode are true? (Choose three)

A. The port receives only RIPv2 multcast packets.

B. The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
D. The port receives only RIPv1 multcast packets.

Aoswern A, B, C

https://www. pass4sures.com/
Huawei H12-211

Huawei Certified Network Associate- Huawei

Networking Technology and Device
Version: 6.0
 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 1

An administrator currently manages AR2200 devices in the network through a single password, however the company wishes to introduce another two
administrators and provide unique user credentials and privilege levels for telnet access to the network devices. What action can be taken? (Choose
three)

A. Configure three users under the AAA-view, and assign each a different password.
B. The authentication mode must be changed to AAA.
C. Each administrator must be assigned a privilege level.
D. A public IP address must be assigned to each user for telnet access

Answer: A,B,C
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 2

Which of the following authentication methods are supported for Telnet users? (Choose three)

A. Password authentication
B. AAA local authentication
C. MD5 authentication
D. No authentication

Answer: A,B,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 3

Which authentication modes does AAA support? (Choose three).

A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X

Answer: A,B,C
Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 2

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 4

[RTA]aaa

[RTA-aaa]domain huawei

[RTA-aaa-domain-huawei]authentication-scheme au1 [RTA-aaa-domain-

huawei]authentication-scheme au2

Refer to the configuration output. RTA has been configured using AAA as shown, and associated with the “huawei” domain. For users in the huawei
domain, which authentication-scheme will be used

A. au1
B. au2
C. au1 will be used. When au1 is deleted, users will use au2
D. au2 will be used. When au2 is deleted, users will use au1

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 5

A user accesses a server supporting AAA, for which the authorization mode on the AAA server has been configured using the command “authorization-
mode hwtacacs if-authenticated”. Which of the following statements regarding this command are true? (Choose three).

A. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authenticated using local authentication.
B. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authenticated using remote authentication.
C. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will bypass authentication.
D. The hwtacacs server will authorize the user.

Answer: A,B,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 6

Which of the following descriptions regarding eSight is not correct?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 3

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. eSight is used to monitor and manage enterprise networks.
B. eSight supports only Huawei devices
C. eSight supports WLAN management and monitoring of hotspot coverage.
D. eSight supports the backup of configuration files and network traffic analysis.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 7

What of the following statements is correct regarding access control list types and ranges?

A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999

B. An advanced ACL value ranges from 3000-4000
C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999
D. An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 8

Which of the following parameters is not used by Advanced ACL?

A. Source interface
B. Destination port number
C. Protocol number
D. Time-range

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 9

[RTA]acl 2001

[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule permit source 10.0.1.0 0.0.0.255

[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 10.0.1.0 0.0.0.255

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 4

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements regarding ACL 2001 is correct?

A. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be denied.

B. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be permitted.
C. Packets destined for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets destined for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be permitted.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 10

[RTA]acl 2002

[RTA-acl-basic-2002]rule permit source 20.1.1.1 0

[RTA-acl-basic-2002]rule permit source 30.1.1.1 0

Refer to the configuration output. A network administrator configured the ACL on router RTA, as shown. Which of the following statements regarding
the rule order are correct? (Choose two).

A. The rule-number of the first rule is 1

B. The rule-number of the first rule is 5
C. The rule-number of the second rule is 2
D. The rule-number of the second rule is 10

Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 11

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator has configured ACL 2000 to filter packets on RTA, as shown.

Which of following statements regarding the subsequent behavior are correct? (Choose two).

A. RTA will forward packets received from Host A.

B. RTA will drop packets received from Host A.
C. RTA will forward packets received from Host B.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 5

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
D. RTA will drop packets received from Host B.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 12

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator wishes to deny Host A access to the HTTP server but allow access to all other servers. Which of the
following ACL rules will achieve this?

A. Rule deny tcp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 21

B. Rule deny tcp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 80
C. Rule deny udp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 21
D. Rule deny udp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 80

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 13

Following a failure of services in the network, an administrator discovered that the configuration in one of the enterprise routers had been changed.
What actions can be taken by the administrator to prevent further changes? (Choose three)

A. The administrator should limit access by setting the login privilege of users to 0.
B. The administrator should configure AAA to manage user authorization on the router.
C. The administrator should configure an ACL to allow only the administrator to manage the router.
D. The administrator should configure port-security on the router

Answer: A,B,C
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 14

[RTA]acl 2001

[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 20 permit source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 6

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 10 deny source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements is correct regarding the configuration of the ACL on RTA?

A. Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be denied.

B. Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be permitted.
C. Packets destined for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets destined for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be permitted.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 15

[RTA]acl 2001

[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 172.16.1.1 0.0.0.0

[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 172.16.0.0 0.255.0.0

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are correct regarding the configuration of the ACL on RTA? (Choose two).

A. Packets from network 172.16.1.1/32 will be denied.

B. Packets from network 172.16.1.0/24 will be denied
C. Packets from network 172.17.1.0/24 will be denied
D. Packets from network 172.18.0.0/16 will be denied.

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 16

The network administrator wants to improve the performance of network transmission, what steps can the administrator take? (Choose two)

A. Change the work mode to full duplex of each end station.

B. Link the end stations together using a switch.
C. Change the work mode to half duplex of each end station.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 7

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
D. Link the end stations together using a hub.

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 17

On Huawei switch, which of the following commands can be used to set port duplex mode as "auto negotiation"? (Choose two)

A. duplex negotiation auto

B. duplex auto-negotiation
C. duplex auto
D. undo duplex

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 18

The network administrator wishes to transmit data between two end stations. The network interface cards of both devices operates at 100Mbps
however one supports half duplex while the other uses full duplex mode.

What will occur as a result?

A. The end stations cannot communicate.

B. The end stations can communicate, but data may be lost during transmission of large amounts of traffic.
C. The end stations will operate normally
D. The end stations can communicate, but speed is different during transmission of large amounts of traffic.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 19

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 8

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
An Ethernet port can work one of three duplex modes, whereas an Optical Ethernet port only supports one single mode. Which of the following
represents this mode?

A. Full-duplex
B. Half-duplex
C. Auto-negotiation
D. Simplex

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 20

While inspecting packets in the network, a network administrator discovers a frame with the destination MAC address of 01-00-5E-A0-B1-C3. What can
the administrator determine from this?

A. The MAC address is a unicast address.

B. The MAC address is a broadcast address
C. The MAC address is a multicast address.
D. The MAC address is incorrect

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 21

According to OSI reference model, which layer is responsible for end to end error checking and flow control?

A. Physical layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 22

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 9

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Which of the following mechanisms are used for flow control? (Choose three)

A. Acknowledgement
B. Buffering
C. Source quench messages
D. Windowing

Answer: B,C,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 23

Source Destination Protocol Info

10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [SYN] Seq=0 Win=8192 Len=0 MSS=1460

10.0.12.2 10.0.12.1 TCP telnet> 50190 [SYN, ACK] Seq=0 Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=0 MSS=1460

10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [ACK] Seq=1 Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=0

Refer to the capture output.The administrator has captured three packets in the network. Which statement regarding the capured packets is incorrect?

A. This packets represent a TCP three-way handshake process.

B. 10.0.12.1 is the telnet server, while 10.0.12.2 is the telnet client.
C. The three packets contain no application data.
D. 10.0.12.1 uses port 50190 to buid the telnet connection.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 24

An Ethernet frame is captured by network protocol analyzer tool and the value of Type/Length field is 0x0800. Which of the following statements about
the frame are correct? (Choose two)

A. The frame structure of the frame is Ethernet_II

B. The frame structure of the frame is 802.3
C. Its upper layer protocol is IP
D. Its upper layer protocol is IPX

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 10

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 25

Which of the following descriptions regarding the TTL field of the IP packet is correct?

A. The TTL defines how many packets the source can send.
B. The TTL defines the duration during which the source can send packets.
C. The TTL value will decrement by 1 each time the packet is routed.
D. The TTL value will increment by 1 each time the packet is routed.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 26

Which of the following statements are correct about TTL field in IP packet? (Choose two)

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">

A. The maximum value of TTL is 65535

B. Normally, it's impossible for a router to receive a packet whose TTL is zero.
C. The main purpose of TTL is to prevent IP packets from circulating endlessly in a network which canconsume a lot of bandwidth
D. TTL value will be decremented as a packet is passed through the network devices such as hub, LAN switchand router.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 11

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 27

In the case of Huawei router, what is the "-i" parameter in a Ping command issued on a VRP operating system used to set?

A. Interface for sending an Echo Request packet

B. Source IP address for sending an Echo Request packet
C. Interface for receiving an Echo Reply packet
D. Destination IP address for receiving an Echo Reply packet

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 28

To provide the information about the IP addresses that a user packet traverses along the path to the destination, which of the following does Tracert
record in each expired ICMP TTL packet?

A. Destination port
B. Source port
C. Destination address
D. Source address

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 29

Which of the following statements regarding the verification of IP connectivity are false? (Choose three)

A. The ping 127.0.0.1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly inserted into thehost’s Ethernet port.
B. The ping command with the host IP address as the destination can be used to verify that the TCP/IPprotocol suite is functioning correctly.
C. The ping command can be used to verify connectivity between the host and the local gateway.
D. The command “ipconfig /release” can be used to check connectivity problems between the host and thelocal gateway.

Answer: A,B,D

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 12

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 30

A network administrator uses the ping command to check for points of failure in the network. Which protocols will be used during this process?
(Choose two)

<choice ident=“A”>

<choice ident=“B”>

<choice ident=“C”>

<choice ident=“D”>

A. ICMP
B. TCP
C. ARP
D. UDP

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 31

A network administrator recently used tracert to trace the path to the destination IP address of an external website, however the trace path displayed
only a timeout result. Which of the following statements correctly explains the reason for this? (Choose two)

A. The source router had shutdown the ICMP function.

B. This destination IP address does not exist.
C. The gateway canot find a route to the destination.
D. This is a normal phenomenon.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 32

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 13

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Ping 10.0.0.2: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break

Reply from 10.0.0.2: bytes=800 Sequence=1 ttl=255 time=2 ms Reply from 10.0.0.2: bytes=800

Sequence=2 ttl=255 time=10 ms

--- 10.0.0.2 ping statistics --- 2 packet(s)

transmitted

2 packet(s) received

0.00% packet loss

round-trip min/avg/max = 2/6/10 ms

A network administrator uses the ping command to test connectivity to the destination 10.0.0.2 on a Huawei AR series router. Which statement
regarding the output is correct?

A. The network administrator used the command ping -c 2 -s 800 10.0.0.2

B. The network administrator used the command ping -a 2 -v 800 10.0.0.2
C. The path between the source and destination is not OK.
D. The network administrator changed the default TTL value.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 33

Which of the following statements explains the behavior of the ICMP redirect function? (Choose two)

A. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and thesource is on the same segment as the next
hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to thesource.
B. When a router receives data on an interface, and the router’s IP address matches the destination IP of thedata, an ICMP redirect
message will be sent by the router to the source.
C. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and thesource is on the same segment as the
next hop, an ICMP Redirect message will be sent by the source tothe router.
D. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and thesource is on a different segment from the
next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router tothe source

Answer: A,D

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 14

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 34

Host A wishes to send data to host C, and generates an ARP request to obtain the destination MAC address.

Which statement is true?

A. The destination IP address of the ARP request is Host C

B. The destination MAC address of this ARP request is Host C
C. The destination IP address for the ARP request is a broadcast IP address.
D. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of G0/0/0 on RTA.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 35

An ARP request is sent by host A to obtain the destination MAC address of host D. Which statement is true about regarding the ARP reply?

A. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Switch A.
B. The destination IP address of this packet is the VLANIF1 IP address of Switch A.
C. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Host A.
D. The destination IP address of this packet is a broadcast IP address.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 36

Which of the following applications can be used to detect the path along which the data packets are transmitted from the source to the destination?

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 15

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">

A. Route
B. Netstat
C. Tracert
D. Send

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 37

How many probe packets are sent for each TTL value by default when "tracert" is used to detect the path along which packet is sent from source to
destination?

A. 3
B. 4
C. 6
D. 8

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 38

Which of the following types can ICMP packets be classified into? (Choose two)

A. ICMP transport packet

B. ICMP error reporting packet
C. ICMP query packet
D. ICMP application packet

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 39

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 16

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
On VRP platform, which of the following parameters can be used together with the "ping" command to specify the source address of an echo request
message?

A. A
B. S
C. D
D. N

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 40

A router functioning as a Proxy receives an ARP request packet, but finds that the destination address in the packet is not intended for itself. In this
case, what will the router do? (Choose two)

A. Discard the packet.

B. Check for a route that matches the destination address.
C. Forward its MAC address to the ARP request sender after finding that a route to the destination address isavailable.
D. Broadcast the ARP request packet.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 41

Two end stations in a point-to-point network perform address resolution. Which of the following statements is correct?

A. The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a unicast MAC address.
B. The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a broadcast IP address.
C. The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a unicast MAC address
D. The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a broadcast MAC address.

Answer: C Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 17

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 42

What will the destination MAC address be at the moment a frame is transmitted by the host, when the router is the IP destination?

A. The MAC address of the switch.

B. The MAC address of the router interface G0/0/0.
C. The MAC address of the host.
D. The destination MAC address will be a broadcast MAC address.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 43

Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Choose two)

A. A system can determine whether conflicting IP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP packet
B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet.
C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address.
D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 44

UDP is connectionless oriented, which of the following must be used in order to ensure reliability?

A. Internet Protocol
B. Application Layer Protocol
C. Network Layer Protocol
D. Transmission Control Protocol

Answer: B Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 18

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 45

The administrator has configured an IP address for Host A and Host B, but had forgotten to configure a default gateway. What effect will this have on
the hosts?

A. Neither host will be affected, and therefore will be able to communicate with the peer.
B. Host A will be unable to connect to the router’s G0/0/0 interface.
C. Hosts will be unable to comminicate unless arp-proxy is enabled on the router.
D. The host will be unable to reach neither the local nor remote network destinations .

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 46

A host has established a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0. Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two)

A. The destination address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of the router interface.
B. The destination address of a frame will be the MAC address of the switch interface.
C. The destination port number in a segment header will have a value of 80.
D. The destination IP address of a packet will be the IP address of the network interface of the router.

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 47

The administrator uses the ping command on the host to test connectivity to the website www.huawei.com.

The command line shows a request time out. The administrator displays the ARP entries for the host.

Which entry will be found in the ARP cache table of the host?

A. The MAC address of the destination www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
B. The MAC address of the switch will exist in the ARP cache.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 19

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
C. The IP address of the destination www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
D. The MAC address of router interface G0/0/0, will exist in the ARP cache.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 48

When R2 forwards data to R3 from R1, which of the following items will change? (Choose two)

A. The source MAC address

B. The destination MAC address
C. The source IP address
D. The destination IP address

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 49

If Host B also configured the IP address as “192.168.1.1/24”, an IP address confict will occur. What will happen as a result?

A. Host B will send an ICMP request to the destination with the configured IP address. If a reply is received,the host will notify of an address conflict.
B. Host A will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destination 192.168.1.1, forwhich Host B will reply.
C. Host B will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destination 192.168.1.1, forwhich Host A will reply.
D. Host A will ignore any received ARP request intended for destination 192.168.1.1.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 50

<Quidway>display mac-address

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 20

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
MAC Address VLAN/VSI Learned-From Type

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

5489-98ec-f018 1/- GE0/0/13 dynamic

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total items displayed = 1

Refer to the graphic. A switch attempts to forward a frame to the MAC destination 5489-98ec-f01. What operation will occur on the switch?

A. The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
B. The switch will report that the destination is unreachable and report this to the source.
C. The switch will flood the frame via all ports, with exception of the port on which the frame was received.
D. The switch will drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address table.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 51

Host A has been connected to switch A and configured with an IP address. When Host A initially forwards a frame, what action will be taken by Switch
A?

A. Switch A will drop this frame.

B. Switch A will attempt to flood the frame to all ports except for the G0/0/1 interface.
C. Switch A will forward the frame via ports G0/0/1, G0/0/2 and G0/0/3.
D. Switch will receive this frame before returning the frame to G0/0/1.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 52

Which of the following statements describes the network shown? (Choose two)

A. There are 6 collision domains in the network.

B. There are 2 broadcast domains in the network.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 21

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
C. There are 4 collision domains in the network.
D. There are 6 broadcast domains in the network.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 53

A server is linked to port interface G0/0/1 of a switch. The administrator wishes to allow only this server to be linked to this interface on the switch.
Which method can be used to achieve this?

A. Configure a static ARP entry using the server’s IP address and MAC address in the switch.
B. Configure a static MAC address binding entry of the server’s MAC address and the interface in the switch.
C. Configure the default gateway of the switch to be the same as the server’s IP address.
D. It is not possible to enable a single device to be associated with an interface.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 54

An administrator connects two switches together in a local enterprise network. The ports of one switch support Fast Ethernet, while the ports of the
other switch support Gigabit Ethernet. Hosts connected to one switch are able to communicate, however communication between the two switches
fails. What is the possible reason for this?

A. The ports have disabled auto-negotiation.

B. One port is supporting auto-negotiation, while auto-negotiation is disabled on the port of the other switch.
C. The port of one switch is operating using half duplex mode, while the port of the other switch is using fullduplex mode.
D. A Fast Ethernet port cannot communicate directly with a Gigabit Ethernet port.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 55

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 22

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A layer 2 LAN switch generates CAM table entries according to the ( ) of the received frame.

A. Source MAC address

B. Destination MAC address
C. Source IP address
D. Destination IP address

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 56

Which of the following statements about collision domains and broadcast domains are correct? (Choose three)

A. Devices connected to the same hub form a collision domain

B. Devices connected to the same hub form a broadcast domain
C. Devices connected to the same bridge form a collision domain
D. Devices connected to the same bridge form a broadcast domain
E. Devices connected to the same router form a broadcast domain

Answer: A,B,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 57

Which of the following statements regarding layer-2 switch is incorrect?

A. The switch learns MAC addresses automatically

B. The layer-3 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted
C. The layer-2 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted.
D. The layer-2 LAN switch operates at data link layer

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 58

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 23

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
[R1]display interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0

GigabitEthernet0/0/0 current state : Administratively DOWN Line protocol current state : DOWN

Refer to the display output. What can be determined based on the output of the display command?

A. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is connected to a wrong cable

B. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with an IP address
C. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with a dynamically defined route.
D. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 has been manually shut down by an administrator.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 59

Which of the following statements regarding static and dynamic routing is incorrect?

A. The static route can be easily configured and managed on the enterprise network.
B. The use of dynamic routing is more convenient for the administrator to manage the network followingnetwork convergence.
C. The static route can automatically recover when a link failure is encountered.
D. Dynamic routing will use more resources than static routes.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 60

Which of the following are routed protocols? (Choose two)

A. IP
B. OSPF
C. BGP
D. IPX

Answer: A,D

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 24

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 61

Which of the following statements regarding the routing table are correct? (Choose two)

A. The next hop in the routing table is redundant because the outgoing interface can be used for packetforwarding.
B. The routes from generated by different protocols have different preferences.
C. The metrics of different routing protocols are comparable.
D. The metrics of different routing protocols are not comparable

Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 62

Which of the following commands can be used to display the routing table on a Quidway router?

A. display ip path
B. display ip routing-table
C. display interface
D. display current-configuration

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 63

Which of the following entries is not included in the routing table?

A. source address
B. next hop
C. destination address
D. cost

Answer: A Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 25

 Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 64

Which of the following problems are caused by routing loops? (Choose three)

A. Slow convergence
B. Packets circulate between routers
C. Router restarting
D. Inconsistency of routing information

Answer: A,B,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 65

An administrator wishes to manage the router in the remote branch office, which method can be used?

A. Telnet
B. FTP
C. Console Connection
D. DHCP

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 66

The network administrator has configured the router as shown. Which statement is false?

A. The configuration manages the user login through the console interface.
B. The user login through vty 0 has the privilege to run level 2 commands.
C. The user login through telnet has the privilege to run level 2 commands.
D. The configuration manages the telnet user login.

Answer: A Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 26

 Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 67

The administrator cannot use telnet to manage the AR2200. The administrator is able to verify connectivity to the router and has been informed that
other administrators have no difficulties using telnet. Which statements describe the possible reasons for this problem? (Choose two)

A. The user’s status has been blocked

B. The user’s priviledge level has been changed to 0.
C. The user has been deleted.
D. The telnet service in the AR2200 router has been disabled.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 68

A user logged into a VRP supported device through telnet, but when attempting to configure the device, found that he is unable to use the sytem-
view command to enter the system-view. What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose two)

A. The device’s VTY interface only provides permission for some telnet users to run the sytem- view command.
B. The user’s telnet software restricts use of this command.
C. The user’s privilege level is lower than the level associated with the system-view command.
D. The system-view command privilege level is lower than the level associated with the user.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 69

The users who log on the router through Telnet are not permitted to configure IP address. What is the possible reason?

A. Communication failures occur between the user and the router.

B. The authentication mode of Telnet is set incorrectly.
C. Privilege level of Telnet is set incorrectly.
D. SNMP parameters are set incorrectly.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 27

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 70

Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two)

A. A single collision domain exists between RTA and SWC.

B. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWB.
C. A single collision domain exists between SWA and SWC.
D. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWC.

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 71

On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command “ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0” has been configured. Which following statements are
correct? (Choose two).

A. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/24

B. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/32
C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in RTA’s routing-table
D. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 does not exist in RTA’s routing-table

Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 72

Refer to the graphic. The host has a problem establishing a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0. Which of the following steps
can be used to help the administrator identify the problem? (Choose two)

<choice ident=“A”>

<choice ident=“B”>

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 28

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
<choice ident=“C”>

<choice ident=“D”>

A. Check whether the host has configured the gateway IP address.

B. Check whether the switch has configured the gateway IP address.
C. Use the ping tool to check connectivity between host and router.
D. Check the telnet server configuration is right on the router.

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 73

Which of the following methods are supported by VRP platform to configure the router? (Choose three)

A. Through the Console port

B. Through Telnet
C. Through the AUX port
D. Through FTP

Answer: A,B,C
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 74

The administrator wishes to update the configuration file of an AR2200 router using a USB cable. How can this be achieved? (Choose two)

A. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the mini USB port of the AR2200router.
B. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the USB port of the AR2200router.
C. The AR2200 router cannot support configuration updates through a USB cable.
D. The administrator should install the mini USB drivers on the terminal after connecting the USB.

Answer: A,D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 29

 Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 75

The administrator wishes to manage a network through telnet from a user's terminal to a router. How can this be achieved?

A. A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the console port of therouter.
B. A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the ethernet port of therouter.
C. A connection should be established between the console port of the terminal and the ethernet port of therouter.use console cable connect pc’s
ethernet port and router’s console port.
D. A connection should be established between the COM port of the terminal and the console port of therouter.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 76

Whilst configuring a device, an administrator experiences trouble remembering certain commands. Which of the following will help support the
administrator? (Choose two)

A. TAB
B. questionmark
C. ctrl+b
D. ctrl+c

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 77

<Huawei> system-view

[Huawei] user-interface console 0

[Huawei-ui-console0] user privilege level 15

[Huawei-ui-console0] authentication-mode password

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 30

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
[Huawei-ui-console0] set authentication password cipher huawei2012

[Huawei-ui-console0] quit

Refer to the configuration output. The administrator configured the device using the commands in the configuration output. Regarding these
commands, which statement is false?

A. The administrator wishes to enable management through the console interface.

B. Following configuration, the administrator cannot manage the device remotely.
C. A user that logs-in through the console interface is assigned the highest privilege level.
D. The password of a user logged in through console is ‘cipher huawei2012’

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 78

Which of the following is abbreviation of VRP?

A. Versatile Routine Platform

B. Virtual Routing Platform
C. Virtual Routing Plane
D. Versatile Routing Platform

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 79

Which of the following must be used to establish the configuration environment when a router is powered on for the first time?

A. SSL
B. SSH
C. Console port
D. Telnet

Answer: C Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 31

 Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 80

Which of the following parameter settings for terminal emulation are correct when configuring a Huawei router through the Console port?

A. 4800bps, 8 data bits,1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no flow control
B. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control
C. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware flow control
D. 19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 81

Which of the following commands is used to enter the system-view from the user view on a Huawei router?

A. system-view
B. enable
C. configure terminal
D. interface system

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 82

On VRP platform, the command lines are classified into four levels in increasing priority: Visit level, Monitoring level, Configuration level, and
Management level. At which level, the operator is permitted to configure service but is not permitted to operate the file system?

A. Visit level
B. Monitoring level
C. Configuration level
D. Management level

Answer: C

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 32

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 83

On Huawei VRP platform, which of the following can be used to invoke the history command saved by the command line interface? (Choose two)

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">

A. Up cursor key < >

B. Left cursor key < >
C. Ctrl+P
D. Ctrl+U

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 84

Which of the following commands can be used to view the current configurations on a Huawei router?

A. display current-configuration
B. display saved-configuration
C. view saved-configuration
D. show startup-configuration

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 85

The administrator wishes to change name of the router. Under which view should the administrator

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 33

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
be in order to achieve this?

A. User-view
B. System-view
C. Interface-view
D. Protocol-view

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 86

<Huawei> system-view

[Huawei]command-privilege level 3 view user save

Refer to the command output. What is the result of the shown command?

A. The command adjusts the save command of a user to privilege level 3.

B. The command adjusts the save command in the user view to privilege level 3.
C. The command adjusts the user view command privilege level to 3, and saves the configuration.
D. The command adjusts the privilege level of a user to 3, and saves the configuration.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 87

<Huawei>system-view

[Huawei]history-command max-size 20

Refer to the command output. Which statements regarding the shown command are true? (Choose two)

A. The command is used to adjust the size of the history command buffer
B. The default value of the history command buffer is 5.
C. The command should be configured in the user-interface view.
D. Once configured, commands totalling up to 20 bytes can be saved in the buffer.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 34

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 88

An AR2200 router is required to be reconfigured from scratch. Which steps are needed to achieve this? (Choose two)

A. Reset the saved configuration

B. Clear the current configuration
C. Reboot the AR2200.
D. Assign the configuration file to be used at next startup.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 89

An adminstrator has been requested to replace the configuration file of a router in the network. The administrator has been instructed that after
logging into the router, he must first permenantly erase the current configuration file config.zip from the system. Which command should he use to
achieve this?

A. delete /force config.zip

B. delete /unreserved config.zip
C. reset config.zip
D. clear config.zip

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 90

Which of the following commands can switch a view from the system view to the user view?

A. System-view
B. Router
C. Quit

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 35

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
D. User-view

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 91

Which of the following storage devices are supported by Huawei router? (Select 4 Answers)

A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. Hard Disk
E. CF Card

Answer: A,B,C,E
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 92

Which of the following storage devices is used to store the startup configuration files in a router?

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">

A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. BootROM

Answer: B Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 36

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 93

<Huawei>reset saved-configuration

Warning: The action will delete the saved configuration in the device. The configuration will be erased to

reconfigure. Continue? [Y/N]:

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are true? (Select two answers)

A. A user should enter ‘Y’ when wishing to clear the saved configuration file.
B. The saved-configuration file that the device starts with can be erased.
C. The saved-configuration will be deleted after typing N
D. The saved-configuration file will be replaced with the current-configuration.

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 94

When a router is powered on, the router reads the configuration file saved in the default save directory to get itself initialized. If the configuration file
does not exist in the default save directory, what does the router use to initialize itself?

A. New configuration file

B. Initial configuration file
C. Default parameters
D. Current configuration file

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 95

<Huawei>display startup MainBoard:

Startup system software: sd1:/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc Next startup system software:

sd1:/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 37

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Backup system software for next startup: null

Startup saved-configuration file: null Next startup saved-

configuration file: null Startup license file: null

Next startup license file: null Startup patch

package: null Next startup patch package: null

Startup voice-files: null

Next startup voice-files: null

Refer to the display output. Which statement is false?

A. The current configuration file has not been saved.

B. The current startup system software is ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
C. The next startup system software cannot be changed.
D. The next startup system software can be changed by using the “startup system software
<startup-softwarename>.cc” command.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 96

<Huawei>

Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you perform configurations when Auto-Config is running, the
DHCP, routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost. Do you want to stop Auto-Config? [y/n]:

When an administrator first initializes the router, a warning is displayed. Which statement regarding this warning is correct?

A. If Auto-Config is required, the administrator should select ‘y’

B. If Auto-Config is not required, the administrator should select ‘n’, for which subsequent configuration of the
DHCP server, routing, DNS server and VTY user configuration is lost
C. When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is active.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 38

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
D. When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is inactive.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 97

An AR2200 router in the company network cannot boot. In order to resolve this, the administrator wishes to update the VRP software. What should
he/she do?

A. The administrator should use a console cable to connect the router and host, and directly upgrade thedevice.
B. The administrator should use FTP to transfer the VRP software, by configuring the AR2200 router as anFTP client.
C. The administrator should use DHCP to boot the AR2200, and then use the AR2200 router as a TFTP clientto download the VRP software from
the server.
D. The administrator should use the telnet command on the client to remote access the device, and upgradethe VRP software.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 98

<Huawei>

Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you perform configurations when Auto-Config is running, the
DHCP, routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost. Do you want to stop Auto-Config? [y/n]:

Refer to the output. When the administrator first starts the router, a system notice is displayed, however after rebooting this router, the notice
disappeared. What is the reason for this? (Choose two)

A. This notice only appears during the very first device startup.
B. The administrator has configured the device and saved the configuration, causing the notice to disappear.
C. The administrator selected ‘n’ and did not save the configuration
D. The administrator selected ‘y’ and saved the configuration.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 39

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 99

An end system is unable to communicate with a DHCP server following the startup process. Which IP address may be used by the client?

A. 0.0.0.0
B. 127.0.0.1
C. 169.254.2.33
D. 255.255.255.255

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 100

[Huawei]ip pool pool1

Info: It's successful to create an IP address pool.

[Huawei-ip-pool-pool1]network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0

[Huawei-ip-pool-pool1]gateway-list 10.10.10.1

Refer to the configuration output. The administrator wishes to configure the DHCP server pool in order to assign an IP address to the customer’s
terminal device.

Which command should be included in the configuration to provide the minimal lease period for IP addresses?

A. dhcp select relay

B. lease day 1
C. lease 24
D. lease 0

Answer: B Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 40

 Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 101

A DHCP server has been established in the enterprise network. After the client has obtained an IP address from the DHCP server, the user decided to
modify the IP address manually. In what way may this affect the enterprise network? (Choose two).

A. The client may experience an IP address conflict.

B. The client may access the network normally.
C. The client’s interface connection will shutdown.
D. The client will associate with another DHCP server.

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 102

Refer to the graphic. Two switches have been connected as shown and both support STP. The administrator has configured switch A as a DHCP server
and set interface VLANIF1 of switch B to obtain an IP address from switch A. A link failure occurs on port interface G0/0/1 of switch B. What action will
occur as a result?

A. The two switches will be unable to communicate.

B. Switch B will send a DHCP Discovery message to obtain a new IP address.
C. Swich B will continue to use the IP address obtained from Switch A
D. Switch B will send a DHCP Release message to release the IP address.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 103

A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An administrator discovers however that some hosts are
obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the DHCP server’s address pool. What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose three).

A. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is allocating IP addresses to hosts that happen to be withina closer proximity than the authorized
DHCP server
B. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 41

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
in the
169.254.0.0 address range.
C. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the
127.254.0.0 address range.
D. All addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned

Answer: A,B,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 104

Router] ip pool pool1

[Router-ip-pool-pool1] network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0

[Router-ip-pool-pool1] gateway-list 10.10.10.1 [Router-ip-pool-pool1]

quit

[Router] ip pool pool2

[Router-ip-pool-pool2] network 10.20.20.0 mask 255.255.255.0

[Router-ip-pool-pool2] gateway-list 10.20.20.1 [Router-ip-pool-pool2]

quit

[Router] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1

[Router-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ip address 10.10.10.1 24 [Router-

GigabitEthernet0/0/1] dhcp select global

Refer to the configuration output. Following configuration, a host is connected to the interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1 of the router. Which IP address
will the client obtain?

<choice ident=“A”>

<choice ident=“B”>

<choice ident=“C”>

<choice ident=“D”>

A. An IP address from network 10.10.10.0/24 will be assigned.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 42

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
B. An IP address from network 10.20.20.0/24 will be assigned.
C. The host will be unable to obtain an IP address.
D. An IP address may be assigned from either 10.10.10.0/24 or 10.20.20.0/24.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 105

The IP addresses of clients in the network are deployed via a DHCP server. When a host reboots, which message will the host first send to the DHCP
server?

A. DHCP DISCOVER
B. DHCP REQUEST
C. DHCP OFFER
D. DHCP ACK

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 106

A DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) in DHCPv6 can be configured in VRP using which formats? (Choose two).

A. DUID-LL
B. DUID-LLT
C. DUID-EN
D. DUID-LLC

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 107

Which of the following statements about the information contained in a Database Description packet are true? (Choose three)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 43

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. A Database Description packet contains all information about each LSA.
B. A Database Description packet contains only the header of an LSA.
C. The header of an LSA is the unique identifier of the LSA.
D. The header of an LSA is only a small portion of all the data of the LSA.

Answer: B,C,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 108

What is the default authentication mode for the default_admin domain?

A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 109

How many domains can be configured on a Huawei router?

A. 30
B. 31
C. 32
D. 33

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 110

An authenticator router has been configured with two domains named “Area1” and “Area2”, following which a user is created with the username
“huawei” and the password ”hello” for authentication. Which domain does this user belongs to?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 44

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
<choice ident=“A”>

<choice ident=“B”>

<choice ident=“C”>

<choice ident=“D”>

A. Area1 domain
B. Area2 domain
C. default domain
D. default_admin domain

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 111

In order to check if the interface serial 1/0/0 is working in either DCE or DTE mode, command ( ) is used.

A. display mode serial 1/0/0

B. display controller
C. display interface serial 1/0/0
D. display current-config

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 112

How is mapping performed on a DTE device in a Frame Relay network?

A. The local DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

B. The local IP address is mapped to a remote DLCI number.
C. The local DLCI number is mapped to a local IP address.
D. The remote DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

Answer: A Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 45

 Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 113

If Frame Relay implements dynamic address mapping for the PVC, which protocol will be used?

A. LMI protocol.
B. ARP protocol.
C. RARP protocol.
D. InARP protocol

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 114

Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements correctly describe the Frame Relay devices? (Choose two)

A. RTA is a DTE device.

B. FRA is a DTE device.
C. FRB is a DCE device.
D. The interface on RTA is a DCE interface

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 115

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are connected over a Frame Relay network using a DLCI, as shown. Static mapping is required on RTA. Which of
the following commands will achieve this?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.1.1 30

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.1.1 31
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.2.1 30
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.2.1 31

Answer: C Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 46

 Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 116

Refer to the graphic. RTA is a DTE device connected to a Frame Relay switch, and uses dynamic address mapping to establish the PVC. With regards
to the configuration, which of the following commands are not necessary? (Choose two).

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]ip address 172.16.1.1 24

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]link-protocol FR
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr interface-type dte
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr inarp

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 117

Which command should be used to check the mapping between protocol addresses and frame relay addresses?

A. display fr interface
B. display fr map-info
C. display fr inarp-info
D. display interface brief

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 118

Which of the following protocols is used in Frame Relay to map the address to DLCI dynamically?

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 47

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. ARP protocol
B. RARP protocol
C. InARP protocol
D. Map protocol

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 119

Which of the following parameters must be specified when configuring static mapping for Frame Relay network? (Choose two)

A. Local DLCI
B. Remote DLCI
C. Local network layer protocol address
D. Remote network layer protocol address

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 120

Which of the following regarding Frame Relay DLCI are correct? (Choose three)

A. DLCI is locally significant

B. DLCI is allocated by DTE
C. The range of DLCI value that can be used is from 16-1007
D. The same DLCI can be configured on different physical interfaces

Answer: A,C,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 121

Which of the following commands is used to enable dynamic address mapping protocol in the interface encapsulated with Frame Relay?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 48

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. fr inarp
B. fr reverse-arp
C. inverse-arp
D. reverse-arp

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 122

What is the meaning of 200 in the command "fr map ip 10.1.1.2 200"?

A. remote logical channel ID

B. local DLCI
C. remote interface ID
D. remote node ID

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 123

Refer to the graphic.RTA and RTB connect to a Frame Relay switch and use dynamic address mapping. The command “fr map ip 10.0.1.1 32” is then
configured on RTB, without using the undo inarp command. What will occur as a result? (Choose two).

A. RTB will be unable to communicate with RTA

B. 10.0.1.1 will still be mapped to DLCI 31 on RTB
C. 10.0.1.1 will still be mapped to DLCI 32 on RTB
D. DLCI 32 will be activated on RTB

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 124

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are connected to the same Frame Relay switch and use same DLCI number, which following is correct? (Choose
two).

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 49

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. RTA and RTB must be associated with the same PVC
B. RTA and RTB can be associated with different PVC’s
C. The DLCI on the different physical interfaces can be the same
D. The DLCI on the different physical interfaces cannot be the same

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 125

Which of the following commands can be used to display mapping relationship between network address and DLCI?

A. display fr interface
B. display fr
C. display fr map-info
D. display fr brief

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 126

Which of following may be the reasons that cause Frame Relay PVC to work abnormally? (Choose three)

A. Same DLCI number is configured on the same router

B. LMI type mismatch
C. Frame Relay encapsulation type mismatch
D. Incorrect configuration of the DLCI number

Answer: B,C,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 127

An administrator wishes to update the VRP software of company’s AR2200 router. How can this be achieved? (Choose three)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 50

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the FTP client.
B. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the FTP server.
C. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP server.
D. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP client.

Answer: A,B,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 128

An administrator wishes to implement new features in the network, but the VRP version of one AR2200 router is out of date. The administrator needs to
upgrade the VRP software. Which of the following options regarding file transfer is false?

A. The AR2200 router can function as a TFTP client to support the upgrade.
B. The AR2200 router can function as the TFTP server to support the upgrade.
C. The AR2200 router can function as the FTP server to support the upgrade.
D. The AR2200 router can function as an FTP client to support the upgrade.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 129

FTP and TFTP can be used to update the system file on Huawei routers. Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose three)

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">

A. Huawei router can be configured as FTP Client

B. Huawei router can be configured as FTP Server

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 51

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
C. Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Client
D. Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Server

Answer: A,B,C
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 130

An administrator discovered he/she was unable to use TFTP to transfer files to the router. Which of the following describes the likely reason for this?

A. The TFTP service had been disabled on the router.

B. TCP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
C. UDP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
D. The username and password had been modified.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 131

FTP may be used to upgrade a router's VRP image. Which of the following transmission modes should be used to achieve this?

A. binary mode
B. ASCII mode
C. byte mode
D. letter mode

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 132

A client failed to transfer a file to the FTP server, but found the IP connectivity was without problem. The client assumed that the problem was with the
port configuration. The blocking of which ports would likely cause this problem? (Choose two)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 52

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. 21
B. 80
C. 20
D. 50649

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 133

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB have established a GRE tunnel, but only RTA has enabled the keepalive function. When RTB receive a keepalive
message from RTA, how will RTB respond?

A. RTB will discard the keepalive message.

B. RTB willl record receipt of the keepalive message but won’t reply
C. RTB will send a keepalive in response.
D. RTB will send a keepalive reply and begin to actively send keepalive messages.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 134

Refer to the graphic. Two hosts communicate through a GRE tunnel. When the GRE tunnel is up, the network administrator configures a static route
on RTA to route packets to Host B. Which of the following commands will achieve this?

A. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 GigabitEthernet0/0/1

B. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 200.2.2.1
C. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 200.1.1.1
D. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 tunnel 0/0/1

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 135

When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the data link layer encapsulation type of a serial interface as HDLC?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 53

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. encapsulation hdlc
B. link-protocol hdlc
C. hdlc enable
D. link-protocol ppp

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 136

Refer to the graphic. Packet encapsulation in the IPsec architecture is performed as shown. Which IPsec mode is being used to encapsulate the packet?

A. normal mode
B. transport mode
C. tunnel mode
D. this encapsulation is wrong

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 137

Refer to the graphic. IPsec VPN uses ESP to encrypt which fields?

A. TCP, Data and ESP Trailer

B. ESP, TCP and Data
C. ESP, TCP, Data and ESP Trailer
D. ESP, TCP, Data, ESP Trailer and ESP Auth

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 138

Refer to the graphic. In order to improve security, the two hosts use IPsec VPN to transmit data. Which IPsec mode and protocol can be used to hide
the host’s IP address? (Choose two).

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 54

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. AH
B. transport mode
C. tunnel mode
D. ESP

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 139

If AH and ESP are both required to protect data streams between IPsec peers, how many Security Associations (SA) are required in total?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 140

Refer to the graphic. The data is transmitted using IPsec tunnel mode. The fields of which headers will be authenticated?

A. TCP and Data

B. Origin IP, TCP and Data
C. AH, Origin IP, TCP and Data
D. The fields of all headers

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 141

Two routers establish an IPsec tunnel, which of the following does not need to be the same on both peering devices?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 55

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. Encapsulation mode
B. Transform mode
C. Proposal name
D. authentication algorithm

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 142

Which of the following formats represent an accurate condensing of the IPv6 address 2031:0000:720C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:130B? (Choose two).

A. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E0:839A:130B B.
2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B C.
2031::720C::9E0:839A:130B
D. 2031:0:720C::9E0:839A:130B

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 143

Which of the following IPv6 addresses can be configured on a router’s interface? (Choose two).

A. fe80:13dc::1/64
B. ff00:8a3c::9b/64
C. ::1/128
D. 2001:12e3:1b02::21/64

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 144

The IPv6 address achitecture does not include which of the following address types?

A. unicast

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 56

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 145

Which of the following descriptions regarding IPv6 addresses are correct? (Choose two)

A. IPv6 addresses are 64 bits in length.

B. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits in length.
C. IPv6 extension headers are processed in order.
D. IPv6 extension headers are processed randomly.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 146

Interface G0/0/1 on RTA contains a MAC address of 00e0-fc03-aa73 and is configured with the IPv6 address 2001::2E0:FCFF:FE03:AA73. Which
method is most likely to have been used to configure the interface IPv6 address?

A. DHCPv6
B. Auto-link
C. ARP
D. EUI-64

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 147

In a small network suppporting IPv6, a network administrator wishes implement RIPng. Which of the following commands should be used to enable this
protocol?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 57

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. [RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]ripng 1 enable
B. [RTA]ripng 1 enable
C. <RTA>ripng 1 enable
D. [RTA-ripng-1]ripng 1 enable

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 148

In a network supporting IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentication
D. multicast updates

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 149

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB have established an IPv6 network for which an IPv6 address has been configured only on the G0/0/1 interface.
RTA is unable to ping RTB. The administrator then configures v3 along with a router-id on both routers, and enables OSPFv3 on G0/0/1 of both RTA
and RTB. Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two).

A. RTA and RTB can establish an OSPFv3 neighbor relationship.

B. RTA and RTB cannot establish an OSPFv3 neighbor relationship.
C. RTA can ping RTB.
D. RTA cannot ping RTB.

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 150

The network administrator has decided to configure link aggregation in the enterprise network. Which of the following represent advantages of link
aggregation? (Choose three)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 58

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. Load balancing.
B. Improved bandwidth.
C. Enhanced reliability.
D. Improved security.

Answer: A,B,C
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 151

In port aggregation, “multiple” ports are aggregated to form a port aggregation group so that all the member ports in the group share the
outgoing/incoming load. At which layer is port aggregation implemented?

A. Physical Layer
B. Data Link Layer
C. Network Layer
D. Transport Layer

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 152

What benefits does port aggregation yield? (Choose three)

A. Improves link bandwidth

B. Implements load sharing
C. Improves network reliability
D. Facilitates data copy for analysis

Answer: A,B,C
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 153

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator wishes to aggregate the two links as member interfaces of Ethtrunk

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 59

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Which statement is correct?

A. The interfaces will be aggregated with load balancing.

B. The interfaces will be aggregated, but only interface GE0/0/1 will send data flow.
C. The interfaces will be aggregated, but the Eth-trunk will not be active.
D. The interfaces cannot be aggregated.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 154

What is the maximum number of member interfaces supported by a single Eth-Trunk?

A. 6.
B. 8.
C. 10
D. 12.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 155

The Eth-Trunk frame forwarding mechanism used to prevent changes in the data sequence forwards frames based on which of the following
parameters?

A. The same source or destination IP address

B. The same source or destination MAC address.
C. The same protocol type.
D. The same source or destination port number.

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 156

In Layer 2 mode, the transmission rate of an Eth-Trunk interface is determined by which of the

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 60

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
following?

A. Maximum number of Up member links

B. Minimum number of Up member links
C. Number of Up member interfaces
D. Number of interfaces.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 157

The network administrator wishes to forward data over an Eth-trunk, however associated member interfaces operate at different rates. In terms of the
resulting behavior, which of the following is true?

A. The two switches will not be able to communicate.

B. The higher rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.
C. The Eth-Trunk will work normally.
D. The lower rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 158

The network administrator attempts to add interface G0/0/1 on Switch A to Eth-trunk 1, however the command fails. Which of the following may cause
this?

A. The interface is operating in half-duplex mode.

B. The interface has been shutdown.
C. The interface is already associated with another Eth-trunk.
D. The interface is an access port.

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 159

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 61

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A network requires a solution to allow 50 private IP addresses to be translated, however only a single public address is available for use. Which
translation method can be used to support this requirement?

A. Static NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 160

NAPT allows for multiple internal addresses to be mapped to a single public address. How does NAT distinguish between the different private
addresses when mapping to the same public address?

A. The source MAC address is used.

B. The destination MAC address is used.
C. The source port number is used.
D. The destination port number is used.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 161

Refer to the graphic. Host A is located in a private network. It is required that Host A not only be capable of routing traffic over the public network, but
also that public users are able to actively communicate with Host A.

Which NAT translation method should be configured on the gateway?

A. Static NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT

Answer: A

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 62

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 162

Refer to the graphic. In the private network, RTA dynamically assigns a public address from the address pool to hosts without port translation. Host
C wishes to access the public network while pool addresses are assigned to Host A and Host B. What will occur as a result?

A. The first public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host A will be forced offline.
B. The last public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host B will be forced offline.
C. Host C will be unable to forward traffic over the public network.
D. All hosts will have access to the public network through pool address swapping.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 163

A web server in a private network is required to provide HTTP services to public users. The network administrator is required to configure NAT on RTA.
Which configuration should be used?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
B. [RTA-Serial0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080
C. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
D. [RTA- Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 164

The network administrator needs to configure static NAT on RTA, in order to allow Host A to communicate with Host C. Which command is correct?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat outbound 200.1.1.10

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.0

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 63

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 192.168.1.1 inside 200.1.1.10
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.1

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 165

[RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]nat outbound 2000 address-group 1

Refer to the configuration output. What does the value “2000” refer to?

A. It represents the ACL number.

B. It represents the NAT number.
C. It represents the translated port number.
D. It represents the number of bytes that can be translated before the address is returned to the public addresspool.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 166

NAPT uses the same public address but different port numbers to translate private addresses. Which statement regarding the port number is correct?

A. It is necessary to configure port number mapping manually.

B. It is only necessary to configure the port number range.
C. It is not necessary to configure port numbers.
D. An access control list is needed to assign port numbers.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 167

A configured internal host of a private network wishes to access the internet. What must be configured on the enterprise network’s edge router in order
to achieve this? (Choose two)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 64

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. NAT EasyIP
B. DHCP
C. BGP
D. Default route

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 168

Which of the following statements are correct about NAT? (Choose three)

A. NAT is the abbreviation for "Network Address Translation"

B. NAT is used for translation between private and public network addresss.
C. When hosts inside a private network access the outside network, NAT is not required.
D. NAT provides an effective way to solve the problem of insufficient IP addresses.

Answer: A,B,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 169

Which of the following technologies can allow a host with IP address 10.0.0.1 to access the internet?

A. Static route
B. Dynamic route
C. Route import
D. NAT

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 170

Which of the following items can be translated by NAPT?

A. MAC address + port number

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 65

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
B. IP address + port number
C. Only MAC address
D. Only IP address

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 171

Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multicast mode are true? (Choose three)

A. The port receives only RIPv2 multicast packets.

B. The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
D. The port receives only RIPv1 multicast packets.

Answer: A,B,C
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 172

Which of the following statements regarding the router ID in OSPF are incorrect? (Choose three)

A. The router IDs of OSPF routers in the same area must be the same, but can be different in different areas.
B. The router ID must be the IP address of an OSPF router interface.
C. The router ID must be configured manually.
D. A router running OSPF must have a router ID for it to operate properly.

Answer: A,B,C
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 173

Which of the following statements regarding Designated Routers in OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 66

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. DR is elected by all the routers in the same network segment.
B. If the priorities of two routers are different, the router with the lower priority will be elected as DR.
C. If the priorities of two routers are equal, the router with the higher Router ID will be elected as DR.
D. DR and BDR must be adjacent.

Answer: A,C,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 174

On the VRP platform, which of the following commands is used to configure the Router ID of a router as

1.1.1.1?

A. <Huawei>router id 1.1.1.1
B. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1
C. [Huawei]router-id 1.1.1.1
D. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 175

Which of the following OSPF versions is specific to IPv6?

A. OSPFv1
B. OSPFv2
C. OSPFv3
D. OSPFv4

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 176

The administrator wishes to configure OSPF on a router in the network however the router has no

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 67

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
loopback interface. Which value will be used as the router ID?

A. The lowest IP address of the router’s active interfaces.

B. The highest IP address of the router’s active interfaces.
C. The IP address of the management interface
D. The priority value of the router.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 177

An administrator of a company supporting a large enterprise network wishes to implement OSPF on the network as opposed to RIP. Which of the
following points should the administrator use to support his reasoning for this change? (Choose three)

A. OSPF has no hop count limitation

B. OSPF has a lower routing update overhead
C. OSPF has a simpler configuration.
D. OSPF supports faster convergence.

Answer: A,B,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 178

Which of the following statements regarding single area OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

A. An IP address needs to be configured on a loopback interface of each router before configuring an OSPFarea.
B. The value of an area can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
C. A single area can be configured using any supported area number.
D. All of the links of the network need to be advertised in Area 0.

Answer: B,C,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 179

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 68

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
10.0.1.0/24 O_ASE 150 2 D 10.0.23.3 Serial2/0/0

Refer to the display output. Which of the following statements regarding route shown are true? (Choose two)

A. The address 10.0.23.3 has been configured on the peer’s serial 2/0/0 interface.
B. The route preference has been changed by the adminstrator.
C. The metric for the route 10.0.1.0 indicates that two hops are needed.
D. The route has been learned via the OSPF protocol.

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 180

Which of the following statements regarding link-state database and routing-table of a “single” OSPF area are correct? (Choose two)

A. The link-state databases that all routers build are identical.

B. The link-state databases that all routers build are different.
C. The routing-tables that all routers calculate are different.
D. The routing-tables that all routers calculate are identical.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 181

Which of the following steps are necessary to configure OSPF on a Huawei router? (Choose three)

A. Configuration of a router ID
B. Enabling of an OSPF process
C. Specifying an OSPF area
D. Configuration of the network segments within each area

Answer: B,C,D
Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 69

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 182

Which of the following statements regarding the DR in an OSPF network are correct? (Choose two)

A. There must be at least one DR in an OSPF area.

B. A DR must be elected among the routers through the negotiations that are defined by OSPF protocol.
C. Only the router with highest priority will be elected as DR.
D. Only NBMA or Broadcast networks need to elect DR

Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 183

Which of the following VRP commands can be used to enter area 0 view? (Choose two)

A. [Huawei]ospf area 0
B. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0
C. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0.0.0.0
D. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0 enable

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 184

Which of the following commands is used to display the OSPF neighbor relationship establishment?

A. display ospf neighbor

B. display ospf brief
C. display ospf peer
D. display ospf interface

Answer: C Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 70

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 185

With what kind of routers does a DRother router exchange link state information and route information? (Choose two)

A. DR
B. BDR
C. DRother
D. All OSPF neighbors

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 186

An OSPF area is a collection of a group of routers and networks. OSPF defines that routers that have the same ( ) belong to the same OSPF area.

A. neighbors
B. LSDB
C. LSA
D. adjacency

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 187

Which of the following statements about router IDs are true? (Choose two)

A. The routers contained in the same LSDB have the same router ID.
B. Each router in an OSPF network must have a unique router ID.
C. Two routers in different OSPF areas can have the same router ID.
D. A router ID is expressed in a 32-bit dotted decimal format.

Answer: B,D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 71

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 188

OSPF allows for “multiple” processes. By default, OSPF selects a process whose number is ( ).

A. 0
B. 1
C. 10
D. 100

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 189

In a network supporting IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentication
D. multicast updates

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 190

Two routers are configured with OSPFv3. OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces of each router. Which of the following is true in the event that the
network administrator does not configure a Router-ID?

A. The IP address of the loopback 0 interface will be used as the router ID

B. The IP address of the loopback 1 interface will be used as the router ID
C. The IP address of interface G0/0/0 will be used as the router ID
D. No router ID will be assigned to the router.

Answer: D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 72

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 191

Destination/Mask protocol pre Cost Nexthop Interface

9.0.0.0/8 OSPF 10 50 1.1.1.1 Serial 1/0/0

9.1.0.0/16 RIP 100 5 2.2.2.2 Ethernet 0/0/1

Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements is correct when this router forwards the packet to the destination host 9.1.4.5?

A. The router selects the first entry to match the destination address of the packet because the preference ofOSPF is higher than the
preference of RIP.
B. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the cost of RIPis lower than that of OSPF.
C. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the outgoinginterface is an Ethernet interface. The
forwarding speed of an Ethernet interface is faster than theforwarding speed of a serial interface
D. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the router willmatch the most specific address.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 192

According to the default value of route preference on the VRP platform, which of the following represent the correct sequence for direct route, static
route, RIP and OSPF if they are listed from high preference to low preference?

A. Direct, Static, RIP, OSPF

B. Direct, OSPF, Static, RIP
C. Direct, OSPF, RIP, Static
D. Direct, RIP, Static, OSPF

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 193

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 73

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A router has learned two routes for the same network with the same prefix. One route has been learned via OSPF with a metric of 4882, while the other
route has been learned via RIPv2 with a metric of 4. Which route (s) will be found in the routing table?

A. The RIPv2 route.

B. The OSPF and RIPv2 routes.
C. The OSPF route.
D. Neither of these routes will be found in the routing table.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 194

Assume that the router has learnt the best route to the same destination by using RIP, OSPF and Static Route respectively. By default, the Huawei
router will select the route learnt via ( ) as the best route.

A. RIP
B. OSPF
C. RIPv2
D. Static route

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 195

After checking the OSPF neighbor state, the administrator discovers that the router has established a TWOWAY state with the peering router. What
can be understood from this information? (Choose two)

A. The routers are configured using the same process ID

B. The routers are configured using the same area ID
C. The routers are configured using wrong router ID
D. The routers are considered DROthers in a broadcast network

Answer: D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 74

 Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 196

Refer to the graphic. An administrator has configured OSPF on the two routers, following which he then implements the command silent-interface
s0/0/1 on RTA. What effect will this command have on the network? (Choose two)

A. The link information advertised by RTB will be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA.
B. The OSPF neighbor relationship will fail between two routers.
C. The configuration will not affect the OSPF neighbor relationship between the two routers.
D. The link information advertised by RTB will no longer be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA.

Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 197

Refer to the graphic. Which statements correctly explains the forwarding behavior between RTA and RTE? (Choose two)

A. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0
B. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0.
C. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path from via E0/0/1.
D. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S2/0/0.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 198

What functions does a Hello packet of OSPF implement? (Choose two)

A. Neighbor discovery
B. Deletion of unreachable neighbors.
C. Maintaining of neighbor relationships.
D. Negotiation of parameters among adjacent ports.

Answer: A,C

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 75

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 199

Refer to the graphic. The link between RTA and RTB is encapsulated using PPP. The IP addresses of serial 1/0/1 of RTA and serial 1/0/1 of RTB are
in different network segments. Which following is correct? (Choose two)

A. RTA can ping 10.1.1.2 successfully

B. RTA cannot ping 10.1.1.2
C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in the routing-table of RTA
D. The route entry 10.1.1.2/32 exists in the routing-table of RTA

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 200

Two routers are connected through serial interfaces and support PPP encapsulation. Which parameters must be negotiated to establish the PPP
connection? (Choose three).

A. MRU
B. Authentication password
C. Magic-Number
D. IP address

Answer: A,C,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 201

What are the three protocol components defined by PPP? (Choose three).

A. Data encapsulation.
B. LCP
C. NCP
D. IPCP

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 76

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Answer: A,B,C
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 202

Two routers are connected via serial interfaces, for which the link-protocol is PPP. The network administrator wishes to configure PPP authentication to
improve security on this link. Which PPP authentication method provides a more secure solution?

A. CHAP
B. PAP
C. MD5
D. SSH

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 203

If PPP authentication fails, which type of packet will be sent to the authenticated peer by the authenticator?

A. Authenticate-Ack
B. Authenticate-Nak
C. Authenticate-Reject
D. Authenticate-Reply

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 204

Two routers are connected via serial interfaces and the link-protocol is PPP, but the MRU of two serial interface’s are different, in PPP LCP negotiated
stage, what will happen?

A. LCP negotiation will fail

B. Negotiation will use the smaller value
C. Negotiation will use the larger value

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 77

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
D. Negotiation will use 1500

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 205

PPP is more secure than HDLC because PPP supports authentication protocols such as ( ). (Choose two)

A. PAP
B. MD5
C. CHAP
D. SSH

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 206

When both ends running PPP protocol detect that the physical link is active, the link state will transit from dead to establish. Which of the following
protocols is used to negotiate the link parameters during this phase?

A. IP
B. DHCP
C. LCP
D. NCP

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 207

A serial interface of a Huawei router currently using HDLC needs to assign PPP as the encapsulation protocol.

Which of the following commands is required to be configured at the serial interface view?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 78

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. link-protocol ppp
B. encapsulation ppp
C. enable ppp
D. address ppp

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 208

When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the PPP authentication method as PAP?

A. ppp pap
B. ppp authentication-pap
C. ppp authentication-mode pap
D. ppp pap-authentication

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 209

When configuring the PPP authentication method as PAP, which of the following operations are necessary? (Choose three)

A. Add the user name and password of the authenticated party to the local user list
B. Configure the encapsulation type of the interface connected to the peer as PPP.
C. Configure PPP authentication method as CHAP
D. On the authenticated party end, configure the user name and password that are sent to authenticator

Answer: A,B,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 210

In the PPP protocol, which of the following encryption algorithms is used by CHAP?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 79

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. DES
B. MD5
C. AES
D. None

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 211

What is the function of the “ip address ppp-negotiate” command?

A. Enables the function of requesting for an IP address from the peer device.
B. Enables the function of accepting the request for an IP address from the remote device.
C. Enables the function of statically allocating IP addresses to the peer.
D. None of the above

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 212

Two routers have established a point-to-point network using PPP. The administrator has configured the routers to run OSPF in the same area with the
same router ID, what will behavior will occur as a result of the configuration?

A. The routers will build a neighbor relationship even though both routers are using the same router ID.
B. VRP will notify of a router ID conflict between the two routers.
C. The routers will build an adjacency even though both routers are using the same router ID.
D. The routers will not send hello packets to each other because they are using the same router ID.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 213

The PPPoE session establishment process can be divided into which stages? (Choose two).

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 80

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. Discovery stage
B. DHCP stage
C. PPPoE Session stage
D. PPP connecting stage.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 214

To establish multiple PPP point-to-point connections in the Ethernet network, a PPPoE server establishes connections with multiple PPPoE clients on
one Ethernet port. How does PPPoE differentiate between each connection?

A. MAC address.
B. IP address and MAC address
C. MAC address and ppp-id
D. MAC address and session-id

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 215

When configuring a router as a PPPoE client, which configuration is not necessary?

A. Configuration of the dialer-rule

B. Configuration of the dialer interface
C. Configuration of an IP address on the dialer interface
D. Configuration of a password on the dialer interface

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 216

Refer to the graphic. RTA is a PPPoE client, and sends PADI packets to Server A. Which distribution method is used for sending PADI packets?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 81

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 217

Refer to the graphic. RTA is a PPPoE client, and following transmission of PADI, Server A responds with PADO packets to RTA. Which distribution
method is used for sending PADO packets?

A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 218

In the PPPoE discovery stage, the PPPoE server assigns a session-id to the PPPoE client in which packet?

A. PADI
B. PADO
C. PADR
D. PADS

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 219

Which command can be used to check the PPPoE client session status?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 82

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. display ip interface brief
B. display current-configuration
C. display pppoe-client session packet
D. display pppoe-client session summary

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 220

[Huawei]rip 1

[Huawei-rip-1]version 2

Refer to the command output. An administrator wishes to configure RIP. Which other command needs to configured for RIP routes to be advertised?

A. import-route GigabitEthernet 0/0/1

B. network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
C. network GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
D. network 192.168.1.0

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 221

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are running RIPv1. RTA has advertised 10.0.0.0 and 192.168.1.0 to the RIP network. Which routes will exist in the
IP routing table of RTB? (Choose two)

A. 10.0.0.0/8
B. 192.168.1.1/32 C.
10.1.12.1/32 D.
192.168.1.0/24

Answer: C,D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 83

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 222

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv1 to advertise its routes, while RTB is using RIPv2. What effect will this
have on learned routes?

A. RTA and RTB will both learn the routes advertised by RIP.
B. RTA will learn the RIP route advertised by RTB, however RTB is unable to learn the route advertised byRTA.
C. RTB will learn the RIP route advertised by RTA, however RTA is unable to learn the route advertised byRTB.
D. Neither RTA nor RTB are able to learn the RIP routes advertised by the peer.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 223

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv1 to advertise its routes, while RTB is using RIPv2 to advertise the route
1.1.1.1/32. How will the route 1.1.1.1/32 appear in the IP routing table of RTA?

A. This route will not appear in the IP routing table of RTA.

B. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/8.
C. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/24.
D. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/32.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 224

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv2 to advertise its routes, while RTB is using RIPv1 to advertise the route
1.1.1.1/32. The administrator configures “RIP version 2 multicast” for interface G0/0/1 of RTB. How will the route 1.1.1.1/32 appear in the the IP routing
table of RTA?

A. This route will not appear in the IP routing table of RTA.

B. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/8.
C. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/24.
D. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/32.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 84

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 225

A RIP router receives the routing update information from its neighbor. Which of the following statements regarding routing update are correct?
(Choose three)

A. The received route that is not in the routing table will be added only when its hop count value is less than16.
B. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is therouter's neighbor and the cost value is
smaller.
C. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is not therouter's neighbor and the cost
value is smaller.
D. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is therouter's neighbor and the cost value
has been changed.

Answer: A,C,D
Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 226

Which of the following commands is used to display the current running state and configuration of RIP?

A. display protocol rip

B. show rip
C. display rip
D. display this rip

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 227

A user can view the information for the RIP protocol on a router. What does “Age time” in the returned result of the command mean?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 85

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. The interval of updating an RIP packet
B. The aging time of an RIP route
C. The suppression time of an RIP route
D. The time spent on switching between RIP routes

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 228

After a command for displaying RIP route information is entered on a router, peer 192.168.1.2 on Serial1/0/0 is displayed in the returned result. What
does 192.168.1.2 stand for?

A. Address of a RIP neighbor

B. Address of the port with the RIP protocol enabled
C. Next hop address of the RIP route
D. Transmission address of the RIP protocol

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 229

Refer to the grapic. An administrator has configured RIPv2 on the two routers, following which he implements the command silent-interface s0/0/1 on
RTA. What effect will this command have on the network? (Two Answers)

A. RTA will continue to learn routes from RTB

B. RTB will continue to learn routes from RTA
C. RTA will have no neighbor relationship with RTB
D. RTB will have no adjacency relationship with RTA

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 230

Refer to the graphic. R1, R2 and R3 are running RIPv1. R1 and R3 both advertise 172.16.0.0 to the RIP network. How will this affect R2?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 86

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
A. R2 will not have a route to the networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 172.16.2.0/24
B. R2 will only have a route to 172.16.1.0/24
C. R2 will only have a route to 172.16.2.0/24
D. R2 will have a route to both networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 172.16.2.0/24, but some packets for thesedestinations will be lost.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 231

<R2>debugging rip 1

Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.1-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13414: RIP 1: Receiving v1 response on

GigabitEthernet0/0/0 from 10.0.12.1 with 1 RTE

Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.2-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13465: RIP 1: Receive response from

10.0.12.1 on GigabitEthernet0/0/0

Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.3-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13476: Packet: Version 1, Cmd response,

Length 24

Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.4-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13527: Dest 1.0.0.0, Cost 1

Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.5-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 2688: RIP 1: Ignoring packet. This version is not configured.

Refer to the debug output. Following configuration of R2, the administrator discovers that the behavior is not as expected and performs debugging.
Based on the output from the debug, what is the source of the problem?

A. R2 has configured an ACL to block the route to network 1.0.0.0

B. R2 has enabled split horizon.
C. R1 is using authentication, however R2 is not.
D. R2 is operating using RIPv2, while R1 is using RIPv1.

Answer: D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 87

 Huawei H12-211 Exam
QUESTION NO: 232

Refer to the graphic. An administrator has configed RIPv2 in the two routers shows in the figure. What will happen after configuring the following
commands? (Choose two)

[RTA-Serial0/0/1]rip output [RTA-rip-1]silent-

interface s0/0/1

A. RTA will have the route learned from the RTB

B. RTB will have the route learn from the RTA
C. RTA will have no neighbor relationship with RTB
D. RTB will have no neighbor relationship with RTB

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 233

Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multicast mode are true? (Choose three)

A. The port receives only RIPv2 multicast packets.

B. The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
D. The port receives only RIPv1 multicast packets.

Answer: A,B,C

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 88

210.Which of the following descript ion is correct about the ICMP redirection function? (Multiple Choice)
0A After the router receives a packet from one interface. but also the data packets sent from the interface.then the router will send ICMP redirect message to the source device (Right Answers)
0 B.After the router receives a packet fro m one interface to find the IP address and destination IP addresses of packets on the same network segment of the interface so that the router will send ICMP redirect message to the source device
0 C.After the router receives a data packet from one interface,but also the packet sent fro m the interface,the source device will send ICMP redirect messages to the router
0 D.After the router receives a data packet from one interface to find the source IP address of the packet and the address of the next hop router continues to forward the packet when IP belong to the same network segment ,then the router
will send ICMP redirect message to the source device (Right Answers)

Answe r: AD
2.On a router to act as an authentication server configured with two authentication domain "Area 1" and "Area 2",if the user using the correct user name "huawei" and the password "hello" for authentication,the n which authentication domain
will the user be assigned to ?
0 A. authenticatio n domain "Area I"
0 B.authentication domain "Area 2"
0 C.authentication domain "default domain" (Right A nswers >
0 D.authentication domain "default_admin domain"

Answer : C
1.Refer to the following BHCP flow diagram,which of the following stat ement is correct? ( ) (Multiple choice)

Client DHCPServer

DHCPDiscover
Stepl

DHCP Offer
Step2

DHCP Request
Step3

DHCP ACK
Step4

D A.The first step is to send multicast packets

D B The second step rs to send unicast packets (Right Answers >
D C The third step is to send broadcast packets (Right Answers )
D D.The fourth step is to send unicast packets (Right Answers >
D E.The fourth step is to send broadcast packets
3.Under the RIP process of Huawei equipment ,declared network 10.1.1.1/30,which of the following configuration is correct? ( ) (Multiple choice)
D A.network 10.1.1.0
DB.undo summary network 10.1.1.0
D C. Version 2 summary network 10.0 0.0 (Right Answers)
D D.undo summary network 10.1.0.0
D E network 10.0.0 0 (Right Answers)

Answer : CE
 V VRP system login timeout t ime should be set under the VTY interface.
D A True
0 B False (Right Answers >

Answer:B
5. NAPT is through TCP or UDP or IP packet s in the protocol number to distinguish the different user's IP address.
D A.True
D B False (Right Answers >

Answer:B
6. There are two routers RTA and RIBfro m the source device to the destination device ,use the Tracert command to test the path.When detecting the first jump RTA,the source device to a large port of the destination device to send a UDP
packet with a mof 1,when the packet arrives in RTB,mbecomes 0, so the RTA respond a ICMP message to the source device .
0 A.Time Exceeded {Right Answers>
0 B.Echo Request
0 C.Echo Reply
0 D.Port Unreachable

Answe r: A
7A About the corresponding relation of access control list numbers andtypes ,Whic h of the following description is true ?()
D A.The basic ACL number in the range of 1000-2999
D B.advanced ACL number in the range of 30004000
D C Layer 2 ACL number in the range of 4000-4999 (Right Answers>
D D.interface-basedACL number inthe range of 1000-2000

Answer:C
8. The following two configurat ion commands can realize router standby backup to the same destination 10.1.1.0:
[RTA) ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 12.1.1_ 1 permanent
[RTA) iproute-static 10.1.1.0 24 13.1.1.1
D A.True
D B.False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
9. ALC will not filter equipment itself generated traffic which access to other devic es;only filter forward traffic,in the forwarding traffic includes traffic
which other devices access the devic e.
D A.True (Right Answers)
D B.False

10. About the static and dynamic routing,which of the following statement is not correct?
D A.Static routing configuration in the enterprise applicatio n is simple,easy management
D B.After administrator deployingdynamic routing protocols in enterprise networks,the late maintenance and extension canbe more convenient.
D C After the link failure,static routing can automatically complete the network convergence (Right Answers >
D D.Dynamic routing protocol takes up more system resources than the static routing.

Answe r: C
11. Refer to the following topology and configuration ,the router R1 and R2 connect via Serial low-speed cable,and the data link layer encapsulation using PPP.When R1 and R2 Holdtime inconsistent,APP negotiation fails , can not
communicate.

Rt R2

S0/0/0 S0/0/0
202.10.1.1 202.10.1.2

[R l]interf ace Seria l0/0/0 [R l-Seria

l0/0/0 ] i p add ress 202.10.1.1255.255.255.0
[R l-Seria l0/0/0 ] timer hold 2
#
[R2]interface Seria l0/0/0
[R2-Seria l0/0/0 ] i p add ress 202. 10.1.2 255.255.255.0
DA. True
D B.False (Right Answers )

Answer: B
12. PING 10.0.0.2: 56 data bytes £• press CTRL_C to
break Reply from 10.0.0.2:bytes=800
Sequence=1tt1=255 time=2 ms
Reply from 10.0.0.2:bytes=800
Sequence=2 tt1=255 time=10 ms
-10.0.0.2 ping statistics -
2 packet (s)transmitted
2 packet (s) received

0.00% packet loss

round-trip min/avg/max = 216/10
ms
Network administrators use the Ping command on the AR G3 series routers to test the conne<:tivity reaching 10.0.0.2,which of the following description of the output is correct? ( )
0 A network administrators using command is ping -c 2 -s 800 10.0.0 2 (Right Answers)
0 B.network administrators using command is ping -a 2 -v 800 10.0.0.2
0 C.destination 10.0.0.2 unreachable
0 D.network administrator to modify the default TIL value for 255

Answer: A
13.Network administrator configures RIPng protocol in a small IPvs network,which of the following configurat ion is correct and effe<:tive?
0 A [RTA-GigabitEthemet0/010) npng 1enable (Right Answers )
0 B.[RTA) ripng 1enable
0 C.<RTA>ripng 1enable
0 D.[RTA-ripng-1)ripng 1enable

Answer: A
14. Iin IPv6 network,Whic h of the following characteristics does OSPPv3 no longer support ?
D A.Multi-zoning division
D B.Router-lo
D C.authentication function (Right Answers)
D D.to send protocol packets via multicast way

Answe r: C
15. On VRP platform,which command is used to set up data link layer encapsulation type to HDLC on the Serial port?
D A. encapsulation hdlc
D B link-protocol hdlc (Right Answers >
D C.hdlc enable
D D.link-protocol PPP

Answer:B
16. Make an IP address 10.0.0.1host access to the Internet.which is the necessary technology?
D A.Static Routing
D B.Dynamic Routing
D C.route redistribution
D D NAT (Right Answers)

Answe r: D
17. Which of the following versions of SNMP protocol support encryption feature?
0 A.SNMPv1
0 B.SNMPv2
0 C.SNMPv2c
D D.SNMPv3 (Right Answers }

Answer : D
18.In STP,assuming that all switches are configured the same priority,switch1MAC address is OO-e04c-00-00-40,switch 2 MAC address is OO-eO-fc-00-00-10,switch3 MAC address is OO-eO-fc-00-00-20 ,switch4 MAC address is OO-eO-fc-00-
00-80,the root switch should be ().
0 A.Switch 1
0 B Switch 2 (Right Answers)
0 C.Switch 3
0 D.Switch 4

Answer: B
19.AS shown,create VLAN2 on the SWA and SWB,configure the port connection to the host as
Access Port,and blong to VLAN2 . The SWA's G0/0/1 and SWB's G0/0/2 are both Trunk Port, and
allow all VLAN. If you want the normal communication between the host,the network
administrator needs to ( ).
 GOJ02

HostA Hosts
VLAN 2 VLAN2
0A.CreatingVLAN2 to the SWC
0 8.Configurating the G0/0/1of SWC as trunk port and allowing VLAN2
0 C.Configurating the G0/0/1and G0/0/2 of SWC as trunk ports and allowing VLAN2
0 D Creating VLAN2 to the SWC,configurating the G0/0/1 and G0/0/2 as trunk ports and allowing VLAN2 (Right
Answers )

Answer: D
20.When using FTP protocol to upgrade router software ,which transmission mode should be used?
D A b nary mode (Right Answers)
D B.flow byte model
D C. byte pattern
D D.text mode

Answer: A
21.<Huawei> system-View
[Huawei] user-interface console 0
[Huawei-ui-<:onsoleOJ user privilege level 15
[Huawei-ui-<:onsoleO] authentication-mode password
[Huawei-ui-consoleOJ set authentication password cipher huawei2012
[Huawei-ui-consoleO] quit
Which of the following statements about the above configuration commands is wrong?
0 A administrators want to login and manage equipment throughthe console port
0 B. after configuration is complete.the administrator cannot implement the equipment management through remote loginway
0 C. the users who loginthe equipment throughthe console had the highest privilege level
0 D the users login the equipment through the console whose password is "cipher huawe12012· (Right Answers >

Answer : D
22. In order to view the mode of the serial port S0/0/1on a router work in DTE or DCE,which of the following commands should be used?
D A. display controller seria l
D B.display saved-<:onfig
D C display interface s0/0/1 (Right Answers>
D D.display current-

<:onfig Answer :C
23. Inthe OSI reference model which can complete end to end error detection and flow control is ( )
0 A.Physical Layer
0 B.Data link layer
0 C.Network Layer
0 D Transport Layer (Right Answers)

Answer : D
24. When the specified interface running at RIPv2multicast mode,which of the following statement is correct? ( )(Select 2 answers)
D A receive only RIPv2 multicast messages (Right Answers>
D B does not receive RIPv1 broadcast messages (Right Answers >
D C.receive RIPv1 broadcast messages
D D.RIPv1 receive multicast messages

Answer :AB
26.When using Tracert program to test the path which reach the destination node,by default each TTLvalue Traceroute be measured ( ) times.
0A3 (Right Answers )
0 B.4
0 C. 6
0 D.8

Answer: A
25 .RSTP port in the Discarding state.although the received data frame will be discarded, but can according to the port received data frame to maintain the MAC address table.
0A.True
0B False (Right Answers )

Answer: B
27. As shown, by default,the network administrator wants to use the Eth-trunk manual aggregat ion of two physical links between SWA and SWB,which of the following description is correct ( ).

SWA SWB
GE0/0/1 G E0/0/1

E0/0/1 E0/0/1
D A.Mer polymerization canwork
D B.can be aggregated,and only after GE ports can send and receive data aggregation
D C.can be aggregated,and only after aggregation Ethernet port can send and receive data
D D.can not be aggregated (Right Answers>

Answer : D
28. As shown,the administrator is configured with the following command on the RTA.which of the following description is true? ( ) (Multiple choice)
[RTA-Serial0/0/1] rip output
[RTA-rip-1] silent-interface s0/0/1

RTA RTB

S0/0/1 S0/0/1
D A RTA will still be able to learn RTB advertised routing information (Right Answers)
D B.RTB will still be able to learn RTA advertised routing information
D C.RTA neighbor information does not include the RTB
D D. RTB neighbor information does not include the RTA (Right Answers )

Answer: AD
 29.<Huawei>display startup Mainboard
Startup system software:sd1:
/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
Next startup system software :sd1:
/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc Backup system software
for next startup: null
Startup saved-configurati on file:
null
Next startup saved-configur ation file: null
Startup license file: null
Next startup license file:null Startup patch package:
null
Next startup patch package:null Startup voice-
files:null
Next startup voice-files:null
The above is the AR2200 router's display startup information,about this information,which statement is wrong?
D A.the running configuration file is not saved
D B.in this sta rtup,the syst em file that the equipment used is ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
D C the system files cannot be modified when the equipment inthe next startup (Right Answers)
D D.the system files can use the named "startup system software<startup-s oftware-name>,cc" to modify during the equipment next sta rtup
32 The network administrator in a network to capture a data frame to the destination MAC address is 01-00-5E-A0-B1-C3 Which statement of the Mac address is correct (
)
□ A. It is a unicast MAC address
□ B It is a broadcast MAC address
□ C It is a multicast MAC address (Right Answers)
□ D It is an illegal MAC address

Answer: C

31 A switch receives a data frame with a VLAN tag. but found in its MAC address table can’t finddestination MAC address of the data frame,
then the switch to the data frame processing behavior is ().
□ A. switch willbroadcast the data framesto all ports
DB switch will broadcast the dataframes to allports (in addition toreceiving port)belonging to the data framein theVLAN (Right Answers)
□ C switch willbroadcast the data frames to all Access ports
□ D switch will discard the data frame

Answer: B
30 The following static routing configuration is correct (). (Choose 3 answers)
□ A ip route-static 129 1 0 0 16 serial 0 (Right Answers)
□ B ip route-static 10 0 0 2 16 129.1 0 0
□ C ip route-static 129 1 00 16 1 0 0 0 2 (Right Answers)
□ D ip route-static 129 1 0 0 255.255 0 0 10 0 0 2 (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD
33. As shown in the configuration, the administrator configures OSPF in R1, but on R1 learning is less than other routers routing, the possible reason is? (select three
answers) [R1] ospf [R1-ospf-1] area 1 [R1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.255
❑ A the router configuration of regional ID is different from its neighbor router ID (Right Answers)
❑ B the router without authentication function, but the neighbor router is configured with the authentication function (Right Answers)
❑ C. the router configuration. without configure OSPF process
❑ D. the router in the OSPF configuration without the network of connected neighbors (Right Answers

Answer ABD
34. As shown in illustration, the port which SWA and SWB used to connect to host is Access port and PVID is 2. GO/0/1 of SWA is Hybrid port, PVID is 1, and the port is configured Hybrid tagged
vlan 2 command. GO/0/1 of SWB is the Trunk port, PVID is 1. and VLAN2 will be allowed to pass.
SWA Hybrid Trunk SWB
GO/011 GO/0/1

Host B
VLAN 2
Which of the following description is correct?
❑ A. Host A can send data frame to Host B but cannot receive reply of host B
❑ B. Host A cannot send data frame to host B but can receive data frames which host B can actively send
❑ C. completely unable to communication between host A and host B
❑ D. one of host A and host B can normal communicate (Right Answers)
Answer : D

35. As shown, which of the following description is correct about the frame relay network equipment?( ) (select 2 answers)

I=1 A RTA is a DTE device (Right Answers)

❑ B. FRA is a DTE device
❑ C. FRB is a DCE device (Right Answers)
❑ D. S1/0/1 interface on the RTA is DCE interface

Answer: AC

36. When Huawei Sx7 series switches running STP, default priority of switch is ( ).
❑ A. 4096
❑ B. 8192
❑ C. 16384
❑ D. 32768 (Right Answers)
37. ARP protocol can resolve the destination MAC address based on the destination IP address,so as to realize the mapping of the link layer address and IP address.
D A True (Right Answers)
D B.False

Answe r: A
38. Access port can only receive and dispatch Untagged frame ,when received data frame with Tag will be discarded directly.
D A. True
0 B False (Right Answers )

Answer :B
39. Which of the following state description is wrong about Spanning Tree protocol Forwarding?(
D A.Forwarding state port can receive BPDU message
D B Forwarding state port does not learn message source MAC address (Right Answers )
D C.Forwarding state port can forward data message
D 0.Forwarding state port can send BPOU message

Answe r: B
40 .What encryption algorithm is used by CHAP in the PPP protocol?
0 A. DES
0B MD5 (Right Answers >
D C. AES
D D.Not Used

Answer : B
41. Which of the following analysis about ICMP packets is true? ( ) (Multiple choice)
D A. ICMP packets can record the time, including the original time,receipt time,transmission time (Right Answers )
D B ICMP packets are encapsulated in IP packets ,not through transport layer encapsulation (Right Answe rs )
D C.ICMP packets containing ICMP error packets,controlpackets, request/response packets,refr esh packets
D D.ICMP protocol does not support redirection function
D E.ICMP packets can not be used to detect the path MTU

Answe r: AB
42. As shown, it can be judged that 00e0-fc99-9999 is a specific host MAC address which the switc h learn from ARP,and the IP address of the host has been replaced three times.

<Huawei> display arp dynamic

IP ADDRESS MAC ADDRESS EXPIRE(M) TYPE INTERFACE VPN- NSTANCE VlAN/CEVLAN PVC

10.137.217.210 ooeo-fcOl-0203 I- Ethernetl/O/O

10.2.2.1 00e0-fc99-9999 I- Eth-TrunkO
192.168.20.1 OOeO-fc99-9999 I- VlaniflOO
10.0.0.1 ooeo-fc99-9999 I- Vlanif200
I\
Tota!:7 Dynamic:2 Static:O lnterface:S
0 A.True
0 B.False (Right Answers>

Answer: B
43. NAPT can be converted to what elements?
0 A. MAC address + port number
0 8 IP address + port number (Right Answers>
0 C.Only MAC address
0 D Only the IP address

Answer : 8
44. .As shown in figure,swit ches GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 two-port all have different Hybrid configuration ,which of the following statement is true ? ( ) (Multiple choice)

LSW1
administrative department financialdepartment

GE0/0/2

192.168.100.1 192.168.200.1

[LSW1)interfaceGiga bitEthernetO/O/1
[LSW1- Giga bitEthernetO/O/l) port hybrid u nta gged vlan 10 20
[LSW1- Gigabit Ethernet0/0/1) port hybrid pvid vlan 10
#
[LSW1)interfa ce GigabitEthernet0/0/2
[LSW1- Giga bitEthernet0/0/2] port hybrid u ntagged vla n 10 20 [LSWl-
Giga bitEthern et0/0/2]port hybrid pvid vla n 20
D A.administrative department and financial departme nt can not exchange visits, because the two departments do not belong to the same VLAN
D B.data frame issued by the administrative depa rtment in the switch carried Tag is VLAN20
D C data frame issued by the financial department in the switch carried Tag is VLAN20 (Right Answers)
D D switch here can be a layer 2 switch,it also can be a layer 3 switch, because the communication without going through 3 layer gateway (Right Answers)
D E.if switches GE0/0/1and GE0/0/2 two-port are modified to Trunk ports,then the two depart ments can communicate normally

Answer: CD
45. .About OSPF area,whic h of the following statements are correct? (Please Choose 2 Answe rs)
0 A.It must configure the IP address for the Router's loopback interface before configuring OSPF area.
0 B.The numbers run from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. (Right Answers)
0 C.The number of backbone area can not be 2 (Right Answers )
0 D.All networks should be declared in the region 0.

Answer: BC
46. Which of the following parameters need to consider when electing root port in STP ? (Multiple choice)
D A Cost of the port to reach the root switc h (Right Answers)
D B.port priority (Right Answers)
D C port slot number, such as G0/0/1 (Right Answers )
D D.port MAC address
D E.port duplex mode

Answer :ABC
47. Which of the following statement about Ethernet port working modeis true ? (Multiple choice)
D A.kilomega Ethernet can work only in full-duplex mode
D B.gigabit Ethernet can work only in full-duplex mode
D C.can work normally when the Ethernet port mode mismatc h
D D.Ethernet port mode can be artificially defined {Right Answers )
D E. 1OOM Ethernet port working mode supports full and half duplex mode (Right Answers )

Answer: DE
48. As shown inthe command,whe n the administrator configures DHCPserver,which of the following commands configuredtime isthe shortest?
ip pool pool1
network 10.10.10.0 mask 255255.255.0
gateway-list in in 10.1
D A.dhcp select relay
D B.lease day 1 (Right Answers)
D C. lease 24
D O.lease 0

Answer: B
49. .Huawei switch can use command vlan batc h to batch create multiple VLHN,simplifying the configuration process.
0 A True (Right Answers)
D B.False

Answe r: A
50. As shown in illustration,the administrator hope to improve the performance of the network,which of the following method is the most appropriate?

D A. use the switches to connect each host.and modify the work pattern of each host to full duplex (Right Answers )
D B.use the switches to connect each host ,and modify the work pattern of each host to half duplex
D C.use the Hub to connect each host,and modify the work pattern of each host to full duplex
D D.use the Hub to connect each host ,and modify the work pattern of each host to half duplex

Answer : A
51 Which of the following OSFF version applies to 1Pv6?
0 A OSPFv1
0 8 OSPFv2
0 C OSPFv3 (Right Answers )
0 0.OSPFv4

Answer: C
52. Inthe network shown in the figure,which of the following description is correct? ( ) (Choose 2 answers)

SWA RTA

HUB
0 A. Between RTA and the SWC for the same collision domain
0 B.Between SWA and SWB for the same broadcast domain
0 C Between SWA and SWC for the same collision domain (Right Answers>
0 D Between SWA and SWC for the same broadcast domain (Right Answers >

Answer: CD
53. When routing in the loop,which of the following problems may cause ? (Multiple choice)
D A.packet endless transfer
D B.router CPU consumption increases (Right Answers)
D C router memory consumption increases (Right Answers)
D D.the packet destination IPaddress constantly being modified
D E.data packets bytes is bigger and bigger

Answer: BC
54. Network structure and OSPF partitions as shown in diagram,except for R1,router R2, RJ and R4 are all ABR router of OSPF.

,-------- ------- - ----- ----, \

AreaO

_,
,-- ----, ,---- --,
' I I
I I
'I I

I I I
I I
I I I
I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I
I
Areal Area2 I
I
I
I
 :

,
DA. True
I '
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------I

D 8 False (Right Answers)

55. Two routers run on the PPP link,the administrator are configured OSPF single area on the two routers,and they have same Router ID,which of the following description is correct?
D A.the two routers will establish normaland complete neighbor relationship
D B VRP will prompt the Router ID conflict of two Router ·(Right Answers>
D C.the two routers will establish normaland complete adjacency relationship
D D.the routers will not send the hello message to each other

Answe r: B
56. There are users in company reflected when transfer files via network,the speed is very low.The adminstrator found some duplicate frames using
Wireshark software caught,the following possible causes or solution described is correct ().
A.Switch can not find data fra me destination MAC address inthe MAC address table,it willlflood the data frame.
B.Corporate netwo rk switching equipment must be upgraded
C.Network has a loop on the second floor (Right A nswers)
D.There is no configuration VLAN in network

Answe r: C
57. After you enable the GRE keepalve function,GRE tunnel home terminal will periodically send keepalive packets every 1Os to the opposite end.
D A.True
D B False (Right Answers)

Answer: B
58. About the configuration and deployment of PPP,which of the following statement is correct?
D A. PPP can not be used to issue IP address
D B PPP supports CHAP and PAP authentication modes (Right Answers)
D C.PPP can not modify keepalive time C.PPP does not support two-way authentication

Answer : B
59.<Huawei>system-vi ew
[Huawei] user-interface console 0
[Huawei-ui-c onsoleO] history-command max-size 20
Which state ment is correct about the above configuration?
D A history-command max-size 20 is to adjust the history command buffer size is 20 (Right Answers )
D B.The default history command buffe r size is 5
D C.The default history command buffe r size is 5 bytes
D D.After the configuration,the history command buffer can store 20 bytes of command

Answer: A
60. About the command of det ecting IP network connectivity,which of the following statement is fa lse? (Multiple choice}
0 A ping 127 0 0 1 t his command 1s used t o detect if the host network c ableis well plugged in (Right A nswers )
0 B ping 127 0 0 2. this command 1s used to detect rf the host network cable is well plugged 1n (Right Answers >
0 C.ping command can be used to detect the host to the local gateway connectivity
0D ipconfigrelease commandcanbeusedto detect the host to the localgateway connectMty (Right Answers >

Answer :ABO
61. IP packet has a header I m field, on the field statement is correct ().
D A.The fie ld length is seven
D B.The fie ld is used for packet fragmentation
D C The field is used anti-packet ring (Right Answers )
D D.The field is used to indicate the priority of the packet

Answer: C
62. As shown,the two hosts realize VLAN's communication by single-arm routing,when RTA G0/0/1.2 sun-interface receive the data fram that host 8 send to host A,then RTA will perform which of the following operation?

RTA

Vian 10 Vian 20
GW: 10.0.1.254 GW: 10.0.2.254
0 A.RTA willforward the data frame through the G0/0/1.1 sub-interface
0 8.aft er RTA delete VLAN tag 20,via G0/0/1.1interface to be sent
0 C.RTA should delete VLAN tag 20 fi rst,and then add a VLAN tag 10,from G0/0/1.1interface to send out (Right Answers )
0 D.RTA will discard the data frame
63. As shown in the topology and configuration on the switches connected port, can determine the labelfor the data frames can be forwarded between the two switches .

GE0/0/1

LSWl LSW2

[LSW1) interfa ce GigabitEthernet0/0/1

[LSWl-Giga bi tEthernet0/0/1]Port link-type tru nk
[LSWl-GigabitEthernetO/O/l]Porttru nk pvid vlan 20
[LSWl-GigabitEthernetO/O/l ]Port trunk allow-pass vlan 10
#
[LSW2]interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
[LSW2-Giga bit Ethernet0/0/1] Port link-type tru nk [LSW2-
Giga bitEthernet0/0/1]Porttru nk pvid vla n 10
[LSW2-Giga bitEthernet0/0/1]Port tru nk allow-pass vlan 10
OA. TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers>
54.In the OSPF protocol,about description of the DR.whic h of the following is correct? (Multiple choice)
D A By default all routers in the broadcast networks will jointly participate inOR election (Right Answers)
D B. If the priority value of the two routers are different,choose a smaller priority value router as DR
D C if the pnonty values of two routers are equal then choose the Router of the big Router ID as DR (Right Answers )
D D need to establish adjacency relat1onsh1p between DR and BDR (Right Answers)

Answer : ACD
65. The administrator can not log in through Telnet AR2200 routers ,but other administrators can log in,so which of the following items are possible reasons? (Multiple choice)
D A The administrator user account has been disabled (Right Answers)
D B.The privilege level administrator user account has been changed to 0
D C.The Administrator user account has been deleted (Right Answers)
D D.AR2200 Router Telnet service has been disabled

Answer: AC
66. Which of the following description of GVRP is correct?
0 A.GVRP enables network devices to dynamically discover and delete
0 B.GVRP is a protocol must be turn ed on the switch,otherwise it can not communicate between switches
0 C.GVRP is based on GARP working mechanism,and the apparatus used to maintain dynamic VLAN registration
information and propagates the information to other devices (Right Answers)
67. Which of the following several subnet route may converge Routing entry 10.0.0.24/29? (Multiple choice)
0 A.10.0.0.24/30 (Right Answers)
0 B. 10.0.0.23/30
0 C. 10.0.0.26/30
0 D 10 0 0 28/30 (Right Answers)
 Answe r: AD

68. Which of the following several subnet route may converge Routing entry 10.0.0.24/29? (Multiple choice)
0 A.10.0.0.24/30 (Right Answers)
0 B. 10.0.0.23/30
0 C. 10.0.0.26/30
0 D 10 0 0 28/30 (Right Answers)

Answe r: AD
69. Network administrator creates VLAN 10 on 3 layer switches, and in the VLAIN virtual interface configurat ion the IP address.
When using the command "display ip interface brief'view interface status ,find VLANIF 10 interfaces are down ,how to make the kind of operation by 10 VLANIF interface returns to normal ?
0 A.Use the command in the VLANIF 10 interface "undo shutdown" B.Add any physical interface into VLAN 10 C.Adding a stale must carry VLAN 10 interface for physical UP D.adding a stale must be UP and must Trunk types of
interfaces into VLAN 10

Answe r: C
70. As shown in illustration,which of the following description about the network topology is correct? j£

RTA

HostA Host B Host c Host D

0 A. The network has 6 collision domains
0 8 The network has 2 broadcast domains (Right Answers)
0 C.The network has 12 collision domains
0 D.The network has 6 broadcast do mains
71. On this multi-point Ethernet access network,PPPoE server can via an Ethernet port and a lot of PPPoE client to establish a PPP connection,the server must create a unique session identifie r to distinguish different connection for each
PPP sess ion.
What parameters will be used to establish PPPoE session identifier?
0 A.MAC address B.IP address and MAC address C.MAC address and PPP-lD D.MAC address and Session-lD

Answer: D
72. InAR router created on certification plan,authorization scheme ,accounting scheme, HWTACACS or RADIUS server template to the domain only after the application to take effect.
0A TRUE (Right Answers>
Q B.FALSE

Answer: T
72.In the data packet which is shown in illustration,which of the following fields will be encrypted ESP protocol of IPsec
VPN?

IP Header ESP Header ESP Tra.,r ESP Auth

D A TCP Header £-. Data .£-. ESP Trailer (Right Answers )

D 8.ESP Header.TCP Header .£-. Data
0 C.ESP Header .£-. TCP Header £-. Data £-. ESPTrailer
0 D.ESP Header .£-.TCP Header .£-.Data .£-.ESPTrailer£-. ESPAuth

Answer: A
73. A company network administrator wants to remotely manage branch network equipment,which agreement will be used in the following?
0 A.CIDR
0 B.RSTP
0 C Telnet (Right Answers }
0 D.VLSM

Answer:C
74. Trunk ports can both send the data frame with labels and the data frame without labels.
0A TRUE (Right Answers)
OB.FALSE

Answe r: T
75. Huawei device ports support auto-negotiation technology,which of the following about the negotiation result is correct?
0 A.Gigabit electricalconsultat ions under certain port full-duplex
0 B.1OOM electrical under negotiation result must be a half-duplex port
0 C negotiation p<acess 1s relegated consultations that 1000M-> 100M-> 10M (Right Answers )
0 D.When the duplex mode is inconsistent,can be solved by replacing the network cable

Answer :C
 76.
As shown the two switches are disabled STP protocol Host A sent an ARP Request the following discription is correct? (Multiple choice)

D A.the two switches can realize load balance

D B.the two switches' CPU usage will be high (Right Answers )
D C.the two switches' MAC address table will frequenUy jitter (Right Answers )
D D.this network will appear repeated frames (Right Answers)

77.PPP is more secure than HOLC,because PPP support ( ).(Multiple choice)

0 A PAP (Right Answers >
0 B.MD5
0 C.CHAP (Right Answers >
0 D.SSH

Answer: AC
78. Which of the following statement is not correct? (Multiple choice)
0 A.Each static route priority may not be the same
0 B.Bydefault route priority order ishigherthan RJP OSPF
D C If the cost of the routes 1s larger the higher the pnority of the route (Right Answers)
D D VRP the routing protocol greater the pnontyvalue indicates a higher priority ofthe route (Right Answers>

Answer:CD
79. When using dynamic NAT address pool,address pool can be reused,the same IP network simultaneously mapped to multiple IP.
OA.TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F
80. As Network topology shown in the network all link cost value as the default value,when RTA forwarding packets to RTE,which of the description about routing is right? (Multiple choice)

D A If your network routers are running OSPF, the RTA will use S1 I 010 interface to forward data to RTE
D B.If your network routers are running RIPv2.the RTA will use S1 I 010 interface to forward data to RTE (Right Answers )
D C.If your network routers are running OSPF. the RTA will use EO I 011interface to forward data to RTE (Right Answers )
D D.If your network routers are running RIPv2, the RTA will use S2 I 010 interface to forward data to RTE
81. When deploying an ACL on Huawei equipment ,which of the following description is correct? (Multiple choice)
D A.When you call ACL at the interface can only be applied to outbound
D B same ACL can be called at a plurality of interfaces (Right Answers )
D C.ACL defined rules, only progressive in this order 10,20,30
D D.ACL can not be used to filter OSPF traffic flow because OSPF does not use UDP protocol encapsulation
D E.ACL can match packets TCP I UDP port number.and you can specify a range of port numbers (Right Answers)

Answe r: BE
82. When the router is powered on.reading configuration files from the default storage path for the router's init ialization.If the default storage path without configuration file,what wfll be used to initialize by the router?
D A.New Configuration
D B.initial configurat ion
D C default parameters (Right Answers)
D D.Current Configuration

Answer: C
83. About the free ARP,which statement is true? (Multiple choice)
0 A by sending free ARP can confirm whether there is IP address conflict (Right Answers )
0 B.free ARP message format belongs to the ARP request message (Right Answers)
0 C.free ARP can help to update the IP address information
0 D.free ARP message format belongs to the ARP Reply message

Answer:AB
84. The Router-ID of OSPFvJ can be automatically generated by the system.
QA. TRUE
0 B FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F
85. As shown in illustration,the four switches are all running STP,various parameters all use default values.

ROOT

G0/0/2

blocked
Switch C

If switch C GO I 012 port is blocked,which cannot be sent via the port configuration bpdus,how long will the netwo rk port enter to the forwarding state?
D A. about 30 seconds
D B.about 50 seconds (Right Answers )
D C.about 15 seconds
D D.about 3 seconds
86. Which of the following description about OSPF Router ID is not correct? (Multiple choice)
D A Router ID must be the same in the same area in different regions or different Router ID (Right Answers )
D B.Router ID must be an interface IP address of the router (Right Answers ) 0 C.Router ID must be specified by manual configuration (Right Answe rs )
0 D.Prerequisites OSPF protocol is running the router Router ID

Answer: ABC

87. Caught an Ethernet frame through caught tools,found that the valued of Type/Length field of the frame is Ox0800,which of the dollowing description about the frame is correct? (Multiple choice)
D A the frame structure of the frame is Ethernet_ll format (Right A nswe rs >
D B.the frame structure of the frame is 802.3 format
D C.the bearing of the frame is an IP message (Right A nswers )
D D.the bearing of the frame is an IPX message

Answer: AC
88. Network management hopes to effectively use the IP address of 192.168.176.0125 segment. The company Marketing Department now has 20 hosts.
Which of the following addresses are assigned to the marketing department?
D A. 192.168.176.0/25
0 B.192.168.176.160/27
0 c. 192.168.176.48/29
D 0. 192.168.176.96/27 (Right Answers )

Answer: D
89. Tracert in Huawei router diagnostic tool use UDP encapsulation tracking data.
0A.TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answer: T
90. What's effect of Command port trunk allow-pass vlan?
D A That port allows all VLAN data frames go through (Right Answers )
D B.the peer port connected to that port must configure port trunk permit vlan all at the same time
D C.the connected peer port can dynamically decide which VLAN IDto go through
D D.If you configure the connected remote equipment with port defa ult vlan 3 commands,then the two devices'VLAN 3 can not intercommunicate

Answe r: A
91. The main function of lnAR is to solve each virtual circuit connection of the addresses of the agreement for the equipment,including IP address and the IPX address ,etc.
0A TRUE (RightAnswers>
Q B.FALSE

Answer:T
92. Inthe transport layer of the OSI reference model,which of the following flow control can be used? (Multiple choice)
0 A.Confirm technology
0 B caching technology (Right Answers >
D C source quench packets (Right Answers>
D D window mechanism (RightAnswers >

Answer:BCD
93. When a router forwarding a packet.if no match to the corresponding spedfic routes and when there is no default route will discard the packet directly.
0A. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB.FALSE

Answer: T
94. Which statement as shown about the VLAN configurat ion of Huawei is correct? (Multiple choice)

vla n 10 vla n 30
# #
interface Giga bitEthernet0/0/1 interfa ce Giga bitf thernet0/0/3
port link-type access port link-type tru nk
port defa ult vla n 10 GE0/0/2 port trunk allow-pass vla n 30

LSWl

vlan 20
mac-vi an mac-address 0022-0022-0022 priority 0 vlan 40
#
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/4
interface
Giga bitEthernet0/0/2 port port link-type hybrid
hybrid untagged vlan 20 port hybrid untagged vlan 40
mac-vla n enable
D A Client 1belong t o VLAN 10.and the command of the divis ion of VLAN swit ches correc t (Right Answers )
D B Chent2 belong to VLAN20 .and the command of switch MAC address of VLAN-based correct (Right Answers >
D C.Client3 belong to VLAN30 ,and the command of the division of VLAN switches correct
D D.Client4 belong to VLAN40,and the command of the division of VLAN switches correct
D E Client4 not belong to VLAN40 and the command of the d
ivision of VLAN on the switch command error (Right Answers >
 95.[Huawe user-interface vty 0 14
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14) acl 2000
inbound [Huawei-ui-vty0-14) user
privilege level 3
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14) authentication-mode password
Please configure the login password £: maximum length 16 £© :huawei
the user privilege leve l is set to leve l 3, which is the highest level that can be set.
QA.TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F
96.[RTA] acl 200 1
[RTA-acl-basic-2001] rule 20 permit source 20.1.1.0 0.0.255
[RTA-acl-basic-2001] rule 10 deny source 20.1.1.0 0.0.255
Completed as shown on the router RTA ACL configuratio n,the following descript ion is correct ( ). [RTA] acl 2001
D A. VRP system will automatically configure the order in order to adjust the first rule number 5
D B.VRP system does not adjust the orde r number, but will be configured to match the first rule permit source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
D C.configuration errors, sequentially numbered rules must be small to large configurations
D D VRP system will sequentially numbered to match the second rule deny source 20 1 1.0 0 0.0.255 (Right Answers) Answer: D

97. As shown, Switc h SWA is running RSTP,after adminstrator configuring the GO 0/3 of SWA as Edge Port,use a switch instead of the host C,so the correct state ment of floowing is( ).

SWA
HostA Host 8 Host C
D A. G0/0/3 Port of SWA will be closed after receiveing the switches send BPDU.
D 8.G0/0/3 Port of SWA will discard the received BPDU,then normalforwarding data.
0 C.After GOI0/ 3 Port of SWA receiving BPDU,RSTP operation will be carried out. (Right Answe rs>
0 D.All hosts,only the host A can normalsend and receive data.

Answer : C
98. Which of the following content is not included in the routing table?
0 A the source address (Right Answers>
0 B.next hop
0 C.the target network
0 D.the routing cost

Answer :A
99. In a private network ,there is a host that wants to vist the Internet,to achieve this requirement ,the administrator should do the following on the network edge router configuration? (Multiple choice)
0 A. NAT Easy IP (Right Answers >
0 B.DHCP
0 C.STP
D D.Default router (Right Answers)

Answer: AD
100. Which statment of lnter-VLAN communication is correct? (Multiple choice)
D A VLAN between the communications can be achieved by single-arm routing (Right Answers)
D B VLAN between the communications can be achieved through layer 3 switches (Right Answers)
D C VLAN between the communications can not be achieved through layer 2 switches (Right Answers)
D D.VLAN between the communication can be achieved namely by GVRP
D E.VLAN between the communicat ions must rely on routers to achieve

Answer :ABC
101.1Pv6 address do not include which of the following types of address?
D A.Unicast Address
D B.Multicast Address
D C broadcast address (Right Answers)
D D.anycast address

Answer: C
102. Which description about the DD in the OSPF packet and LSA are correct? (Multiple choice)
0 A.DDpacket contains informatio nof LSA
0 B.DD includes only the LSA header information in the packet (Right Answers>
0 C.LSA head can be uniquely identifies a LSA (Right Answers >
0 D.LSA head is only a small part of the LSA (Right Answers)

Answe r: BCD
103. Huawei AR G3 series routers can update the system files through FTP and TFTP,which of the following description is correct? (Multiple choice)
D A. AR G3 series routers can be used as FTP Client (Right Answers>
D B.AR G3 series routers can be used as FTP Server (Right Answers >
D C AR G3 series routers can be used as TFTP Client (Right Answers )
D D.AR G3 series routers can be used as TFTP Server

Answer: ABC
104. Which of the following description about the PPP is correct ? (Multiple choice)
D A.For the physical layer,PPP supports asynchronous link and synchronous link (Right Answers)
D B.PPP extens ibility is bad,can not be deployed on the Ethernet link
D C.PPP supports plaintext and ciphertext (Right Answers )
D D.PPP supports a variety of network layer protocols.such as IPCP,IPXCP (Right Answers)
D E PPP supports to bundle multiple physical link is to increase the logical link bandwidth (Right Answers)

Answer: ACDE
105. Frame Relay networks , DLCI interface is a virtual circuit identifier;it must remain globally unique in the planning and deployment.
0A TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F
106.Which of the following about static routing in huaweiequipment priority is wrong?
D A static routing priority value 1n the range of 0-255 (Right Answers)
D B.static routing priority of the default value is 60
D C.static routing priority can be divided into internal and external priority priority,the administrator can change the priority
D .static routing priority value of 255 indicates which made unavailable

Answer :A
107. If administrator wants to update VRP of Router AR2200,the correct methods are ( ) (Multiple choice)
D A The administrator configures AR2200 as FTP chent , and transfer VRP software through FTP (Right Answers>
D B The administrator configures AR2200 as FTP server .and transfer VRP software through FTP (Right Answers>
D C.The administrator configures AR2200 as TFTP server,and transfer VRP software through TFTP
D D The administrator configures AR2200 as TFTP chent and transfer VRP software through TFTP (Right Answers)

Answer :ABO
108. Network administrators in order to constantly changing some office locations.thus often classified from different users access the corporate network to switch VLAN 10,which way should be used to divide VLAN?
0 A.Port-based divide VLAN
D B.protocol based divide VLAN
D C.MAC address-based divide VLAN (Right Answe rs)
D D.Subnet based divide VLAN

Answer: C
109.[RTA] aaa
[RTA-aaa] domain huawei
(RTA-aaa-domain-huawei] authentication-scheme au1
(RTA-aaa-doma in-huawei] authentication-sc heme au2
Network administrators configure is shown above on Huaweirouters RTA. if a user needs to process authentiation in the authentic ation domain "Huawel",which of the following descript ion is correct?
D A.use "authentication-scheme au1" authentiation
0 B use the "authentication-scheme au2" authentiation (Right Answers)
D C.use the "aut hentication-scheme au1" authentiation,if "au1" is deleted,it will use "au2"
D D.use the "authentication-scheme au2" authentiation,if "au2" is deleted,it will use "au1"

Answe r: B
110. View the Age time of RIP routing through the command on the router,what does Age time refer to?
0 A.RIP message update interval
DB RIP routing aging time (Right Answers)
0 C.RIP routing suppression time
0 D.RIP routing switching time

Answer: B
111. Alternate Port and Backup port in STP all can not forward user traffic,but can receive, process occurs and sends BPOU.
0A.TRUE (Right Answers)
QB.FALSE

Answe r: T
112. Refer to the following configuration,can judge the equipment GigabitEthernet0/0/0 of the IP address of the interface configuration is wrong,because the IP addre ss of the interface can not end in zero.
[Huawei] interface GigabitEthe rnet0/0/0
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/0) ip address 19.224.17.0 255.255.128.0
0A. TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers>

Answe r: F
113. Which of the following protocols using Frame Relay addresses dynamically mapped to DLCI?
D A.ARP Protocol
D B.RARP Protocol
D C inARP Protocol (Right A nswers)
D D.map Protocol

Answe r: C
114.<Huawei>reset saved-configuration
Warning:The act on will delete the saved configuration in the device
The configuration will be erased to reconfigure.Continue? [YIN ] £0
The adminstrator configurated on the AS2200 as above,so which of the following statement about the configuration information is correct?
D A If users want to clear the saved configuration file ,you should select "Y" (Right Answers )
D B.Device startup configuration file will be retained
D C.If users want to clear the saved c onfiguration file,you should select "N"
D D.Saved configuration file will be replaced with the running configuration file

Answe r: A
115. In Huawei devices,what are the methods of OSPF selecting Router ID of the following? (Multiple Choice)
D A If have configured the Loopback interface choosing the largest IP address from loopback interface as the Router ID (Right A nswers )
D B Ifdo not configure the Loopback interface select the largest IP address from other interface as the Router ID (Right Answers)
D C Huawei switches may use the largest IP address of VLANIF as the Router ID (Right Answers>
0 D.Use 127.0.0.1by default
D E Manually define an arbitrary legal Router ID (Right Answers )

Answer:ABCE
116. The following about Trunk port and the Access port ,which description is right?
0 A the Access port can only send the untagged frames (Right Answers>
0 B.the Access port can only send the tagged frame 0 C.the Trunk port can only send the untagged fra mes 0 D.the Trunk port can only send the tagged frame

Answer:A

117. Huawei equipment in the RIPprocess,not only can use the command to configure RIP route preference priority value,you can specify the routing poficy after this command,to meet the conditions specified routing set priorityvalue.
0A TRUE (Right Answers>
OB. FALSE

Answe r: T
118. A switch directly connected to the specified port of the opposite end equipment through a port,but the port does not forward any message,but can be monitored network changes by receiving BPDU,so what should be the role of the port?
0 A. Root port
0 8.Designated port
0 C Alternate port (Right Answers }
0 D.Disable port

Answer : C
119. Which of the following about door of TIL field in the IP packet header is correct?
0 A.m defines the number of the source host can send packets
0 B.m defines the source host can send packets of interval
0 C.IP limit packet per passes through a router, mvalue is decremented by 1 (Right Answers>
0 D.IP limit packet per passes through a router,m value is incremented by 1

Answe r: C
120.VRP supports OSPF multi-process,if you do not specify a process ID when you enable OSPF, the default number of processes is ( ).
D A.O
D B.1 (Right Answers )
D c.10
D D.100

Answer: B
121. Which of the following WLAN standard operating in the 5 GHz frequency band? (Choose 2 Answers)
D A. 802 11a (Right Answers)
D B.802.11b
D c. 802.11g
D D.802.11n (Right Answers)

Answer: AD
122. Which of the following is routing protocol? (Multiple Choice)
D A IP
0 B OSPF (Right Answers>
0 C BGP (Right Answers>
0 0.IPX

Answer: BC
123. In the frame relay network,which description is correct about mapping information in the DTE device? ( )
D A local DLC with the remote IP address mapping (Right Answers)
D B.local IP address with remote DLC mapping
D C.local DLC with local IP address mapping
D D.remote DLC with the remote IP address mapping

Answer: A
124. Which of the following parameters can not be used for advanced access control lists?
0A Physical Interface (Right Answers)
0 B.destination port number
0 C.Protocol No.
0 D.timerange

Answer:A
125. On Huawei AR G3 router,in VRP ,Ping command's -i parameters is used to set ( )?
D A Send Echo Request packet interface (Right Answers >
D B.Send Echo Request packet's source IP address
D C.receive Echo Reply packets interface
D D.receives Echo Reply messages destination IPaddress

Answer:A
126. As shown,according to the configuration of the router R1,it can judge that the two PC can access ISP network normally.

LSWl

GE0/0/3
GE0/0/0

200.100.1.1
[Rl]acl number 2000
[R1-acl-basic-2000)rule5 permit source 192.168.0.0 0.0.0.255
Client2 #
192.168.0.2 [Rl]interface Giga bitEt hemet0/0/0
[Rl-Giga bitEthemet0/0/0]ip add ress 192.168.0.254255.255.255.0
I*
[Rl]interfaceGiga bitEthemet0/0/1
[Rl-Giga bitEthernetO/O/l ]ip address 200.100.1.2 255.255.255.252 [Rl-Giga
bitEthernetO/O/l ]nat outbound 2000 easy-ip
#
[Rl]ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 200.100.1.1

QA.TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers>

127.[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/1) port link-type trunk

[Huawei-GigabitEthe rnet0/0/ 1) port default vtan 10
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/2) port link-type trunk
(Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/2) port trunk allow-pass vtan 10
According to the command as shown above,which of the following description is correct? (Multiple choice)
D A GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port's PVID is 10 (Right Answers)
0 B.GigabitEthemet0/0/1 port's PVID is 1
0 C.GigabitEthernet0/0/2 port's PVID is 10
D D GigabitEthernet0/0/2 port's PVID is 1 (Right Answers)

Answe r: AD
128.As shown,if run the command ping 10.1.1.2 on R1,then data frames of VLAN10 which LSW1 receives from LSW2 is labeled.

Rl LSWl LSW2

GE0/0/0

[Rl]interf ace Giga bitEt hernet0/0/0

[Rl- Giga bitEthernetO/O/O]ip address 10.1.1.1255.255.255.0
#
[LSWl]interfa ce Giga bitEthernet0/0/1
[LSWl- GigabitEthernet0/0/1]port hybrid untagged vlan 1020
[LSWl-GigabitEthernet0/0/1) port hybrid pvidvlan 10
[LSWl]interface Giga bitEthernet0/0/2
[LSWl- GigabitEt hernet0/0/2] port link-type trunk
(LSWl-Giga bitEthernet0/0/2]porttrunkallow-passvlan 1020
#
(LSW2] interfa ce Giga bitEt hernet0/0/2
[LSW2- Giga bitEthernet0/0/2) port link-type trunk
[LSW2- GigabitEthernet0/0/2)port tru nk a llow-pass vla n 1020
(LSW2)interfacevlanif 10
[LSW2-Vla niflO]ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
0A TRUE {Right Answers)
OB.FALSE
129.The command which is used to enable CHAP authe ntication in PPP is pppd chap authenticat ion
OA. TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers)

Answer:F
130. Ethernet electrical interface can work in three kinds of duplex mode,which mode can Ethernet optical interface only work in?
D A full-duplex (Right Answers)
D B.half-duplex
D C.self-negotiation
D D.simplex

Answer:A
131. When a router configures OSPF,which of the followings must be configured manually? (Multiple Choice)
D A Configure Router ID
D B Open the OSPF process (Right Answers>
D C Create an OSPF area (Right Answers>
D D specify network segments that are contained in each region (Right Answers )

Answer:BCD
132. Which of the following are the characteristics of default VLAN in two-layer Ethernet switc h? (Multiple choice)
D A. The default VLAN cannot be deleted manually (Right Answers)
D B By default.all switch ports are member ports of the default VlAN (Right Answers )
D C.must first create a default VLAN to assign ports for it
D D.configured IP address on the switch will only be appliedto the member ports of the default VLAN

Answe r: AB
133. Between two routers connected via the serial port and the link layer protocol is PPP,which of the following parameters must be negotiated before the PPP link UP? (Multiple choice)
0 A MRU (Right Answers)
0 8.Authentication Password
D C. Magic-Number (Right Answers)
0 D.Authenticat ion Protocol (Right Answers )

Answer: ACD
134. Under Standard STP mode,which port of the following non-root switch will forward TC set BPDU generated by the root switch?
D A.root port
D 8.backup port
D C designated port (Right Answers>
D D.Preparatory port

Answer :C
135. The following description about layer 2 Ethernet switches,whic h is not correct?
D A.can learn the MAC address
D B needs to do some midifications on the forwarded packet's layer three head,then forward again (Right Answers )
D C.to forward according to the Ethernet frame's layer two head information
D D.layer 2 Ethe rnet switc hes working in data link layer

Answe r: B
136.As shown,the host has been through a Telnet and establishes the connection between the router and about the data sent to the routefs host by the host,which
description is correct? (Multiple Choic e)

SWA RTA
GO/O/ G0/0/0
D A The desitmat1on MAC address that the host sends the data frame to 1s the router G0/0/0 interface's MAC address (Right Answers)
D B.The des itination MAC address that the host sends the data frame to is the swtic h's MAC address
D C.the host sending data segment's destination port number is 80
D D The desitination IP address that the host sends the data to is the

router G0/0/0 interface's IP address (Right Answers ) Answer: AD

137. NAPT allows multiple private IP addresses through different port mapping to the same public IP address.whic h of the following about NAPT description is correct?
D A.must manually configure port number, and the corresponding relation of private address
D B.only need to configure the port range
D C.don't need to do anything about port configuration (Right Answers)
D D.you need to use the ACL assigned port Numbers

Answe r: C
138. Which of the following ways VRP support to configure the router through? (Multiple choice}
0 A.Through the Console port to configure the router (Right Answers)
0 B through Telnet to configure the router (Right Answers)
0 C through mini USB port to configure the route (Right Answers }
0 D.through FTP to configure the router

Answer: ABC
139.A company to apply for a Class C IPaddresses,but to be assigned to six subsidiary companies,one of the largest subsidiaries have 26 computers.Different subsidiary must be in different network segment,the subnet mask should be set
to ( ).
0 A. 255.255.255.0
0 B.255.255.255.128
0 C.255.255.255.192
0 D 255.255 255.224 (Right Answers }

Answer: D
140. Which of the following description about eSight is wrong?
D A.eSight can be used monitor and manage enterprise networks
D B eSight can only manage huawei's network equipment (Right Answers)
D C.eSight supports WLAN device management and monitoring of hot spot coverage
D D.eSight supports configuration file backup andtraffic analysis

Answe r: B
141. As shown,RTA with RIB G0/0/1 interface is configured with different network prefix 1Pv6 addresses,network administrators are running OSPFv3 protocol on two routers, and configure with OSPFv3 Router-ID for each Router,the n which
following description is correct? (Multiple Choice)

RTA RTB
G0/0/1 G0/0/1
Fe80::fe03:538b/64 Fe80::fe03:62ca/64
loopbackO : 2031:7::N64 loopbackO : 2032:3::D/64
loopbac kl : 1.1.1.1/32 loopbackl : 2.2.2.2/32
D A. RTA and RIB can establish OSPFv3 neighbor relationship (Right Answers )
D B.RTA and RIB can not establish OSPFv3 neighbor relationship
D C.RTA can ping RIB
D D.RTA cannot ping RTB (Right Answers)

Answe r: AD
142. VLSM can expand any IPnetwork,including the Class D address.
QA.TRUE
QB FALSE (Right Answers )

Answer: F
143. As shown,the network administrator to configure the router finishe-0 Telnet and found the host can not establish a connection to the router via Telnet.

SWA RTA

G0/0/1 G0/0/0

Which of the following options can help solve this problem? (Multiple Choice)
D A.Check the host's ARP cache table overflow or not
D 8.Check the switch is configured with a default gateway address
D C.Use Ping to check the hosts and routers G0/0/0 IPbetween the interface connectivity (Right Answers)
D D Check the router is correct or not configured on Telnet (Right Answers)

Answer: CD
144. Which command can used to switch to user view in the system view?
0 A.system-view
0 B.souter
0 C.quit (Right Answers)
0 D.user-view

Answer: C
145. As shown,about the topology and configuration of OSPF,which of the following statement is correct?

R1 R2
G E0/0/0 GE0/0/0

f Rl]interface Gigabit Et hernet0/0/0

[Rl-GigabitEthernet0/0/0)ip add ress 100.1.1.1255.255.255.0
[Rl-GigabitEt hernetO/O/O)ospf network-type p2p
[Rl-GigabitEthernetO/O/O)ospf dr-priority 100
[Rl-GigabitEt hernetO/O/O)ospf timer hello 20
[Rl]ospf 1
[R1-ospf-l)area 0.0.0.0
[Rl-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0]network 100.1.1.10.0.0.0
It
{R2)interface Gigabit Ethernet0/0/0
f R2-GigabitEthernetO/O/O)ip add ress 100.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
[R2)ospf 1
[R2-ospf -l)a rea 0.0.0.0
[R2-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0]network 100.1.1.2 0.0.0.0
D A.R1 and R2 can establish stable OSPF neighbor relationship
D B.As long as restoring the interface network type of R1to the default type of broadcasting,R1 and R2 can create a stable neighbor relationship
D C.as long as restoring the interface network type of R1 to the default type of broadcasting,while adjusting hello time to 10S.R1 and R2 can create a stable neighbor relationship (Right Answers >
D D.R1 compared with R2,R2 have the opportunity to become the DR. because its DR priority value of interface is smaller.
146.[R1) display interface g0/0/0
GigabitEthernet0/0/0 current state:Administratively DOWN Une protocol current state : DOWN
Which description is correct about above display information?
D A. Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 interface connect an error cables
D B.Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 interface did not configure IP address
D C.Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 interface dynamic routing protocol is not enabled
D D Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 interface manually shut down by the administrator (Right Answers)
 Answer: D

147. Administrators found two routers in the establishment of OSPF neighbors to stay in TWO-WAY state ,which of the following description is correct? A. routers configured with the same process ID 8.Router configure<l with the same area
ID C.router configuration wrong Router ID 0.Both routers are broadcast networks OR Other routers

Answer: D
148. As shown, using IPsec VPN to transfer data between two hosts,in order to hide the realIP address and as high as possible to ensure data,which model and protocol encapsulation of IPsec VPN are better? (Multiple Choice)

.,.• • -,74 IPseoTunnel I

D A.AH
D B.Transfer Mode
D C.Tunnel mode (Right Answers>
0 D.ESP (Right Answers >

Answer : CD
149. Huawei devices can be managed by using the Telnet protocol,about the management functions,which of the following statement is correct?
D A.Telnet default port number is 22,cannot be modified
D B Telnet VTY interfaces must be turned on,and the maximum is 15 (Right Answers)
0 C.Telnet does not support authentication of user name and password
0 D.Telnet does not support the deployme nt of ACLto increase security

Answe r: B
150. On the switch,which VLAN can use the undo command to delete? (Multiple Choice)
D A. vlan 1
D B vlan 2 (Right Answers)
D C vlan 1024 (Right Answers)
D D vlan 4094 (Right Answers)

Answer : BCD
151.At the comma nd fr ma p ip 10.1.1.2 200, what is the meaning of the n umber 200?
0 A.the opposite end logical channel number
D B.home termi nal DLCI number (Right Answers)
0 C.the opposite end interface number
0 D.the opposite end node number

Answer: B
152. As shown,deploy static NAT command on router R1,when PC access the Internet ,the destination address in data packet will not be changed.

PC Rl ISP

G El/0/0 GE2/0/0
192.168.0.1 202.10.1.2
192.168.0.2 202.10.1.1

[R l]interface Giga bitEtherneU/0/0

[Rl-Giga bitEthernetl/0/0 ] i p address 192.168.0.1255.255.255.0
#

[R l]interface Giga bitEthernet2/0/0

[Rl-Giga bitEthernet2/0/0]ip address

202.10.1.2 255.255.255.0
[Rl]nat staticglobal 202. 10.1.3 inside 192.168.0.2 netmask 255.255.255.255
 [R l] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0202.10.1.1
0A.TRUE (Right Answers >
OB.FALSE
153. The company has a network AR2200 doas not start property, an administrator wants to update its VRP,how to achieve?
D A.Administrators need to use the console cable to connect the router and the host, and then enter the BootROM interface can complete the upgrade
D B Administrators need to be configured AR2200 as an FTP client ,use FTP to transfer the new VRP (Right Answers )
0 C.Administrators need to configure to obtain an IP address throu gh DHCP when AR2200 start s,and then to get the VRP system files via TFTP
D D.Administrators need to use Telnet on the local host to remote update equipment of VRP systemfiles equipment

Answe r: B
154.[RTA] acl 2002
[RTA-aci-basic-2002)rule deny source17216 1.10.0.0.0
[RTA-acl-basic-2002) rule deny source 172 16.0.0 0.255.0.0
Use ACL shown above to match routing entry on the router RTA,which ofthe following entry will be matched? (Multiple choice)
0 A 172 16 11/32 (Right Answers>
0 B. 172.16.1.0/24
0 C.192.17 0.0/24
0 D 172 18 0 0/16 (Right Answers>

Answer : AD
155. Host A get IP address from OHCP server after the restart,then when restart which message will be sent to OHCP Server A?
0 A.OHCPDISCOVER
0 B OHCPREQUEST (Right Answers>
0 C.OHCP OFFER
0 0.DHCPACK

Answer: B
 156. ACL on AR G3 series routers supports two match orders:configuration order and automatic sorting.
0A TRUE (Right Answers)
Q B.FALSE
Answer: T

157. Switch which runs STP sends BPDU.Which of the following statement about BPDU is correct? (Multiple choice)
D A frame which BPDU use is IEEE 802.3 standard (Right Answers )
D B.frame which BPDU use is Ethernet IIstandard
D C.Control field value of BPDU frame is 3 (Right Answers )
D D.destination MAC address of BPDU frame is broadcast address

Answe r: AC
158.Refer to the output result as shown , it can determine the routing table ofthe router is composed of direct routes and static routes, and routing priority value of direct routes cannot be
modified.

<Huawei>dis ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib

Routing Tables: Public

Destinations :9 Routes :9

Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

1.1.1.1/32 Static 60 0 D 100.1.1.1 Gigabi tEt hemet0/0/0

100.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 100.1.1.1 GigabitEt hernet0/0/0
100.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 GlgabitEt her net0/0/0
103.0.0.0/26 Direct 0 0 D 103.0.0.1 GigabitEt her net0/0/2
103.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 GigabitEt her net0/0/2
127.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 lnloopBackO
127.0.0.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 l nloopBackO
200.1.1.0/24 Direct 0 0 D 200.1.1.1 GigabitEt her net0/0/1
200.1.1.1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0.1 GigabitEt hernet0/0/1
0A. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB.FALSE
Answer: T
159. In RSTP standard,the switch directly connected to the terminal not linked to other bridge port,this is defined as ().
0 A Fast port
0 B.backup port
0 C.Root Port
0 D edge port (Right Answers>

Answer :0
160. When Access port receives the same data frame of VLAN ID and PVID, peel off the VLAN ID, and then forwarded directly .
QA. TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F
161. When sending packets acess type of port , it will (
D A.sending packets with Tag's
D B stripped VLAN informat ion packets and then sent out (Right Answers>
0 C.add VLAN information packets and then sent out
0 D.marked PVID information in this port , and then sent out

Answe r: B
162. Huawei devices can use the command undo summary to prohibit automatic summary of routing protocol RIPv2
QA TRUE (Right Answers>
OB.FALSE

Answer:T
163. lf the network address of network is 10.1.1.0/30,then what is its broadcast address?
D A. 10.1.1.1
D B.10.1.1.2
D C. 10.1.1.3 (Right Answers)
DD.10.1.1.4

Answe r: C
164. On VRP platform.direct routing,static routing,RIP,OSPF default protocol priority from high to low order is ().
D A.direct routing, static routing, RIP,OSPF
D B direct routing OSPF static routing RIP (Right Answers>
D C.direct routing, OSPF RIP static routing
D D.direct routing,RIP static routing,OSPF

Answer :B
165. As shown,three switches are running GVRP,create VLAN 10 and VLAN 20 on the SWA and SWC, created VLAN 10 on SWB. SWB through GVRP dynamically learn to VLAN 20 from the SWA and SWC.
If you modify the SWB G0/0/ 1 port to GVRP's the fixed mode ,which of the following description is correct?
SWA SWB SlC
G0/011 G0/011 G0/ 012 G0/012

HostA HostB Host e HostD

VlAN 10 VlAN 20 VLAN 10 VLAN 20
D A.Host A can continue to communicate with the host C (Right Answ ers)
D 8.Host 8 can continue to communicate with the host 0
D C.Host belong to the same VLAN can continue to communicate
D 0.All hosts can not communicate with any other host

Answer: A
166.Onarouter,MACaddress oftheG0/0/1interface is OOEO-FC03-AA73,1Pv6addressforthis interfaceis20012EO:FCFF:FE03:AA73,accordingtothis information,it candeterminetheinterfaceidentifierofthis interfaceisbasedon().
0 A.DHCPv6
D B.Auto-link
D C.ARP
D D.EUl-64 (Right

Answers ) Answer: D
167. In the PPP,when both ends of the communicating partiesj- detected physical link activated,will switch fro m the link unavailable phase to link established phase.In this phase, it mainly negotiate link paramete rs through () protocol.
D A.IP
0 B.DHCP
D C LCP (Right Answers)
D D.NCP

Answe r: C
168. About the RIP routing protocol,which of the following description is correct?
D A.the router cannot send the routing entry of 16 hops to its directly connected neighbors
D B.the router might receive directly connected neighbors who sent to routing entry of 16 hops,but will be discarded immediately after receiving,and no longer do other processing
D C.the router might receive directly connected neighbors sent to routing entry of 16 hops,will use it to update their routing table after receiving (Right Answers>
D D.the router might send the routing entry of 16 hops to its directly connected neighbors ;but after directly connected neighbors receives;it will not use it to update its routing t able.

Answe r: C
169.Which of the following storage media are Huawei routers commonly used storage media? (Multiple
Choice)
0 A SDRAM (Right Answers >
D B NVRAM (Right Answers )
D C.Flash (Right Answers)
D D.Hard Disk
D E.SD Card (Right Answers)

Answe r: ABCE
170.Two-layer Ethernet switch based on () of the message which port receives generates entries of MAC address table.
D A source MAC address (Right Answers>
D B.destination MAC address
D C.source IP address
D D.Destination IP address

Answer :A
171.In OSPF broadcast network ,which routerwill a DR Other routers exchange linkstate information with? (Multiple choice)
0 A DR (Right Answers>
0 B BDR (Right Answers>
0 C.DR Other
0 D.All OSPFneighbors

Answer : AB
172. As shown ,H-frame contains IP message which is sent from Host A to Host B,the destination MAC address of the H-frame is ( ).

RTA RTB RTC

G0/0/l G0/0/0

I HFramel

Host B
Host A
D A G0/0/1 interface MAC address of RTB
D B.G0/0/1 interface MAC address of the RTC
D C.Host B'sMAC address
D D.RTC's G0/0/0 interface MAC address (Right Answers >

Answer: D
173. Deploy a DHCP seiver on network ,but the administrator found that some hosts did not access to specified address by the DHCP server correctly,what are the possible reasons? (Multiple Choice)
D A There is another one to make the audience more efficient network DHCP server (Right Answers )
D B part of the DHCP seiver host can not communicate properly with these host client system automatically generates an address within the range 169.254.0.0 (Right Answers)
D C.Part HSBC unit can not communicate properly with the DHCP server;the abundance of native client system automatically generates a range of addresses in the 127.254.0.0
D D DHCP server address pool have all been allocated (Right Answers)

Answer: ABO
174. On the VRP platform,what is the role of the command "interface vlan vlan-id"?
D A. Creating a VLAN
D B.Create or enter VLAN interface view (Right Answers)
D C.configure VLAN for one port
D D.No such command

Answe r: B
175. A windows host initialstartup,if you cannot obtain an IP address from a DHCP server ,the n which of the following IP address may the host use?
0 A. 0.0.0.0
0 B. 127.0.0.1
0 C. 169.254.2.33 (Right Answers )
0 0. 255.255.255.255

Answer: C
176. Huawei device,administrators can declare a subnet in RIPv2,the reason is RIPv2 supports VLSM.
QA.TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F
177. Admi nistrator want to upgrade configuration files for AR2200 through the USS cable,which of the following description is right? (Multiple Choice)
0 A.Use the mini USE cables to connect the PC and AR2200 miniUSS interface (Right Answers)
0 S.use the mini USB cable to connect the PC and AR2200 USS interface
0 C.AR2200 does not support the use of USS to update the configuration file
0 D After connecting the cable, the administrator needs to install drivers for mini USB (Right Answers)

Answer: AD
178.

MSTID Port Role STP State Protection

0 GigabitEthernet0/0/1 DESI FORWARDING NONE
0 GigabitEtherneto/0/2 DESI FORWARDING NONE
0 GigabitEthernet0/0/13 DESI FORWARDING NONE
0 GigabitEthernet0/0/21 DESI FORWARDING NONE
0 GigabitEthernet0/0/22 DESI FORWARDING NONE
0 GigabitEthernet0/0/23 DESI FORWARDING NONE
The above information is the interface status information on a switch running STP displayed .Based on this information,which ofthe following description is wrong?
0 A.This network may only contain this switch.
0 B.This switch may be the root switch of the network.
0 C.This switch is a non-designated switch connected to the network. (Right Answers >
0 D.The switch may be connected to the six other switches.

Answer : C
179.As shown ,the host A and the host 8 hope to achieve inter-VLAN traffic through the router-on-a-stick, which configuration should be done under the G0/0/1.1 interface of the RTA?

RTA

G0/0/1.1 G0/0/1.2
10.0.1.254/24 10.0.2.254/24

Vla n lO Vlan20
Gateway : 10.0.1.254 Gateway , 10.0.2.254
0 A.dot1qtermination vid 1
0 8 dot1qtermination vid 10 (Right Answers)
0 C.dot1q termination vid 20
0 D.dot1q termination vid 30
180.The following description about 1Pv6,which is right? (Multiple Choice)
D A. 1Pv6 address length is S4 bits
D B 1Pv6 address length 1s 128 bits (Right Answers>
D C when a 1Pv6 packet have multiple extension head extended head must appear orderly (Right Answers>
D D.when a 1Pv6 packet have multiple extension head, extended head can appear randomly

Answer :BC
181. When using Telnet way to login the router,whic h severalkinds of authentication can be cheesed? (Multiple Choice)
0 A Password authentication (Right Answers)
0 B.AAA local authentication (Right Answers >
0 C.MD5 ciphertext authentication
0 D.No authentication

Answe r: AB
182. As shown,PTA's G0/0/0 and G0/0/1 interface are connected to two different network segments,RTA,as these two networks gateways .
Before Host A sends data to the host in C,will first send ARP Request to get ( ) MAC address

RTA

Host A Hosts Hoste Hosto

D A.Host C
D 8.RTACs G0/0/0 interface (Right Answers)
D C.RTACs G0/0/1interface
D D.SWA
183. When an-image-file in the sende r transmit via network using the application software.the TCP/IP encapsulation process pass through is: Date-Data Segment -Data Packet-Data Frame-Data Stream.
0A TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answe r: T
 GE0/0/1

GE0/0/1 GE0/0/1

LSW2 LSW3

32768.00ec-fc23-4567 32768.00ec-fc34-5678

As following ,the incorrect statement is ( ).

D A. After the comparison of the bridge ID,LSW1 is Root Bridge
D B.G0/0/2 port of LSW1 is in blocked status
D C.G0/0/1 port of LSW3 is AP port,which is in blocked status
D D.Both the two ports of LSW1 are the designated port,which are in forward status (Right Answers )
185.Whic h one of the following does not be included in VRP system login ways?
0 A.Tel net
0 B.SSH
0 C.Web
0 D.Netstream (RightAnswers)

Answer: D
186.<Quidway>display mac-address

MAC Address VLANINSI Learned-From Type

5489-98ec-f018 1/- GE0/0/13 dynamic

Total items displayed= 1

As the Display information shown.when the switc h need to forwarded the 5489-98ec-f0 11 frame of the destination MAC address.the correct description
as following is ( ).
0 A.Switch needs to find the device that the MAC address is 5489-98ec-f011by sending a request
0 B.Switch will send the destination unreachable message to the source device
0 C Switch willl flood the frame to all the ports except the port which recieved this frame (Right A nswers)
0 0.Swithc does not found

the matched entries in

 the MAC address table,

so it will discard the frame

Answer: C

187. Which version of the SNMP protocol eSight support? (Multiple Choice}
188. 0 A SNMPv1 (Right Answers>
189. 0 B.SNMPv2
190. D C SNMPv2c (Right Answers>
191. D 0 SNMPv3 (Right Answers> Answer: ACD
192. Which of the following description is correct? ( ) (Multiple Choice)
D A.the next hop routing tables are redundant ,with the interface can guide the packet forwarding
D B.through different routing protocol obtained routing;its pr ority is not the same (Right Answers)
D C.different routing protocol defined by the metrics values comparable
D D.different routing protocol defined by the metrics values not comparable (Right Answers ) Answer: BO

189. When establish IPsec tunnel between two routers,which of the following parameters do not need to ensure consistency betwee n the IPsec peers?
D A.security protocol which is used
D B.data encapsulation mode
D C.Proposal name (Right Answers )
D D.authenticatio n algorithm
Answe r: C
190. As shown,the four switc hes are running STP,various parameters have default values.

ROOT

Whe n a port of the root swit ch blocked and cannot send configuration BPOU via the port, how long will blocked ports in the network enter to the forwarding state after?
D A. about 30 seconds
D 8 about 50 seconds (Right Answers )
D C.about 15 seconds
D 0.about 3 seconds
191. Configure the router through the Console,which is the correct program configured of a terminalemulation? ( ).
0 A. 4800bps.8 data bits .1stop bit odd parity and no flow control
0 B.9600bps.8 data bits 1stop bit no parity and no flow control (Right Answers)
0 C.9600bps.8 data bits .1stop bit,even parity and hardware flow control
0 D. 19200bps .8 data bits .1 stop bit no parity and no flow control

Answe r: B
192. Which of the following description about spanning tree designated port is correct?
D A.Each switch only has one des ignated port
D B Specify ports can be forwarded configuration BPDU message to the connected network (Right Answers)
D C.The port on root switch must not be a specified port
D 0.The specified port forwarding configuration BPDU packe from this switch reach to the root switch

Answe r: B
193. In the fra me relay network,it has configured a static MAP under one interface,if it continues to configure the fr inarp c ommand,then this interface will send the Inverse ARP require message to the opposite end,cover the static MAP
record at the same time.
0A. TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F
194. W hich of the following command can check whether the OSPF have esta blished neighbor relationship correctly or not?
D A.display ospf neighbor
0 B.display ospf brief
D C display ospf peer (Right Answers>
D D.display ospf interface

Answer : C
195. Administrators found it impossible to transfer files via TFTP to Huawei AR2200 router,what is the possible
reason?
D A. routers disable the TFTP service
D B.TFTP server's number TCP69 port is disabled
D C.TFTP server's number UDP69 port is disabled (Right Answers )
D D.TFTP server's username and password are modified

Answe r: C
196. Which of the following commands can be use-0 to check the session status of PPPoE client?
D A.display ip interface brief
D B.display current-configuration
D C.display pppoe-client session packet
D D.display pppoe-client session summary (Right A nswers) Answe r: D
197. AR2200 route via PSPF and RIPv2 learn at the same time to reach the same network's router entry,Cost values of routing learned through OSPF is 4882,Hops routes learned via RJPv2 is 4,the routing table of the router with ().
D A.RIPv2 Routing
D B.The routing of OSPF and RIPv2
0 C OSPF Routing (Right Answers )
0 D.Both do not exist

Answer : C
198. An error occurred when customers access to the FTP server,checked and found the connectivity between the server and the client is no problem,which serve r port is blocked that may be a problem caused?(Multiple Choice)
D A 21 (Right Answers)
D B. 80
D C 20 (Right Answers>
DD.50649

Answer: AC
199. Which function of the OSPF hello message as follows? (Multiple Choice)
D A.the neighbors found (Right Answers)
0 B.release Router ID.Router Priority and so on parameters information (Right Answers)
0 C.maintain neighbor relations (Right Answers )
0 D.synchronizing router LSDB

Answer : ABC
200. Administrator want to completely delete the old equipment configuration file conflg.zip,then which of the following command is correct?
D A.delete/force config zip
D B. delete/unreserved config zip (Right Answers)
D C.reset config zip
D D.clear config zip

Answer: 8
201. Under the Huawei AR router's command line interface,the role of the Save command is to save the current systemtime.
QA. TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers>

Answe r : F
202. When saving the configuration file of the router, it usually will be saved on which of the following storage medium?
O A.SDRAM
0 B.N VRAM
0 C Flash (Right Answers >
0 D.Boot ROM

Answer:C
203. Which description is correct about this command?
ip route-static 10 0 12 0 255 255 255 0 192 168.1.1
0 A.This command is configured with a route to reach the 192.168.1.1network
0 B This command is configured with a route to reach the 10 0.12.0 network (Right Answers)
0 C.The route priority is 100
0 D.Ifthe router to learn the route and the route to the same destination network through other protocols ,routers will prefer this route

Answer : B
204. These are the thre e data packets captured by administrator in the network.
Source Destination Protocol Info
10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [SYN] Seq=O Win=8192 Len=O MSS=1460
10.0.12.2 10.0.12.1 TCP telnet > 50190 [SYN £• ACK] Seq=O Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=O MSS=1460
10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [ACK] Seq=1Ack=1Win=8192 Len=O
Which of the following statement is not correct?
D A.The three data packet s represent the TCP three-way handshake process
D B Telnet server's IP address is 10 .0 12.1 IP address of the Telnet client is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)
D C.The three data packet s are not included inthe application layer data
D D.Telnet client is to use to establish a connection with the server port 50190

Answer : B
205 . B roadcast address is a special address that all the hosts are set as 1in the network address,it also can be used as host addresses.
O A.TRUE
08 FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F
206.The Backup port in RSTP can replace a failed root port.
OA. TRUE
08 FALSE (Right Answers>
Answer:F
207.What are the types as following are supported by OSPF protocol? (Multiple Choice)
0 A Pomt-to-Pomt (Right Answers )
0 B Broadcast (Right Answers )
0 C Non-Broadcast Mulh-Access (Right Answers )
0 D Pomt-to-Mult1pomt (Right Answers )

Answer : ABCD
208. .When using link aggregation technology to interconnect betwee n the two switches,which of the following conditions need to be met by each member port? (Multiple Choice)
D A.The number of physical ports connected to both ends should be consistent (Right Answers )
D B The rate of physical ports connected to both ends should be consistent (Right Answers)
D C.The duplex mode of physical ports connected to both ends should be consistent (Right Answers )
D D.The physical number of physical ports connected to both ends should be consistent
D E.The used optical module type of physical ports connected to both ends should be consistent

Answer: ABC
209. Network management workstation manages network equipment through the SNMP protocol,when the managed devices have an exception occurs,what kind of SNMP message will be received by Network management workstation?
D A.get-response message
D B.set-request message
D C.trap message (Right Answers )
D D.get-request message

Answer : C
211. Under the VRP interface,using the command delete or unreserved vrpcfg.zip can not delete files,you must empty the Recycle Binto completely delete the file.
QA.TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F
212. About the role and packet encapsulation of APR protocol,the correct description is ( ).
0 A.The Inverse ARP in ARP is used to analysis the device name
0 B.It can get the MAC address and UUID address of destination port through ARP protocol
0 C.ARP protocol support the deployment on the PPP link and HDLC link
0 D.ARP protocol is based on Ethernet encapsulation (Right Answers)

Answer: D
213.Topology and configuration are shown as the following, so it can est a blish an Eth-Trunk logical link between two switches, and the LSW2 as the drive
end.

LSWl LSW2

(LSWl)lacp priority 100 [LSW2)1acp priority 200

It It
(LSWl)interface Eth-Tr unkl [LSW2)interface Eth-Trunkl
(LSWl-Eth-Trunkl)mode lacp-static (LSW2- Eth-Trunkl)mode lacp-static
(LSWl-Eth-Trunkl)max active-linknum ber 2 (LSW2- Eth-Trunkl]max active-linknumber 2
It It
[LSWl)interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 (LSW2)interface Giga bitEthernet0/0/1
(LSWl-GigabitEthernetO/O/ l)eth-trunk 1 (LSW2- GigabitEthernet0/0/l)eth-trunk 1
(LSWl-GigabitEthernet0/0/l)lacp priority 100 It
fl (LSW2)interface Giga bitEthernet0/0/2
[LSW1)interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 [LSW2- Giga bitEthernet0/0/2]eth-trunk 1
[LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/2)eth-tr
unk 1
[LSW1-Giga bitEthernet0/0/2)1acp priority 100
OA. TRUE
0B. FALSE (Right Answers>
Answer: F
214. As shown,RTA is a DTE devices which connect to a frame relay switch,if RTA creates the PVC link using dynamic mapping,then which command as following does not require to configure on the RTA? ((Multiple Choice)

DLCl30
RTA FRSW
Serial 1/0/1
172.16.1.1/24
DTE DCE
0 A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1) ip address 172.16.1.124
D B.[RTA-Serial1/0/1) link-protocol fr
0 C.[RTA-Serial1/0/1) fr interface-type dte (Right Answers >
0 D.[RTA-Serial1/0/1) fr inarp (Right Answers >

Answer: CD
215. .If two IPsec VPN peers want to use both AH and ESP to ensure secure communications.so what is the number of SA (Security Association)the two peers need to build?
D A. 1
D B.2
D C. 3
D D.4 (Right Answers)

Answer: D
216.Trunk port can allow multipleVLAN go through,including

VLAN4096. QA.TRUE
QB.FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer : F
217 : Interface Gigabit Ethernet0/01 port link \type trunk
Port trunk allow \pass vlan 2 to 4094
According to the above shown command output,which of the following description is correct? (Multiple Choice)
0 A.GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is not allowed VLAN1 to go through
0 B GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is allowed VLAN 1to go through (Right Answers )
0 C.If you want GigabitEthernet0/0/1port to become Access port,need to use the command "undo port trunk allow-pass vlan all "to clear the default
configuration firstly
0 D If you want GigabitEthernetO I 011 port to become Access port,need to use the command "undo port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 to 4094 "to clear

default configuration firstly (Right Answers ) Answe r: BO

218.The election of root switch in STP is based on comparing the switch priority,but in RSTP,will both compare the switch priority and MAC address.
QA. TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers )

Answer: F
219.[Router] ip pool pool1
[Router-ip-pool-poo11] network 10.10.10.0 mask 255 .255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-pool1] gateway-list 10.10.10.1
(Router-ip-pool-pool1] quit
[Router] ip pool pool2
(Router-ip-pool-pool2] network 10.20.20.0 mask 255 .255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-poo12] gateway-list 10.20.20.1
(Router-ip-pool-pool2] quit
[Router] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[Router-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ipaddress 10.10.10.124
[Router-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] dhcp select global
Administrators have the configurat ion on Router as described above.then the host which connected to G1/0/0 interface of this router will get what kinds of IP address through DHCP?
D A. The IP address of this host got belongs to the 10.10.10.0/24 Network (Right A nswers)
D B.The IP address of this host got belongs to the 10.20.20.0/24 Network
D C.This hose can not obtain IP address
D D.The IP address of this host got may belong to the 10.10.10.0/24 Network,may also belong to the 10.20.20.0/24 Network

Answe r: A
220. .As shown, RTA as PPPoE client sends PADImessage to server A,Server A replies PADO message

'l:O. S\·"iA .el\'tf A

•
=.:..:i FAJC,:.

•
=;.,!)1
--+

IJ
:A:)1

Thereinto.what frame the PADO message is?

D A. Unicast (Right Answers>
0 8.Multicast
D C.Broadcast
D 0. Anycast

Answer: A
221. As shown in illustration,the Serial1/0/1interface in RTA uses command "IP address unnumbered interface loopback O" to configure address to borrow,whic h the following description is correct? (Multiple Choice)

•
•ocoe•:o<: !O• • -i'.l_C S 1 ;;. •

'1.. . . . . . .
,. -,:. , -1 • ;z ·.-. t T -t.r','.f --

D A.the IP address of the RTA interface Serial 1/0/1is 10.1.1.1/24

D B.the IP address of the RTA interface Serial 1/011 is 10.1.1.1/32 (Right Answers )
D C.the routing table of RTA exist a 10.1.1.0/24 routing entry
0 D.the routing table of RTA does not exist a 10.1.1.0/24 routing entry (Right Answers >

Answer : BO
222. About the STP, what is the incorrect description as following? (Multiple Choice)
D A There is only one designated switch in a switched network (Right Answers )
D B All ports of the root SW1tch are the root ports (Right Answers>
D C.All ports of the root switch are the designated ports
D D The swithc W1th the mm1mum switch pnonty value m the switched network will be the non-root switch (Right Answers>

Answer :ABO
223. Through RIP, OSPF and static routing,a router has learned a routing to the same destination address from the three of them.
By default,what kind of routing learned from which protocol the VRP eventually will choose?
0 A. RIP
0 B OSPF (Right Answers >
0 C.Choose all the routing learnd from the three protocols
0 D.Static routing

Answer: B
224. .Administrators want to configure a static floating route to achieve the route backup,then the correct implementation method is ( ).
D A Administrator needs to configure different protocol priority values for mainly static routing and alternate static routing (Right Answers>
D B.Administrator only need to configure two static routes
D C.Administrator needs to configure different TAG for mainly static routing and alternate static routing
D D.Administrator needs to configure different metrics for mainly static routing and alternate static routing

Answer: A
225. .The full name ofVRP is (
).D A.Versatile Routine
Platform D B.Virtua l Routing
Platform D C.Virtual Routing
Plane
D D Versatile Routing Platform (Right Answers >

Answer: D
226. Port cost STP port bandwidth calc ulation and a certain relationship,that the greater the bandwidth,the ( ) the overhead .
D A Small (Right Answers)
D B.Large
D C.consistent
D D.is not sure

Answer: A
227. After the network fault occurs ,the administrator through the investigation found that a router's configuration is c hanged,and then what can the
administrators do to prevent this situation from happening again? (Multiple Choice}
A administrators should configure all devices (except the account administrator) login privilege level 0 (Right Answers )
B administrators should
configure AAA for
authentication and
authorization of users
logging (Right Answers)
C administrators should
configure the ACL to control
only the administrator can
log device (Right Answers )
D.The administrator should
enable port-securit y on the
route of administration port

Answer: ABC

228: If the network address of a network is 192.1S8 .1.0,then its broadcast address must be 192.168.1.255.
QA. TRUE
0 B FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F
228. .The following figure shows the routing table of a router,when the router receives a packet which destination IP is 9.1.1.1,the router will forward according to the 9.1.0.0/16 route,since the route matching the destination address 9.1 .1.1
has mo re digits.

<Huawei>displa y ip routing-ta ble

Route Fla gs: R - rela y, D - downloa d to fib

Routing Tables: Public Destinations :2 Routes :2

Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop I nterface
0.0.0.0/0 Static 60 0 D 120.0.0.2 Serial1/0/0
8.0.0.0/8 RI P 100 3 D 120.0.0.2 Seria l1/0/0
9.0.0.0/8 OSPF 10 so D 20.0.0.2 Ethernet2/0/0
9.1.0.0/16 RI P 100 4 D 120.0.0.2 Seriall/0/0
11.0.0.0/8 Static 60 0 D 120.0.0.2 Seria l2/0/0
20.0.0.0/8 Direct 0 0 D 20.0.0.1 Ethernet2/0/0
20.0.0. 1/32 Direct 0 0 D 127.0.0. 1 LoopbackO
0A.TRUE (Right Answers>
OB.FALSE

Answer:T
230. VRP operating system commands divided into access , monitor,configure ,and manage grade 4 level
Which level can run a variety of business configuration commands but can not run operations of the file system?
0 A. Access Level
0 B. Monitoring level
0 C Configuration level (Right Answers >
0 D.Management

Class Answer : C
231. On Huaweidevices £•if authorizing with AM authentication,when the remote server is not responding, it can authorize the devic e from the network side .
0A TRUE (Right Answers>
OB. FALSE

Answer: T
232. When proceeding the configuration related to AAA. certified on Huawei AR G3 series routers,how many domains can be configured at most?
D A.30 (Right Answers }
D B.31
0 c.32
0 D.33

Answe r: A
233. .A port of the switch is configured as a trunk port,now intends a host connected to the port to access the
network. The following operations are necessary ( ).
0 A.Delete multiple VLAN on the port in the global view
0 B.Delete multiple VLAN on the port in interface view
0 C.Close the interface,and then re-enable to restore the default configuration
0 D The interface is configured as an access port (Right Answers )

Answe r: D
234. .Port aggregation is aggregate multiple ports together to form an aggregation group,in order to achieve eac h member ports load balancing.Port Aggregation is implemented on ().
D A.Physical Layer
D B.Data link layer (Right Answers)
D C.Network Layer
D D.Transport Laye r

Answer: B
235. .When configuring a AR2220 Router as a PPPoE client,which of the following configuration is not needed?
D A. Configure dial rule
D B.Configure dial interface
D C.Configure IP address on the dial interface (Right Answers)
D D.Configure password on the dial interface

Answer: C
236.In the VRP operat ing system,how to enter the OSPF area 0 view? (Multiple Choice)
D A.[Huawei] ospf area 0
D B [Huawei-ospf-1] area 0 (Right Answers)
D C.[Huawei-ospf-1] area 0.0 0 0 (Right Answers)
D D. [Huawei-ospf-1] area 0 enable

Answe r: BC
 237.If using Gigabit optical modules to interconnec two Huawei S5710 switches ,the work pattern of netwo rk port is full-
duplex mode by default.
0A TRUE (Right Answers)
Q B.FALSE
Answer True
238.The broadcas t address of 192.168.1.0/25 su bnet is 192.168.1.128.
QA.TRUE
QB.FALSE (Right Answers )
Answe r: F
239. .Below is data packet enc apsulation format in the IPsec VPN,which mode does this type of data packets use IPsec VPN to encapsulate?

D A.Common Mode
D 8.Transfer Mode
D C.Tunnel mode (Right Answers>
D D.The encapsulation False

Answer : C
240. .If in the process of the PPP authentication,the authenticated sends a False username and password to the authenticator .what type of packets will the authenticator sent to the authenticated?
D A.Authe nticate-Ack
D B.Authenticate-Nak (RightAnswers)
D C.Authe nticat e-Reject
D D.Authenticate-Reply

Answer: B
241. Link aggregation is the common technology in the enterprise network.
Which of the following description is the advantage of link aggregation? (Multiple Choice)
0 A.implement load sharing (Right Answers)
0 B increase the bandwidt h (Right Answers)
0 C improve reliability (Right Answers )
D D.improve security

Answer: ABC
242. As shown,the switch uses the default parameters to run STP,which of the following ports will be elected to specified port?

SWA

(Right Answers )

Answer: A
243 .After the adminstrator via Telnet login to the router successfully,and find that it cannot configure the router's interface IP address,what's the possible reason?
D A.Telnet terminal software that the administrator uses does not allow the corresponding operat ion
D B.Telnet user's authentication way is wrong
D C.Telnet user's level configuration is wrong (Right Answers )
D D.SNMP parameter configuration is wrong

Answe r: C
244. Whic h of following 1Pv6 address can be manually configured on the router
interface? D A.fe80 ·13dc:-1/64 (Right Answers)
D B.ffll0:8a3c:9b/64
D c. ::1/128
D D.2001·12e3:1b02::21/64 (RightAnswers)

Answer: AD
245. .VLSM's role is:on the class's basis of the IP address ,divide corresponding bits fro m the host portion and take it as the network bits.However,when deploying on the router,you need routing protocols support.
0A.TRUE (Right Answers )
OB.FALSE

Answer: T
246 .About 1Pv6 address 2031:0000:720C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:1308, Whic h of th e following abbreviations are correct?(Multip le Choice)
0 A 2031:0:720C:0·0:9E0:839A:1308 (Right Answers >
D B. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B
D C.2031::720C::9E0:839A:130B
D D. 2031:0:720C::9E0·839A:130B (Right Answers)

Answer: AD
247.<Huawei>
Warning:Aute>-Config is working.Before configuring the device £ stop Auto-Config.If you perform configurations when Auto-Co nfig is running £ the OHCP £ routing £ ONS £ and VTY configurations will be lost. Do you
want to stop Auto Config? [y n) £0 108
Administrators find the above equipment pop-up message,about the information,which is correct?
0 A.If you want to enable automatic configuration,the administrator needs to select y
D 8.If you do not enable automatic configuration,the administrator need to select n
0 C.When the device is first started.the automatic configuration feature is enabled (Right A nswers )
D 0.When the device is first started,the automatic configuration feature is disabled
Answer C
248. .When using ping command on VRP platform,if you need to specify the IP address as the ec ho request message's source address ,which of the following parameters should be used?
D A -a (Right Answers )
D B. S
D c.-cl
D D.-n

Answer: A
249. Configuring a Frame Relay PVC on the router,finding not valid.What are the possible reasons? (Multiple Choice)
0 A.configure the same DLCI on the same router
0 B LMItype configuration error (Right Answers>
0 C the configuration of frame Relay encapsulation type is wrong (Right Answers >
0 D DLCIconfiguration 1s wrong (Right Answers)

Answer: BCD
250. .Known that a route(s routing table has the following two entries £ 0
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
9.0.0 .0/8 OSPF 10 50 1.1.1.1 SerialO
9.1.0.0/16 RIP 100 5 2.2.2.2 EthemetO
If the router wants to forward the message whose destination address is 9.1.4.5,then which of the following state ment is correct?
D A.Select the first item as the best match, because OSPF protocol has higher priority
D B.Select the seconditem as the best match,because of the small value of the RIP generation
D C.Select the second item as the best match,because EthternetO is faster than SerialO's speed
D D Select the second item as the best match,because the route entry for the destination address of 9 14.5,it is more accurate match (Right Answers )

Answe r: D
251. Which of the following contents can be used to filter on Huawei device's advanced ACL? (Multiple choice)
D A network traffic based on a specific source address (Right Answers)
D B.the traffic based on the specific applications, such as QQ
D C network traffic based on a specific destination address (Right Answers)
D D network traffic based on the specific port numbers (Right Answers )
D E.network traffic based on a specific user name

Answer: ACD
252. A network segment 150.25.0.0 subnet mask is 255.255.224.0,so which is a valid host address in the network segment.(Multiple Choice)
D A. 150.25.0.0
D B. 150.25 1.255 (Right Answers)
D C. 150 25.2.24 (Right Answers)
D D.150.15.3.30

Answer : BC
253. As shown,the running RIP between R1 and R2,R1 can not learn 2.2.2.2/32 or 2.0.0 0/8 route

Rl R2
GE0/0/0 GE0/0/0

LoopbackO: 1.1.1.1/32 loopbackO: 2.2.2.2/32

[Rl)rip1 [R2]rip 1 [R2-

[Rl-rip-l)version 2 rip-1}network 10.0.0.0
[Rl-rip-l]network 10.0.0.0 [R2-rip-1]network 2.0.0.0
[Rl-rip-l]net\vork 1.0.0.0
0A TRUE (Right Answers )
O B.FALSE

Answer: T
254. About the description of PPP link esta blishment procedure,which of the following statement is wrong? (Multiple choice)
D A.Dead phase is also called the physical layer unavailable stage.When both ends of the communication line is detected physical lin activation,it will move fro m stage to Establish Dead phase, also means the link establishment phase
D B.In the Establish phase,PPP link carries out the LCP parameter negotiation.The negotiation involves the Maximum Receive Unit MRU,authentication mode, magic words and other options
D C.In the Network phase, PPP links carries out NCP negotiation.To select and configure a network layer protocol by the NCP negotiation,and proceed the network layer parameter negotiation
D D after NCP negotiation is successful PPP link will remain communication state,and enter the Terminate phase (Right Answers)
D E.PPP link supports half-duplex and full-duplex modes (Right Answers )

Answer: DE
255. .Administrator configures OSPF on a router,but it doesn'tconfigure the loopback interface on the router.Which description about the Router ID is correct?
D A.The minimum IP address of the router's physical interface will become Router ID
D B.The maximum IP address of the router's physical interface will become Router ID (Right Answers)
D C.The IP address of the router management interface will become Router ID
D D.The router's priority will be Router ID

Answe r: B
256. DHCP OFFER packets can carry DNS address , but can only carry one DNS address.
QA. TRUE
QB.FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F
257. UDP is connectionless.whic h you must use to provide transmiss ion reliability.249
D A.Internet Protocol
D B Application Layer protocol ·(Right Answers)
D C.Network Layer Protocol
D D.Transmission Control Protocol

Answe r: B
258. .The rule to create VLAN on Huawei switches is that you can't create VLAN4095 ,and you can not delete VLAN1.
0A TRUE (Right Answers>
OB.FALSE

Answe r: T
259.When configuring DHCPv6 in the VRP system,which of DUIDformats can be configurated? (Multiple
Choice)
0 A DUID-LL (Right Answers >
D B DUID-LLT (Right Answers )
0 C.DUID-EN
0 D.OUID-LLC

Answer: AB
260. Refer to the following output configuration result,about RIP description,which is correct?
<Huawei> display rip
Public VPN-instance :
RIP process:34
RIP version:1
Preference:100
Checkzero:Enabled
Default-cost: 1
Summary:Disabled
Host-route:Enabled
Maximum number of balanced paths·4
Update time:30 sec
Age time: 180 sec
Garbage-collect time·120 sec
Graceful restart:Disabled
Silent-interfaces ·None
Default-route:Enabled
Default route cost: 2
Verify-source:Enabled
Networks:34.0.0.0 12.0 0 0
0 A. auto-summary is enabled
D B.RIP process number is 1
0 C.RIP routing update packet's transm1ss1on interval 1s 30s (Right Answers)
0 D.RIP routing's spam timeout is 180s

Answer :C
261. As shown,in private network,one Web server needs to provide HTIP service to public network users,so the network administrator needs to configure NAT on the gateway router RTA to achieve demand,so which of the
following configuration can meet the needs?

D A (RTA-Serial1/0/1) nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080 (Right Answers)
D 8_ [RTA-Serial1/0/1) nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1www inside 192.10.10.1 8080
D C.[RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1) nat serve r protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
D D.[RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1) nat serve r protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.18080

Answe r: A
262. A company has 50 Private IP addresses.The administrator access to the public network using NAT technology,and the company has only one public network address available,which of the following NAT conversion ways can meet the
requirement?
0 A.Static Transfer
0 B.Dynamic Conversion
0 C easy-ip ·(Right Answers)
0 D.NAPT

Answer: C
 263. As shown,RTA as PPPoE client send PADI message to seiver A,which of the following way PADI message will
use?

D A.Unicast D

B.Multicast
D C Broadcast (Right Answers >
D D.anycast

Answer: C
264. .STP meanwhile in improving the reliability of the network,but also can solve the loop problem of switched network.
0A_ TRUE (Right Answers)
OB.FALSE

Answer:T
265.On the router,which command can be used to display the mapping relationship between the network address andthe DLCI?
D A.display fr interface
D B.display fr
D C display fr map-info (Right Answers >
D D.display fr brief

Answer : C
266. Which address does 192.168.1.127/25 represent?
0 A Host
0 8.network
0 C multicast
0 D Broadcast (Right Answers)

Answer: D
267. Whic h of ICMP timeout message will Tracert Diagnostic Tool record,thereby providing pac ket reaches the destination IP address to the user?
D A.Destination port
D B.Source port
D C.Destination IPAddress
D D Source IPaddress (Right Answers ) Answer: D

201.Under the Huawei AR router's command line interface,the role of the Save command is to save the current systemtime.
QA. TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers>

Answe r : F
Huawei

H12-211 PRACTICE EXAM

HCNA-HNTD (Huawei Certified Network Associate - Huawei Network
Technology and Device)

Page No | 2

Product Question: 233

Question 1

An administrator currently manages AR2200 devices in the network through a single password, however the company wishes to introduce
another two administrators and provide unique user credentals and privilege levels for telnet access to the network devices. What acton
can be taken? (Choose three)

A. Confgure three users under the AAA-view, and assign each a diferent password.
B. The authentcaton mode must be changed to AAA
C. Each administrator must be assigned a privilege level.
D. A public IP address must be assigned to each user for telnet access

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 2

Which of the following authentcaton methods are supported for Telnet users? (Choose three)

A. Password authentcaton
B. AAA local authentcaton
C. MD5 authentcaton
D. No authentcaton

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 3

Which authentcaton modes does AAA support? (Choose three).

A. None
B. Local
C. Radius D. 802.1X

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 4

[RTA]aaa
[RTA-aaa]domain huawei
[RTA-aaa-domain-huawei]authentcaton-scheme au1 [RTA-aaa-domain-huawei]authentcaton-scheme au2
Refer to the confguraton output. RTA has been confgured using AAA as shown, and associated with the “huawei” domain. For users in
the huawei domain, which authentcaton-scheme will be used

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 3

A. au1
B. au2
C. au1 will be used. When au1 is deleted, users will use au2
D. au2 will be used. When au2 is deleted, users will use au1

Aoswern B

Question 5

A user accesses a server supportng AAA, for which the authorizaton mode on the AAA server has been confgured using the command
“authorizaton-mode hwtacacs if-authentcated”. Which of the following statements regarding this command are true? (Choose three).

A. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authentcated using local authentcaton.
B. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authentcated using remote authentcaton.
C. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will bypass authentcaton.
D. The hwtacacs server will authorize the user.

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 6

Which of the following descriptons regarding eSight is not correct?

A. eSight is used to monitor and manage enterprise networks.

B. eSight supports only Huawei devices
C. eSight supports WLAN management and monitoring of hotspot coverage.
D. eSight supports the backup of confguraton fles and network trafc analysis.

Aoswern B

Question 7

What of the following statements is correct regarding access control list types and ranges?

A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999

B. An advanced ACL value ranges from 3000-4000
C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999
D. An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000

Aoswern C

Question 8
Which of the following parameters is not used by Advanced ACL?

A. Source interface
B. Destnaton port number

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 4

C. Protocol number
D. Time-range

Aoswern A

Question 9

[RTA]acl 2001
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule permit source 10.0.1.0 0.0.0.255
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 10.0.1.0 0.0.0.255
Refer to the confguraton output. Which of the following statements regarding ACL 2001 is correct?

A. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be denied.

B. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be permited.
C. Packets destned for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets destned for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be permited.

Aoswern B

Question 10

[RTA]acl 2002
[RTA-acl-basic-2002]rule permit source 20.1.1.1 0
[RTA-acl-basic-2002]rule permit source 30.1.1.1 0
Refer to the confguraton output. A network administrator confgured the ACL on router RTA, as shown. Which of the following statements
regarding the rule order are correct? (Choose two).

A. The rule-number of the frst rule is 1

B. The rule-number of the frst rule is 5
C. The rule-number of the second rule is 2
D. The rule-number of the second rule is 10

Aoswern B, D

Question 11

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator has confgured ACL 2000 to flter packets on RTA, as shown. Which of following
statements regarding the subsequent behavior are correct? (Choose two).

A. RTA will forward packets received from Host A

B. RTA will drop packets received from Host A
C. RTA will forward packets received from Host B
D. RTA will drop packets received from Host B

Aoswern B, C
Question 12

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator wishes to deny Host A access to the HTTP server but allow access to

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 5

all other servers. Which of the following ACL rules will achieve this?

A. Rule deny tcp source 10.1.1.1 0 destnaton 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destnaton-port eq 21

B. Rule deny tcp source 10.1.1.1 0 destnaton 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destnaton-port eq 80
C. Rule deny udp source 10.1.1.1 0 destnaton 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destnaton-port eq 21
D. Rule deny udp source 10.1.1.1 0 destnaton 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destnaton-port eq 80

Aoswern B

Question 13

Following a failure of services in the network, an administrator discovered that the confguraton in one of the enterprise routers had been
changed. What actons can be taken by the administrator to prevent further changes? (Choose three)

A. The administrator should limit access by setng the login privilege of users to 0.
B. The administrator should confgure AAA to manage user authorizaton on the router.
C. The administrator should confgure an ACL to allow only the administrator to manage the router.
D. The administrator should confgure port-security on the router

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 14

[RTA]acl 2001
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 20 permit source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 10 deny source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
Refer to the confguraton output. Which of the following statements is correct regarding the confguraton of the ACL on RTA?

A. Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be denied.

B. Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be permited.
C. Packets destned for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets destned for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be permited.

Aoswern A

Question 15

[RTA]acl 2001
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 172.16.1.1 0.0.0.0
[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 172.16.0.0 0.255.0.0
Refer to the confguraton output. Which of the following statements are correct regarding the confguraton of the ACL on RTA? (Choose
two).

A. Packets from network 172.16.1.1/32 will be denied.

B. Packets from network 172.16.1.0/24 will be denied
C. Packets from network 172.17.1.0/24 will be denied
D. Packets from network 172.18.0.0/16 will be denied.

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 6

Aoswern A, D

Question 16

The network administrator wants to improve the performance of network transmission, what steps can the administrator take?
(Choose two)

A. Change the work mode to full duplex of each end staton.

B. Link the end statons together using a switch.
C. Change the work mode to half duplex of each end staton.
D. Link the end statons together using a hub.

Aoswern A, B

Question 17

On Huawei switch, which of the following commands can be used to set port duplex mode as "auto negotaton"? (Choose two)

A. duplex negotaton auto

B. duplex auto-negotaton
C. duplex auto
D. undo duplex

Aoswern C, D

Question 18

The network administrator wishes to transmit data between two end statons. The network interface cards of both devices operates at
100Mbps however one supports half duplex while the other uses full duplex mode.
What will occur as a result?

A. The end statons cannot communicate.

B. The end statons can communicate, but data may be lost during transmission of large amounts of trafc.
C. The end statons will operate normally
D. The end statons can communicate, but speed is diferent during transmission of large amounts of trafc.

Aoswern B

Question 19

An Ethernet port can work one of three duplex modes, whereas an Optcal Ethernet port only supports one single mode. Which of the
following represents this mode?
A. Full-duplex
B. Half-duplex
C. Auto-negotaton
D. Simplex

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 7

Aoswern A

Question 20

While inspectng packets in the network, a network administrator discovers a frame with the destnaton MAC address of 01-00-5E-A0-B1-
C3. What can the administrator determine from this?

A. The MAC address is a unicast address.

B. The MAC address is a broadcast address
C. The MAC address is a multcast address.
D. The MAC address is incorrect

Aoswern C

Question 21

According to OSI reference model, which layer is responsible for end to end error checking and fow control?

A. Physical layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer

Aoswern D

Question 22

Which of the following mechanisms are used for fow control? (Choose three)

A. Acknowledgement
B. Bufering
C. Source quench messages
D. Windowing

Aoswern B, C, D

Question 23

Source Destnaton Protocol Info

10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [SYN] Seq=0 Win=8192 Len=0 MSS=1460
10.0.12.2 10.0.12.1 TCP telnet> 50190 [SYN, ACK] Seq=0 Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=0 MSS=1460
10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [ACK] Seq=1 Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=0
Refer to the capture output.The administrator has captured three packets in the network. Which statement regarding the capured packets is
incorrect?

A. This packets represent a TCP three-way handshake process.

B. 10.0.12.1 is the telnet server, while 10.0.12.2 is the telnet client.
C. The three packets contain no applicaton data.

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 8

D. 10.0.12.1 uses port 50190 to buid the telnet connecton.

Aoswern B

Question 24

An Ethernet frame is captured by network protocol analyzer tool and the value of Type/Length feld is 0x0800. Which of the following
statements about the frame are correct? (Choose two)

A. The frame structure of the frame is Ethernet_II

B. The frame structure of the frame is 802.3
C. Its upper layer protocol is IP
D. Its upper layer protocol is IPX

Aoswern A, C

Question 25

Which of the following descriptons regarding the TTL feld of the IP packet is correct?

A. The TTL defnes how many packets the source can send.
B. The TTL defnes the duraton during which the source can send packets.
C. The TTL value will decrement by 1 each tme the packet is routed.
D. The TTL value will increment by 1 each tme the packet is routed.

Aoswern C

Question 26

Which of the following statements are correct about TTL feld in IP packet? (Choose two)
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

A. The maximum value of TTL is 65535

B. Normally, it's impossible for a router to receive a packet whose TTL is zero.
C. The main purpose of TTL is to prevent IP packets from circulatng endlessly in a network which can consume a lot of bandwidth
D. TTL value will be decremented as a packet is passed through the network devices such as hub, LAN switch and router.

Aoswern B, C

Question 27
In the case of Huawei router, what is the "-i" parameter in a Ping command issued on a VRP operatng system used to set?

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 9

A. Interface for sending an Echo Request packet

B. Source IP address for sending an Echo Request packet
C. Interface for receiving an Echo Reply packet
D. Destnaton IP address for receiving an Echo Reply packet

Aoswern A

Question 28

To provide the informaton about the IP addresses that a user packet traverses along the path to the destnaton, which of the following does
Tracert record in each expired ICMP TTL packet?

A. Destnaton port
B. Source port
C. Destnaton address
D. Source address

Aoswern D

Question 29

Which of the following statements regarding the verifcaton of IP connectvity are false? (Choose three)

A. The ping 127.0.0.1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly inserted into the host’s Ethernet port.
B. The ping command with the host IP address as the destnaton can be used to verify that the TCP/IP protocol suite is functoning
correctly.
C. The ping command can be used to verify connectvity between the host and the local gateway.
D. The command “ipconfg /release” can be used to check connectvity problems between the host and the local gateway.

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 30

A network administrator uses the ping command to check for points of failure in the network. Which protocols will be used during this
process? (Choose two)
<choice ident=“A”>
<choice ident=“B”>
<choice ident=“C”>
<choice ident=“D”>

A. ICMP
B. TCP
C. ARP
D. UDP

Aoswern A, C
https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 10

Question 31

A network administrator recently used tracert to trace the path to the destnaton IP address of an external website, however the trace path
displayed only a tmeout result. Which of the following statements correctly explains the reason for this? (Choose two)

A. The source router had shutdown the ICMP functon.

B. This destnaton IP address does not exist.
C. The gateway canot fnd a route to the destnaton.
D. This is a normal phenomenon.

Aoswern B, C

Question 32

Ping 10.0.0.2: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break

Reply from 10.0.0.2: bytes=800 Sequence=1 tl=255 tme=2 ms Reply from 10.0.0.2: bytes=800 Sequence=2 tl=255 tme=10 ms
--- 10.0.0.2 ping statstcs --- 2 packet(s) transmited
2 packet(s) received
0.00% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 2/6/10 ms
A network administrator uses the ping command to test connectvity to the destnaton 10.0.0.2 on a Huawei AR series router. Which
statement regarding the output is correct?

A. The network administrator used the command ping -c 2 -s 800 10.0.0.2

B. The network administrator used the command ping -a 2 -v 800 10.0.0.2
C. The path between the source and destnaton is not OK.
D. The network administrator changed the default TTL value.

Aoswern A

Question 33

Which of the following statements explains the behavior of the ICMP redirect functon? (Choose two)

A. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the source is on the same
segment as the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the source.
B. When a router receives data on an interface, and the router’s IP address matches the destnaton IP of the data, an ICMP redirect
message will be sent by the router to the source.
C. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the source is on the same
segment as the next hop, an ICMP Redirect message will be sent by the source to the router.
D. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and the source is on a diferent
segment from the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to the source

Aoswern A, D

Question 34
https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 11

Host A wishes to send data to host C, and generates an ARP request to obtain the destnaton MAC address. Which statement is true?

A. The destnaton IP address of the ARP request is Host C

B. The destnaton MAC address of this ARP request is Host C
C. The destnaton IP address for the ARP request is a broadcast IP address.
D. The destnaton MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of G0/0/0 on RTA

Aoswern A

Question 35

An ARP request is sent by host A to obtain the destnaton MAC address of host D, Which statement is true about regarding the ARP reply?

A. The destnaton MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Switch A
B. The destnaton IP address of this packet is the VLANIF1 IP address of Switch A
C. The destnaton MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Host A
D. The destnaton IP address of this packet is a broadcast IP address.

Aoswern C

Question 36

Which of the following applicatons can be used to detect the path along which the data packets are transmited from the source to the
destnaton?
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

A. Route
B. Netstat
C. Tracert
D. Send

Aoswern C

Question 37

How many probe packets are sent for each TTL value by default when "tracert" is used to detect the path along which packet is sent from
source to destnaton?

A. 3
B. 4
C. 6
D. 8

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 12
Aoswern A

Question 38

Which of the following types can ICMP packets be classifed into? (Choose two)

A. ICMP transport packet

B. ICMP error reportng packet
C. ICMP query packet
D. ICMP applicaton packet

Aoswern B, C

Question 39

On VRP platorm, which of the following parameters can be used together with the "ping" command to specify the source address of an
echo request message?

A. A
B. S
C. D
D. N

Aoswern A

Question 40

A router functoning as a Proxy receives an ARP request packet, but fnds that the destnaton address in the packet is not intended for itself.
In this case, what will the router do? (Choose two)

A. Discard the packet.

B. Check for a route that matches the destnaton address.
C. Forward its MAC address to the ARP request sender afer fnding that a route to the destnaton address is available.
D. Broadcast the ARP request packet.

Aoswern B, C

Question 41

Two end statons in a point-to-point network perform address resoluton. Which of the following statements is correct?

A. The destnaton address of an ARP request from each staton will be a unicast MAC address.
B. The destnaton address of an ARP request from each staton will be a broadcast IP address.
C. The destnaton address of an ARP reply from each staton will be a unicast MAC address
D. The destnaton address of an ARP reply from each staton will be a broadcast MAC address.

Aoswern C
https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 13

Question 42

What will the destnaton MAC address be at the moment a frame is transmited by the host, when the router is the IP destnaton?

A. The MAC address of the switch.

B. The MAC address of the router interface G0/0/0.
C. The MAC address of the host.
D. The destnaton MAC address will be a broadcast MAC address.

Aoswern D

Question 43

Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Choose two)

A. A system can determine whether confictng IP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP packet
B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet.
C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address.
D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.

Aoswern A, B

Question 44

UDP is connectonless oriented, which of the following must be used in order to ensure reliability?

A. Internet Protocol
B. Applicaton Layer Protocol
C. Network Layer Protocol
D. Transmission Control Protocol

Aoswern B

Question 45

The administrator has confgured an IP address for Host A and Host B, but had forgoten to confgure a default gateway. What efect will this
have on the hosts?

A. Neither host will be afected, and therefore will be able to communicate with the peer.
B. Host A will be unable to connect to the router’s G0/0/0 interface.
C. Hosts will be unable to comminicate unless arp-proxy is enabled on the router.
D. The host will be unable to reach neither the local nor remote network destnatons .

Aoswern C

Question 46
https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 14

A host has established a telnet connecton with the router atached to interface G0/0/0. Which of the following statements are correct?
(Choose two)

A. The destnaton address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of the router interface.
B. The destnaton address of a frame will be the MAC address of the switch interface.
C. The destnaton port number in a segment header will have a value of 80.
D. The destnaton IP address of a packet will be the IP address of the network interface of the router.

Aoswern A, D

Question 47

The administrator uses the ping command on the host to test connectvity to the website www.huawei.com. The command line shows a
request tme out. The administrator displays the ARP entries for the host.
Which entry will be found in the ARP cache table of the host?

A. The MAC address of the destnaton www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
B. The MAC address of the switch will exist in the ARP cache.
C. The IP address of the destnaton www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
D. The MAC address of router interface G0/0/0, will exist in the ARP cache.

Aoswern D

Question 48

When R2 forwards data to R3 from R1, which of the following items will change? (Choose two)

A. The source MAC address

B. The destnaton MAC address
C. The source IP address
D. The destnaton IP address

Aoswern A, B

Question 49

If Host B also confgured the IP address as “192.168.1.1/24”, an IP address confct will occur. What will happen as a result?

A. Host B will send an ICMP request to the destnaton with the confgured IP address. If a reply is received, the host will notfy of an
address confict.
B. Host A will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destnaton 192.168.1.1, for which Host B will
reply.
C. Host B will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destnaton 192.168.1.1, for which Host A will
reply.
D. Host A will ignore any received ARP request intended for destnaton 192.168.1.1.

Aoswern C

https://www. pass4sures.com/
Page No | 15

Question 50

<Quidway>display mac-address
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MAC Address VLAN/VSI Learned-From Type
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5489-98ec-f018 1/- GE0/0/13 dynamic
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total items displayed = 1
Refer to the graphic. A switch atempts to forward a frame to the MAC destnaton 5489-98ec-f01. What operaton will occur on the switch?

A. The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
B. The switch will report that the destnaton is unreachable and report this to the source.
C. The switch will food the frame via all ports, with excepton of the port on which the frame was received.
D. The switch will drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address table.

Aoswern C

Question 51

Host A has been connected to switch A and confgured with an IP address. When Host A initally forwards a frame, what acton will be
taken by Switch A?

A. Switch A will drop this frame.

B. Switch A will atempt to food the frame to all ports except for the G0/0/1 interface.
C. Switch A will forward the frame via ports G0/0/1, G0/0/2 and G0/0/3.
D. Switch will receive this frame before returning the frame to G0/0/1.

Aoswern B

Question 52

Which of the following statements describes the network shown? (Choose two)

A. There are 6 collision domains in the network.

B. There are 2 broadcast domains in the network.
C. There are 4 collision domains in the network.
D. There are 6 broadcast domains in the network.

Aoswern B, C

Question 53

A server is linked to port interface G0/0/1 of a switch. The administrator wishes to allow only this server to be linked to this interface on
the switch. Which method can be used to achieve this?

A. Confgure a statc ARP entry using the server’s IP address and MAC address in the switch.

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 16
B. Confgure a statc MAC address binding entry of the server’s MAC address and the interface in the switch.
C. Confgure the default gateway of the switch to be the same as the server’s IP address.
D. It is not possible to enable a single device to be associated with an interface.

Aoswern B

Question 54

An administrator connects two switches together in a local enterprise network. The ports of one switch support Fast Ethernet, while the
ports of the other switch support Gigabit Ethernet. Hosts connected to one switch are able to communicate, however communicaton
between the two switches fails. What is the possible reason for this?

A. The ports have disabled auto-negotaton.

B. One port is supportng auto-negotaton, while auto-negotaton is disabled on the port of the other switch.
C. The port of one switch is operatng using half duplex mode, while the port of the other switch is using full duplex mode.
D. A Fast Ethernet port cannot communicate directly with a Gigabit Ethernet port.

Aoswern A

Question 55

A layer 2 LAN switch generates CAM table entries according to the ( ) of the received frame.

A. Source MAC address

B. Destnaton MAC address
C. Source IP address
D. Destnaton IP address

Aoswern A

Question 56

Which of the following statements about collision domains and broadcast domains are correct? (Choose three)

A. Devices connected to the same hub form a collision domain

B. Devices connected to the same hub form a broadcast domain
C. Devices connected to the same bridge form a collision domain
D. Devices connected to the same bridge form a broadcast domain
E. Devices connected to the same router form a broadcast domain

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 57

Which of the following statements regarding layer-2 switch is incorrect?

A. The switch learns MAC addresses automatcally

B. The layer-3 header is modifed before the received packet is transmited

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 17
C. The layer-2 header is modifed before the received packet is transmited.
D. The layer-2 LAN switch operates at data link layer

Aoswern B

Question 58

[R1]display interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0 GigabitEthernet0/0/0 current state : Administratvely DOWN Line protocol current state :
DOWN
Refer to the display output. What can be determined based on the output of the display command?

A. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is connected to a wrong cable

B. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with an IP address
C. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with a dynamically defned route.
D. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 has been manually shut down by an administrator.

Aoswern D

Question 59

Which of the following statements regarding statc and dynamic routng is incorrect?

A. The statc route can be easily confgured and managed on the enterprise network.
B. The use of dynamic routng is more convenient for the administrator to manage the network following network convergence.
C. The statc route can automatcally recover when a link failure is encountered.
D. Dynamic routng will use more resources than statc routes.

Aoswern C

Question 60

Which of the following are routed protocols? (Choose two)

A. IP
B. OSPF
C. BGP
D. IPX

Aoswern A, D

Question 61

Which of the following statements regarding the routng table are correct? (Choose two)

A. The next hop in the routng table is redundant because the outgoing interface can be used for packet forwarding.
B. The routes from generated by diferent protocols have diferent preferences.
C. The metrics of diferent routng protocols are comparable.

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 18
D. The metrics of diferent routng protocols are not comparable

Aoswern B, D

Question 62

Which of the following commands can be used to display the routng table on a Quidway router?

A. display ip path
B. display ip routng-table
C. display interface
D. display current-confguraton

Aoswern B

Question 63

Which of the following entries is not included in the routng table?

A. source address
B. next hop
C. destnaton address
D. cost

Aoswern A

Question 64

Which of the following problems are caused by routng loops? (Choose three)

A. Slow convergence
B. Packets circulate between routers
C. Router restartng
D. Inconsistency of routng informaton

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 65

An administrator wishes to manage the router in the remote branch ofce, which method can be used?

A. Telnet
B. FTP
C. Console Connecton
D. DHCP

Aoswern A
https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 19

Question 66

The network administrator has confgured the router as shown. Which statement is false?

A. The confguraton manages the user login through the console interface.
B. The user login through vty 0 has the privilege to run level 2 commands.
C. The user login through telnet has the privilege to run level 2 commands.
D. The confguraton manages the telnet user login.

Aoswern A

Question 67

The administrator cannot use telnet to manage the AR2200. The administrator is able to verify connectvity to the router and has been
informed that other administrators have no difcultes using telnet. Which statements describe the possible reasons for this problem?
(Choose two)

A. The user’s status has been blocked

B. The user’s priviledge level has been changed to 0.
C. The user has been deleted.
D. The telnet service in the AR2200 router has been disabled.

Aoswern A, C

Question 68

A user logged into a VRP supported device through telnet, but when atemptng to confgure the device, found that he is unable to use the
sytem-view command to enter the system-view. What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose two)

A. The device’s VTY interface only provides permission for some telnet users to run the sytem-view command.
B. The user’s telnet sofware restricts use of this command.
C. The user’s privilege level is lower than the level associated with the system-view command.
D. The system-view command privilege level is lower than the level associated with the user.

Aoswern A, C

Question 69

The users who log on the router through Telnet are not permited to confgure IP address. What is the possible reason?

A. Communicaton failures occur between the user and the router.

B. The authentcaton mode of Telnet is set incorrectly.
C. Privilege level of Telnet is set incorrectly.
D. SNMP parameters are set incorrectly.

Aoswern C
https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 20

Question 70

Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two)

A. A single collision domain exists between RTA and SWC.

B. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWB.
C. A single collision domain exists between SWA and SWC.
D. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWC.

Aoswern C, D

Question 71

On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command “ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0” has been confgured. Which
following statements are correct? (Choose two).

A. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/24

B. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/32
C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in RTA’s routng-table
D. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 does not exist in RTA’s routng-table

Aoswern B, D

Question 72

Refer to the graphic. The host has a problem establishing a telnet connecton with the router atached to interface G0/0/0. Which of the
following steps can be used to help the administrator identfy the problem? (Choose two)
<choice ident=“A”>
<choice ident=“B”>
<choice ident=“C”>
<choice ident=“D”>

A. Check whether the host has confgured the gateway IP address.

B. Check whether the switch has confgured the gateway IP address.
C. Use the ping tool to check connectvity between host and router.
D. Check the telnet server confguraton is right on the router.

Aoswern C, D

Question 73

Which of the following methods are supported by VRP platorm to confgure the router? (Choose three)

A. Through the Console port

B. Through Telnet
C. Through the AUX port
D. Through FTP

Aoswern A, B, C

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 21

Question 74

The administrator wishes to update the confguraton fle of an AR2200 router using a USB cable. How can this be achieved? (Choose two)

A. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the mini USB port of the AR2200 router.
B. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the USB port of the AR2200 router.
C. The AR2200 router cannot support confguraton updates through a USB cable.
D. The administrator should install the mini USB drivers on the terminal afer connectng the USB.

Aoswern A, D

Question 75

The administrator wishes to manage a network through telnet from a user's terminal to a router. How can this be achieved?

A. A connecton should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the console port of the router.
B. A connecton should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the ethernet port of the router.
C. A connecton should be established between the console port of the terminal and the ethernet port of the router.use console cable
connect pc’s ethernet port and router’s console port.
D. A connecton should be established between the COM port of the terminal and the console port of the router.

Aoswern B

Question 76

Whilst confguring a device, an administrator experiences trouble remembering certain commands. Which of the following will help
support the administrator? (Choose two)

A. TAB
B. queston mark
C. ctrl+b
D. ctrl+c

Aoswern A, B

Question 77

<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei] user-interface console 0
[Huawei-ui-console0] user privilege level 15
[Huawei-ui-console0] authentcaton-mode password
[Huawei-ui-console0] set authentcaton password cipher huawei2012 [Huawei-ui-console0] quit
Refer to the confguraton output. The administrator confgured the device using the commands in the confguraton output. Regarding these
commands, which statement is false?
https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 22

A. The administrator wishes to enable management through the console interface.

B. Following confguraton, the administrator cannot manage the device remotely.
C. A user that logs-in through the console interface is assigned the highest privilege level.
D. The password of a user logged in through console is ‘cipher huawei2012’

Aoswern D

Question 78

Which of the following is abbreviaton of VRP?

A. Versatle Routne Platorm

B. Virtual Routng Platorm
C. Virtual Routng Plane
D. Versatle Routng Platorm

Aoswern D

Question 79

Which of the following must be used to establish the confguraton environment when a router is powered on for the frst tme?

A. SSL
B. SSH
C. Console port
D. Telnet

Aoswern C

Question 80

Which of the following parameter setngs for terminal emulaton are correct when confguring a Huawei router through the Console port?

A. 4800bps, 8 data bits,1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no fow control
B. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no fow control
C. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware fow control
D. 19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no fow control

Aoswern B

Question 81

Which of the following commands is used to enter the system-view from the user view on a Huawei router?
A. system-view
B. enable
C. confgure terminal

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 23

D. interface system

Aoswern A

Question 82

On VRP platorm, the command lines are classifed into four levels in increasing priority: Visit level, Monitoring level, Confguraton level,
and Management level. At which level, the operator is permited to confgure service but is not permited to operate the fle system?

A. Visit level
B. Monitoring level
C. Confguraton level
D. Management level

Aoswern C

Question 83

On Huawei VRP platorm, which of the following can be used to invoke the history command saved by the command line interface?
(Choose two)
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

A. Up cursor key < >

B. Lef cursor key < >
C. Ctrl+P
D. Ctrl+U

Aoswern A, C

Question 84

Which of the following commands can be used to view the current confguratons on a Huawei router?

A. display current-confguraton
B. display saved-confguraton
C. view saved-confguraton
D. show startup-confguraton

Aoswern A

Question 85
The administrator wishes to change name of the router. Under which view should the administrator be in order to achieve this?

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 24

A. User-view
B. System-view
C. Interface-view
D. Protocol-view

Aoswern B

Question 86

<Huawei> system-view
[Huawei]command-privilege level 3 view user save
Refer to the command output. What is the result of the shown command?

A. The command adjusts the save command of a user to privilege level 3.

B. The command adjusts the save command in the user view to privilege level 3.
C. The command adjusts the user view command privilege level to 3, and saves the confguraton.
D. The command adjusts the privilege level of a user to 3, and saves the confguraton.

Aoswern B

Question 87

<Huawei>system-view
[Huawei]history-command max-size 20
Refer to the command output. Which statements regarding the shown command are true? (Choose two)

A. The command is used to adjust the size of the history command bufer
B. The default value of the history command bufer is 5.
C. The command should be confgured in the user-interface view.
D. Once confgured, commands totalling up to 20 bytes can be saved in the bufer.

Aoswern A, C

Question 88

An AR2200 router is required to be reconfgured from scratch. Which steps are needed to achieve this? (Choose two)

A. Reset the saved confguraton

B. Clear the current confguraton
C. Reboot the AR2200.
D. Assign the confguraton fle to be used at next startup.

Aoswern A, C

Question 89
An adminstrator has been requested to replace the confguraton fle of a router in the network. The administrator has been instructed that
afer logging into the router, he must frst permenantly erase the current confguraton fle confg.zip from the system. Which command should
he use to achieve this?

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 25

A. delete /force confg.zip

B. delete /unreserved confg.zip
C. reset confg.zip
D. clear confg.zip

Aoswern B

Question 90

Which of the following commands can switch a view from the system view to the user view?

A. System-view
B. Router
C. Quit
D. User-view

Aoswern C

Question 91

Which of the following storage devices are supported by Huawei router? (Select 4 Answers)

A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. Hard Disk
E. CF Card

Aoswern A, B, C, E

Question 92

Which of the following storage devices is used to store the startup confguraton fles in a router?
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. BootROM

Aoswern B

Question 93

<Huawei>reset saved-confguraton

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 26

Warning: The acton will delete the saved confguraton in the device. The confguraton will be erased to reconfgure. Contnue? [Y/N]:
Refer to the confguraton output. Which of the following statements are true? (Select two answers)

A. A user should enter ‘Y’ when wishing to clear the saved confguraton fle.
B. The saved-confguraton fle that the device starts with can be erased.
C. The saved-confguraton will be deleted afer typing N
D. The saved-confguraton fle will be replaced with the current-confguraton.

Aoswern A, B

Question 94

When a router is powered on, the router reads the confguraton fle saved in the default save directory to get itself initalized. If the
confguraton fle does not exist in the default save directory, what does the router use to initalize itself?

A. New confguraton fle

B. Inital confguraton fle
C. Default parameters
D. Current confguraton fle

Aoswern C

Question 95

<Huawei>display startup MainBoard:

Startup system sofware: sd1:/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
Next startup system sofware: sd1:/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc Backup system sofware for next startup: null
Startup saved-confguraton fle: null
Next startup saved-confguraton fle: null Startup license fle: null
Next startup license fle: null Startup patch package: null
Next startup patch package: null Startup voice-fles: null
Next startup voice-fles: null
Refer to the display output. Which statement is false?

A. The current confguraton fle has not been saved.

B. The current startup system sofware is ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
C. The next startup system sofware cannot be changed.
D. The next startup system sofware can be changed by using the “startup system sofware <startup-
sofwarename>.cc” command.

Aoswern C
https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 27

Question 96

<Huawei>
Warning: Auto-Confg is working. Before confguring the device, stop Auto-Confg. If you perform confguratons when Auto-Confg is
running, the DHCP, routng, DNS, and VTY confguratons will be lost. Do you want to stop Auto-Confg? [y/n]:
When an administrator frst initalizes the router, a warning is displayed. Which statement regarding this warning is correct?

A. If Auto-Confg is required, the administrator should select ‘y’

B. If Auto-Confg is not required, the administrator should select ‘n’, for which subsequent confguraton of the DHCP server,
routng, DNS server and VTY user confguraton is lost
C. When a device is started for the frst tme, the Auto-Confg functon is actve.
D. When a device is started for the frst tme, the Auto-Confg functon is inactve.

Aoswern C

Question 97

An AR2200 router in the company network cannot boot. In order to resolve this, the administrator wishes to update the VRP sofware.
What should he/she do?

A. The administrator should use a console cable to connect the router and host, and directly upgrade the device.
B. The administrator should use FTP to transfer the VRP sofware, by confguring the AR2200 router as an FTP client.
C. The administrator should use DHCP to boot the AR2200, and then use the AR2200 router as a TFTP client to download the
VRP sofware from the server.
D. The administrator should use the telnet command on the client to remote access the device, and upgrade the VRP sofware.

Aoswern B

Question 98

<Huawei>
Warning: Auto-Confg is working. Before confguring the device, stop Auto-Confg. If you perform confguratons when Auto-Confg is
running, the DHCP, routng, DNS, and VTY confguratons will be lost. Do you want to stop Auto-Confg? [y/n]:
Refer to the output. When the administrator frst starts the router, a system notce is displayed, however afer rebootng this router, the
notce disappeared. What is the reason for this? (Choose two)

A. This notce only appears during the very frst device startup.
B. The administrator has confgured the device and saved the confguraton, causing the notce to disappear.
C. The administrator selected ‘n’ and did not save the confguraton
D. The administrator selected ‘y’ and saved the confguraton.

Aoswern B, D

Question 99
https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 28

An end system is unable to communicate with a DHCP server following the startup process. Which IP address may be used by the client?

A. 0.0.0.0
B. 127.0.0.1
C. 169.254.2.33
D. 255.255.255.255

Aoswern C

Question 100

[Huawei]ip pool pool1

Info: It's successful to create an IP address pool.
[Huawei-ip-pool-pool1]network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Huawei-ip-pool-pool1]gateway-list 10.10.10.1
Refer to the confguraton output. The administrator wishes to confgure the DHCP server pool in order to assign an IP address to the
customer’s terminal device.
Which command should be included in the confguraton to provide the minimal lease period for IP addresses?

A. dhcp select relay

B. lease day 1
C. lease 24
D. lease 0

Aoswern B

Question 101

A DHCP server has been established in the enterprise network. Afer the client has obtained an IP address from the DHCP server, the user
decided to modify the IP address manually. In what way may this afect the enterprise network? (Choose two).

A. The client may experience an IP address confict.

B. The client may access the network normally.
C. The client’s interface connecton will shutdown.
D. The client will associate with another DHCP server.

Aoswern A, B

Question 102

Refer to the graphic. Two switches have been connected as shown and both support STP. The administrator has confgured switch A as a
DHCP server and set interface VLANIF1 of switch B to obtain an IP address from switch A, A link failure occurs on port interface G0/0/1
of switch B, What acton will occur as a result?

A. The two switches will be unable to communicate.

B. Switch B will send a DHCP Discovery message to obtain a new IP address.
C. Swich B will contnue to use the IP address obtained from Switch A

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 29
D. Switch B will send a DHCP Release message to release the IP address.

Aoswern C

Question 103

A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An administrator discovers however that some
hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the DHCP server’s address pool. What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose
three).

A. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is allocatng IP addresses to hosts that happen to be within a closer proximity
than the authorized DHCP server
B. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the 169.254.0.0 address range.
C. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the 127.254.0.0 address range.
D. All addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 104

Router] ip pool pool1

[Router-ip-pool-pool1] network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-pool1] gateway-list 10.10.10.1 [Router-ip-pool-pool1] quit
[Router] ip pool pool2
[Router-ip-pool-pool2] network 10.20.20.0 mask 255.255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-pool2] gateway-list 10.20.20.1 [Router-ip-pool-pool2] quit
[Router] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
[Router-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ip address 10.10.10.1 24 [Router-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] dhcp select global
Refer to the confguraton output. Following confguraton, a host is connected to the interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1 of the router. Which IP
address will the client obtain?
<choice ident=“A”>
<choice ident=“B”>
<choice ident=“C”>
<choice ident=“D”>

A. An IP address from network 10.10.10.0/24 will be assigned.

B. An IP address from network 10.20.20.0/24 will be assigned.
C. The host will be unable to obtain an IP address.
D. An IP address may be assigned from either 10.10.10.0/24 or 10.20.20.0/24.

Aoswern A

Question 105

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 30
The IP addresses of clients in the network are deployed via a DHCP server. When a host reboots, which message will the host frst send to
the DHCP server?

A. DHCP DISCOVER
B. DHCP REQUEST
C. DHCP OFFER
D. DHCP ACK

Aoswern B

Question 106

A DHCP Unique Identfer (DUID) in DHCPv6 can be confgured in VRP using which formats? (Choose two).

A. DUID-LL
B. DUID-LLT
C. DUID-EN
D. DUID-LLC

Aoswern A, B

Question 107

Which of the following statements about the informaton contained in a Database Descripton packet are true? (Choose three)

A. A Database Descripton packet contains all informaton about each LSA

B. A Database Descripton packet contains only the header of an LSA
C. The header of an LSA is the unique identfer of the LSA
D. The header of an LSA is only a small porton of all the data of the LSA

Aoswern B, C, D

Question 108

What is the default authentcaton mode for the default_admin domain?

A. None
B. Local
C. Radius D. 802.1X

Aoswern B

Question 109

How many domains can be confgured on a Huawei router?

A. 30

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 31

B. 31
C. 32
D. 33
Aoswern A

Question 110

An authentcator router has been confgured with two domains named “Area1” and “Area2”, following which a user is created with the
username “huawei” and the password ”hello” for authentcaton. Which domain does this user belongs to?
<choice ident=“A”>
<choice ident=“B”>
<choice ident=“C”>
<choice ident=“D”>

A. Area1 domain
B. Area2 domain
C. default domain
D. default_admin domain

Aoswern C

Question 111

In order to check if the interface serial 1/0/0 is working in either DCE or DTE mode, command ( ) is used.

A. display mode serial 1/0/0

B. display controller
C. display interface serial 1/0/0
D. display current-confg

Aoswern C

Question 112

How is mapping performed on a DTE device in a Frame Relay network?

A. The local DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

B. The local IP address is mapped to a remote DLCI number.
C. The local DLCI number is mapped to a local IP address.
D. The remote DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

Aoswern A

Question 113

If Frame Relay implements dynamic address mapping for the PVC, which protocol will be used?

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 32

A. LMI protocol.
B. ARP protocol.
C. RARP protocol.
D. InARP protocol
Aoswern D

Question 114

Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements correctly describe the Frame Relay devices? (Choose two)

A. RTA is a DTE device.

B. FRA is a DTE device.
C. FRB is a DCE device.
D. The interface on RTA is a DCE interface

Aoswern A, C

Question 115

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are connected over a Frame Relay network using a DLCI, as shown. Statc mapping is required
on RTA, Which of the following commands will achieve this?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.1.1 30

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.1.1 31
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.2.1 30
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.2.1 31

Aoswern C

Question 116

Refer to the graphic. RTA is a DTE device connected to a Frame Relay switch, and uses dynamic address mapping to establish the PVC.
With regards to the confguraton, which of the following commands are not necessary? (Choose two).

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]ip address 172.16.1.1 24

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]link-protocol FR
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr interface-type dte
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr inarp

Aoswern C, D

Question 117

Which command should be used to check the mapping between protocol addresses and frame relay addresses?

A. display fr interface
B. display fr map-info

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 33

C. display fr inarp-info
D. display interface brief
Aoswern B

Question 118

Which of the following protocols is used in Frame Relay to map the address to DLCI dynamically?
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

A. ARP protocol
B. RARP protocol
C. InARP protocol
D. Map protocol

Aoswern C

Question 119

Which of the following parameters must be specifed when confguring statc mapping for Frame Relay network? (Choose two)

A. Local DLCI
B. Remote DLCI
C. Local network layer protocol address
D. Remote network layer protocol address

Aoswern A, D

Question 120

Which of the following regarding Frame Relay DLCI are correct? (Choose three)

A. DLCI is locally signifcant

B. DLCI is allocated by DTE
C. The range of DLCI value that can be used is from 16-1007
D. The same DLCI can be confgured on diferent physical interfaces

Aoswern A, C, D

Question 121

Which of the following commands is used to enable dynamic address mapping protocol in the interface encapsulated with Frame Relay?

A. fr inarp

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 34

B. fr reverse-arp
C. inverse-arp
D. reverse-arp

Aoswern A

Question 122

What is the meaning of 200 in the command "fr map ip 10.1.1.2 200"?

A. remote logical channel ID

B. local DLCI
C. remote interface ID
D. remote node ID

Aoswern B

Question 123

Refer to the graphic.RTA and RTB connect to a Frame Relay switch and use dynamic address mapping. The command “fr map ip 10.0.1.1
32” is then confgured on RTB, without using the undo inarp command. What will occur as a result? (Choose two).

A. RTB will be unable to communicate with RTA

B. 10.0.1.1 will stll be mapped to DLCI 31 on RTB
C. 10.0.1.1 will stll be mapped to DLCI 32 on RTB
D. DLCI 32 will be actvated on RTB

Aoswern A, C

Question 124

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are connected to the same Frame Relay switch and use same DLCI number, which following is
correct? (Choose two).

A. RTA and RTB must be associated with the same PVC

B. RTA and RTB can be associated with diferent PVC’s
C. The DLCI on the diferent physical interfaces can be the same
D. The DLCI on the diferent physical interfaces cannot be the same

Aoswern B, C

Question 125

Which of the following commands can be used to display mapping relatonship between network address and DLCI?

A. display fr interface
B. display fr
C. display fr map-info

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 35
D. display fr brief

Aoswern C

Question 126

Which of following may be the reasons that cause Frame Relay PVC to work abnormally? (Choose three)

A. Same DLCI number is confgured on the same router

B. LMI type mismatch
C. Frame Relay encapsulaton type mismatch
D. Incorrect confguraton of the DLCI number

Aoswern B, C, D

Question 127

An administrator wishes to update the VRP sofware of company’s AR2200 router. How can this be achieved? (Choose three)

A. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP sofware, with the AR2200 router as the FTP client.
B. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP sofware, with the AR2200 router as the FTP server.
C. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP sofware, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP server.
D. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP sofware, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP client.

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 128

An administrator wishes to implement new features in the network, but the VRP version of one AR2200 router is out of date. The
administrator needs to upgrade the VRP sofware. Which of the following optons regarding fle transfer is false?

A. The AR2200 router can functon as a TFTP client to support the upgrade.
B. The AR2200 router can functon as the TFTP server to support the upgrade.
C. The AR2200 router can functon as the FTP server to support the upgrade.
D. The AR2200 router can functon as an FTP client to support the upgrade.

Aoswern B

Question 129

FTP and TFTP can be used to update the system fle on Huawei routers. Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose three)
<choice ident="A">
<choice ident="B">
<choice ident="C">
<choice ident="D">

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 36

A. Huawei router can be confgured as FTP Client

B. Huawei router can be confgured as FTP Server
C. Huawei router can be confgured as TFTP Client
D. Huawei router can be confgured as TFTP Server

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 130

An administrator discovered he/she was unable to use TFTP to transfer fles to the router. Which of the following describes the likely
reason for this?

A. The TFTP service had been disabled on the router.

B. TCP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
C. UDP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
D. The username and password had been modifed.

Aoswern C

Question 131

FTP may be used to upgrade a router's VRP image. Which of the following transmission modes should be used to achieve this?

A. binary mode
B. ASCII mode
C. byte mode
D. leter mode

Aoswern A

Question 132

A client failed to transfer a fle to the FTP server, but found the IP connectvity was without problem. The client assumed that the problem
was with the port confguraton. The blocking of which ports would likely cause this problem? (Choose two)

A. 21
B. 80
C. 20
D. 50649

Aoswern A, C

Question 133

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB have established a GRE tunnel, but only RTA has enabled the keepalive functon. When RTB receive
a keepalive message from RTA, how will RTB respond?

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 37

A. RTB will discard the keepalive message.

B. RTB willl record receipt of the keepalive message but won’t reply
C. RTB will send a keepalive in response.
D. RTB will send a keepalive reply and begin to actvely send keepalive messages.

Aoswern C

Question 134

Refer to the graphic. Two hosts communicate through a GRE tunnel. When the GRE tunnel is up, the network administrator confgures a
statc route on RTA to route packets to Host B, Which of the following commands will achieve this?

A. ip route-statc 10.1.2.0 24 GigabitEthernet0/0/1 B. ip route-statc 10.1.2.0 24 200.2.2.1

C. ip route-statc 10.1.2.0 24 200.1.1.1
D. ip route-statc 10.1.2.0 24 tunnel 0/0/1

Aoswern D

Question 135

When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to confgure the data link layer encapsulaton type of a serial interface as
HDLC?

A. encapsulaton hdlc
B. link-protocol hdlc
C. hdlc enable
D. link-protocol ppp

Aoswern B

Question 136

Refer to the graphic. Packet encapsulaton in the IPsec architecture is performed as shown. Which IPsec mode is being used to encapsulate
the packet?

A. normal mode
B. transport mode
C. tunnel mode
D. this encapsulaton is wrong

Aoswern C

Question 137

Refer to the graphic. IPsec VPN uses ESP to encrypt which felds?

A. TCP, Data and ESP Trailer

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 38

B. ESP, TCP and Data

C. ESP, TCP, Data and ESP Trailer
D. ESP, TCP, Data, ESP Trailer and ESP Auth
Aoswern A

Question 138

Refer to the graphic. In order to improve security, the two hosts use IPsec VPN to transmit data. Which IPsec mode and protocol can be
used to hide the host’s IP address? (Choose two).

A. AH
B. transport mode
C. tunnel mode
D. ESP

Aoswern C, D

Question 139

If AH and ESP are both required to protect data streams between IPsec peers, how many Security Associatons (SA) are required in total?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4

Aoswern D

Question 140

Refer to the graphic. The data is transmited using IPsec tunnel mode. The felds of which headers will be authentcated?

A. TCP and Data

B. Origin IP, TCP and Data
C. AH, Origin IP, TCP and Data
D. The felds of all headers

Aoswern C

Question 141

Two routers establish an IPsec tunnel, which of the following does not need to be the same on both peering devices?

A. Encapsulaton mode
B. Transform mode
C. Proposal name

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 39

D. authentcaton algorithm

Aoswern C
Question 142

Which of the following formats represent an accurate condensing of the IPv6

address 2031:0000:720C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:130B? (Choose two).

A. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E0:839A:130B B. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B C. 2031::720C::9E0:839A:130B

D. 2031:0:720C::9E0:839A:130B

Aoswern A, D

Question 143
Which of the following IPv6 addresses can be confgured on a router’s interface? (Choose two). A. fe80:13dc::1/64
B. f00:8a3c::9b/64 C. ::1/128
D. 2001:12e3:1b02::21/64

Aoswern A, D

Question 144

The IPv6 address achitecture does not include which of the following address types?

A. unicast
B. multcast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Aoswern C

Question 145

Which of the following descriptons regarding IPv6 addresses are correct? (Choose two)

A. IPv6 addresses are 64 bits in length.

B. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits in length.
C. IPv6 extension headers are processed in order.
D. IPv6 extension headers are processed randomly.

Aoswern B, C

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 40

Question 146

Interface G0/0/1 on RTA contains a MAC address of 00e0-fc03-aa73 and is confgured with the IPv6 address
2001::2E0:FCFF:FE03:AA73. Which method is most likely to have been used to confgure the interface IPv6 address?
A. DHCPv6
B. Auto-link
C. ARP
D. EUI-64

Aoswern D

Question 147

In a small network suppportng IPv6, a network administrator wishes implement RIPng. Which of the following commands should be used
to enable this protocol?

A. [RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]ripng 1 enable
B. [RTA]ripng 1 enable
C. <RTA>ripng 1 enable
D. [RTA-ripng-1]ripng 1 enable

Aoswern A

Question 148

In a network supportng IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

A. multple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentcaton
D. multcast updates

Aoswern C

Question 149

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB have established an IPv6 network for which an IPv6 address has been confgured only on the G0/0/1
interface. RTA is unable to ping RTB. The administrator then confgures v3 along with a router-id on both routers, and enables OSPFv3 on
G0/0/1 of both RTA and RTB. Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two).

A. RTA and RTB can establish an OSPFv3 neighbor relatonship.

B. RTA and RTB cannot establish an OSPFv3 neighbor relatonship.
C. RTA can ping RTB.
D. RTA cannot ping RTB.

Aoswern A, D

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 41

Question 150

The network administrator has decided to confgure link aggregaton in the enterprise network. Which of the following represent
advantages of link aggregaton? (Choose three)

A. Load balancing.
B. Improved bandwidth.
C. Enhanced reliability.
D. Improved security.

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 151

In port aggregaton, “multple” ports are aggregated to form a port aggregaton group so that all the member ports in the group share the
outgoing/incoming load. At which layer is port aggregaton implemented?

A. Physical Layer
B. Data Link Layer
C. Network Layer
D. Transport Layer

Aoswern B

Question 152

What benefts does port aggregaton yield? (Choose three)

A. Improves link bandwidth

B. Implements load sharing
C. Improves network reliability
D. Facilitates data copy for analysis

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 153

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator wishes to aggregate the two links as member interfaces of Ethtrunk Which statement is
correct?

A. The interfaces will be aggregated with load balancing.

B. The interfaces will be aggregated, but only interface GE0/0/1 will send data fow.
C. The interfaces will be aggregated, but the Eth-trunk will not be actve.
D. The interfaces cannot be aggregated.

Aoswern D

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 42

Question 154

What is the maximum number of member interfaces supported by a single Eth-Trunk?

A. 6.
B. 8.
C. 10 D. 12.
Aoswern B

Question 155

The Eth-Trunk frame forwarding mechanism used to prevent changes in the data sequence forwards frames based on which of the
following parameters?

A. The same source or destnaton IP address

B. The same source or destnaton MAC address.
C. The same protocol type.
D. The same source or destnaton port number.

Aoswern A, B

Question 156

In Layer 2 mode, the transmission rate of an Eth-Trunk interface is determined by which of the following?

A. Maximum number of Up member links

B. Minimum number of Up member links
C. Number of Up member interfaces
D. Number of interfaces.

Aoswern A, C

Question 157

The network administrator wishes to forward data over an Eth-trunk, however associated member interfaces operate at diferent rates. In
terms of the resultng behavior, which of the following is true?

A. The two switches will not be able to communicate.

B. The higher rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.
C. The Eth-Trunk will work normally.
D. The lower rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.

Aoswern D

Question 158

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 43

The network administrator atempts to add interface G0/0/1 on Switch A to Eth-trunk 1, however the command fails. Which of the
following may cause this?

A. The interface is operatng in half-duplex mode.

B. The interface has been shutdown.
C. The interface is already associated with another Eth-trunk.
D. The interface is an access port.

Aoswern C, D

Question 159

A network requires a soluton to allow 50 private IP addresses to be translated, however only a single public address is available for use.
Which translaton method can be used to support this requirement?

A. Statc NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT

Aoswern C

Question 160

NAPT allows for multple internal addresses to be mapped to a single public address. How does NAT distnguish between the diferent
private addresses when mapping to the same public address?

A. The source MAC address is used.

B. The destnaton MAC address is used.
C. The source port number is used.
D. The destnaton port number is used.

Aoswern C

Question 161

Refer to the graphic. Host A is located in a private network. It is required that Host A not only be capable of routng trafc over the public
network, but also that public users are able to actvely communicate with Host A,
Which NAT translaton method should be confgured on the gateway?

A. Statc NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT

Aoswern A

Question 162

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 44

Refer to the graphic. In the private network, RTA dynamically assigns a public address from the address pool to hosts without port
translaton. Host C wishes to access the public network while pool addresses are assigned to Host A and Host B, What will occur as a
result?

A. The frst public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host A will be forced ofine.
B. The last public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host B will be forced ofine.
C. Host C will be unable to forward trafc over the public network.
D. All hosts will have access to the public network through pool address swapping.

Aoswern C

Question 163

A web server in a private network is required to provide HTTP services to public users. The network administrator is required to confgure
NAT on RTA, Which confguraton should be used?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
B. [RTA-Serial0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080
C. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
D. [RTA- Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080

Aoswern A

Question 164

The network administrator needs to confgure statc NAT on RTA, in order to allow Host A to communicate with Host
C. Which command is correct?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat outbound 200.1.1.10

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat statc global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.0
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat statc global 192.168.1.1 inside 200.1.1.10
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat statc global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.1

Aoswern D

Question 165

[RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]nat outbound 2000 address-group 1

Refer to the confguraton output. What does the value “2000” refer to?

A. It represents the ACL number.

B. It represents the NAT number.
C. It represents the translated port number.
D. It represents the number of bytes that can be translated before the address is returned to the public address pool.

Aoswern A

Question 166

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 45

NAPT uses the same public address but diferent port numbers to translate private addresses. Which statement regarding the port number is
correct?

A. It is necessary to confgure port number mapping manually.

B. It is only necessary to confgure the port number range.
C. It is not necessary to confgure port numbers.
D. An access control list is needed to assign port numbers.
Aoswern C

Question 167

A confgured internal host of a private network wishes to access the internet. What must be confgured on the enterprise network’s edge
router in order to achieve this? (Choose two)

A. NAT EasyIP
B. DHCP
C. BGP
D. Default route

Aoswern A, D

Question 168

Which of the following statements are correct about NAT? (Choose three)

A. NAT is the abbreviaton for "Network Address Translaton"

B. NAT is used for translaton between private and public network addresss.
C. When hosts inside a private network access the outside network, NAT is not required.
D. NAT provides an efectve way to solve the problem of insufcient IP addresses.

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 169

Which of the following technologies can allow a host with IP address 10.0.0.1 to access the internet?

A. Statc route
B. Dynamic route
C. Route import
D. NAT

Aoswern D

Question 170

Which of the following items can be translated by NAPT?

A. MAC address + port number

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 46

B. IP address + port number

C. Only MAC address
D. Only IP address

Aoswern B
Question 171

Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multcast mode are true? (Choose three)

A. The port receives only RIPv2 multcast packets.

B. The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
D. The port receives only RIPv1 multcast packets.

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 172

Which of the following statements regarding the router ID in OSPF are incorrect? (Choose three)

A. The router IDs of OSPF routers in the same area must be the same, but can be diferent in diferent areas.
B. The router ID must be the IP address of an OSPF router interface.
C. The router ID must be confgured manually.
D. A router running OSPF must have a router ID for it to operate properly.

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 173

Which of the following statements regarding Designated Routers in OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

A. DR is elected by all the routers in the same network segment.

B. If the priorites of two routers are diferent, the router with the lower priority will be elected as DR.
C. If the priorites of two routers are equal, the router with the higher Router ID will be elected as DR.
D. DR and BDR must be adjacent.

Aoswern A, C, D

Question 174

On the VRP platorm, which of the following commands is used to confgure the Router ID of a router as 1.1.1.1?

A. <Huawei>router id 1.1.1.1
B. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1
C. [Huawei]router-id 1.1.1.1
D. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 47

Aoswern B

Question 175
Which of the following OSPF versions is specifc to IPv6?

A. OSPFv1
B. OSPFv2
C. OSPFv3
D. OSPFv4

Aoswern C

Question 176

The administrator wishes to confgure OSPF on a router in the network however the router has no loopback interface. Which value will be
used as the router ID?

A. The lowest IP address of the router’s actve interfaces.

B. The highest IP address of the router’s actve interfaces.
C. The IP address of the management interface
D. The priority value of the router.

Aoswern B

Question 177

An administrator of a company supportng a large enterprise network wishes to implement OSPF on the network as opposed to RIP. Which
of the following points should the administrator use to support his reasoning for this change? (Choose three)

A. OSPF has no hop count limitaton

B. OSPF has a lower routng update overhead
C. OSPF has a simpler confguraton.
D. OSPF supports faster convergence.

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 178

Which of the following statements regarding single area OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

A. An IP address needs to be confgured on a loopback interface of each router before confguring an OSPF area.
B. The value of an area can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
C. A single area can be confgured using any supported area number.
D. All of the links of the network need to be advertsed in Area 0.

Aoswern B, C, D

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 48

Question 179
10.0.1.0/24 O_ASE 150 2 D 10.0.23.3 Serial2/0/0
Refer to the display output. Which of the following statements regarding route shown are true? (Choose two)

A. The address 10.0.23.3 has been confgured on the peer’s serial 2/0/0 interface.
B. The route preference has been changed by the adminstrator.
C. The metric for the route 10.0.1.0 indicates that two hops are needed.
D. The route has been learned via the OSPF protocol.

Aoswern A, D

Question 180

Which of the following statements regarding link-state database and routng-table of a “single” OSPF area are correct? (Choose two)

A. The link-state databases that all routers build are identcal.

B. The link-state databases that all routers build are diferent.
C. The routng-tables that all routers calculate are diferent.
D. The routng-tables that all routers calculate are identcal.

Aoswern A, C

Question 181

Which of the following steps are necessary to confgure OSPF on a Huawei router? (Choose three)

A. Confguraton of a router ID
B. Enabling of an OSPF process
C. Specifying an OSPF area
D. Confguraton of the network segments within each area

Aoswern B, C, D

Question 182

Which of the following statements regarding the DR in an OSPF network are correct? (Choose two)

A. There must be at least one DR in an OSPF area.

B. A DR must be elected among the routers through the negotatons that are defned by OSPF protocol.
C. Only the router with highest priority will be elected as DR.
D. Only NBMA or Broadcast networks need to elect DR

Aoswern B, D

Question 183

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 49

Which of the following VRP commands can be used to enter area 0 view? (Choose two)

A. [Huawei]ospf area 0
B. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0
C. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0.0.0.0
D. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0 enable

Aoswern B, C

Question 184

Which of the following commands is used to display the OSPF neighbor relatonship establishment?

A. display ospf neighbor

B. display ospf brief
C. display ospf peer
D. display ospf interface

Aoswern C

Question 185

With what kind of routers does a DRother router exchange link state informaton and route informaton? (Choose two)

A. DR
B. BDR
C. DRother
D. All OSPF neighbors

Aoswern A, B

Question 186

An OSPF area is a collecton of a group of routers and networks. OSPF defnes that routers that have the same ( ) belong to the same OSPF
area.

A. neighbors
B. LSDB
C. LSA
D. adjacency

Aoswern B

Question 187

Which of the following statements about router IDs are true? (Choose two)

A. The routers contained in the same LSDB have the same router ID

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 50

B. Each router in an OSPF network must have a unique router ID

C. Two routers in diferent OSPF areas can have the same router ID
D. A router ID is expressed in a 32-bit doted decimal format.
Aoswern B, D

Question 188

OSPF allows for “multple” processes. By default, OSPF selects a process whose number is ( ).

A. 0
B. 1
C. 10 D. 100

Aoswern B

Question 189

In a network supportng IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

A. multple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentcaton
D. multcast updates

Aoswern C

Question 190

Two routers are confgured with OSPFv3. OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces of each router. Which of the following is true in the event
that the network administrator does not confgure a Router-ID?

A. The IP address of the loopback 0 interface will be used as the router ID

B. The IP address of the loopback 1 interface will be used as the router ID
C. The IP address of interface G0/0/0 will be used as the router ID
D. No router ID will be assigned to the router.

Aoswern D

Question 191

Destnaton/Mask protocol pre Cost Nexthop Interface 9.0.0.0/8 OSPF 10 50 1.1.1.1 Serial 1/0/0
9.1.0.0/16 RIP 100 5 2.2.2.2 Ethernet 0/0/1
Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements is correct when this router forwards the packet to the destnaton host 9.1.4.5?

A. The router selects the frst entry to match the destnaton address of the packet because the preference of OSPF is

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 51
higher than the preference of RIP.
B. The router selects the second entry to match the destnaton address of the packet because the cost of RIP is lower than that of
OSPF.
C. The router selects the second entry to match the destnaton address of the packet because the outgoing interface is an Ethernet
interface. The forwarding speed of an Ethernet interface is faster than the forwarding speed of a serial interface
D. The router selects the second entry to match the destnaton address of the packet because the router will match the most specifc
address.

Aoswern D

Question 192

According to the default value of route preference on the VRP platorm, which of the following represent the correct sequence for direct
route, statc route, RIP and OSPF if they are listed from high preference to low preference?

A. Direct, Statc, RIP, OSPF

B. Direct, OSPF, Statc, RIP
C. Direct, OSPF, RIP, Statc
D. Direct, RIP, Statc, OSPF

Aoswern B

Question 193

A router has learned two routes for the same network with the same prefx. One route has been learned via OSPF with a metric of 4882,
while the other route has been learned via RIPv2 with a metric of 4. Which route (s) will be found in the routng table?

A. The RIPv2 route.

B. The OSPF and RIPv2 routes.
C. The OSPF route.
D. Neither of these routes will be found in the routng table.

Aoswern C

Question 194

Assume that the router has learnt the best route to the same destnaton by using RIP, OSPF and Statc Route respectvely. By default,
the Huawei router will select the route learnt via ( ) as the best route.

A. RIP
B. OSPF
C. RIPv2
D. Statc route

Aoswern B

Question 195

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 52

Afer checking the OSPF neighbor state, the administrator discovers that the router has established a TWOWAY state with the peering
router. What can be understood from this informaton? (Choose two)

A. The routers are confgured using the same process ID

B. The routers are confgured using the same area ID
C. The routers are confgured using wrong router ID
D. The routers are considered DROthers in a broadcast network

Aoswern D

Question 196

Refer to the graphic. An administrator has confgured OSPF on the two routers, following which he then implements the command silent-
interface s0/0/1 on RTA, What efect will this command have on the network? (Choose two)

A. The link informaton advertsed by RTB will be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA
B. The OSPF neighbor relatonship will fail between two routers.
C. The confguraton will not afect the OSPF neighbor relatonship between the two routers.
D. The link informaton advertsed by RTB will no longer be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA

Aoswern B, D

Question 197

Refer to the graphic. Which statements correctly explains the forwarding behavior between RTA and RTE? (Choose two)

A. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0
B. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0.
C. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path from via E0/0/1.
D. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S2/0/0.

Aoswern B, C

Question 198

What functons does a Hello packet of OSPF implement? (Choose two)

A. Neighbor discovery
B. Deleton of unreachable neighbors.
C. Maintaining of neighbor relatonships.
D. Negotaton of parameters among adjacent ports.

Aoswern A, C

Question 199

Refer to the graphic. The link between RTA and RTB is encapsulated using PPP. The IP addresses of serial 1/0/1 of RTA

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 53

and serial 1/0/1 of RTB are in diferent network segments. Which following is correct? (Choose two)

A. RTA can ping 10.1.1.2 successfully

B. RTA cannot ping 10.1.1.2
C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in the routng-table of RTA
D. The route entry 10.1.1.2/32 exists in the routng-table of RTA

Aoswern A, D

Question 200

Two routers are connected through serial interfaces and support PPP encapsulaton. Which parameters must be negotated to establish the
PPP connecton? (Choose three).

A. MRU
B. Authentcaton password
C. Magic-Number
D. IP address

Aoswern A, C, D

Question 201

What are the three protocol components defned by PPP? (Choose three).

A. Data encapsulaton.
B. LCP
C. NCP
D. IPCP

Aoswern A, B, C

Question 202

Two routers are connected via serial interfaces, for which the link-protocol is PPP. The network administrator wishes to confgure PPP
authentcaton to improve security on this link. Which PPP authentcaton method provides a more secure soluton?

A. CHAP
B. PAP
C. MD5
D. SSH

Aoswern A

Question 203

If PPP authentcaton fails, which type of packet will be sent to the authentcated peer by the authentcator?

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 54

A. Authentcate-Ack
B. Authentcate-Nak
C. Authentcate-Reject
D. Authentcate-Reply

Aoswern B
Question 204

Two routers are connected via serial interfaces and the link-protocol is PPP, but the MRU of two serial interface’s are diferent, in PPP
LCP negotated stage, what will happen?

A. LCP negotaton will fail

B. Negotaton will use the smaller value
C. Negotaton will use the larger value
D. Negotaton will use 1500

Aoswern B

Question 205

PPP is more secure than HDLC because PPP supports authentcaton protocols such as ( ). (Choose two)

A. PAP
B. MD5
C. CHAP
D. SSH

Aoswern A, C

Question 206

When both ends running PPP protocol detect that the physical link is actve, the link state will transit from dead to establish. Which of the
following protocols is used to negotate the link parameters during this phase?

A. IP
B. DHCP
C. LCP
D. NCP

Aoswern C

Question 207

A serial interface of a Huawei router currently using HDLC needs to assign PPP as the encapsulaton protocol. Which of the following
commands is required to be confgured at the serial interface view?

A. link-protocol ppp
B. encapsulaton ppp

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 55

C. enable ppp
D. address ppp

Aoswern A
Question 208

When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to confgure the PPP authentcaton method as PAP?

A. ppp pap
B. ppp authentcaton-pap
C. ppp authentcaton-mode pap
D. ppp pap-authentcaton

Aoswern C

Question 209

When confguring the PPP authentcaton method as PAP, which of the following operatons are necessary? (Choose three)

A. Add the user name and password of the authentcated party to the local user list
B. Confgure the encapsulaton type of the interface connected to the peer as PPP.
C. Confgure PPP authentcaton method as CHAP
D. On the authentcated party end, confgure the user name and password that are sent to authentcator

Aoswern A, B, D

Question 210

In the PPP protocol, which of the following encrypton algorithms is used by CHAP?

A. DES
B. MD5
C. AES
D. None

Aoswern B

Question 211

What is the functon of the “ip address ppp-negotate” command?

A. Enables the functon of requestng for an IP address from the peer device.
B. Enables the functon of acceptng the request for an IP address from the remote device.
C. Enables the functon of statcally allocatng IP addresses to the peer.
D. None of the above

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 56

Aoswern A

Question 212
Two routers have established a point-to-point network using PPP. The administrator has confgured the routers to run OSPF in the same
area with the same router ID, what will behavior will occur as a result of the confguraton?

A. The routers will build a neighbor relatonship even though both routers are using the same router ID.
B. VRP will notfy of a router ID confict between the two routers.
C. The routers will build an adjacency even though both routers are using the same router ID
D. The routers will not send hello packets to each other because they are using the same router ID

Aoswern B

Question 213

The PPPoE session establishment process can be divided into which stages? (Choose two).

A. Discovery stage
B. DHCP stage
C. PPPoE Session stage
D. PPP connectng stage.

Aoswern A, C

Question 214

To establish multple PPP point-to-point connectons in the Ethernet network, a PPPoE server establishes connectons with multple PPPoE
clients on one Ethernet port. How does PPPoE diferentate between each connecton?

A. MAC address.
B. IP address and MAC address
C. MAC address and ppp-id
D. MAC address and session-id

Aoswern D

Question 215

When confguring a router as a PPPoE client, which confguraton is not necessary?

A. Confguraton of the dialer-rule

B. Confguraton of the dialer interface
C. Confguraton of an IP address on the dialer interface
D. Confguraton of a password on the dialer interface

Aoswern C

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 57

Question 216
Refer to the graphic. RTA is a PPPoE client, and sends PADI packets to Server A, Which distributon method is used for sending PADI
packets?

A. unicast
B. multcast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Aoswern C

Question 217

Refer to the graphic. RTA is a PPPoE client, and following transmission of PADI, Server A responds with PADO packets to RTA, Which
distributon method is used for sending PADO packets?

A. unicast
B. multcast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Aoswern A

Question 218

In the PPPoE discovery stage, the PPPoE server assigns a session-id to the PPPoE client in which packet?

A. PADI
B. PADO
C. PADR
D. PADS

Aoswern D

Question 219

Which command can be used to check the PPPoE client session status?

A. display ip interface brief

B. display current-confguraton
C. display pppoe-client session packet
D. display pppoe-client session summary

Aoswern D

Question 220

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 58

[Huawei]rip 1
[Huawei-rip-1]version 2
Refer to the command output. An administrator wishes to confgure RIP. Which other command needs to confgured for RIP routes to be
advertsed?

A. import-route GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 B. network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255

C. network GigabitEthernet 0/0/1 D. network 192.168.1.0

Aoswern D

Question 221

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are running RIPv1. RTA has advertsed 10.0.0.0 and 192.168.1.0 to the RIP network. Which routes
will exist in the IP routng table of RTB? (Choose two)

A. 10.0.0.0/8
B. 192.168.1.1/32 C. 10.1.12.1/32
D. 192.168.1.0/24

Aoswern C, D

Question 222

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv1 to advertse its routes, while RTB is using RIPv2. What
efect will this have on learned routes?

A. RTA and RTB will both learn the routes advertsed by RIP.
B. RTA will learn the RIP route advertsed by RTB, however RTB is unable to learn the route advertsed by RTA
C. RTB will learn the RIP route advertsed by RTA, however RTA is unable to learn the route advertsed by RTB
D. Neither RTA nor RTB are able to learn the RIP routes advertsed by the peer.

Aoswern B

Question 223

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv1 to advertse its routes, while RTB is using RIPv2 to
advertse the route 1.1.1.1/32. How will the route 1.1.1.1/32 appear in the IP routng table of RTA?

A. This route will not appear in the IP routng table of RTA

B. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/8.
C. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/24.
D. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/32.

Aoswern D

Question 224

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 59

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv2 to advertse its routes, while RTB is using RIPv1 to
advertse the route 1.1.1.1/32. The administrator confgures “RIP version 2 multcast” for interface G0/0/1 of RTB. How will the route
1.1.1.1/32 appear in the the IP routng table of RTA?

A. This route will not appear in the IP routng table of RTA

B. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/8.
C. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/24.
D. This route will appear in the IP routng table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/32.

Aoswern D

Question 225

A RIP router receives the routng update informaton from its neighbor. Which of the following statements regarding routng update are
correct? (Choose three)

A. The received route that is not in the routng table will be added only when its hop count value is less than 16.
B. The received route that already exists in the routng table will be updated only when the next hop is the router's neighbor and the
cost value is smaller.
C. The received route that already exists in the routng table will be updated only when the next hop is not the router's neighbor and
the cost value is smaller.
D. The received route that already exists in the routng table will be updated only when the next hop is the router's neighbor and the
cost value has been changed.

Aoswern A, C, D

Question 226

Which of the following commands is used to display the current running state and confguraton of RIP?

A. display protocol rip

B. show rip
C. display rip
D. display this rip

Aoswern C

Question 227

A user can view the informaton for the RIP protocol on a router. What does “Age tme” in the returned result of the command mean?

A. The interval of updatng an RIP packet

B. The aging tme of an RIP route
C. The suppression tme of an RIP route
D. The tme spent on switching between RIP routes

Aoswern B

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 60

Question 228

Afer a command for displaying RIP route informaton is entered on a router, peer 192.168.1.2 on Serial1/0/0 is displayed in the returned
result. What does 192.168.1.2 stand for?

A. Address of a RIP neighbor

B. Address of the port with the RIP protocol enabled
C. Next hop address of the RIP route
D. Transmission address of the RIP protocol

Aoswern A

Question 229

Refer to the grapic. An administrator has confgured RIPv2 on the two routers, following which he implements the command silent-
interface s0/0/1 on RTA, What efect will this command have on the network? (Two Answers)

A. RTA will contnue to learn routes from RTB

B. RTB will contnue to learn routes from RTA
C. RTA will have no neighbor relatonship with RTB
D. RTB will have no adjacency relatonship with RTA

Aoswern A, D

Question 230

Refer to the graphic. R1, R2 and R3 are running RIPv1. R1 and R3 both advertse 172.16.0.0 to the RIP network. How will this afect R2?

A. R2 will not have a route to the networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 172.16.2.0/24

B. R2 will only have a route to 172.16.1.0/24
C. R2 will only have a route to 172.16.2.0/24
D. R2 will have a route to both networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 172.16.2.0/24, but some packets for these destnatons will be lost.

Aoswern D

Question 231

<R2>debugging rip 1
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.1-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13414: RIP 1: Receiving v1 response on GigabitEthernet0/0/0
from 10.0.12.1 with 1 RTE
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.2-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13465: RIP 1: Receive response from 10.0.12.1 on
GigabitEthernet0/0/0
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.3-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13476: Packet: Version 1, Cmd response, Length 24
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.4-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13527: Dest 1.0.0.0, Cost 1
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.5-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 2688: RIP 1: Ignoring packet. This version is not confgured.
Refer to the debug output. Following confguraton of R2, the administrator discovers that the behavior is not as

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 61

expected and performs debugging. Based on the output from the debug, what is the source of the problem?

A. R2 has confgured an ACL to block the route to network 1.0.0.0

B. R2 has enabled split horizon.
C. R1 is using authentcaton, however R2 is not.
D. R2 is operatng using RIPv2, while R1 is using RIPv1.

Aoswern D
https://www. pass4sures.com/

Page No | 62

Question 232

Refer to the graphic. An administrator has confged RIPv2 in the two routers shows in the fgure. What will happen afer confguring the
following commands? (Choose two)
[RTA-Serial0/0/1]rip output
[RTA-rip-1]silent-interface s0/0/1

A. RTA will have the route learned from the RTB

B. RTB will have the route learn from the RTA
C. RTA will have no neighbor relatonship with RTB
D. RTB will have no neighbor relatonship with RTB
Aoswern A, D

Question 233

Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multcast mode are true? (Choose three)

A. The port receives only RIPv2 multcast packets.

B. The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
D. The port receives only RIPv1 multcast packets.

Aoswern A, B, C

https://www. pass4sures.com/

Huawei H12-211
Huawei Certified Network Associate- Huawei Networking Technology and Device
Version: 6.0

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 1

An administrator currently manages AR2200 devices in the network through a single password, however the company wishes to introduce
another two administrators and provide unique user credentials and privilege levels for telnet access to the network devices. What action
can be taken? (Choose three)

A. Configure three users under the AAA-view, and assign each a different password.
B. The authentication mode must be changed to AAA.
C. Each administrator must be assigned a privilege level.
D. A public IP address must be assigned to each user for telnet access

Answer: A,B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 2

Which of the following authentication methods are supported for Telnet users? (Choose three)

A. Password authentication
B. AAA local authentication
C. MD5 authentication
D. No authentication

Answer: A,B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 3

Which authentication modes does AAA support? (Choose three).

A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X

Answer: A,B,C Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 2

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 4

[RTA]aaa

[RTA-aaa]domain huawei

[RTA-aaa-domain-huawei]authentication-scheme au1 [RTA-aaa-domain-huawei]authentication-scheme au2

Refer to the configuration output. RTA has been configured using AAA as shown, and associated with the “huawei” domain. For users in
the huawei domain, which authentication-scheme will be used

A. au1
B. au2
C. au1 will be used. When au1 is deleted, users will use au2
D. au2 will be used. When au2 is deleted, users will use au1
Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 5

A user accesses a server supporting AAA, for which the authorization mode on the AAA server has been configured using the command
“authorization-mode hwtacacs if-authenticated”. Which of the following statements regarding this command are true? (Choose three).

A. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authenticated using local authentication.
B. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will be authenticated using remote authentication.
C. If the hwtacacs server fails to respond, the user will bypass authentication.
D. The hwtacacs server will authorize the user.

Answer: A,B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 6

Which of the following descriptions regarding eSight is not correct?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 3

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. eSight is used to monitor and manage enterprise networks.
B. eSight supports only Huawei devices
C. eSight supports WLAN management and monitoring of hotspot coverage.
D. eSight supports the backup of configuration files and network traffic analysis.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 7

What of the following statements is correct regarding access control list types and ranges?

A. A basic ACL value ranges from 1000-2999

B. An advanced ACL value ranges from 3000-4000
C. A layer 2 ACL value ranges from 4000-4999
D. An interface ACL value ranges 1000-2000

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 8

Which of the following parameters is not used by Advanced ACL?

A. Source interface
B. Destination port number
C. Protocol number
D. Time-range

Answer: A Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 9

[RTA]acl 2001

[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule permit source 10.0.1.0 0.0.0.255

[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 10.0.1.0 0.0.0.255

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 4

Huawei H12-211 Exam Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements regarding ACL 2001 is
correct?

A. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be denied.

B. Packets from network 10.0.1.0/24 network will be permitted.
C. Packets destined for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets destined for network 10.0.1.0/24 will be permitted.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 10

[RTA]acl 2002

[RTA-acl-basic-2002]rule permit source 20.1.1.1 0

[RTA-acl-basic-2002]rule permit source 30.1.1.1 0

Refer to the configuration output. A network administrator configured the ACL on router RTA, as shown. Which of the following
statements regarding the rule order are correct? (Choose two).

A. The rule-number of the first rule is 1

B. The rule-number of the first rule is 5
C. The rule-number of the second rule is 2
D. The rule-number of the second rule is 10

Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 11

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator has configured ACL 2000 to filter packets on RTA, as shown.

Which of following statements regarding the subsequent behavior are correct? (Choose two).

A. RTA will forward packets received from Host A.

B. RTA will drop packets received from Host A.
C. RTA will forward packets received from Host B.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 5

Huawei H12-211 Exam

D. RTA will drop packets received from Host B.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 12

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator wishes to deny Host A access to the HTTP server but allow access to all other servers.
Which of the following ACL rules will achieve this?

A. Rule deny tcp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 21

B. Rule deny tcp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 80
C. Rule deny udp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 21
D. Rule deny udp source 10.1.1.1 0 destination 202.100.1.12 0.0.0.0 destination-port eq 80

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 13

Following a failure of services in the network, an administrator discovered that the configuration in one of the enterprise routers had been
changed. What actions can be taken by the administrator to prevent further changes? (Choose three)

A. The administrator should limit access by setting the login privilege of users to 0.
B. The administrator should configure AAA to manage user authorization on the router.
C. The administrator should configure an ACL to allow only the administrator to manage the router.
D. The administrator should configure port-security on the router

Answer: A,B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 14

[RTA]acl 2001

[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 20 permit source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 6

Huawei H12-211 Exam [RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule 10 deny source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements is correct regarding the configuration of the ACL on RTA?

A. Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be denied.

B. Packets from network 20.1.1.0/24 network will be permitted.
C. Packets destined for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be denied.
D. Packets destined for network 20.1.1.0/24 will be permitted.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 15

[RTA]acl 2001

[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 172.16.1.1 0.0.0.0

[RTA-acl-basic-2001]rule deny source 172.16.0.0 0.255.0.0

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are correct regarding the configuration of the ACL on RTA? (Choose
two).

A. Packets from network 172.16.1.1/32 will be denied.

B. Packets from network 172.16.1.0/24 will be denied
C. Packets from network 172.17.1.0/24 will be denied
D. Packets from network 172.18.0.0/16 will be denied.

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 16

The network administrator wants to improve the performance of network transmission, what steps can the administrator take? (Choose
two)

A. Change the work mode to full duplex of each end station.

B. Link the end stations together using a switch.
C. Change the work mode to half duplex of each end station.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 7

Huawei H12-211 Exam

D. Link the end stations together using a hub.

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 17

On Huawei switch, which of the following commands can be used to set port duplex mode as "auto negotiation"? (Choose two)

A. duplex negotiation auto

B. duplex auto-negotiation
C. duplex auto
D. undo duplex

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 18

The network administrator wishes to transmit data between two end stations. The network interface cards of both devices operates at
100Mbps however one supports half duplex while the other uses full duplex mode.

What will occur as a result?

A. The end stations cannot communicate.

B. The end stations can communicate, but data may be lost during transmission of large amounts of traffic.
C. The end stations will operate normally
D. The end stations can communicate, but speed is different during transmission of large amounts of traffic.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 19

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 8

Huawei H12-211 Exam An Ethernet port can work one of three duplex modes, whereas an Optical Ethernet port only
supports one single mode. Which of the following represents this mode?

A. Full-duplex
B. Half-duplex
C. Auto-negotiation
D. Simplex

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 20

While inspecting packets in the network, a network administrator discovers a frame with the destination MAC address of 01-00-5E-A0-
B1-C3. What can the administrator determine from this?

A. The MAC address is a unicast address.

B. The MAC address is a broadcast address
C. The MAC address is a multicast address.
D. The MAC address is incorrect

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 21

According to OSI reference model, which layer is responsible for end to end error checking and flow control?

A. Physical layer
B. Data link layer
C. Network layer
D. Transport layer

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 22

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 9

Huawei H12-211 Exam Which of the following mechanisms are used for flow control? (Choose three)

A. Acknowledgement
B. Buffering
C. Source quench messages
D. Windowing

Answer: B,C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 23

Source Destination Protocol Info

10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [SYN] Seq=0 Win=8192 Len=0 MSS=1460

10.0.12.2 10.0.12.1 TCP telnet> 50190 [SYN, ACK] Seq=0 Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=0 MSS=1460

10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [ACK] Seq=1 Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=0

Refer to the capture output.The administrator has captured three packets in the network. Which statement regarding the capured packets is
incorrect?

A. This packets represent a TCP three-way handshake process.

B. 10.0.12.1 is the telnet server, while 10.0.12.2 is the telnet client.
C. The three packets contain no application data.
D. 10.0.12.1 uses port 50190 to buid the telnet connection.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 24

An Ethernet frame is captured by network protocol analyzer tool and the value of Type/Length field is 0x0800. Which of the following
statements about the frame are correct? (Choose two)

A. The frame structure of the frame is Ethernet_II

B. The frame structure of the frame is 802.3
C. Its upper layer protocol is IP
D. Its upper layer protocol is IPX

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 10

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 25

Which of the following descriptions regarding the TTL field of the IP packet is correct?

A. The TTL defines how many packets the source can send.
B. The TTL defines the duration during which the source can send packets.
C. The TTL value will decrement by 1 each time the packet is routed.
D. The TTL value will increment by 1 each time the packet is routed.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 26

Which of the following statements are correct about TTL field in IP packet? (Choose two)

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">

A. The maximum value of TTL is 65535

B. Normally, it's impossible for a router to receive a packet whose TTL is zero.
C. The main purpose of TTL is to prevent IP packets from circulating endlessly in a network which canconsume a lot of bandwidth
D. TTL value will be decremented as a packet is passed through the network devices such as hub, LAN switchand router.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 11

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 27

In the case of Huawei router, what is the "-i" parameter in a Ping command issued on a VRP operating system used to set?

A. Interface for sending an Echo Request packet

B. Source IP address for sending an Echo Request packet
C. Interface for receiving an Echo Reply packet
D. Destination IP address for receiving an Echo Reply packet

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 28

To provide the information about the IP addresses that a user packet traverses along the path to the destination, which of the following
does Tracert record in each expired ICMP TTL packet?

A. Destination port
B. Source port
C. Destination address
D. Source address

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 29

Which of the following statements regarding the verification of IP connectivity are false? (Choose three)

A. The ping 127.0.0.1 command can be used to check whether the network cable is correctly inserted into thehost’s Ethernet port.
B. The ping command with the host IP address as the destination can be used to verify that the TCP/IPprotocol suite is functioning
correctly.
C. The ping command can be used to verify connectivity between the host and the local gateway.
D. The command “ipconfig /release” can be used to check connectivity problems between the host and thelocal gateway.

Answer: A,B,D

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 12

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 30

A network administrator uses the ping command to check for points of failure in the network. Which protocols will be used during this
process? (Choose two)

<choice ident=“A”>

<choice ident=“B”>
<choice ident=“C”>

<choice ident=“D”>

A. ICMP
B. TCP
C. ARP
D. UDP

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 31

A network administrator recently used tracert to trace the path to the destination IP address of an external website, however the trace path
displayed only a timeout result. Which of the following statements correctly explains the reason for this? (Choose two)

A. The source router had shutdown the ICMP function.

B. This destination IP address does not exist.
C. The gateway canot find a route to the destination.
D. This is a normal phenomenon.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 32

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 13

Huawei H12-211 Exam Ping 10.0.0.2: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break
Reply from 10.0.0.2: bytes=800 Sequence=1 ttl=255 time=2 ms Reply from 10.0.0.2: bytes=800 Sequence=2 ttl=255 time=10 ms
--- 10.0.0.2 ping statistics --- 2 packet(s) transmitted
2 packet(s) received

0.00% packet loss

round-trip min/avg/max = 2/6/10 ms

A network administrator uses the ping command to test connectivity to the destination 10.0.0.2 on a Huawei AR series router. Which
statement regarding the output is correct?

A. The network administrator used the command ping -c 2 -s 800 10.0.0.2

B. The network administrator used the command ping -a 2 -v 800 10.0.0.2
C. The path between the source and destination is not OK.
D. The network administrator changed the default TTL value.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 33

Which of the following statements explains the behavior of the ICMP redirect function? (Choose two)

A. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and thesource is on the same
segment as the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router to thesource.
B. When a router receives data on an interface, and the router’s IP address matches the destination IP of thedata, an ICMP redirect
message will be sent by the router to the source.
C. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and thesource is on the same
segment as the next hop, an ICMP Redirect message will be sent by the source tothe router.
D. When a router receives data on the interface via which the same data needs to be forwarded, and thesource is on a different
segment from the next hop, an ICMP redirect message will be sent by the router tothe source

Answer: A,D

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 14

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 34

Host A wishes to send data to host C, and generates an ARP request to obtain the destination MAC address.

Which statement is true?

A. The destination IP address of the ARP request is Host C

B. The destination MAC address of this ARP request is Host C
C. The destination IP address for the ARP request is a broadcast IP address.
D. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of G0/0/0 on RTA.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 35

An ARP request is sent by host A to obtain the destination MAC address of host D. Which statement is true about regarding the ARP
reply?

A. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Switch A.
B. The destination IP address of this packet is the VLANIF1 IP address of Switch A.
C. The destination MAC address of this frame is the MAC address of Host A.
D. The destination IP address of this packet is a broadcast IP address.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 36

Which of the following applications can be used to detect the path along which the data packets are transmitted from the source to the
destination?

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 15

Huawei H12-211 Exam

<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">

A. Route
B. Netstat
C. Tracert
D. Send

Answer: C Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 37

How many probe packets are sent for each TTL value by default when "tracert" is used to detect the path along which packet is sent from
source to destination?

A. 3
B. 4
C. 6
D. 8

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 38

Which of the following types can ICMP packets be classified into? (Choose two)

A. ICMP transport packet

B. ICMP error reporting packet
C. ICMP query packet
D. ICMP application packet

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 39

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 16

Huawei H12-211 Exam On VRP platform, which of the following parameters can be used together with the "ping"
command to specify the source address of an echo request message?

A. A
B. S
C. D
D. N

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 40

A router functioning as a Proxy receives an ARP request packet, but finds that the destination address in the packet is not intended for
itself. In this case, what will the router do? (Choose two)

A. Discard the packet.

B. Check for a route that matches the destination address.
C. Forward its MAC address to the ARP request sender after finding that a route to the destination address isavailable.
D. Broadcast the ARP request packet.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 41
Two end stations in a point-to-point network perform address resolution. Which of the following statements is correct?

A. The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a unicast MAC address.
B. The destination address of an ARP request from each station will be a broadcast IP address.
C. The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a unicast MAC address
D. The destination address of an ARP reply from each station will be a broadcast MAC address.

Answer: C Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 17

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 42

What will the destination MAC address be at the moment a frame is transmitted by the host, when the router is the IP destination?

A. The MAC address of the switch.

B. The MAC address of the router interface G0/0/0.
C. The MAC address of the host.
D. The destination MAC address will be a broadcast MAC address.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 43

Which of the following statements about gratuitous ARP packets are true? (Choose two)

A. A system can determine whether conflicting IP addresses are used by sending a gratuitous ARP packet
B. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP request packet.
C. A gratuitous ARP packet can help to update an IP address.
D. A gratuitous ARP packet uses the same format as an ARP reply packet.

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 44

UDP is connectionless oriented, which of the following must be used in order to ensure reliability?

A. Internet Protocol
B. Application Layer Protocol
C. Network Layer Protocol
D. Transmission Control Protocol

Answer: B Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 18

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 45
The administrator has configured an IP address for Host A and Host B, but had forgotten to configure a default gateway. What effect will
this have on the hosts?

A. Neither host will be affected, and therefore will be able to communicate with the peer.
B. Host A will be unable to connect to the router’s G0/0/0 interface.
C. Hosts will be unable to comminicate unless arp-proxy is enabled on the router.
D. The host will be unable to reach neither the local nor remote network destinations .

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 46

A host has established a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0. Which of the following statements are correct?
(Choose two)

A. The destination address of a frame sent by the host will be the MAC address of the router interface.
B. The destination address of a frame will be the MAC address of the switch interface.
C. The destination port number in a segment header will have a value of 80.
D. The destination IP address of a packet will be the IP address of the network interface of the router.

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 47

The administrator uses the ping command on the host to test connectivity to the website www.huawei.com.

The command line shows a request time out. The administrator displays the ARP entries for the host.

Which entry will be found in the ARP cache table of the host?

A. The MAC address of the destination www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
B. The MAC address of the switch will exist in the ARP cache.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 19

Huawei H12-211 Exam

C. The IP address of the destination www.huawei.com will exist in the ARP cache.
D. The MAC address of router interface G0/0/0, will exist in the ARP cache.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 48

When R2 forwards data to R3 from R1, which of the following items will change? (Choose two)

A. The source MAC address

B. The destination MAC address
C. The source IP address
D. The destination IP address

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 49
If Host B also configured the IP address as “192.168.1.1/24”, an IP address confict will occur. What will happen as a result?

A. Host B will send an ICMP request to the destination with the configured IP address. If a reply is received,the host will notify of
an address conflict.
B. Host A will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destination 192.168.1.1, forwhich Host B will
reply.
C. Host B will send a gratuitous ARP request to resolve the MAC address of the destination 192.168.1.1, forwhich Host A will
reply.
D. Host A will ignore any received ARP request intended for destination 192.168.1.1.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 50

<Quidway>display mac-address

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 20

Huawei H12-211 Exam MAC Address VLAN/VSI Learned-From Type

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

5489-98ec-f018 1/- GE0/0/13 dynamic

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total items displayed = 1

Refer to the graphic. A switch attempts to forward a frame to the MAC destination 5489-98ec-f01. What operation will occur on the
switch?

A. The switch will send a request to obtain the MAC address of 5489-98ec-f011.
B. The switch will report that the destination is unreachable and report this to the source.
C. The switch will flood the frame via all ports, with exception of the port on which the frame was received.
D. The switch will drop the frame because it does not have an entry in its MAC address table.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 51

Host A has been connected to switch A and configured with an IP address. When Host A initially forwards a frame, what action will be
taken by Switch A?

A. Switch A will drop this frame.

B. Switch A will attempt to flood the frame to all ports except for the G0/0/1 interface.
C. Switch A will forward the frame via ports G0/0/1, G0/0/2 and G0/0/3.
D. Switch will receive this frame before returning the frame to G0/0/1.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 52

Which of the following statements describes the network shown? (Choose two)

A. There are 6 collision domains in the network.

B. There are 2 broadcast domains in the network.
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 21

Huawei H12-211 Exam

C. There are 4 collision domains in the network.
D. There are 6 broadcast domains in the network.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 53

A server is linked to port interface G0/0/1 of a switch. The administrator wishes to allow only this server to be linked to this interface on
the switch. Which method can be used to achieve this?

A. Configure a static ARP entry using the server’s IP address and MAC address in the switch.
B. Configure a static MAC address binding entry of the server’s MAC address and the interface in the switch.
C. Configure the default gateway of the switch to be the same as the server’s IP address.
D. It is not possible to enable a single device to be associated with an interface.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 54

An administrator connects two switches together in a local enterprise network. The ports of one switch support Fast Ethernet, while the
ports of the other switch support Gigabit Ethernet. Hosts connected to one switch are able to communicate, however communication
between the two switches fails. What is the possible reason for this?

A. The ports have disabled auto-negotiation.

B. One port is supporting auto-negotiation, while auto-negotiation is disabled on the port of the other switch.
C. The port of one switch is operating using half duplex mode, while the port of the other switch is using fullduplex mode.
D. A Fast Ethernet port cannot communicate directly with a Gigabit Ethernet port.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 55

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 22

Huawei H12-211 Exam A layer 2 LAN switch generates CAM table entries according to the ( ) of the received frame.

A. Source MAC address

B. Destination MAC address
C. Source IP address
D. Destination IP address

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 56

Which of the following statements about collision domains and broadcast domains are correct? (Choose three)

A. Devices connected to the same hub form a collision domain

B. Devices connected to the same hub form a broadcast domain
C. Devices connected to the same bridge form a collision domain
D. Devices connected to the same bridge form a broadcast domain
E. Devices connected to the same router form a broadcast domain

Answer: A,B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 57

Which of the following statements regarding layer-2 switch is incorrect?

A. The switch learns MAC addresses automatically

B. The layer-3 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted
C. The layer-2 header is modified before the received packet is transmitted.
D. The layer-2 LAN switch operates at data link layer

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 58

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 23

Huawei H12-211 Exam [R1]display interface GigabitEthernet0/0/0

GigabitEthernet0/0/0 current state : Administratively DOWN Line protocol current state : DOWN

Refer to the display output. What can be determined based on the output of the display command?

A. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is connected to a wrong cable

B. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with an IP address
C. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 is not associated with a dynamically defined route.
D. Interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 has been manually shut down by an administrator.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 59

Which of the following statements regarding static and dynamic routing is incorrect?

A. The static route can be easily configured and managed on the enterprise network.
B. The use of dynamic routing is more convenient for the administrator to manage the network followingnetwork convergence.
C. The static route can automatically recover when a link failure is encountered.
D. Dynamic routing will use more resources than static routes.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 60

Which of the following are routed protocols? (Choose two)

A. IP
B. OSPF
C. BGP
D. IPX

Answer: A,D
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 24

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 61

Which of the following statements regarding the routing table are correct? (Choose two)

A. The next hop in the routing table is redundant because the outgoing interface can be used for packetforwarding.
B. The routes from generated by different protocols have different preferences.
C. The metrics of different routing protocols are comparable.
D. The metrics of different routing protocols are not comparable

Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 62

Which of the following commands can be used to display the routing table on a Quidway router?

A. display ip path
B. display ip routing-table
C. display interface
D. display current-configuration

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 63

Which of the following entries is not included in the routing table?

A. source address
B. next hop
C. destination address
D. cost

Answer: A Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 25

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 64

Which of the following problems are caused by routing loops? (Choose three)

A. Slow convergence
B. Packets circulate between routers
C. Router restarting
D. Inconsistency of routing information

Answer: A,B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 65

An administrator wishes to manage the router in the remote branch office, which method can be used?

A. Telnet
B. FTP
C. Console Connection
D. DHCP

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 66

The network administrator has configured the router as shown. Which statement is false?

A. The configuration manages the user login through the console interface.
B. The user login through vty 0 has the privilege to run level 2 commands.
C. The user login through telnet has the privilege to run level 2 commands.
D. The configuration manages the telnet user login.

Answer: A Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 26

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 67

The administrator cannot use telnet to manage the AR2200. The administrator is able to verify connectivity to the router and has been
informed that other administrators have no difficulties using telnet. Which statements describe the possible reasons for this problem?
(Choose two)

A. The user’s status has been blocked

B. The user’s priviledge level has been changed to 0.
C. The user has been deleted.
D. The telnet service in the AR2200 router has been disabled.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 68

A user logged into a VRP supported device through telnet, but when attempting to configure the device, found that he is unable to use the
sytem-view command to enter the system-view. What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose two)

A. The device’s VTY interface only provides permission for some telnet users to run the sytem- view command.
B. The user’s telnet software restricts use of this command.
C. The user’s privilege level is lower than the level associated with the system-view command.
D. The system-view command privilege level is lower than the level associated with the user.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 69

The users who log on the router through Telnet are not permitted to configure IP address. What is the possible reason?

A. Communication failures occur between the user and the router.

B. The authentication mode of Telnet is set incorrectly.
C. Privilege level of Telnet is set incorrectly.
D. SNMP parameters are set incorrectly.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 27

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 70

Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two)

A. A single collision domain exists between RTA and SWC.

B. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWB.
C. A single collision domain exists between SWA and SWC.
D. A single broadcast domain exists between SWA and SWC.

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 71

On the interface serial 1/0/1 of RTA, the command “ip address unnumbered interface loopback 0” has been configured. Which following
statements are correct? (Choose two).

A. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/24

B. The IP address of interface serial 1/0/1 is 10.1.1.1/32
C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in RTA’s routing-table
D. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 does not exist in RTA’s routing-table

Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 72

Refer to the graphic. The host has a problem establishing a telnet connection with the router attached to interface G0/0/0. Which of the
following steps can be used to help the administrator identify the problem? (Choose two)

<choice ident=“A”>

<choice ident=“B”>

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 28

Huawei H12-211 Exam

<choice ident=“C”>

<choice ident=“D”>
A. Check whether the host has configured the gateway IP address.
B. Check whether the switch has configured the gateway IP address.
C. Use the ping tool to check connectivity between host and router.
D. Check the telnet server configuration is right on the router.

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 73

Which of the following methods are supported by VRP platform to configure the router? (Choose three)

A. Through the Console port

B. Through Telnet
C. Through the AUX port
D. Through FTP

Answer: A,B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 74

The administrator wishes to update the configuration file of an AR2200 router using a USB cable. How can this be achieved? (Choose
two)

A. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the mini USB port of the AR2200router.
B. The administrator should connect the USB cable between the terminal and the USB port of the AR2200router.
C. The AR2200 router cannot support configuration updates through a USB cable.
D. The administrator should install the mini USB drivers on the terminal after connecting the USB.

Answer: A,D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 29

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 75

The administrator wishes to manage a network through telnet from a user's terminal to a router. How can this be achieved?

A. A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the console port of therouter.
B. A connection should be established between the ethernet port of the terminal and the ethernet port of therouter.
C. A connection should be established between the console port of the terminal and the ethernet port of therouter.use console cable
connect pc’s ethernet port and router’s console port.
D. A connection should be established between the COM port of the terminal and the console port of therouter.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 76

Whilst configuring a device, an administrator experiences trouble remembering certain commands. Which of the following will help
support the administrator? (Choose two)

A. TAB
B. questionmark
C. ctrl+b
D. ctrl+c

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 77

<Huawei> system-view

[Huawei] user-interface console 0

[Huawei-ui-console0] user privilege level 15

[Huawei-ui-console0] authentication-mode password

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 30

Huawei H12-211 Exam [Huawei-ui-console0] set authentication password cipher huawei2012

[Huawei-ui-console0] quit

Refer to the configuration output. The administrator configured the device using the commands in the configuration output. Regarding
these commands, which statement is false?

A. The administrator wishes to enable management through the console interface.

B. Following configuration, the administrator cannot manage the device remotely.
C. A user that logs-in through the console interface is assigned the highest privilege level.
D. The password of a user logged in through console is ‘cipher huawei2012’

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 78

Which of the following is abbreviation of VRP?

A. Versatile Routine Platform

B. Virtual Routing Platform
C. Virtual Routing Plane
D. Versatile Routing Platform

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 79

Which of the following must be used to establish the configuration environment when a router is powered on for the first time?

A. SSL
B. SSH
C. Console port
D. Telnet

Answer: C Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 31

 Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 80

Which of the following parameter settings for terminal emulation are correct when configuring a Huawei router through the Console port?

A. 4800bps, 8 data bits,1 stop bits, odd parity check, and no flow control
B. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control
C. 9600bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, even parity check, and hardware flow control
D. 19200bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bits, no parity check, and no flow control

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 81

Which of the following commands is used to enter the system-view from the user view on a Huawei router?

A. system-view
B. enable
C. configure terminal
D. interface system

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 82

On VRP platform, the command lines are classified into four levels in increasing priority: Visit level, Monitoring level, Configuration
level, and Management level. At which level, the operator is permitted to configure service but is not permitted to operate the file system?

A. Visit level
B. Monitoring level
C. Configuration level
D. Management level

Answer: C

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 32

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 83

On Huawei VRP platform, which of the following can be used to invoke the history command saved by the command line interface?
(Choose two)

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">

A. Up cursor key < >

B. Left cursor key < >
C. Ctrl+P
D. Ctrl+U

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 84

Which of the following commands can be used to view the current configurations on a Huawei router?

A. display current-configuration
B. display saved-configuration
C. view saved-configuration
D. show startup-configuration

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 85

The administrator wishes to change name of the router. Under which view should the administrator

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 33

Huawei H12-211 Exam be in order to achieve this?

A. User-view
B. System-view
C. Interface-view
D. Protocol-view

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 86

<Huawei> system-view

[Huawei]command-privilege level 3 view user save

Refer to the command output. What is the result of the shown command?

A. The command adjusts the save command of a user to privilege level 3.

B. The command adjusts the save command in the user view to privilege level 3.
C. The command adjusts the user view command privilege level to 3, and saves the configuration.
D. The command adjusts the privilege level of a user to 3, and saves the configuration.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 87

<Huawei>system-view

[Huawei]history-command max-size 20

Refer to the command output. Which statements regarding the shown command are true? (Choose two)
A. The command is used to adjust the size of the history command buffer
B. The default value of the history command buffer is 5.
C. The command should be configured in the user-interface view.
D. Once configured, commands totalling up to 20 bytes can be saved in the buffer.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 34

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 88

An AR2200 router is required to be reconfigured from scratch. Which steps are needed to achieve this? (Choose two)

A. Reset the saved configuration

B. Clear the current configuration
C. Reboot the AR2200.
D. Assign the configuration file to be used at next startup.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 89

An adminstrator has been requested to replace the configuration file of a router in the network. The administrator has been instructed that
after logging into the router, he must first permenantly erase the current configuration file config.zip from the system. Which command
should he use to achieve this?

A. delete /force config.zip

B. delete /unreserved config.zip
C. reset config.zip
D. clear config.zip

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 90

Which of the following commands can switch a view from the system view to the user view?

A. System-view
B. Router
C. Quit

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 35

Huawei H12-211 Exam

D. User-view

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 91

Which of the following storage devices are supported by Huawei router? (Select 4 Answers)
A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. Hard Disk
E. CF Card

Answer: A,B,C,E Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 92

Which of the following storage devices is used to store the startup configuration files in a router?

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">

A. SDRAM
B. NVRAM
C. Flash
D. BootROM

Answer: B Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 36

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 93

<Huawei>reset saved-configuration

Warning: The action will delete the saved configuration in the device. The configuration will be erased to reconfigure. Continue? [Y/N]:

Refer to the configuration output. Which of the following statements are true? (Select two answers)

A. A user should enter ‘Y’ when wishing to clear the saved configuration file.
B. The saved-configuration file that the device starts with can be erased.
C. The saved-configuration will be deleted after typing N
D. The saved-configuration file will be replaced with the current-configuration.

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 94

When a router is powered on, the router reads the configuration file saved in the default save directory to get itself initialized. If the
configuration file does not exist in the default save directory, what does the router use to initialize itself?

A. New configuration file

B. Initial configuration file
C. Default parameters
D. Current configuration file

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 95

<Huawei>display startup MainBoard:

Startup system software: sd1:/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc Next startup system software: sd1:/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 37

Huawei H12-211 Exam Backup system software for next startup: null
Startup saved-configuration file: null Next startup saved-configuration file: null Startup license file: null
Next startup license file: null Startup patch package: null Next startup patch package: null Startup voice-files: null
Next startup voice-files: null

Refer to the display output. Which statement is false?

A. The current configuration file has not been saved.

B. The current startup system software is ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
C. The next startup system software cannot be changed.
D. The next startup system software can be changed by using the “startup system software
<startup-softwarename>.cc” command.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 96

<Huawei>

Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you perform configurations when Auto-Config is
running, the DHCP, routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost. Do you want to stop Auto-Config? [y/n]:

When an administrator first initializes the router, a warning is displayed. Which statement regarding this warning is correct?

A. If Auto-Config is required, the administrator should select ‘y’

B. If Auto-Config is not required, the administrator should select ‘n’, for which subsequent configuration of the
DHCP server, routing, DNS server and VTY user configuration is lost
C. When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is active.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 38

Huawei H12-211 Exam

D. When a device is started for the first time, the Auto-Config function is inactive.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 97

An AR2200 router in the company network cannot boot. In order to resolve this, the administrator wishes to update the VRP software.
What should he/she do?

A. The administrator should use a console cable to connect the router and host, and directly upgrade thedevice.
B. The administrator should use FTP to transfer the VRP software, by configuring the AR2200 router as anFTP client.
C. The administrator should use DHCP to boot the AR2200, and then use the AR2200 router as a TFTP clientto download the
VRP software from the server.
D. The administrator should use the telnet command on the client to remote access the device, and upgradethe VRP software.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 98

<Huawei>

Warning: Auto-Config is working. Before configuring the device, stop Auto-Config. If you perform configurations when Auto-Config is
running, the DHCP, routing, DNS, and VTY configurations will be lost. Do you want to stop Auto-Config? [y/n]:

Refer to the output. When the administrator first starts the router, a system notice is displayed, however after rebooting this router, the
notice disappeared. What is the reason for this? (Choose two)

A. This notice only appears during the very first device startup.
B. The administrator has configured the device and saved the configuration, causing the notice to disappear.
C. The administrator selected ‘n’ and did not save the configuration
D. The administrator selected ‘y’ and saved the configuration.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 39

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 99

An end system is unable to communicate with a DHCP server following the startup process. Which IP address may be used by the client?

A. 0.0.0.0
B. 127.0.0.1
C. 169.254.2.33
D. 255.255.255.255

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 100

[Huawei]ip pool pool1

Info: It's successful to create an IP address pool.

[Huawei-ip-pool-pool1]network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0

[Huawei-ip-pool-pool1]gateway-list 10.10.10.1

Refer to the configuration output. The administrator wishes to configure the DHCP server pool in order to assign an IP address to the
customer’s terminal device.

Which command should be included in the configuration to provide the minimal lease period for IP addresses?

A. dhcp select relay

B. lease day 1
C. lease 24
D. lease 0

Answer: B Explanation:
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 40

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 101

A DHCP server has been established in the enterprise network. After the client has obtained an IP address from the DHCP server, the user
decided to modify the IP address manually. In what way may this affect the enterprise network? (Choose two).

A. The client may experience an IP address conflict.

B. The client may access the network normally.
C. The client’s interface connection will shutdown.
D. The client will associate with another DHCP server.

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 102

Refer to the graphic. Two switches have been connected as shown and both support STP. The administrator has configured switch A as a
DHCP server and set interface VLANIF1 of switch B to obtain an IP address from switch A. A link failure occurs on port interface G0/0/1
of switch B. What action will occur as a result?

A. The two switches will be unable to communicate.

B. Switch B will send a DHCP Discovery message to obtain a new IP address.
C. Swich B will continue to use the IP address obtained from Switch A
D. Switch B will send a DHCP Release message to release the IP address.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 103

A DHCP server in the enterprise network is being used to allocated IP addresses to hosts. An administrator discovers however that some
hosts are obtaining IP addresses outside of the scope of the DHCP server’s address pool. What are the possible reasons for this? (Choose
three).

A. Another DHCP server exists in the network and is allocating IP addresses to hosts that happen to be withina closer proximity
than the authorized DHCP server
B. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 41

Huawei H12-211 Exam in the

169.254.0.0 address range.
C. The hosts were unable to discover a DHCP server and therefore generated their own address in the
127.254.0.0 address range.
D. All addresses from the DHCP pool have been assigned

Answer: A,B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 104

Router] ip pool pool1

[Router-ip-pool-pool1] network 10.10.10.0 mask 255.255.255.0

[Router-ip-pool-pool1] gateway-list 10.10.10.1 [Router-ip-pool-pool1] quit

[Router] ip pool pool2

[Router-ip-pool-pool2] network 10.20.20.0 mask 255.255.255.0

[Router-ip-pool-pool2] gateway-list 10.20.20.1 [Router-ip-pool-pool2] quit

[Router] interface GigabitEthernet 0/0/1

[Router-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] ip address 10.10.10.1 24 [Router-GigabitEthernet0/0/1] dhcp select global

Refer to the configuration output. Following configuration, a host is connected to the interface Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/1 of the router. Which
IP address will the client obtain?

<choice ident=“A”>

<choice ident=“B”>

<choice ident=“C”>

<choice ident=“D”>

A. An IP address from network 10.10.10.0/24 will be assigned.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 42

Huawei H12-211 Exam

B. An IP address from network 10.20.20.0/24 will be assigned.
C. The host will be unable to obtain an IP address.
D. An IP address may be assigned from either 10.10.10.0/24 or 10.20.20.0/24.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 105

The IP addresses of clients in the network are deployed via a DHCP server. When a host reboots, which message will the host first send to
the DHCP server?

A. DHCP DISCOVER
B. DHCP REQUEST
C. DHCP OFFER
D. DHCP ACK

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 106

A DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) in DHCPv6 can be configured in VRP using which formats? (Choose two).

A. DUID-LL
B. DUID-LLT
C. DUID-EN
D. DUID-LLC

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 107

Which of the following statements about the information contained in a Database Description packet are true? (Choose three)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 43

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. A Database Description packet contains all information about each LSA.
B. A Database Description packet contains only the header of an LSA.
C. The header of an LSA is the unique identifier of the LSA.
D. The header of an LSA is only a small portion of all the data of the LSA.

Answer: B,C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 108

What is the default authentication mode for the default_admin domain?

A. None
B. Local
C. Radius
D. 802.1X

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 109

How many domains can be configured on a Huawei router?

A. 30
B. 31
C. 32
D. 33

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 110

An authenticator router has been configured with two domains named “Area1” and “Area2”, following which a user is created with the
username “huawei” and the password ”hello” for authentication. Which domain does this user belongs to?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 44

Huawei H12-211 Exam

<choice ident=“A”>

<choice ident=“B”>

<choice ident=“C”>

<choice ident=“D”>
A. Area1 domain
B. Area2 domain
C. default domain
D. default_admin domain

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 111

In order to check if the interface serial 1/0/0 is working in either DCE or DTE mode, command ( ) is used.

A. display mode serial 1/0/0

B. display controller
C. display interface serial 1/0/0
D. display current-config

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 112

How is mapping performed on a DTE device in a Frame Relay network?

A. The local DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

B. The local IP address is mapped to a remote DLCI number.
C. The local DLCI number is mapped to a local IP address.
D. The remote DLCI number is mapped to a remote IP address.

Answer: A Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 45

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 113

If Frame Relay implements dynamic address mapping for the PVC, which protocol will be used?

A. LMI protocol.
B. ARP protocol.
C. RARP protocol.
D. InARP protocol

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 114

Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements correctly describe the Frame Relay devices? (Choose two)

A. RTA is a DTE device.

B. FRA is a DTE device.
C. FRB is a DCE device.
D. The interface on RTA is a DCE interface
Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 115

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are connected over a Frame Relay network using a DLCI, as shown. Static mapping is required on
RTA. Which of the following commands will achieve this?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.1.1 30

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.1.1 31
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.2.1 30
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr map ip 172.16.2.1 31

Answer: C Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 46

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 116

Refer to the graphic. RTA is a DTE device connected to a Frame Relay switch, and uses dynamic address mapping to establish the PVC.
With regards to the configuration, which of the following commands are not necessary? (Choose two).

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]ip address 172.16.1.1 24

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]link-protocol FR
C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr interface-type dte
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]fr inarp

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 117

Which command should be used to check the mapping between protocol addresses and frame relay addresses?

A. display fr interface
B. display fr map-info
C. display fr inarp-info
D. display interface brief

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 118

Which of the following protocols is used in Frame Relay to map the address to DLCI dynamically?

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 47

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. ARP protocol
B. RARP protocol
C. InARP protocol
D. Map protocol

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 119

Which of the following parameters must be specified when configuring static mapping for Frame Relay network? (Choose two)

A. Local DLCI
B. Remote DLCI
C. Local network layer protocol address
D. Remote network layer protocol address

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 120

Which of the following regarding Frame Relay DLCI are correct? (Choose three)

A. DLCI is locally significant

B. DLCI is allocated by DTE
C. The range of DLCI value that can be used is from 16-1007
D. The same DLCI can be configured on different physical interfaces

Answer: A,C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 121

Which of the following commands is used to enable dynamic address mapping protocol in the interface encapsulated with Frame Relay?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 48

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. fr inarp
B. fr reverse-arp
C. inverse-arp
D. reverse-arp

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 122

What is the meaning of 200 in the command "fr map ip 10.1.1.2 200"?

A. remote logical channel ID

B. local DLCI
C. remote interface ID
D. remote node ID

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 123

Refer to the graphic.RTA and RTB connect to a Frame Relay switch and use dynamic address mapping. The command “fr map ip 10.0.1.1
32” is then configured on RTB, without using the undo inarp command. What will occur as a result? (Choose two).

A. RTB will be unable to communicate with RTA

B. 10.0.1.1 will still be mapped to DLCI 31 on RTB
C. 10.0.1.1 will still be mapped to DLCI 32 on RTB
D. DLCI 32 will be activated on RTB

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 124

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are connected to the same Frame Relay switch and use same DLCI number, which following is
correct? (Choose two).

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 49

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. RTA and RTB must be associated with the same PVC
B. RTA and RTB can be associated with different PVC’s
C. The DLCI on the different physical interfaces can be the same
D. The DLCI on the different physical interfaces cannot be the same

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 125

Which of the following commands can be used to display mapping relationship between network address and DLCI?

A. display fr interface
B. display fr
C. display fr map-info
D. display fr brief

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 126

Which of following may be the reasons that cause Frame Relay PVC to work abnormally? (Choose three)

A. Same DLCI number is configured on the same router

B. LMI type mismatch
C. Frame Relay encapsulation type mismatch
D. Incorrect configuration of the DLCI number

Answer: B,C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 127

An administrator wishes to update the VRP software of company’s AR2200 router. How can this be achieved? (Choose three)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 50

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the FTP client.
B. The administrator can use FTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the FTP server.
C. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP server.
D. The administrator can use TFTP to transfer the VRP software, with the AR2200 router as the TFTP client.

Answer: A,B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 128

An administrator wishes to implement new features in the network, but the VRP version of one AR2200 router is out of date. The
administrator needs to upgrade the VRP software. Which of the following options regarding file transfer is false?

A. The AR2200 router can function as a TFTP client to support the upgrade.
B. The AR2200 router can function as the TFTP server to support the upgrade.
C. The AR2200 router can function as the FTP server to support the upgrade.
D. The AR2200 router can function as an FTP client to support the upgrade.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 129

FTP and TFTP can be used to update the system file on Huawei routers. Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose three)

<choice ident="A">

<choice ident="B">

<choice ident="C">

<choice ident="D">

A. Huawei router can be configured as FTP Client

B. Huawei router can be configured as FTP Server

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 51

Huawei H12-211 Exam

C. Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Client
D. Huawei router can be configured as TFTP Server

Answer: A,B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 130

An administrator discovered he/she was unable to use TFTP to transfer files to the router. Which of the following describes the likely
reason for this?
A. The TFTP service had been disabled on the router.
B. TCP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
C. UDP port 69 of the server had been blocked.
D. The username and password had been modified.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 131

FTP may be used to upgrade a router's VRP image. Which of the following transmission modes should be used to achieve this?

A. binary mode
B. ASCII mode
C. byte mode
D. letter mode

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 132

A client failed to transfer a file to the FTP server, but found the IP connectivity was without problem. The client assumed that the problem
was with the port configuration. The blocking of which ports would likely cause this problem? (Choose two)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 52

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. 21
B. 80
C. 20
D. 50649

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 133

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB have established a GRE tunnel, but only RTA has enabled the keepalive function. When RTB receive
a keepalive message from RTA, how will RTB respond?

A. RTB will discard the keepalive message.

B. RTB willl record receipt of the keepalive message but won’t reply
C. RTB will send a keepalive in response.
D. RTB will send a keepalive reply and begin to actively send keepalive messages.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 134

Refer to the graphic. Two hosts communicate through a GRE tunnel. When the GRE tunnel is up, the network administrator configures a
static route on RTA to route packets to Host B. Which of the following commands will achieve this?

A. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 GigabitEthernet0/0/1

B. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 200.2.2.1
C. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 200.1.1.1
D. ip route-static 10.1.2.0 24 tunnel 0/0/1
Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 135

When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the data link layer encapsulation type of a serial interface as
HDLC?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 53

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. encapsulation hdlc
B. link-protocol hdlc
C. hdlc enable
D. link-protocol ppp

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 136

Refer to the graphic. Packet encapsulation in the IPsec architecture is performed as shown. Which IPsec mode is being used to encapsulate
the packet?

A. normal mode
B. transport mode
C. tunnel mode
D. this encapsulation is wrong

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 137

Refer to the graphic. IPsec VPN uses ESP to encrypt which fields?

A. TCP, Data and ESP Trailer

B. ESP, TCP and Data
C. ESP, TCP, Data and ESP Trailer
D. ESP, TCP, Data, ESP Trailer and ESP Auth

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 138

Refer to the graphic. In order to improve security, the two hosts use IPsec VPN to transmit data. Which IPsec mode and protocol can be
used to hide the host’s IP address? (Choose two).

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 54

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. AH
B. transport mode
C. tunnel mode
D. ESP

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 139

If AH and ESP are both required to protect data streams between IPsec peers, how many Security Associations (SA) are required in total?

A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 140

Refer to the graphic. The data is transmitted using IPsec tunnel mode. The fields of which headers will be authenticated?

A. TCP and Data

B. Origin IP, TCP and Data
C. AH, Origin IP, TCP and Data
D. The fields of all headers

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 141

Two routers establish an IPsec tunnel, which of the following does not need to be the same on both peering devices?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 55

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. Encapsulation mode
B. Transform mode
C. Proposal name
D. authentication algorithm

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 142

Which of the following formats represent an accurate condensing of the IPv6 address 2031:0000:720C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:130B?
(Choose two).

A. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E0:839A:130B B. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B C. 2031::720C::9E0:839A:130B

D. 2031:0:720C::9E0:839A:130B

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 143

Which of the following IPv6 addresses can be configured on a router’s interface? (Choose two).
A. fe80:13dc::1/64
B. ff00:8a3c::9b/64
C. ::1/128
D. 2001:12e3:1b02::21/64

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 144

The IPv6 address achitecture does not include which of the following address types?

A. unicast

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 56

Huawei H12-211 Exam

B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 145

Which of the following descriptions regarding IPv6 addresses are correct? (Choose two)

A. IPv6 addresses are 64 bits in length.

B. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits in length.
C. IPv6 extension headers are processed in order.
D. IPv6 extension headers are processed randomly.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 146

Interface G0/0/1 on RTA contains a MAC address of 00e0-fc03-aa73 and is configured with the IPv6 address
2001::2E0:FCFF:FE03:AA73. Which method is most likely to have been used to configure the interface IPv6 address?

A. DHCPv6
B. Auto-link
C. ARP
D. EUI-64

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 147

In a small network suppporting IPv6, a network administrator wishes implement RIPng. Which of the following commands should be used
to enable this protocol?
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 57

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. [RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]ripng 1 enable
B. [RTA]ripng 1 enable
C. <RTA>ripng 1 enable
D. [RTA-ripng-1]ripng 1 enable

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 148

In a network supporting IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentication
D. multicast updates

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 149

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB have established an IPv6 network for which an IPv6 address has been configured only on the G0/0/1
interface. RTA is unable to ping RTB. The administrator then configures v3 along with a router-id on both routers, and enables OSPFv3
on G0/0/1 of both RTA and RTB. Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two).

A. RTA and RTB can establish an OSPFv3 neighbor relationship.

B. RTA and RTB cannot establish an OSPFv3 neighbor relationship.
C. RTA can ping RTB.
D. RTA cannot ping RTB.

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 150

The network administrator has decided to configure link aggregation in the enterprise network. Which of the following represent
advantages of link aggregation? (Choose three)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 58

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. Load balancing.
B. Improved bandwidth.
C. Enhanced reliability.
D. Improved security.

Answer: A,B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 151

In port aggregation, “multiple” ports are aggregated to form a port aggregation group so that all the member ports in the group share the
outgoing/incoming load. At which layer is port aggregation implemented?
A. Physical Layer
B. Data Link Layer
C. Network Layer
D. Transport Layer

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 152

What benefits does port aggregation yield? (Choose three)

A. Improves link bandwidth

B. Implements load sharing
C. Improves network reliability
D. Facilitates data copy for analysis

Answer: A,B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 153

Refer to the graphic. The network administrator wishes to aggregate the two links as member interfaces of Ethtrunk

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 59

Huawei H12-211 Exam Which statement is correct?

A. The interfaces will be aggregated with load balancing.

B. The interfaces will be aggregated, but only interface GE0/0/1 will send data flow.
C. The interfaces will be aggregated, but the Eth-trunk will not be active.
D. The interfaces cannot be aggregated.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 154

What is the maximum number of member interfaces supported by a single Eth-Trunk?

A. 6.
B. 8.
C. 10
D. 12.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 155

The Eth-Trunk frame forwarding mechanism used to prevent changes in the data sequence forwards frames based on which of the
following parameters?

A. The same source or destination IP address

B. The same source or destination MAC address.
C. The same protocol type.
D. The same source or destination port number.
Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 156

In Layer 2 mode, the transmission rate of an Eth-Trunk interface is determined by which of the

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 60

Huawei H12-211 Exam following?

A. Maximum number of Up member links

B. Minimum number of Up member links
C. Number of Up member interfaces
D. Number of interfaces.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 157

The network administrator wishes to forward data over an Eth-trunk, however associated member interfaces operate at different rates. In
terms of the resulting behavior, which of the following is true?

A. The two switches will not be able to communicate.

B. The higher rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.
C. The Eth-Trunk will work normally.
D. The lower rate member interfaces may incur packet loss.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 158

The network administrator attempts to add interface G0/0/1 on Switch A to Eth-trunk 1, however the command fails. Which of the
following may cause this?

A. The interface is operating in half-duplex mode.

B. The interface has been shutdown.
C. The interface is already associated with another Eth-trunk.
D. The interface is an access port.

Answer: C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 159

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 61

Huawei H12-211 Exam A network requires a solution to allow 50 private IP addresses to be translated, however only a
single public address is available for use. Which translation method can be used to support this requirement?

A. Static NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT

Answer: C Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 160

NAPT allows for multiple internal addresses to be mapped to a single public address. How does NAT distinguish between the different
private addresses when mapping to the same public address?

A. The source MAC address is used.

B. The destination MAC address is used.
C. The source port number is used.
D. The destination port number is used.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 161

Refer to the graphic. Host A is located in a private network. It is required that Host A not only be capable of routing traffic over the public
network, but also that public users are able to actively communicate with Host A.

Which NAT translation method should be configured on the gateway?

A. Static NAT
B. Dynamic NAT
C. Easy-IP
D. NAPT

Answer: A

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 62

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 162

Refer to the graphic. In the private network, RTA dynamically assigns a public address from the address pool to hosts without port
translation. Host C wishes to access the public network while pool addresses are assigned to Host A and Host B. What will occur as a
result?

A. The first public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host A will be forced offline.
B. The last public address will be allocated to Host C, and Host B will be forced offline.
C. Host C will be unable to forward traffic over the public network.
D. All hosts will have access to the public network through pool address swapping.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 163

A web server in a private network is required to provide HTTP services to public users. The network administrator is required to configure
NAT on RTA. Which configuration should be used?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
B. [RTA-Serial0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080
C. [RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
D. [RTA- Gigabitethernet0/0/1]nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1 www inside 202.10.10.1 8080

Answer: A Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 164

The network administrator needs to configure static NAT on RTA, in order to allow Host A to communicate with Host C. Which
command is correct?

A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat outbound 200.1.1.10

B. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.0

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 63

Huawei H12-211 Exam

C. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 192.168.1.1 inside 200.1.1.10
D. [RTA-Serial1/0/1]nat static global 200.1.1.10 inside 192.168.1.1

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 165

[RTA-GigabitEthernet0/0/0]nat outbound 2000 address-group 1

Refer to the configuration output. What does the value “2000” refer to?

A. It represents the ACL number.

B. It represents the NAT number.
C. It represents the translated port number.
D. It represents the number of bytes that can be translated before the address is returned to the public addresspool.

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 166

NAPT uses the same public address but different port numbers to translate private addresses. Which statement regarding the port number
is correct?

A. It is necessary to configure port number mapping manually.

B. It is only necessary to configure the port number range.
C. It is not necessary to configure port numbers.
D. An access control list is needed to assign port numbers.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 167

A configured internal host of a private network wishes to access the internet. What must be configured on the enterprise network’s edge
router in order to achieve this? (Choose two)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 64

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. NAT EasyIP
B. DHCP
C. BGP
D. Default route

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 168

Which of the following statements are correct about NAT? (Choose three)

A. NAT is the abbreviation for "Network Address Translation"

B. NAT is used for translation between private and public network addresss.
C. When hosts inside a private network access the outside network, NAT is not required.
D. NAT provides an effective way to solve the problem of insufficient IP addresses.

Answer: A,B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 169

Which of the following technologies can allow a host with IP address 10.0.0.1 to access the internet?

A. Static route
B. Dynamic route
C. Route import
D. NAT

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 170

Which of the following items can be translated by NAPT?

A. MAC address + port number

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 65

Huawei H12-211 Exam

B. IP address + port number
C. Only MAC address
D. Only IP address

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 171

Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multicast mode are true? (Choose three)

A. The port receives only RIPv2 multicast packets.

B. The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
D. The port receives only RIPv1 multicast packets.

Answer: A,B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 172

Which of the following statements regarding the router ID in OSPF are incorrect? (Choose three)

A. The router IDs of OSPF routers in the same area must be the same, but can be different in different areas.
B. The router ID must be the IP address of an OSPF router interface.
C. The router ID must be configured manually.
D. A router running OSPF must have a router ID for it to operate properly.

Answer: A,B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 173

Which of the following statements regarding Designated Routers in OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 66

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. DR is elected by all the routers in the same network segment.
B. If the priorities of two routers are different, the router with the lower priority will be elected as DR.
C. If the priorities of two routers are equal, the router with the higher Router ID will be elected as DR.
D. DR and BDR must be adjacent.

Answer: A,C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 174

On the VRP platform, which of the following commands is used to configure the Router ID of a router as

1.1.1.1?

A. <Huawei>router id 1.1.1.1
B. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1
C. [Huawei]router-id 1.1.1.1
D. [Huawei]router id 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 175

Which of the following OSPF versions is specific to IPv6?

A. OSPFv1
B. OSPFv2
C. OSPFv3
D. OSPFv4

Answer: C Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 176
The administrator wishes to configure OSPF on a router in the network however the router has no

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 67

Huawei H12-211 Exam loopback interface. Which value will be used as the router ID?

A. The lowest IP address of the router’s active interfaces.

B. The highest IP address of the router’s active interfaces.
C. The IP address of the management interface
D. The priority value of the router.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 177

An administrator of a company supporting a large enterprise network wishes to implement OSPF on the network as opposed to RIP.
Which of the following points should the administrator use to support his reasoning for this change? (Choose three)

A. OSPF has no hop count limitation

B. OSPF has a lower routing update overhead
C. OSPF has a simpler configuration.
D. OSPF supports faster convergence.

Answer: A,B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 178

Which of the following statements regarding single area OSPF are correct? (Choose three)

A. An IP address needs to be configured on a loopback interface of each router before configuring an OSPFarea.
B. The value of an area can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
C. A single area can be configured using any supported area number.
D. All of the links of the network need to be advertised in Area 0.

Answer: B,C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 179

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 68

Huawei H12-211 Exam 10.0.1.0/24 O_ASE 150 2 D 10.0.23.3 Serial2/0/0

Refer to the display output. Which of the following statements regarding route shown are true? (Choose two)

A. The address 10.0.23.3 has been configured on the peer’s serial 2/0/0 interface.
B. The route preference has been changed by the adminstrator.
C. The metric for the route 10.0.1.0 indicates that two hops are needed.
D. The route has been learned via the OSPF protocol.

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 180

Which of the following statements regarding link-state database and routing-table of a “single” OSPF area are correct? (Choose two)
A. The link-state databases that all routers build are identical.
B. The link-state databases that all routers build are different.
C. The routing-tables that all routers calculate are different.
D. The routing-tables that all routers calculate are identical.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 181

Which of the following steps are necessary to configure OSPF on a Huawei router? (Choose three)

A. Configuration of a router ID
B. Enabling of an OSPF process
C. Specifying an OSPF area
D. Configuration of the network segments within each area

Answer: B,C,D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 69

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 182

Which of the following statements regarding the DR in an OSPF network are correct? (Choose two)

A. There must be at least one DR in an OSPF area.

B. A DR must be elected among the routers through the negotiations that are defined by OSPF protocol.
C. Only the router with highest priority will be elected as DR.
D. Only NBMA or Broadcast networks need to elect DR

Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 183

Which of the following VRP commands can be used to enter area 0 view? (Choose two)

A. [Huawei]ospf area 0
B. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0
C. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0.0.0.0
D. [Huawei-ospf-1]area 0 enable

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 184

Which of the following commands is used to display the OSPF neighbor relationship establishment?

A. display ospf neighbor

B. display ospf brief
C. display ospf peer
D. display ospf interface

Answer: C Explanation:
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 70

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 185

With what kind of routers does a DRother router exchange link state information and route information? (Choose two)

A. DR
B. BDR
C. DRother
D. All OSPF neighbors

Answer: A,B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 186

An OSPF area is a collection of a group of routers and networks. OSPF defines that routers that have the same ( ) belong to the same
OSPF area.

A. neighbors
B. LSDB
C. LSA
D. adjacency

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 187

Which of the following statements about router IDs are true? (Choose two)

A. The routers contained in the same LSDB have the same router ID.
B. Each router in an OSPF network must have a unique router ID.
C. Two routers in different OSPF areas can have the same router ID.
D. A router ID is expressed in a 32-bit dotted decimal format.

Answer: B,D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 71

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 188

OSPF allows for “multiple” processes. By default, OSPF selects a process whose number is ( ).

A. 0
B. 1
C. 10
D. 100

Answer: B Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 189

In a network supporting IPv6, OSPF no longer supports which feature?

A. multiple areas
B. Router-ID
C. authentication
D. multicast updates

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 190

Two routers are configured with OSPFv3. OSPFv3 is enabled on all interfaces of each router. Which of the following is true in the event
that the network administrator does not configure a Router-ID?

A. The IP address of the loopback 0 interface will be used as the router ID

B. The IP address of the loopback 1 interface will be used as the router ID
C. The IP address of interface G0/0/0 will be used as the router ID
D. No router ID will be assigned to the router.

Answer: D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 72

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 191

Destination/Mask protocol pre Cost Nexthop Interface

9.0.0.0/8 OSPF 10 50 1.1.1.1 Serial 1/0/0

9.1.0.0/16 RIP 100 5 2.2.2.2 Ethernet 0/0/1

Refer to the graphic. Which of the following statements is correct when this router forwards the packet to the destination host 9.1.4.5?

A. The router selects the first entry to match the destination address of the packet because the preference ofOSPF is higher than the
preference of RIP.
B. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the cost of RIPis lower than that of
OSPF.
C. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the outgoinginterface is an Ethernet
interface. The forwarding speed of an Ethernet interface is faster than theforwarding speed of a serial interface
D. The router selects the second entry to match the destination address of the packet because the router willmatch the most specific
address.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 192

According to the default value of route preference on the VRP platform, which of the following represent the correct sequence for direct
route, static route, RIP and OSPF if they are listed from high preference to low preference?

A. Direct, Static, RIP, OSPF

B. Direct, OSPF, Static, RIP
C. Direct, OSPF, RIP, Static
D. Direct, RIP, Static, OSPF

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 193

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 73

Huawei H12-211 Exam A router has learned two routes for the same network with the same prefix. One route has been
learned via OSPF with a metric of 4882, while the other route has been learned via RIPv2 with a metric of 4. Which route (s) will be found
in the routing table?

A. The RIPv2 route.

B. The OSPF and RIPv2 routes.
C. The OSPF route.
D. Neither of these routes will be found in the routing table.

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 194

Assume that the router has learnt the best route to the same destination by using RIP, OSPF and Static Route respectively. By default, the
Huawei router will select the route learnt via ( ) as the best route.

A. RIP
B. OSPF
C. RIPv2
D. Static route

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 195

After checking the OSPF neighbor state, the administrator discovers that the router has established a TWOWAY state with the peering
router. What can be understood from this information? (Choose two)

A. The routers are configured using the same process ID

B. The routers are configured using the same area ID
C. The routers are configured using wrong router ID
D. The routers are considered DROthers in a broadcast network

Answer: D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 74

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 196

Refer to the graphic. An administrator has configured OSPF on the two routers, following which he then implements the command silent-
interface s0/0/1 on RTA. What effect will this command have on the network? (Choose two)
A. The link information advertised by RTB will be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA.
B. The OSPF neighbor relationship will fail between two routers.
C. The configuration will not affect the OSPF neighbor relationship between the two routers.
D. The link information advertised by RTB will no longer be maintained in the Link State Database of RTA.

Answer: B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 197

Refer to the graphic. Which statements correctly explains the forwarding behavior between RTA and RTE? (Choose two)

A. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0
B. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S1/0/0.
C. When the network uses OSPF, data will be forwarded along the path from via E0/0/1.
D. When the network uses RIPv2, data will be forwarded along the path via S2/0/0.

Answer: B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 198

What functions does a Hello packet of OSPF implement? (Choose two)

A. Neighbor discovery
B. Deletion of unreachable neighbors.
C. Maintaining of neighbor relationships.
D. Negotiation of parameters among adjacent ports.

Answer: A,C

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 75

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 199

Refer to the graphic. The link between RTA and RTB is encapsulated using PPP. The IP addresses of serial 1/0/1 of RTA and serial 1/0/1
of RTB are in different network segments. Which following is correct? (Choose two)

A. RTA can ping 10.1.1.2 successfully

B. RTA cannot ping 10.1.1.2
C. The route entry 10.1.1.0/24 exists in the routing-table of RTA
D. The route entry 10.1.1.2/32 exists in the routing-table of RTA

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 200

Two routers are connected through serial interfaces and support PPP encapsulation. Which parameters must be negotiated to establish the
PPP connection? (Choose three).

A. MRU
B. Authentication password
C. Magic-Number
D. IP address

Answer: A,C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 201

What are the three protocol components defined by PPP? (Choose three).

A. Data encapsulation.
B. LCP
C. NCP
D. IPCP

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 76

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Answer: A,B,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 202

Two routers are connected via serial interfaces, for which the link-protocol is PPP. The network administrator wishes to configure PPP
authentication to improve security on this link. Which PPP authentication method provides a more secure solution?

A. CHAP
B. PAP
C. MD5
D. SSH

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 203

If PPP authentication fails, which type of packet will be sent to the authenticated peer by the authenticator?

A. Authenticate-Ack
B. Authenticate-Nak
C. Authenticate-Reject
D. Authenticate-Reply

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 204

Two routers are connected via serial interfaces and the link-protocol is PPP, but the MRU of two serial interface’s are different, in PPP
LCP negotiated stage, what will happen?

A. LCP negotiation will fail

B. Negotiation will use the smaller value
C. Negotiation will use the larger value

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 77

Huawei H12-211 Exam

D. Negotiation will use 1500

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 205

PPP is more secure than HDLC because PPP supports authentication protocols such as ( ). (Choose two)

A. PAP
B. MD5
C. CHAP
D. SSH

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 206

When both ends running PPP protocol detect that the physical link is active, the link state will transit from dead to establish. Which of the
following protocols is used to negotiate the link parameters during this phase?

A. IP
B. DHCP
C. LCP
D. NCP

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 207

A serial interface of a Huawei router currently using HDLC needs to assign PPP as the encapsulation protocol.

Which of the following commands is required to be configured at the serial interface view?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 78

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. link-protocol ppp
B. encapsulation ppp
C. enable ppp
D. address ppp

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 208

When using VRP, which of the following commands is used to configure the PPP authentication method as PAP?

A. ppp pap
B. ppp authentication-pap
C. ppp authentication-mode pap
D. ppp pap-authentication

Answer: C Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 209

When configuring the PPP authentication method as PAP, which of the following operations are necessary? (Choose three)

A. Add the user name and password of the authenticated party to the local user list
B. Configure the encapsulation type of the interface connected to the peer as PPP.
C. Configure PPP authentication method as CHAP
D. On the authenticated party end, configure the user name and password that are sent to authenticator

Answer: A,B,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 210

In the PPP protocol, which of the following encryption algorithms is used by CHAP?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 79

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. DES
B. MD5
C. AES
D. None

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 211

What is the function of the “ip address ppp-negotiate” command?

A. Enables the function of requesting for an IP address from the peer device.
B. Enables the function of accepting the request for an IP address from the remote device.
C. Enables the function of statically allocating IP addresses to the peer.
D. None of the above

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 212

Two routers have established a point-to-point network using PPP. The administrator has configured the routers to run OSPF in the same
area with the same router ID, what will behavior will occur as a result of the configuration?

A. The routers will build a neighbor relationship even though both routers are using the same router ID.
B. VRP will notify of a router ID conflict between the two routers.
C. The routers will build an adjacency even though both routers are using the same router ID.
D. The routers will not send hello packets to each other because they are using the same router ID.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 213

The PPPoE session establishment process can be divided into which stages? (Choose two).
"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 80

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. Discovery stage
B. DHCP stage
C. PPPoE Session stage
D. PPP connecting stage.

Answer: A,C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 214

To establish multiple PPP point-to-point connections in the Ethernet network, a PPPoE server establishes connections with multiple
PPPoE clients on one Ethernet port. How does PPPoE differentiate between each connection?

A. MAC address.
B. IP address and MAC address
C. MAC address and ppp-id
D. MAC address and session-id

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 215

When configuring a router as a PPPoE client, which configuration is not necessary?

A. Configuration of the dialer-rule

B. Configuration of the dialer interface
C. Configuration of an IP address on the dialer interface
D. Configuration of a password on the dialer interface

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 216

Refer to the graphic. RTA is a PPPoE client, and sends PADI packets to Server A. Which distribution method is used for sending PADI
packets?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 81

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 217

Refer to the graphic. RTA is a PPPoE client, and following transmission of PADI, Server A responds with PADO packets to RTA. Which
distribution method is used for sending PADO packets?

A. unicast
B. multicast
C. broadcast
D. anycast

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 218

In the PPPoE discovery stage, the PPPoE server assigns a session-id to the PPPoE client in which packet?

A. PADI
B. PADO
C. PADR
D. PADS

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 219

Which command can be used to check the PPPoE client session status?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 82

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. display ip interface brief
B. display current-configuration
C. display pppoe-client session packet
D. display pppoe-client session summary

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 220

[Huawei]rip 1

[Huawei-rip-1]version 2

Refer to the command output. An administrator wishes to configure RIP. Which other command needs to configured for RIP routes to be
advertised?

A. import-route GigabitEthernet 0/0/1

B. network 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255
C. network GigabitEthernet 0/0/1
D. network 192.168.1.0

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 221

Refer to the graphic. RTA and RTB are running RIPv1. RTA has advertised 10.0.0.0 and 192.168.1.0 to the RIP network. Which routes
will exist in the IP routing table of RTB? (Choose two)

A. 10.0.0.0/8
B. 192.168.1.1/32 C. 10.1.12.1/32 D. 192.168.1.0/24
Answer: C,D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 83

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 222

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv1 to advertise its routes, while RTB is using RIPv2. What
effect will this have on learned routes?

A. RTA and RTB will both learn the routes advertised by RIP.
B. RTA will learn the RIP route advertised by RTB, however RTB is unable to learn the route advertised byRTA.
C. RTB will learn the RIP route advertised by RTA, however RTA is unable to learn the route advertised byRTB.
D. Neither RTA nor RTB are able to learn the RIP routes advertised by the peer.

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 223

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv1 to advertise its routes, while RTB is using RIPv2 to
advertise the route 1.1.1.1/32. How will the route 1.1.1.1/32 appear in the IP routing table of RTA?

A. This route will not appear in the IP routing table of RTA.

B. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/8.
C. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/24.
D. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/32.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 224

Refer to the graphic. Two peering routers are running RIP. RTA is using RIPv2 to advertise its routes, while RTB is using RIPv1 to
advertise the route 1.1.1.1/32. The administrator configures “RIP version 2 multicast” for interface G0/0/1 of RTB. How will the route
1.1.1.1/32 appear in the the IP routing table of RTA?

A. This route will not appear in the IP routing table of RTA.

B. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/8.
C. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/24.
D. This route will appear in the IP routing table of RTA as 1.0.0.0/32.

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 84

Huawei H12-211 Exam

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 225

A RIP router receives the routing update information from its neighbor. Which of the following statements regarding routing update are
correct? (Choose three)

A. The received route that is not in the routing table will be added only when its hop count value is less than16.
B. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is therouter's neighbor and the
cost value is smaller.
C. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is not therouter's neighbor and
the cost value is smaller.
D. The received route that already exists in the routing table will be updated only when the next hop is therouter's neighbor and the
cost value has been changed.

Answer: A,C,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 226

Which of the following commands is used to display the current running state and configuration of RIP?

A. display protocol rip

B. show rip
C. display rip
D. display this rip

Answer: C Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 227

A user can view the information for the RIP protocol on a router. What does “Age time” in the returned result of the command mean?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 85

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. The interval of updating an RIP packet
B. The aging time of an RIP route
C. The suppression time of an RIP route
D. The time spent on switching between RIP routes

Answer: B Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 228

After a command for displaying RIP route information is entered on a router, peer 192.168.1.2 on Serial1/0/0 is displayed in the returned
result. What does 192.168.1.2 stand for?

A. Address of a RIP neighbor

B. Address of the port with the RIP protocol enabled
C. Next hop address of the RIP route
D. Transmission address of the RIP protocol

Answer: A Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 229

Refer to the grapic. An administrator has configured RIPv2 on the two routers, following which he implements the command silent-
interface s0/0/1 on RTA. What effect will this command have on the network? (Two Answers)

A. RTA will continue to learn routes from RTB

B. RTB will continue to learn routes from RTA
C. RTA will have no neighbor relationship with RTB
D. RTB will have no adjacency relationship with RTA

Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 230

Refer to the graphic. R1, R2 and R3 are running RIPv1. R1 and R3 both advertise 172.16.0.0 to the RIP network. How will this affect R2?

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 86

Huawei H12-211 Exam

A. R2 will not have a route to the networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 172.16.2.0/24
B. R2 will only have a route to 172.16.1.0/24
C. R2 will only have a route to 172.16.2.0/24
D. R2 will have a route to both networks 172.16.1.0/24 and 172.16.2.0/24, but some packets for thesedestinations will be lost.

Answer: D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 231

<R2>debugging rip 1

Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.1-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13414: RIP 1: Receiving v1 response on

GigabitEthernet0/0/0 from 10.0.12.1 with 1 RTE

Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.2-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13465: RIP 1: Receive response from

10.0.12.1 on GigabitEthernet0/0/0
Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.3-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13476: Packet: Version 1, Cmd response,
Length 24

Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.4-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 13527: Dest 1.0.0.0, Cost 1

Sep 13 2013 11:07:20.974.5-05:13 R2 RIP/7/DBG: 6: 2688: RIP 1: Ignoring packet. This version is not configured.

Refer to the debug output. Following configuration of R2, the administrator discovers that the behavior is not as expected and performs
debugging. Based on the output from the debug, what is the source of the problem?

A. R2 has configured an ACL to block the route to network 1.0.0.0

B. R2 has enabled split horizon.
C. R1 is using authentication, however R2 is not.
D. R2 is operating using RIPv2, while R1 is using RIPv1.

Answer: D Explanation:

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 87

Huawei H12-211 Exam

QUESTION NO: 232

Refer to the graphic. An administrator has configed RIPv2 in the two routers shows in the figure. What will happen after configuring the
following commands? (Choose two)

[RTA-Serial0/0/1]rip output [RTA-rip-1]silent-interface s0/0/1

A. RTA will have the route learned from the RTB

B. RTB will have the route learn from the RTA
C. RTA will have no neighbor relationship with RTB
D. RTB will have no neighbor relationship with RTB
Answer: A,D Explanation:

QUESTION NO: 233

Which of the following statements about a designated port working in RIPv2 multicast mode are true? (Choose three)

A. The port receives only RIPv2 multicast packets.

B. The port does not receive RIPv1 broadcast packets.
C. The port does not receive RIPv2 broadcast packets.
D. The port receives only RIPv1 multicast packets.

Answer: A,B,C

"Pass Any Exam. Any Time." - www.actualtests.com 88

210.Which of the following descript ion is correct about the ICMP redirection function? (Multiple Choice)
0 A After the router receives a packet from one interface. but also the data packets sent from the interface.then the router will send ICMP
redirect message to the source device (Right Answers)
0 B.After the router receives a packet fro m one interface to find the IP address and destination IP addresses of packets onthe same
network segment ofthe interface so that the router will send ICMP redirect message to the source device
0 C.After the router receives a data packet from one interface,but also the packet sent fro m the interface,the source device will send ICMP
redirect messages to the router
0 D.After the router receives a data packet from one interface to find the source IP address of the packet and the address of the next hop
router continues to forward the packet when IP belong to the same network segment ,then the router will send ICMP redirect message to
the source device (Right Answers)

Answe r: AD

2.On a router to act as an authentication server configured with two authentication domain "Area 1" and "Area 2",if the user using the
correct user name "huawei" and the password "hello" for authentication,the nwhich authentication domain will the user be assigned to ?
0 A. authenticatio n domain "Area I"
0 B.authentication domain "Area 2"
0 C.authentication domain "default domain" (Right A nswers >
0 D.authentication domain "default_admin domain" Answer : C

1.Refer to the following BHCP flow diagram,which of the following stat ement is correct? ()(Multiple choice)

Client DHCPServer
Stepl

Step3

DHCPDiscover

DHCP Offer

DHCP Request

Step2

DHCP ACK

D A.The first step is to send multicast packets

D B The second step rs to send unicast packets (Right Answers > D C The third step is to send broadcast packets (Right Answers ) D
D.The fourth step is to send unicast packets (Right Answers > D E.The fourth step is to send broadcast packets

Step4

3.Under the RIP process of Huawei equipment,declared network 10.1.1.1/30,which of the following configuration is correct? ( ) (Multiple
choice) D A.network 10.1.1.0
DB.undosummary network 10.1.1.0
D C. Version 2 summary network 10.0 0.0 (Right Answers) D D.undo summary network 10.1.0.0
D E network 10.0.0 0 (Right Answers)

Answer : CE

V VRP system login timeout t ime should be set under the VTY interface.
D ATrue
0 B False (Right Answers >

Answer:B

5. NAPT is through TCP or UDP or IP packet s in the protocol number to distinguish the different user's IP address.
D A.True
D B False (Right Answers >

Answer:B

6. There are two routers RTA and RIBfro mthe source device to the destination device ,use the Tracert command to test the
path.When detecting the first jump RTA,the source device to a large port of the destination device to send a UDP packet with a mof
1,when the packet arrives in RTB,mbecomes 0, so the RTA respond a ICMP message to the source device .
0 A.Time Exceeded {Right Answers>
0 B.Echo Request
0 C.Echo Reply
0 D.Port Unreachable Answe r: A

About the corresponding relation of access control list numbers and types ,Whic h of the following description is true ?() A.The basic
ACL number in the rangeof 1000-2999
B.advanced ACL number in the range of 30004000
C Layer 2 ACL number in the range of 4000-4999 (Right Answers> D.interface-basedACL number inthe range of 1000-2000

Answer:C

8. The following two configurat ion commands can realize router standby backup to the same destination 10.1.1.0:
[RTA) ip route-static 10.1.1.0 24 12.1.1_ 1 permanent
[RTA) iproute-static 10.1.1.0 24 13.1.1.1
D A.True
D B.False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

9. ALC will not filter equipment itself generated traffic which access to other devic es;only filter forward traffic,in the forwarding
traffic includes traffic which other devices access the devic e.
D A.True (Right Answers)
D B.False

10. About the static and dynamic routing,which of the following statement is not correct?
D A.Static routing configuration in the enterprise applicatio n is simple,easy management
DB.After administrator deployingdynamic routing protocols inenterprise networks,the late maintenance and extension canbe more
convenient.
D C After the link failure,static routing can automatically complete the network convergence (Right Answers >
D D.Dynamic routing protocol takes up more system resources than the static routing. Answe r: C

11. Refer to the following topology and configuration ,the router R1 and R2 connect via Serial low-speed cable,and the data link
layer encapsulation using PPP.When R1 and R2 Holdtime inconsistent,APP negotiation fails , can not communicate.

Rt R2

[R l]interf ace Seria l0/0/0 [Rl-Seria l0/0/0 ] ip add ress

202.10.1.1255.255.255.0
[Rl-Seria l0/0/0 ] timer hold 2
#
[R2]interface Seria l0/0/0
[R2-Seria l0/0/0 ] ip address 202.10.1.2 255.255.255.0
DA.True
D B.False (Right Answers )

Answer: B

12. PING 10.0.0.2: 56 data bytes £• press CTRL_C to break Reply from 10.0.0.2:bytes=800
Sequence=1tt1=255 time=2 ms Reply from 10.0.0.2:bytes=800 Sequence=2 tt1=255 time=10 ms
-10.0.0.2 ping statistics - 2 packet (s)transmitted
2 packet (s) received
0.00% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 216/10
ms
Network administrators use the Ping command on the AR G3 series routers to test the conne<:tivity reaching 10.0.0.2,which ofthe
following description ofthe output is correct? ()
0 A network administrators using command is ping -c 2 -s 800 10.0.0 2 (Right Answers)
0 B.network administrators using command is ping -a 2 -v 800 10.0.0.2
0 C.destination 10.0.0.2 unreachable
0 D.network administrator to modify the default TIL value for 255

Answer: A

13.Network administrator configures RIPng protocol in a small IPvs network,which of the following configurat ion is correct and
effe<:tive?
0A [RTA-GigabitEthemet0/010) npng 1enable (RightAnswers )
0 B.[RTA) ripng 1enable
0 C.<RTA>ripng 1enable
0 D.[RTA-ripng-1)ripng 1enable Answer: A
14. Iin IPv6 network,Whic h of the following characteristics does OSPPv3 no longer support ?
D A.Multi-zoning division
D B.Router-lo
D C.authentication function (Right Answers)
D D.to send protocol packets via multicast way Answe r: C

15. On VRP platform,which command is used to set up data link layer encapsulation type to HDLC on the Serial port?
D A. encapsulation hdlc
D B link-protocol hdlc (Right Answers >
D C.hdlc enable
D D.link-protocol PPP

Answer:B

16. Make an IP address 10.0.0.1host access to the Internet.which is the necessary technology?
D A.Static Routing
D B.Dynamic Routing
D C.route redistribution
D D NAT (Right Answers) Answe r: D

17. Which of the following versions of SNMP protocol support encryption feature?
0 A.SNMPv1
0 B.SNMPv2
0 C.SNMPv2c
D D.SNMPv3 (Right Answers } Answer : D

18.In STP,assuming that all switches are configured the same priority,switch1MAC address is OO-e04c-00-00-40,switch 2 MAC address
is OO-eO-fc-00-00-10,switch3 MAC address is OO-eO-fc-00-00-20 ,switch4 MAC address is OO-eO-fc-00- 00-80,the root switch should
be ().
0 A.Switch 1
0 B Switch 2 (Right Answers)
0 C.Switch 3
0 D.Switch 4 Answer: B

19.AS shown,create VLAN2 on the SWA and SWB,configure the port connection to the host as Access Port,and blong to VLAN2 . The
SWA's G0/0/1 and SWB's G0/0/2 are both Trunk Port, and allow all VLAN. If you want the normal communication between the host,the
network administrator needs to ( ).

GOJ02

HostA Hosts
VLAN 2 VLAN2

0A.CreatingVLAN2 to the SWC

0 8.Configurating the G0/0/1of SWC as trunk port and allowing VLAN2
0 C.Configurating the G0/0/1and G0/0/2 of SWC as trunk ports and allowing VLAN2
0 D Creating VLAN2 to the SWC,configurating the G0/0/1 and G0/0/2 as trunk ports and allowing VLAN2 (Right
Answers )

Answer: D

20.When using FTP protocol to upgrade router software ,which transmission mode should be used?
D A bnary mode (Right Answers)
D B.flow byte model
D C. byte pattern
D D.text mode

Answer: A

21.<Huawei> system-View [Huawei] user-interface console 0

[Huawei-ui-<:onsoleOJ user privilege level 15
[Huawei-ui-<:onsoleO] authentication-mode password
[Huawei-ui-consoleOJ set authentication password cipher huawei2012 [Huawei-ui-consoleO] quit
Which of the following statements about the above configuration commands is wrong?
0A administrators want to login and manage equipment throughthe console port
0B.after configuration is complete.the administrator cannot implement the equipment management through remote loginway
0 C.the users who loginthe equipment throughthe console had the highest privilege level
0 D the users login the equipment through the console whose password is "cipher huawe12012· (Right Answers > Answer : D

22.In order to view the mode of the serial port S0/0/1on a router work in DTE or DCE,which of the following commands should be used?
D A. display controller seria l
D B.display saved-<:onfig
D C display interface s0/0/1 (Right Answers>
D D.display current-

<:onfig Answer :C

23. In the OSI reference model which can complete end to end error detection and flow control is ( )
0 A.Physical Layer 0 B.Data link layer 0 C.Network Layer
0 D Transport Layer (Right Answers) Answer : D

24. When the specified interface running at RIPv2 multicast mode,which of the following statement is correct? ( )(Select 2 answers)
D A receive only RIPv2 multicast messages (Right Answers> D B does not receive RIPv1 broadcast messages (Right Answers > D
C.receive RIPv1 broadcast messages
D D.RIPv1 receive multicast messages Answer :AB

26.When using Tracert program to test the pathwhich reach the destination node,by default each TTLvalue Traceroute be measured ( )
times.
0 A 3 (Right Answers )
0 B.4
0 C. 6
0 D.8

Answer: A

25 .RSTP port in the Discarding state.although the received data frame will be discarded, but can according to the port received data frame
to maintain the MAC address table.
0A.True
0 B False (Right Answers ) Answer: B

27. As shown, by default,the network administrator wants to use the Eth-trunk manual aggregat ion of two physical links between
SWA and SWB,which of the following description is correct ( ).

DA.Mer polymerization canwork

D B.can be aggregated,and only after GE ports can send and receive data aggregation
D C.can be aggregated,and only after aggregation Ethernet port can send and receive data
D D.can not be aggregated (Right Answers> Answer : D

28. As shown,the administrator is configured with the following command on the RTA.which of the followingdescription is true? (
) (Multiple choice) [RTA-Serial0/0/1] rip output
[RTA-rip-1] silent-interface s0/0/1

RTA RTB

D A RTA will still be able to learn RTB advertised routing information (Right Answers)
D B.RTB will still be able to learn RTA advertised routing information
D C.RTA neighbor information does not include the RTB
D D. RTB neighbor information does not include the RTA (Right Answers )

Answer: AD

29.<Huawei>display startup Mainboard Startup system software:sd1:

/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
Next startup system software :sd1:
/ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc Backup system software for next startup: null
Startup saved-configurati
null
Next startup saved-configur Startup license file: null
Next startup license file:null Startup patch package: null

Next startup patch package:null Startupvoice-

files:null
Next startup voice-files:null
The above is the AR2200 router's display startup information,about this information,which statement is wrong?
D A.the running configuration file is not saved
D B.in this startup,the system file that the equipment used is ar2220-v200r003c00spc200.cc
D C the system files cannot be modified when the equipment in the next startup (Right Answers)
D D.the systemfiles can use the named "startup system software<startup-s oftware-name>,cc" to modify during the equipment next sta

32 The network administrator in a network to capture a data frame to the destination MAC address is 01-00-5E-A0-B1-C3 Which
statement of the Mac address is correct (
)
□ A. It is a unicast MAC address
□ B It is a broadcast MAC address
□ C It is a multicast MAC address (Right Answers)

□ D It is an illegal MAC address Answer: C

31 A switch receives a data frame with a VLAN tag. but found in its MAC address table can’t finddestination MAC address of
the data frame, then the switch to the data frame processing behavior is ().
□ A. switch willbroadcast the data framesto all ports

DB switch will broadcast the dataframes to allports (in addition toreceiving port)belonging to the data framein theVLAN
(Right Answers)
□ C switch willbroadcast the data frames to all Access ports
□ D switch will discard the data frame Answer: B

30 The following static routing configuration is correct (). (Choose 3 answers)

□ A ip route-static 129 1 0 0 16 serial 0 (Right Answers)
□ B ip route-static 10 0 0 2 16 129.1 0 0
□ C ip route-static 129 1 00 16 1 0 0 0 2 (Right Answers)
□ D ip route-static 129 1 0 0 255.255 0 0 10 0 0 2 (Right Answers)

Answer: ACD

33. As shown in the configuration, the administrator configures OSPF in R1, but on R1 learning is less than other routers routing, the
possible reason is? (select three answers) [R1] ospf [R1-ospf-1] area 1 [R1-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 10.0.12.0 0.0.0.255
❑ A the router configuration of regional ID is different from its neighbor router ID (Right Answers)
❑ B the router without authentication function, but the neighbor router is configured with the authentication function (Right
Answers)
❑ C. the router configuration. without configure OSPF process
❑ D. the router in the OSPF configuration without the network of connected neighbors (Right Answers

Answer ABD

34. As shown in illustration, the port which SWA and SWB used to connect to host is Access port and PVID is 2. GO/0/1 of SWA is
Hybrid port, PVID is 1, and the port is configured Hybrid tagged vlan 2 command. GO/0/1 of SWB is the Trunk port, PVID is 1. and
VLAN2 will be allowed to pass.
SWA Hybrid Trunk SWB GO/011 GO/0/1
Which of the following description is correct?
❑ A. Host A can send data frame to Host B but cannot receive reply of host B
❑ B. Host A cannot send data frame to host B but can receive data frames which host B can actively send
❑ C. completely unable to communication between host A and host B
❑ D. one of host A and host B can normal communicate (Right Answers)
Answer : D

35. As shown, which of the following description is correct about the frame relay network equipment?( ) (select 2 answers)

I=1 A RTA is a DTE device (Right Answers)

❑ B. FRA is a DTE device

❑ C. FRB is a DCE device (Right Answers)

❑ D. S1/0/1 interface on the RTA is DCE interface Answer: AC

36. When Huawei Sx7 series switches running STP, default priority of switch is ( ).
❑ A. 4096
❑ B. 8192
❑ C. 16384
❑ D. 32768 (Right Answers)

37. ARP protocol can resolve the destination MAC address based on the destination IP address,so as to realize the mapping of the
link layer address and IP address.
D A True (Right Answers)
D B.False

Answer: A

38. Access port can only receive and dispatch Untagged frame ,when received data frame with Tag will be discarded directly.
D A.True
0 B False (Right Answers ) Answer :B

39. Which of the following state description is wrong about Spanning Tree protocol Forwarding?(
D A.Forwarding state port can receive BPDU message
D B Forwarding state port does not learn message source MAC address (Right Answers )
D C.Forwarding state port can forward data message
D 0.Forwarding state port can send BPOU message Answe r: B

40 .What encryption algorithm is used by CHAP in the PPP protocol?

0 A. DES
0 B MD5 (Right Answers >
D C. AES
DD.Not Used Answer : B

41. Which of the following analysis about ICMP packets is true? ( ) (Multiple choice)
D A. ICMP packets can record the time, including the original time,receipt time,transmission time (Right Answers )
D B ICMP packets are encapsulated in IP packets ,not through transport layer encapsulation (Right Answe rs) D C.ICMP packets
containing ICMP error packets,controlpackets, request/response packets,refr esh packets D D.ICMP protocol does not support redirection
function
D E.ICMP packets can not be used to detect the path MTU

Answe r: AB

42. As shown, it can be judged that 00e0-fc99-9999 is a specific host MAC address which the switch learn from ARP,and the IP
address of the host has been replaced three times.
<Huawei> display arp dynamic
IP ADDRESS MAC ADDRESS EXPIRE(M) TYPE INTERFACE VPN- NSTANCE VlAN/CEVLAN PVC
10.137.217.210 ooeo-fcOl-0203
10.2.2.1 00e0-fc99-9999
192.168.20.1 OOeO-fc99-9999
10.0.0.1 ooeo-fc99-9999

I- Ethernetl/O/O
I- Eth-TrunkO
I- VlaniflOO
I- Vlanif200
I\

Tota!:7 Dynamic:2 Static:O lnterface:S

0 A.True
0 B.False (Right Answers>

Answer: B

43. NAPT can be converted to what elements?

0 A. MAC address + port number
0 8 IP address + port number (Right Answers>
0 C.Only MAC address
0 D Only the IP address Answer : 8

44. .As shown in figure,swit ches GE0/0/1 and GE0/0/2 two-port all have different Hybrid configuration ,which of the following
statement is true ? ( ) (Multiple choice)
LSW1

192.168.100.1 192.168.200.1
[LSW1)interfaceGiga bitEthernetO/O/1
[LSW1- GigabitEthernetO/O/l) port hybrid untagged vlan 10 20 [LSW1- Gigabit Ethernet0/0/1) port hybrid pvid vlan 10
#
[LSW1)interfa ce GigabitEthernet0/0/2
[LSW1- GigabitEthernet0/0/2] port hybrid untagged vla n 10 20 [LSWl- GigabitEthernet0/0/2]port hybrid pvid vlan 20
D A.administrative department and financial departme nt can not exchange visits, because the two departments do not belong to the same
VLAN
D B.data frame issued by the administrative department in the switch carried Tag is VLAN20
D C data frame issued by the financial department in the switch carried Tag is VLAN20 (Right Answers)
D D switch here can be a layer 2 switch,it also can be a layer 3 switch, because the communication without going through 3 layer gateway
(Right Answers)
D E.if switches GE0/0/1and GE0/0/2 two-port are modified to Trunk ports,then the two depart ments can communicate normally

Answer: CD

45. .About OSPF area,whic h of the following statements are correct? (Please Choose 2 Answe rs)
0 A.It must configure the IP address for the Router's loopback interface before configuring OSPF area.
0 B.The numbers run from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. (Right Answers)
0 C.The number of backbone area can not be 2 (Right Answers )
0 D.All networks should be declared in the region 0. Answer: BC

46. Which of the following parameters need to consider when electing root port in STP ? (Multiple choice)
D A Cost of the port to reach the root switch (Right Answers)
D B.port priority (Right Answers)
D C port slot number, such as G0/0/1 (Right Answers )
D D.port MAC address
D E.port duplex mode Answer :ABC

47. Which of the following statement about Ethernet port working modeis true ? (Multiple choice)
D A.kilomega Ethernet can work only in full-duplex mode
D B.gigabit Ethernet can work only in full-duplex mode
D C.can work normally when the Ethernet port mode mismatc h
D D.Ethernet port mode can be artificially defined {Right Answers )
D E. 1OOM Ethernet port working mode supports full and half duplex mode (Right Answers )

Answer: DE

48. As shown inthe command,whe n the administrator configures DHCPserver,which of the following commands configuredtime is
the shortest? ip pool pool1
network 10.10.10.0 mask 255255.255.0 gateway-list in in 10.1
D A.dhcp select relay
D B.lease day 1 (Right Answers)
D C.lease 24
D O.lease 0

Answer: B

49. .Huawei switch can use command vlan batc h to batch create multiple VLHN,simplifying the configuration process.
0 A True (Right Answers)
D B.False

Answe r: A

50. As shown in illustration,the administrator hope to improve the performance of the network,which of the following method is the
most appropriate?

D A. use the switches to connect each host.and modify the work pattern of each host to full duplex (Right Answers )
D B.use the switches to connect each host,and modify the work pattern of each host to half duplex
D C.use the Hub to connect each host,and modify the work pattern of each host to full duplex
D D.use the Hub to connect each host,and modify the work pattern of each host to half duplex Answer : A

51 Which of the following OSFF version applies to 1Pv6?

0 A OSPFv1
08 OSPFv2
0 C OSPFv3 (Right Answers )
00.OSPFv4

Answer: C

52. Inthe network shown in the figure,which of the following description is correct? () (Choose 2 answers)

0 A. Between RTA and the SWC for the same collision domain
0 B.Between SWA and SWB for the same broadcast domain
0 C Between SWA and SWC for the same collision domain (Right Answers>
0 D Between SWA and SWC for the same broadcast domain (Right Answers >

Answer: CD

53. When routing in the loop,which of the following problems may cause ? (Multiple choice)
D A.packet endless transfer
D B.router CPU consumption increases (Right Answers)
D C router memory consumption increases (Right Answers) D D.the packet destination IP address constantly being modified D E.data
packets bytes is bigger and bigger

Answer: BC

54. Network structure and OSPF partitions as shown in diagram,except for R1,router R2, RJ and R4 are all ABR router of OSPF.
,--------------- ----------,\
AreaO
,,--

Areal

----,
'I
I
IIIIIII

,----
IIIIIIIII

Area2

_,
--,
'I
I
IIIIIIIIIII
:

,
DA.True
D 8 False (Right Answers)

I ' I

55. Two routers run on the PPP link,the administrator are configured OSPF single area on the two routers,andthey have same
Router ID,which of the following description is correct?
D A.the two routers will establish normaland complete neighbor relationship
D B VRP will prompt the Router ID conflict of two Router ·(Right Answers>
D C.the two routers will establish normaland complete adjacency relationship
D D.the routers will not send the hello message to each other Answe r: B

56. There are users in company reflected when transfer files via network,the speed is very low.The adminstrator found some
duplicate frames using Wireshark software caught,the following possible causes or solution described is correct ().
A.Switch can not find data fra me destination MAC address inthe MAC address table,it wil flood the data frame.
B.Corporate network switching equipment must be upgraded C.Network has a loop on the second floor (Right A nswers) D.There is no
configuration VLAN in network
Answe r: C

57. After you enable the GRE keepalve function,GRE tunnel home terminal will periodically send keepalive packets every 1Os to
the opposite end. D A.True
D B False (Right Answers)

Answer: B

58. About the configuration and deployment of PPP,which of the following statement is correct?
D A. PPP can not be used to issue IP address
D B PPP supports CHAP and PAP authentication modes (Right Answers)
D C.PPP can not modify keepalive time C.PPP does not support two-way authentication Answer : B

59.<Huawei>system-view [Huawei] user-interface console 0

[Huawei-ui-consoleO] history-command max-size 20 Which state ment is correct about the above configuration?
D A history-command max-size 20 is to adjust the history command buffer size is 20 (Right Answers )
D B.The default history command buffe r size is 5
D C.The default history command buffe r size is 5 bytes
D D.After the configuration,the history command buffer can store 20 bytes of command Answer: A

60. About the command of det ecting IP network connectivity,which of the following statement is false? (Multiple choice} 0 A ping
127 0 0 1 this command 1s used to detect if the host network cableis well plugged in (Right Answers) 0 B ping 127 0 0 2. this command
1s used to detect rf the host network cable is well plugged 1n (Right Answers > 0 C.ping command can be used to detect the host to the
local gateway connectivity
0D ipconfigrelease commandcanbeusedto detect the host to the localgateway connectMty (Right Answers > Answer :ABO

61. IP packet has a header Imfield, on the field statement is correct ().
D A.The fie ld length is seven
D B.The fie ld is used for packet fragmentation
D C The field is used anti-packet ring (Right Answers )
D D.The field is used to indicate the priority of the packet Answer: C

62. As shown,the two hosts realize VLAN's communication bysingle-arm routing,when RTA G0/0/1.2 sun-interface receive the
data fram that host 8 sendto host A,then RTA will performwhich of the following operation?

Vian 10 Vian 20
GW: 10.0.1.254 GW: 10.0.2.254
0 A.RTA willforward the data frame through the G0/0/1.1 sub-interface
0 8.aft er RTA delete VLAN tag 20,via G0/0/1.1interface to be sent
0 C.RTA should delete VLAN tag 20 first,and then add a VLAN tag 10,from G0/0/1.1interface to send out (Right Answers )
0 D.RTA will discard the data frame

63. As shown in the topology and configuration on the switches connected port, can determine the labelfor the data frames can be
forwarded between the two switches .
GE0/0/1

LSWl LSW2
[LSW1) interfa ce GigabitEthernet0/0/1 [LSWl-GigabitEthernet0/0/1]Port link-type tru nk
[LSWl-GigabitEthernetO/O/l]Porttru nk pvid vlan 20 [LSWl-GigabitEthernetO/O/l]Port trunk allow-pass vlan 10
#
[LSW2]interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1
[LSW2-Giga bit Ethernet0/0/1] Port link-type trunk [LSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/1]Porttru nk pvid vlan 10
[LSW2-GigabitEthernet0/0/1]Port tru nk allow-pass vlan 10
OA. TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers>

54.In the OSPF protocol,about description of the DR.which of the following is correct? (Multiple choice)
DA By default all routers in the broadcast networks will jointly participate in OR election (Right Answers)
D B.Ifthe priority value of the two routers are different,choose a smaller priority value router as DR
D C if the pnonty values of two routers are equal then choose the Router of the big Router ID as DR (Right Answers )
D D need to establish adjacency relat1onsh1p between DR and BDR (Right Answers) Answer : ACD

65. The administrator can not log in through Telnet AR2200 routers ,but other administrators can log in,so which of the following
items are possible reasons? (Multiple choice)
D A The administrator user account has been disabled (Right Answers) D B.The privilege level administrator user account has been
changed to 0 D C.The Administrator user account has been deleted (Right Answers) D D.AR2200 Router Telnet service has been disabled

Answer: AC

66. Which of the following description of GVRP is correct?

0 A.GVRP enables network devices to dynamically discover and delete
0 B.GVRP is a protocol must be turned on the switch,otherwise it can not communicate between switches
0 C.GVRP is based on GARP working mechanism,and the apparatus used to maintain dynamic VLAN registration information and
propagates the information to other devices (Right Answers)
67. Which of the following several subnet route may converge Routing entry 10.0.0.24/29? (Multiple choice)
0 A.10.0.0.24/30 (Right Answers)
0 B. 10.0.0.23/30
0 C. 10.0.0.26/30
0 D 10 0 0 28/30 (Right Answers)
Answe r: AD

68. Which of the following several subnet route may converge Routing entry 10.0.0.24/29? (Multiple choice)
0 A.10.0.0.24/30 (Right Answers)
0 B. 10.0.0.23/30
0 C. 10.0.0.26/30
0 D 10 0 0 28/30 (Right Answers)

Answe r: AD

69. Network administrator creates VLAN 10 on 3 layer switches, and in the VLAIN virtual interface configurat ion the IP address.
When using the command "display ip interface brief'view interface status ,find VLANIF 10 interfaces are down ,how to make the kind of
operation by 10 VLANIF interface returns to normal ?
0 A.Use the command in the VLANIF 10 interface "undo shutdown" B.Add any physical interface into VLAN 10 C.Adding a stale must
carry VLAN 10 interface for physical UP D.adding a stale must be UP and must Trunk types of interfaces into VLAN 10

Answe r: C

70. As shown in illustration,which of the following description about the network topology is correct? j£

RTA

HostA Host B Host c

0 A. The network has 6 collision domains

Host D

0 8 The network has 2 broadcast domains (Right Answers)

0 C.The network has 12 collision domains
0 D.The network has 6 broadcast do mains

71. On this multi-point Ethernet access network,PPPoE server can via an Ethernet port and a lot of PPPoE client to establish a PPP
connection,the server must create a unique session identifie r to distinguish different connection for each PPP sess ion.
What parameters will be used to establish PPPoE session identifier?
0 A.MAC address B.IP address and MAC address C.MAC address and PPP-lD D.MAC address and Session-lD Answer: D

72. In AR router created on certification plan,authorization scheme ,accounting scheme, HWTACACS or RADIUS server template
to the domain only after the application to take effect.
0A TRUE (Right Answers>
Q B.FALSE

Answer: T

72.In the data packet which is shown in illustration,which of the following fields will be encrypted ESP protocol of IPsec VPN?

IPHeader ESP Header ESP Tra.,r ESP Auth

D A TCP Header £-. Data .£-. ESP Trailer (Right Answers )
D 8.ESP Header.TCP Header .£-. Data
0 C.ESP Header .£-. TCP Header £-. Data £-. ESP Trailer
0 D.ESP Header .£-.TCP Header .£-. Data .£-. ESP Trailer £-. ESP Auth Answer: A

73. A company network administrator wants to remotely manage branch network equipment,which agreement will be used in the
following?
0 A.CIDR
0 B.RSTP
0 C Telnet (Right Answers }
0 D.VLSM

Answer:C

74. Trunk ports can both send the data frame with labels and the data frame without labels.
0A TRUE (Right Answers)
OB.FALSE

Answe r: T

75. Huawei device ports support auto-negotiation technology,which of the following about the negotiation result is correct?
0 A.Gigabit electricalconsultat ions under certain port full-duplex
0 B.1OOM electrical under negotiation result must be ahalf-duplex port
0 C negotiation p<acess 1s relegated consultations that 1000M-> 100M-> 10M (Right Answers )
0 D.When the duplex mode is inconsistent,can be solved by replacing the network cable Answer :C

76.
As shown the two switches are disabled STP protocol Host A sent an ARP Request the following discription is correct? (Multiple choice)

D A.the two switches can realize load balance

D B.the two switches' CPU usage will be high (Right Answers )
D C.the two switches' MAC address table will frequenUy jitter (Right Answers )
D D.this network will appear repeated frames (Right Answers)

77.PPP is more secure than HOLC,because PPP support ( ).(Multiple choice)

0 A PAP (Right Answers >
0 B.MD5
0 C.CHAP (Right Answers >
0 D.SSH

Answer: AC

78. Which of the following statement is not correct? (Multiple choice)

0 A.Each static route priority may not be the same
0 B.Bydefault route priority order is higher than RJP OSPF
D C If the cost of the routes 1s larger the higher the pnority of the route (Right Answers)
D D VRP the routing protocol greater the pnontyvalue indicates a higher priority ofthe route (Right Answers> Answer:CD

79. When using dynamic NAT address pool,address pool can be reused,the same IP network simultaneously mapped to multiple IP.
OA.TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers> Answer: F

80. As Network topology shown in the network all link cost value as the default value,when RTA forwarding packets to RTE,which
of the description about routing is right? (Multiple choice)

D A If your network routers are running OSPF, the RTA will use S1 I 010 interface to forward data to RTE
D B.If your network routers are running RIPv2.the RTA will use S1 I 010 interface to forward data to RTE (Right Answers ) D C.If your
network routers are running OSPF. the RTA will use EO I 011interface to forward data to RTE (Right Answers ) D D.If your network
routers are running RIPv2, the RTA will use S2 I 010 interface to forward data to RTE

81. When deploying an ACL on Huawei equipment,which of the following description is correct? (Multiple choice)
D A.When you call ACL at the interface can only be applied to outbound D B same ACL can be called at a plurality of interfaces (Right
Answers ) D C.ACL defined rules, only progressive in this order 10,20,30
D D.ACL can not be used to filter OSPF traffic flow because OSPF does not use UDP protocol encapsulation
D E.ACL can match packets TCP I UDP port number.and you can specify a range of port numbers (Right Answers) Answe r: BE

82. When the router is powered on.reading configuration files from the default storage path for the router's initialization.If the
default storage path without configuration file,what wfll be used to initialize by the router?
D A.New Configuration
D B.initial configurat ion
D C default parameters (Right Answers)
D D.Current Configuration Answer: C

83. About the free ARP,which statement is true? (Multiple choice)

0 A by sending free ARP can confirm whether there is IP address conflict (Right Answers )
0 B.free ARP message format belongs to the ARP request message (Right Answers)
0 C.free ARP can help to update the IP address information
0 D.free ARP message format belongs to the ARP Reply message Answer:AB

84. The Router-ID of OSPFvJ can be automatically generated by the system.

QA. TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers> Answer: F

85. As shown in illustration,the four switches are all running STP,various parameters all use default values.

ROOT

Switch C
If switch C GO I 012 port is blocked,which cannot be sent via the port configuration bpdus,how long will the network port enter to the
forwarding state?
D A. about 30 seconds
D B.about 50 seconds (Right Answers )
D C.about 15 seconds
D D.about 3 seconds

86. Which of the following description about OSPF Router ID is not correct? (Multiple choice)
D A Router ID must be the same in the same area in different regions or different Router ID (Right Answers )
D B.Router ID must be an interface IP address of the router (Right Answers ) 0 C.Router ID must be specified by manual configuration
(Right Answers)
0 D.Prerequisites OSPF protocol is running the router Router ID Answer: ABC

87. Caught an Ethernet frame through caught tools,found that the valued of Type/Length field of the frame is Ox0800,which of the
dollowing description about the frame is correct? (Multiple choice)
D A the frame structure of the frame is Ethernet_ll format (Right Answers>

D B.the frame structure of the frame is 802.3 format

D C.the bearing of the frame is an IP message (Right Answers )
D D.the bearing of the frame is an IPX message Answer: AC

88. Network management hopes to effectively use the IP address of 192.168.176.0125 segment. The company Marketing
Department now has 20 hosts. Which of the following addresses are assigned to the marketing department?
D A. 192.168.176.0/25
0 B.192.168.176.160/27
0 c.192.168.176.48/29
D 0.192.168.176.96/27 (Right Answers ) Answer: D

89. Tracert in Huawei router diagnostic tool use UDP encapsulation tracking data.
0A.TRUE (Right Answers)
OB.FALSE

Answer: T

90. What's effect of Command port trunk allow-pass vlan?

D A That port allows all VLAN data frames go through (Right Answers )
D B.the peer port connected to that port must configure port trunk permit vlan all at the same time
D C.the connected peer port can dynamically decide which VLAN ID to go through
DD.If you configure the connected remote equipment with port defa ult vlan 3 commands,then the two devices'VLAN 3 can not
intercommunicate Answe r: A

91. The main function of lnAR is to solve each virtual circuit connection of the addresses of the agreement for the
equipment,including IP address and the IPX address ,etc.
0A TRUE (RightAnswers>
Q B.FALSE

Answer:T

92. In the transport layer of the OSI reference model,which of the following flow control can be used? (Multiple choice)
0A.Confirm technology
0 B caching technology (Right Answers >
D C source quench packets (Right Answers>
DD window mechanism (RightAnswers > Answer:BCD

93. When a router forwarding a packet.if no match to the corresponding spedfic routes andwhen there is no default route will
discard the packet directly.
0A. TRUE (Right Answers)
OB.FALSE

Answer: T

94. Which statement as shown about the VLAN configurat ion of Huawei is correct? (Multiple choice)

vla n 10
#
interface Giga bitEthernet0/0/1 port link-type access
port default vla n 10 GE0/0/2

LSWl

vlan 30
#
interface Giga bitf thernet0/0/3
port link-type trunk
port trunk allow-pass vla n 30

vlan 20
mac-vian mac-address 0022-0022-0022 priority 0
#
interface
Giga bitEthernet0/0/2 port hybrid untagged vlan 20 mac-vla n enable

vlan 40
#
interface GigabitEthernet0/0/4
port link-type hybrid port hybrid untagged vlan 40

D A Client 1belong to VLAN 10.and the command of the divis ion of VLAN swit ches correc t (Right Answers )
D B Chent2 belong to VLAN20 .and the command of switch MAC address of VLAN-based correct (Right Answers >
D C.Client3 belong to VLAN30 ,and the command of the division of VLAN switches correct
D D.Client4 belong to VLAN40,and the command of the division of VLAN switches correct

D E Client4 not belong to VLAN40 and the command of the division of VLAN on the switch command error (Right Answers >

95.[Huawe user-interface vty 0 14 [Huawei-ui-vty0-14) acl 2000 inbound [Huawei-ui-vty0-14) user privilege level 3
[Huawei-ui-vty0-14) authentication-mode password
Please configure the login password £: maximum length 16 £© :huawei
the user privilege leve l is set to leve l 3, which is the highest level that can be set. QA.TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F

96.[RTA] acl 2001

[RTA-acl-basic-2001] rule 20 permit source 20.1.1.0 0.0.255
[RTA-acl-basic-2001] rule 10 deny source 20.1.1.0 0.0.255
Completed as shown on the router RTA ACL configuratio n,the following descript ion is correct ( ). [RTA] acl 2001
D A. VRP system will automatically configure the order in order to adjust the first rule number 5
D B.VRP system does not adjust the orde r number, but will be configured to match the first rule permit source 20.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
D C.configuration errors, sequentially numbered rules must be small to large configurations
D D VRP system will sequentially numbered to match the second rule deny source 20 1 1.0 0 0.0.255 (Right Answers) Answer: D

97. As shown, Switch SWA is running RSTP,after adminstrator configuring the GO 0/3 of SWA as Edge Port,use a switch instead
of the host C,so the correct state ment of floowing is( ). SWA

HostA Host 8 Host C

D A. G0/0/3 Port of SWA will be closed after receiveing the switches send BPDU.
D 8.G0/0/3 Port of SWA will discard the received BPDU,then normal forwardingdata.
0 C.After GOI0/ 3 Port of SWA receiving BPDU,RSTP operation will be carried out. (Right Answe rs>
0 D.All hosts,only the host A can normalsend and receive data. Answer : C

98. Which of the following content is not included in the routing table?
0 A the source address (Right Answers>
0 B.next hop
0 C.the target network
0 D.the routing cost Answer :A

99. In a private network ,there is a host that wants to vist the Internet,to achieve this requirement ,the administrator should do the
following on the network edge router configuration? (Multiple choice)
0 A. NAT Easy IP (Right Answers >
0 B.DHCP
0 C.STP
D D.Default router (Right Answers) Answer: AD

100. Which statment of lnter-VLAN communication is correct? (Multiple choice)

D A VLAN between the communications can be achieved by single-arm routing (Right Answers)
D B VLAN between the communications can be achieved through layer 3 switches (Right Answers)
D C VLAN between the communications can not be achieved through layer 2 switches (Right Answers)
D D.VLAN between the communication can be achieved namely by GVRP
DE.VLAN between the communicat ions must rely on routers to achieve Answer :ABC

101.1Pv6 address do not include which of the following types of address?

D A.Unicast Address
D B.Multicast Address
D C broadcast address (Right Answers)
D D.anycast address Answer: C

102. Which description about the DD in the OSPF packet and LSA are correct? (Multiple choice)
0A.DDpacket contains informatio nof LSA
0 B.DD includes only the LSA header information in the packet (Right Answers>
0 C.LSA head can be uniquely identifies a LSA (Right Answers >
0 D.LSA head is only a small part of the LSA (Right Answers) Answe r: BCD

103. Huawei AR G3 series routers can update the system files through FTP and TFTP,which of the following description is correct?
(Multiple choice)
D A. AR G3 series routers can be used as FTP Client (Right Answers> D B.AR G3 series routers can be used as FTP Server (Right
Answers > D C AR G3 series routers can be used as TFTP Client (Right Answers ) D D.AR G3 series routers can be used as TFTP Server

Answer: ABC

104. Which of the following description about the PPP is correct ? (Multiple choice)
D A.For the physical layer,PPP supports asynchronous link and synchronous link (Right Answers)
D B.PPP extens ibility is bad,can not be deployed on the Ethernet link
D C.PPP supports plaintext and ciphertext (Right Answers )
D D.PPP supports a variety of network layer protocols.such as IPCP,IPXCP (Right Answers)
D E PPP supports to bundle multiple physical link is to increase the logical link bandwidth (Right Answers) Answer: ACDE

105. Frame Relay networks , DLCI interface is a virtual circuit identifier;it must remain globally unique in the planning and
deployment.
0A TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers> Answer: F

106.Which of the following about static routing in huaweiequipment priority is wrong?

D A static routing priority value 1n the range of 0-255 (Right Answers)
D B.static routing priority of the default value is 60
D C.static routing priority can be divided into internal and external priority priority,the administrator can change the priority
D .static routing priority value of 255 indicates which made unavailable

Answer :A

107. If administrator wants to update VRP of Router AR2200,the correct methods are ( ) (Multiple choice)
D A The administrator configures AR2200 as FTP chent , and transfer VRP software through FTP (Right Answers> D B The
administrator configures AR2200 as FTP server .and transfer VRP software through FTP (Right Answers> D C.The administrator
configures AR2200 as TFTP server,and transfer VRP software through TFTP
D D The administrator configures AR2200 as TFTP chent and transfer VRP software through TFTP (Right Answers)

Answer :ABO

108. Network administrators in order to constantly changing some office locations.thus often classified from different users access
the corporate network to switch VLAN 10,which way should be used to divide VLAN?
0 A.Port-based divide VLAN
D B.protocol based divide VLAN
D C.MAC address-based divide VLAN (Right Answe rs)
D D.Subnet based divide VLAN Answer: C

109.[RTA] aaa
[RTA-aaa] domain huawei
(RTA-aaa-domain-huawei] authentication-scheme au1 (RTA-aaa-doma in-huawei] authentication-sc heme au2
Network administrators configure is shown above on Huaweirouters RTA. if a user needs to process authentiation in the authentication
domain "Huawel",which of the following descript ion is correct?
D A.use "authentication-scheme au1" authentiation
0 B use the "authentication-scheme au2" authentiation (Right Answers)
D C.use the "authentication-scheme au1" authentiation,if "au1" is deleted,it will use "au2"
D D.use the "authentication-scheme au2" authentiation,if "au2" is deleted,it will use "au1" Answe r: B

110. View the Age time of RIP routing through the command on the router,what does Age time refer to?
0A.RIP message update interval
D B RIP routing aging time (Right Answers)
0 C.RIP routing suppression time
0 D.RIP routing switching time Answer: B

111. Alternate Port and Backup port in STP all can not forward user traffic,but can receive, process occurs and sends BPOU.
0A.TRUE (Right Answers)
QB.FALSE

Answe r: T

112. Refer to the following configuration,can judge the equipment GigabitEthernet0/0/0 of the IP address of the interface
configuration is wrong,because the IP address of the interface can not end in zero. [Huawei] interface GigabitEthe rnet0/0/0
[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/0) ip address 19.224.17.0 255.255.128.0
0A. TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers> Answe r: F

113. Which of the following protocols using Frame Relay addresses dynamically mapped to DLCI?
D A.ARP Protocol
D B.RARP Protocol
D C inARP Protocol (Right A nswers)
D D.map Protocol Answe r: C

114.<Huawei>reset saved-configuration Warning:The act on will delete the saved configuration in the
device
The configuration will be erased to reconfigure.Continue? [YIN ] £0
The adminstrator configurated on the AS2200 as above,so which of the following statement about the configuration information is
correct?
D A If users want to clear the saved configuration file ,you should select "Y" (Right Answers )
D B.Device startup configuration file will be retained
D C.If users want to clear the saved configuration file,you should select "N"
D D.Saved configuration file will be replaced with the running configuration file
Answe r: A

115. In Huawei devices,what are the methods of OSPF selecting Router ID of the following? (Multiple Choice)
D A If have configured the Loopback interface choosing the largest IP address from loopback interface as the Router ID (Right A nswers )
D B Ifdo not configure the Loopback interface select the largest IP address from other interface as the Router ID (Right Answers)
D C Huawei switches may use the largest IP address of VLANIF as the Router ID (Right Answers>
0 D.Use 127.0.0.1by default
D E Manually define an arbitrary legal Router ID (Right Answers ) Answer:ABCE

116. The following about Trunk port and the Access port ,which description is right?
0 A the Access port can only send the untagged frames (Right Answers>
0 B.the Access port can only send the tagged frame 0 C.the Trunk port can only send the untagged fra Trunk port can only send the
tagged frame Answer:A
117. Huawei equipment in the RIPprocess,not only can use the command to configure RIP route preference priority value,you can
specify the routing poficy after this command,to meet the conditions specified routing set priorityvalue.
0A TRUE (Right Answers>
OB. FALSE

Answe r: T

118. A switch directly connected to the specified port of the opposite end equipment through a port,but the port does not forward any
message,but can be monitored network changes by receiving BPDU,so what should be the role of the port?
0 A. Root port
0 8.Designated port
0 C Alternate port (Right Answers }
0 D.Disable port Answer : C

119. Which of the following about door of TIL field in the IP packet header is correct?
0 A.m defines the number of the source host can send packets
0 B.m defines the source host can send packets of interval
0 C.IP limit packet per passes through a router,mvalue is decremented by 1 (Right Answers>
0 D.IP limit packet per passes through a router,m value is incremented by 1

Answe r: C

120.VRP supports OSPFmulti-process,if youdo not specify a process IDwhen you enable OSPF,the default number of processes is ( ).
D A.O
D B.1 (Right Answers )
D c.10
D D.100

Answer: B

121. Which of the following WLAN standard operating in the 5 GHz frequency band? (Choose 2 Answers)
D A. 802 11a (Right Answers)
D B.802.11b
D c.802.11g
D D.802.11n (Right Answers) Answer: AD

Which of the following is routing protocol? (Multiple Choice)

A IP
B OSPF (Right Answers> C BGP (Right Answers>
.IPX

Answer: BC

123. In the frame relay network,which description is correct about mapping information in the DTE device? ()
D A local DLC with the remote IP address mapping (Right Answers)
D B.local IP address with remote DLC mapping
D C.local DLC with local IP address mapping
D D.remote DLC with the remote IP address mapping Answer: A

124. Which of the following parameters can not be used for advanced access control lists?
0 A Physical Interface (Right Answers)
0 B.destination port number
0 C.Protocol No.
0 D.timerange Answer:A

125. On Huawei AR G3 router,in VRP,Ping command's -i parameters is used to set ( )?

D A Send Echo Request packet interface (Right Answers >
D B.Send Echo Request packet's source IP address
D C.receive Echo Reply packets int erface
DD.receives Echo Reply messages destination IP address Answer:A

126. As shown,according to the configuration of the router R1,it can judge that the two PC can access ISP network normally.

LSWl
GE0/0/3
GE0/0/0

Client2 192.168.0.2

[Rl]acl number 2000

[R1-acl-basic-2000)rule5 permit source 192.168.0.0 0.0.0.255
#
[Rl]interface GigabitEt hemet0/0/0

200.100.1.1

QA.TRUE

[Rl-GigabitEthemet0/0/0 ]ip address 192.168.0.254 255.255.255.0

I*
[Rl]interface Giga bitEthemet0/0/1
[Rl-Giga bitEthernetO/O/l]ip address 200.100.1.2 255.255.255.252 [Rl-Giga bitEthernetO/O/l ]nat outbound 2000 easy-ip
#
[Rl]ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 200.100.1.1

0B FALSE (Right Answers>

127.[Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/1) port link-type trunk [Huawei-GigabitEthe rnet0/0/ 1) port default vtan 10 [Huawei-
GigabitEthernet0/0/2) port link-type trunk
(Huawei-GigabitEthernet0/0/2) port trunk allow-pass vtan 10
According to the command as shown above,which of the following description is correct? (Multiple choice)
D A GigabitEthernet0/0/1 port's PVID is 10 (Right Answers)
0 B.GigabitEthemet0/0/1 port's PVID is 1
0 C.GigabitEthernet0/0/2 port's PVID is 10
D D GigabitEthernet0/0/2 port's PVID is 1 (Right Answers) Answe r: AD

128.As shown,if run the command ping 10.1.1.2 on R1,then data frames of VLAN10 which LSW1 receives from LSW2 is labeled.

Rl LSWl

GE0/0/0

[Rl]interf ace Giga bitEt hernet0/0/0

[Rl- GigabitEthernetO/O/O]ip address 10.1.1.1255.255.255.0
#
[LSWl]interfa ce Giga bitEthernet0/0/1
[LSWl-GigabitEthernet0/0/1]port hybrid untagged vlan 1020 [LSWl-GigabitEthernet0/0/1) porthybridpvidvlan 10 [LSWl]interface
GigabitEthernet0/0/2
[LSWl- GigabitEt hernet0/0/2] port link-type trunk
(LSWl-GigabitEthernet0/0/2]porttrunkallow-passvlan 1020
#
(LSW2] interfa ce Giga bitEt hernet0/0/2
[LSW2- Giga bitEthernet0/0/2) port link-type trunk
[LSW2- GigabitEthernet0/0/2)port tru nk a llow-pass vlan 1020 (LSW2)interfacevlanif 10
[LSW2-Vla niflO]ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
0A TRUE {Right Answers)
OB.FALSE

LSW2

129.The command which is used toenable CHAP authe ntication in PPP is pppd chap authenticat ion
OA. TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers) Answer:F

130. Ethernet electrical interface can work inthree kinds ofduplex mode,which mode can Ethernet optical interface only work in?
D A full-duplex (Right Answers)
D B.half-duplex
D C.self-negotiation
D D.simplex

Answer:A

131. When a router configures OSPF,which of the followings must be configured manually? (Multiple Choice)
D A Configure Router ID
D B Open the OSPF process (Right Answers>
D C Create an OSPF area (Right Answers>
D D specify network segments that are contained in each region (Right Answers ) Answer:BCD

132. Which of the following are the characteristics of default VLAN in two-layer Ethernet switch? (Multiple choice)
D A. The default VLAN cannot be deleted manually (Right Answers)
D B By default.all switch ports are member ports of the default VlAN (Right Answers )
D C.must first create a default VLAN to assign ports for it
D D.configured IP address on the switch will only be applied to the member ports of the default VLAN Answe r: AB

133. Between two routers connected via the serial port and the link layer protocol is PPP,which of the following parameters must be
negotiated before the PPP link UP? (Multiple choice)
0 A MRU (Right Answers)
0 8.Authentication Password
D C. Magic-Number (Right Answers)
0 D.Authenticat ion Protocol (Right Answers ) Answer: ACD

134. Under Standard STP mode,which port of the following non-root switch will forward TC set BPDU generated by the root
switch?
D A.root port
D 8.backup port
D C designated port (Right Answers>
DD.Preparatory port Answer :C

135. The following description about layer 2 Ethernet switches,whic h is not correct?
D A.can learn the MAC address
D B needs to do some midifications on the forwarded packet's layer three head,then forward again (Right Answers )
D C.to forward according to the Ethernet frame's layer two head information
D D.layer 2 Ethe rnet switc hes working in data link layer Answe r: B

136.As shown,the host has been through a Telnet and establishes the connection between the router and about the data sent to the routefs
host by the host,which description is correct? (Multiple Choice)

SWA RTA

D A The desitmat1on MAC address that the host sends the data frame to 1s the router G0/0/0 interface's MAC address (Right Answers)
D B.The des itination MAC address that the host sends the data frame to is the swtic h's MAC address
D C.the host sending data segment's destination port number is 80
D D The desitination IP address that the host sends the data to is the router G0/0/0 interface's IP address (Right Answers ) Answer: AD

137. NAPT allows multiple private IP addresses through different port mapping to the same public IP address.which of the following
about NAPT description is correct?
D A.must manually configure port number, and the corresponding relation of private address
D B.only need to configure the port range
D C.don't need to do anything about port configuration (Right Answers)
D D.you need to use the ACL assigned port Numbers Answe r: C

138. Which of the following ways VRP support to configure the router through? (Multiple choice}
0 A.Through the Console port to configure the router (Right Answers)
0 B through Telnet to configure the router (Right Answers)
0 C through mini USB port to configure the route (Right Answers }
0 D.through FTP to configure the router Answer: ABC

139.A company to apply fora Class C IPaddresses,but to be assigned tosix subsidiary companies,one of the largest subsidiaries have 26
computers.Different subsidiary must be in different network segment,the subnet mask should be set to ( ).
0 A. 255.255.255.0
0 B.255.255.255.128
0 C.255.255.255.192
0 D 255.255 255.224 (Right Answers } Answer: D

140. Which of the following description about eSight is wrong?

D A.eSight can be used monitor and manage enterprise networks
D B eSight can only manage huawei's network equipment (Right Answers)
D C.eSight supports WLAN device management and monitoring of hot spot coverage
DD.eSightsupports configuration file backup andtraffic analysis Answe r: B

141. As shown,RTA with RIB G0/0/1 interface is configured with different network prefix 1Pv6 addresses,network administrators
are running OSPFv3 protocol on two routers, and configure with OSPFv3 Router-ID for each Router,then which following description is
correct? (Multiple Choice)

RTA RTB

loopbackO : 2031:7 :N64 loopbackl : 1.1.1.1/32

loopbackO :2032:3::D/64 loopbackl : 2.2.2.2/32

D A. RTA and RIB can establish OSPFv3 neighbor relationship (Right Answers )
D B.RTA and RIB can not establish OSPFv3 neighbor relationship
D C.RTA can ping RIB
D D.RTA cannot ping RTB (Right Answers)

Answe r: AD

142. VLSM can expand any IP network,including the Class D address.

QA.TRUE
QB FALSE (Right Answers )

Answer: F

143. As shown,the network administrator to configure the router finishe-0 Telnet and found the host can not establish a connection to
the router via Telnet. SWA RTA

Which of the following options can help solve this problem? (Multiple Choice)
D A.Check the host's ARP cache table overflow or not
D 8.Check the switch is configured with a default gateway address
D C.Use Ping to check the hosts and routers G0/0/0 IP between the interface connectivity (Right Answers)
D D Check the router is correct or not configured on Telnet (Right Answers)
Answer: CD

144. Which command can used to switch to user view in the system view?
0 A.system-view
0 B.souter
0 C.quit (Right Answers)
0 D.user-view Answer: C

145. As shown,about the topology and configuration of OSPF,which of the following statement is correct?

R1 R2

f Rl]interface Gigabit Ethernet0/0/0

[Rl-GigabitEthernet0/0/0)ip add ress 100.1.1.1255.255.255.0 [Rl-GigabitEthernetO/O/O)ospf network-type p2p
[Rl-GigabitEthernetO/O/O)ospf dr-priority 100 [Rl-GigabitEt hernetO/O/O)ospf timer hello 20 [Rl]ospf 1
[R1-ospf-l)area 0.0.0.0
[Rl-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0]network 100.1.1.10.0.0.0
It
{R2)interface Gigabit Ethernet0/0/0
f R2-GigabitEthernetO/O/O)ip add ress 100.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
[R2)ospf 1
[R2-ospf -l)a rea 0.0.0.0
[R2-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0]network 100.1.1.2 0.0.0.0
D A.R1 and R2 can establish stable OSPF neighbor relationship
D B.As long as restoring the interface network type of R1to the default type of broadcasting,R1 and R2 can create a stable neighbor
relationship
D C.as long as restoring the interface network type of R1 to the default type of broadcasting,while adjusting hello time to 10S.R1 and R2
can create a stable neighbor relationship (Right Answers >
D D.R1 compared with R2,R2 have the opportunity to become the DR. because its DR priority value of interface is smaller.

146.[R1) display interface g0/0/0

GigabitEthernet0/0/0 current state:Administratively DOWN Une protocol : DOWN Which description is correct about above display
information?
D A. Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 interface connect an error cables
D B.Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 interface did not configure IP address
D C.Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 interface dynamic routing protocol is not enabled
D D Gigabit Ethernet 0/0/0 interface manually shut down by the administrator (Right Answers)

Answer: D

147. Administrators found two routers in the establishment of OSPF neighbors to stay in TWO-WAY state ,which of the following
description is correct? A. routers configured with the same process ID 8.Router configure<l with the same area ID C.router configuration
wrong Router ID 0.Both routers are broadcast networks OR Other routers

Answer: D

148. As shown, using IPsec VPN to transfer data between two hosts,in order to hide the realIP address and as high as possible to
ensure data,which model and protocol encapsulation of IPsec VPN are better? (Multiple Choice)

.,.• • -,74 IPseoTunnel I

D A.AH
D B.Transfer Mode
D C.Tunnel mode (Right Answers>
0 D.ESP (Right Answers >

Answer : CD

149. Huawei devices can be managed by using the Telnet protocol,about the management functions,which of the following statement
is correct?
D A.Telnet default port number is 22,cannot be modified
D B Telnet VTY interfaces must be turned on,and the maximum is 15 (Right Answers)
0 C.Telnet does not support authentication of user name and password
0 D.Telnet does not support the deployme nt of ACLto increase security Answe r: B

150. On the switch,which VLAN can use the undo command to delete? (Multiple Choice)
D vlan 1
D B vlan 2 (Right Answers)
D C vlan 1024 (Right Answers)
D D vlan 4094 (Right Answers) Answer : BCD

151.At the comma nd fr ma p ip 10.1.1.2 200, what is the meaning of the n umber 200?
0 A.the opposite end logical channel number
DB.home termi nal DLCI number (Right Answers)
0 C.the opposite end interface number
0 D.the opposite end node number Answer: B

152. As shown,deploy static NAT command on router R1,when PC access the Internet ,the destination address in data packet will not
be changed.

PC

192.168.0.2

Rl ISP

202.10.1.1

[R l]interface Giga bitEtherneU/0/0

[Rl-GigabitEthernetl/0/0 ] ip address 192.168.0.1255.255.255.0
#
[R l]interface Giga bitEthernet2/0/0
[Rl-Giga bitEthernet2/0/0]ip address 202.10.1.2 255.255.255.0
[Rl]nat staticglobal 202.10.1.3 inside 192.168.0.2 netmask 255.255.255.255
[Rl] iproute-static 0.0.0.00.0.0.0202.10.1.1
0A.TRUE (Right Answers >
OB.FALSE

153. The company has a network AR2200 doas not start property, an administrator wants to update its VRP,how to achieve?
D A.Administrators need to use the console cable to connect the router and the host, and then enter the BootROM interface can complete
the upgrade
D B Administrators need to be configured AR2200 as an FTP client,use FTP to transfer the new VRP (Right Answers)
0 C.Administrators need to configure to obtain an IP address throu gh DHCP when AR2200 start s,and then to get the VRP system files
via TFTP
D D.Administrators need to use Telnet on the local host to remote update equipment of VRP systemfiles equipment Answe r: B

154.[RTA] acl 2002

[RTA-aci-basic-2002) ruledenysource 172161.10.0.0.0
[RTA-acl-basic-2002) rule deny source 172 16.0.0 0.255.0.0
Use ACL shown above to match routing entry on the router RTA,which of the following entry will be matched? (Multiple choice)
0 A 172 16 11/32 (Right Answers>
0 B. 172.16.1.0/24
0 C.192.17 0.0/24
0 D 172 18 0 0/16 (Right Answers> Answer : AD

155. Host A get IP address from OHCP server after the restart,then when restart which message will be sent to OHCP Server A?
0A.OHCPDISCOVER
0 B OHCPREQUEST (Right Answers>
0 C.OHCP OFFER
0 0.DHCPACK

Answer: B
156. ACL on AR G3 series routers supports two match orders:configuration order and automatic sorting.
0A TRUE (Right Answers)
Q B.FALSE
Answer: T

157. Switch which runs STP sends BPDU.Which of the following statement about BPDU is correct? (Multiple choice)
D A frame which BPDU use is IEEE 802.3 standard (Right Answers )
D B.frame which BPDU use is Ethernet IIstandard
D C.Control field value of BPDU frame is 3 (Right Answers)
D D.destination MAC address of BPDU frame is broadcast address Answe r: AC

158.Refer to the output result as shown , it can determine the routing table ofthe router is composed of direct routes and static routes, and
routing priority value of direct routes cannot be modified.

<Huawei>dis ip routing-table
Route Flags: R - relay, D - download to fib

Routing Tables: Public Destinations :9 Routes :9

Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Flags NextHop Interface

0A. TRUE (Right Answers)

OB.FALSE

Answer: T

159. In RSTP standard,the switch directly connected to the terminal not linked to other bridge port,this is defined as ().
0 A Fast port
0 B.backup port
0 C.Root Port
0 D edge port (Right Answers> Answer :0

160. When Access port receives the same data frame of VLAN ID and PVID, peel off the VLAN ID, and then forwarded directly.
QA. TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers> Answer: F

161. When sending packets acess type of port,it will (

D A.sending packets with Tag's
D B stripped VLAN informat ion packets and then sent out (Right Answers>
0 C.add VLAN information packets and then sent out
0 D.marked PVID information in this port, and then sent out Answe r: B

162. Huawei devices can use the command undo summary to prohibit automatic summary of routing protocol RIPv2
QA TRUE (Right Answers>
OB.FALSE

Answer:T

163. lf the network address of network is 10.1.1.0/30,then what is its broadcast address?
D A. 10.1.1.1
D B.10.1.1.2
D C. 10.1.1.3 (Right Answers)
DD.10.1.1.4

Answe r: C

164. On VRP platform.direct routing,static routing,RIP,OSPF default protocol priority from high to low order is ().
D A.direct routing, static routing, RIP, OSPF
D B direct routing OSPF static routing RIP (Right Answers>
D C.direct routing, OSPF RIP static routing
DD.direct routing,RIP static routing,OSPF Answer :B

165. As shown,three switches are running GVRP,create VLAN 10 and VLAN 20 on the SWA and SWC, created VLAN 10 on
SWB. SWB through GVRP dynamically learn to VLAN 20 from the SWA and SWC. If you modify the SWB G0/0/ 1 port to GVRP's the
fixed mode ,which of the following description is correct?
HostA HostB Host e
VlAN 10 VlAN 20 VLAN 10
D A.Host A can continue to communicate with the host C (Right Answ ers)
D 8.Host 8 can continue to communicate with the host 0
D C.Host belong to the same VLAN can continue to communicate
D 0.All hosts can not communicate with any other host

HostD
VLAN 20

Answer: A

166.Onarouter,MACaddressoftheG0/0/1interfaceisOOEO-FC03-
AA73,1Pv6addressforthisinterfaceis20012EO:FCFF:FE03:AA73,accordingtothisinformation,itcandeterminetheinterfaceidentifierofthis
interfaceisbasedon().
0 A.DHCPv6
DB.Auto-link
D C.ARP
D D.EUl-64 (Right

Answers ) Answer: D

167. In the PPP,when both ends of the communicating partiesj- detected physical link activated,will switch fro m the link unavailable
phase to link established phase.In this phase, it mainly negotiate link parameters through () protocol. D A.IP
0 B.DHCP
D C LCP (Right Answers)
D D.NCP

Answe r: C

168. About the RIP routing protocol,which of the following description is correct?
D A.the router cannot send the routing entry of 16 hops to its directly connected neighbors
D B.the router might receive directly connected neighbors who sent to routing entry of 16 hops,but will be discarded immediately after
receiving,and no longer do other processing
D C.the router might receive directly connected neighbors sent to routing entry of 16 hops,will use it to update their routing table after
receiving (Right Answers>
D D.the router might send the routing entry of 16 hops to its directly connected neighbors;but after directly connected neighbors
receives;it will not use it to update its routing table. Answe r: C

169.Which of the following storage media are Huawei routers commonly used storage media? (Multiple Choice)
0 A SDRAM (Right Answers > D B NVRAM (Right Answers ) D C.Flash (Right Answers)
D D.Hard Disk
D E.SD Card (Right Answers) Answe r: ABCE

170.Two-layer Ethernet switch based on () of the message which port receives generates entries of MAC address table.
D A source MAC address (Right Answers>
D B.destination MAC address
D C.source IP address
D D.Destination IP address

Answer :A

171.In OSPF broadcast network ,which routerwill a DR Otherrouters exchange link state information with? (Multiple choice)
0 A DR (Right Answers> 0 B BDR (Right Answers> 0 C.DR Other
0 D.All OSPF neighbors Answer : AB

172. As shown,H-frame contains IP message which is sent from Host A to Host B,the destination MAC address of the H-frame is ( ).
RTA RTB RTC
G0/0/l G0/0/0

I HFramel
Host A
DA G0/0/1 interface MAC address of RTB
D B.G0/0/1 interface MAC address of the RTC
DC.Host B'sMAC address
D D.RTC's G0/0/0 interface MAC address (Right Answers >

Host B

Answer: D

173. Deploy a DHCP seiver on network ,but the administrator found that some hosts did not access to specified address by the
DHCP server correctly,what are the possible reasons? (Multiple Choice)
D A There is another one to make the audience more efficient network DHCP server (Right Answers )
D B part of the DHCP seiver host can not communicate properly with these host client system automatically generates an address within
the range 169.254.0.0 (Right Answers) D C.Part HSBC unit can not communicate properly with the DHCP server;the abundance of native
client system automatically generates a range of addresses in the 127.254.0.0 D D DHCP server address pool have all been allocated
(Right Answers)

Answer: ABO

174. On the VRP platform,what is the role of the command "interface vlan vlan-id"?
D A. Creating a VLAN
D B.Create or enter VLAN interface view (Right Answers)
D C.configure VLAN for one port
D D.No such command Answe r: B

175. A windows host initialstartup,if you cannot obtain an IP address from a DHCP server ,then which of the following IP address
may the host use?
0 A. 0.0.0.0
0 B. 127.0.0.1
0 C. 169.254.2.33 (Right Answers )
0 0.255.255.255.255

Answer: C

176. Huaweidevice,administrators can declare a subnet in RIPv2,the reason is RIPv2 supports VLSM.
QA.TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers> Answer: F

177. Admi nistrator want to upgrade configuration files for AR2200 through the USS cable,which of the following description is
right? (Multiple Choice)
0 A.Use the mini USE cables to connect the PC and AR2200 miniUSS interface (Right Answers)
0 S.use the mini USB cable to connect the PC and AR2200 USS interface
0 C.AR2200 does not support the use of USS to update the configuration file
0 D After connecting the cable, the administrator needs to install drivers for mini USB (Right Answers) Answer: AD

178.

The above information is the interface status information on a switch running STP displayed .Based on this information,which ofthe
following description is wrong?
0 A.This network may only contain this switch.
0 B.This switch may be the root switch of the network.
0 C.This switch is a non-designated switch connected to the network. (Right Answers >
0 D.The switch may be connected to the six other switches.

Answer : C

179.As shown,the host A and the host 8 hope to achieve inter-VLAN traffic through the router-on-a-stick, which configuration should be
done under the G0/0/1.1 interface of the RTA?

RTA
Vla n lO Vlan20
Gateway : 10.0.1.254 Gateway , 10.0.2.254
0 A.dot1qtermination vid 1
0 8 dot1qtermination vid 10 (Right Answers)
0 C.dot1q termination vid 20
0 D.dot1q termination vid 30

180.The following description about 1Pv6,which is right? (Multiple Choice)

D A. 1Pv6 address length is S4 bits
D B 1Pv6 address length 1s 128 bits (Right Answers>
D C when a 1Pv6 packet have multiple extension head extended head must appear orderly (Right Answers>
D D.when a 1Pv6 packet have multiple extension head, extended head can appear randomly Answer :BC

181. When using Telnet way to login the router,whic h severalkinds of authentication can be cheesed? (Multiple Choice)
0 A Password authentication (Right Answers) 0 B.AAA local authentication (Right Answers > 0 C.MD5 ciphertext authentication
0 D.No authentication Answe r: AB

182. As shown,PTA's G0/0/0 and G0/0/1 interface are connected to two different network segments,RTA,as these two networks
gateways . Before Host A sends data to the host in C,will first send ARP Request to get ( ) MAC address

RTA

Host A Hosts Hoste Hosto

D A.Host C
D 8.RTACs G0/0/0 interface (Right Answers) D C.RTACs G0/0/1interface
D D.SWA

183. When an-image-file in the sende r transmit via network using the application software.the TCP/IP encapsulation process pass
through is: Date-Data Segment -Data Packet-Data Frame-Data Stream.
0A TRUE (Right Answers)
OB. FALSE

Answe r: T

LSW2
32768.00ec-fc23-4567

LSW3
32768.00ec-fc34-5678

As following ,the incorrect statement is ( ).

D A. After the comparison of the bridge ID,LSW1 is Root Bridge
D B.G0/0/2 port of LSW1 is in blocked status
D C.G0/0/1 port of LSW3 is AP port,which is in blocked status
D D.Both the two ports of LSW1 are the designated port,which are in forward status (Right Answers )

185.Which one of the following does not be included in VRP system login ways?
0A.Telnet
0 B.SSH
0 C.Web
0 D.Netstream (RightAnswers) Answer: D

186.<Quidway>display mac-address

MAC Address VLANINSI Learned-From Type

5489-98ec-f018 1/- GE0/0/13 dynamic

Total items displayed = 1
As the Display information shown.when the switch need to forwarded the 5489-98ec-f011 frame of the destination MAC address.the
correct description as following is ( ).
0 A.Switch needs to find the device that the MAC address is 5489-98ec-f011by sending a request
0 B.Switch will send the destination unreachable message to the source device
0 C Switch wil flood the frame to all the ports except the port which recieved this frame (Right A nswers)
0 0.Swithc does not found

the matched entries in

the MAC address table, so it willdiscard the frame

Answer: C

187. Which version of the SNMP protocol eSight support? (Multiple Choice}
188. 0 A SNMPv1 (Right Answers>
189. 0 B.SNMPv2
190. D C SNMPv2c (Right Answers>
191. D 0 SNMPv3 (Right Answers> Answer: ACD

192. Which of the following description is correct? ( ) (Multiple Choice)

D A.the next hop routing tables are redundant,with the interface can guide the packet forwarding D B.through different routing protocol
obtained routing;its prority is not the same (Right Answers) D C.different routing protocol defined by the metrics values comparable
D D.different routing protocol defined by the metrics values not comparable (Right Answers ) Answer: BO

189. When establish IPsec tunnel between two routers,which of the following parameters do not need to ensure consistency betwee n
the IPsec peers?
D A.security protocol which is used
D B.data encapsulation mode
D C.Proposal name (Right Answers )
D D.authenticatio nalgorithm

Answe r: C

190. As shown,the four switc hes are running STP,various parameters have default values.

ROOT

When a port of the root switch blocked and cannot send configuration BPOU via the port, how long will blocked ports in the network
enter to the forwarding state after?
D A. about 30 seconds
D 8 about 50 seconds (Right Answers )
D C.about 15 seconds
D 0.about 3 seconds

191. Configure the router through the Console,which is the correct program configured of a terminalemulation? ( ).
0 A. 4800bps.8 data bits .1stop bit odd parity and no flow control
0 B.9600bps.8 data bits 1stop bit no parity and no flow control (Right Answers)
0 C.9600bps.8 data bits .1stop bit,even parity andhardware flowcontrol
0 D. 19200bps .8 data bits .1 stop bit no parity and no flow control Answe r: B

192. Which of the following description about spanning tree designated port is correct?
D A.Each switch only has one des ignated port
D B Specify ports can be forwarded configuration BPDU message to the connected network (Right Answers)
D C.The port on root switch must not be a specified port
D 0.The specified port forwarding configuration BPDU packe from this switch reach to the root switch Answe r: B

193. In the frame relay network,it has configured a static MAP under one interface,if it continues to configure the fr inarp
command,then this interface will send the Inverse ARP require message to the opposite end,cover the static MAP record at the same time.
0A. TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F

hich of the following command can check whether the OSPF have esta blished neighbor relationship correctly or not? display ospf
neighbor
isplay ospf brief
C display ospf peer (Right Answers>
D.display ospf interface

Answer : C

195. Administrators found it impossible to transfer files via TFTP to Huawei AR2200 router,what is the possible reason?
D A. routers disable the TFTP service
D B.TFTP server's number TCP69 port is disabled
D C.TFTP server's number UDP69 port is disabled (Right Answers )
D D.TFTP server's username and password are modified Answe r: C

196. Which of the following commands can be use-0 to check the session status of PPPoE client?
D A.display ip interface brief
D B.display current-configuration
D C.display pppoe-client session packet
D D.display pppoe-client session summary (Right Answers) Answe r: D

197. AR2200 route via PSPFand RIPv2 learn at the same time to reach the same network's router entry,Cost values of routing
learned through OSPF is 4882,Hops routes learned via RJPv2 is 4,the routing table of the router with ().
D A.RIPv2 Routing
D B.The routing of OSPF and RIPv2 0 C OSPF Routing (Right Answers ) 0 D.Both do not exist

Answer : C

198. An error occurred when customers access to the FTP server,checked and found the connectivity between the server and the
client is no problem,which serve r port is blocked that may be a problem caused?(Multiple Choice)
D A 21 (Right Answers)
D B. 80
D C 20 (Right Answers>
DD.50649

Answer: AC

199. Which function of the OSPF hello message as follows? (Multiple Choice)
D A.the neighbors found (Right Answers)
0 B.release Router ID.Router Priority and so on parameters information (Right Answers)
0 C.maintain neighbor relations (Right Answers )
0 D.synchronizing router LSDB Answer : ABC

200. Administrator want to completely delete the old equipment configuration file conflg.zip,then which of the following command
is correct?
D A.delete/force config zip
D B. delete/unreserved config zip (Right Answers)
D C.reset config zip
D D.clear config zip Answer: 8

201. Under the Huawei AR router's command line interface,the role of the Save command is to save the current systemtime.
QA. TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers> Answe r: F

202. When saving the configuration file of the router, it usually will be saved on which of the following storage medium?
O A SDRAM
0B VRAM
0 C Flash (Right Answers >
0 D.Boot ROM

Answer:C

203. Which description is correct about this command? ip route-static 10 0 12 0 255 255 255 0 192 168.1.1
0A.This command is configured with a route to reach the 192.168.1.1network
0 B This command is configured with a route to reach the 10 0.12.0 network (Right Answers)
0 C.The route priority is 100
0 D.Ifthe router to learn the route and the route to the same destination network through other protocols ,routers will prefer this route
Answer : B

204. These are the thre e data packets captured by administrator in the network. Source Destination Protocol Info
10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [SYN] Seq=O Win=8192 Len=O MSS=1460
10.0.12.2 10.0.12.1 TCP telnet > 50190 [SYN £• ACK] Seq=O Ack=1 Win=8192 Len=O MSS=1460
10.0.12.1 10.0.12.2 TCP 50190 > telnet [ACK] Seq=1Ack=1Win=8192 Len=O Which of the following statement is not correct?
D A.The three data packet s represent the TCP three-way handshake process
D B Telnet server's IP address is 10 .0 12.1 IP address of the Telnet client is 10.0.12.2 (Right Answers)
D C.The three data packet s are not included in the application layer data
D D.Telnet client is to use to establish a connection with the server port 50190 Answer : B

roadcast address is a special address that all the hosts are set as 1in the network address,it also can be used as host addresses.
RUE
8 FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F

206.The Backup port in RSTP can replace a failed root port.

OA. TRUE
08 FALSE (Right Answers> Answer:F

207.What are the types as following are supported by OSPF protocol? (Multiple Choice)
0 A Pomt-to-Pomt (Right Answers )
0 B Broadcast (Right Answers )
0 C Non-Broadcast Mulh-Access (Right Answers )
0 D Pomt-to-Mult1pomt (Right Answers )

Answer : ABCD

208. .When using link aggregation technology to interconnect betwee n the two switches,which of the following conditions need to
be met by each member port? (Multiple Choice)
D A.The number of physical ports connected to both ends should be consistent (Right Answers )
D B The rate of physical ports connected to both ends should be consistent (Right Answers)
D C.The duplex mode of physicalports connected to both ends should be consistent (Right Answers )
D D.The physical number of physical ports connected to both ends should be consistent
D E.The used optical module type of physical ports connected to both ends should be consistent Answer: ABC

209. Network management workstation manages network equipment through the SNMP protocol,when the managed devices have an
exception occurs,what kind of SNMP message will be received by Network management workstation?
D A.get-response message
D B.set-request message
D C.trap message (Right Answers )
D D.get-request message Answer : C

211. Under the VRP interface,using the command delete or unreserved vrpcfg.zip can not delete files,you must empty the Recycle
Bin to completely delete the file.
QA.TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers> Answer: F

212. About the role and packet encapsulation of APR protocol,the correct description is ( ).
0 A.The Inverse ARP in ARP is used to analysis the device name
0 B.It can get the MAC address and UUID address of destination port through ARP protocol
0 C.ARP protocol support the deployment on the PPP link and HDLC link
0 D.ARP protocol is based on Ethernet encapsulation (Right Answers) Answer: D

213.Topology and configuration are shown as the following, so it can esta blish an Eth-Trunk logical link between two switches, and the
LSW2 as the drive end.

LSWl LSW2

(LSWl)lacp priority 100

It
(LSWl)interface Eth-Trunkl
(LSWl-Eth-Trunkl)mode lacp-static
(LSWl-Eth-Trunkl)max active-linknum ber 2
It
[LSWl)interface GigabitEthernet0/0/1 (LSWl-GigabitEthernetO/O/ l)eth-trunk 1
(LSWl-GigabitEthernet0/0/l)lacp priority 100
fl
[LSW1)interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 [LSW1-GigabitEthernet0/0/2)eth-tr unk 1
[LSW1-Giga bitEthernet0/0/2)1acp priority 100
OA. TRUE
0B. FALSE (Right Answers>

[LSW2)1acp priority 200

It
[LSW2)interface Eth-Trunkl
(LSW2- Eth-Trunkl)mode lacp-static
(LSW2- Eth-Trunkl]max active-linknumber 2
It
(LSW2)interface Giga bitEthernet0/0/1 (LSW2- GigabitEthernet0/0/l)eth-trunk 1 It
(LSW2)interface GigabitEthernet0/0/2 [LSW2- GigabitEthernet0/0/2]eth-trunk 1

Answer: F

214. As shown,RTA is a DTE devices which connect to a frame relay switch,if RTA creates the PVC link using dynamic mapping,then
which command as following does not require to configure on the RTA? ((Multiple Choice)
DLCl30

0 A. [RTA-Serial1/0/1) ip address 172.16.1.124

D B.[RTA-Serial1/0/1) link-protocol fr
0 C.[RTA-Serial1/0/1) fr interface-type dte (Right Answers >
0 D.[RTA-Serial1/0/1) fr inarp (Right Answers >

Answer: CD

215..If two IPsec VPN peers want to use both AH and ESPto ensure secure communications.so what is the number of SA (Security
Association)the two peers need to build?
D A. 1 D B.2 D C. 3
D D.4 (Right Answers)

Answer: D

216.Trunk portcanallow multiple VLAN gothrough,including

VLAN4096. QA.TRUE
QB.FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F

217 : Interface Gigabit Ethernet0/01 port link \type trunk Port trunk allow \pass vlan 2 to 4094
According to the above shown command output,which of the following description is correct? (Multiple Choice)
0 A.GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is not allowed VLAN1 to go through
0 B GigabitEthernet0/0/1 is allowed VLAN 1to go through (Right Answers )
0 C.If you want GigabitEthernet0/0/1port to become Access port,need to use the command "undo port trunk allow-pass vlan all "to clear
the default configuration firstly
0 D If you want GigabitEthernetO I 011 port to become Access port,need to use the command "undo port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 to 4094
"to clear

default configuration firstly (Right Answers ) Answe r: BO

218.The election of root switch in STP is based on comparing the switch priority,but in RSTP,will both compare the switch priority and
MAC address.
QA. TRUE
0B.FALSE (Right Answers ) Answer: F

219.[Router] ip pool pool1

[Router-ip-pool-poo11] network 10.10.10.0 mask 255 .255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-pool1] gateway-list 10.10.10.1 (Router-ip-pool-pool1] quit
[Router] ippool pool2
(Router-ip-pool-pool2] network 10.20.20.0 mask 255 .255.255.0
[Router-ip-pool-poo12] gateway-list 10.20.20.1 (Router-ip-pool-pool2] quit
[Router] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[Router-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ipaddress 10.10.10.124
[Router-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] dhcp select global
Administrators have the configurat ion on Router as described above.then the host which connected to G1/0/0 interface of this router will
get what kinds of IP address through DHCP?
D A. The IP address of this host got belongs to the 10.10.10.0/24 Network (Right A nswers)
D B.The IP address of this host got belongs to the 10.20.20.0/24 Network
D C.This hose can not obtain IP address
D D.The IP address of this host got may belong to the 10.10.10.0/24 Network,may also belong to the 10.20.20.0/24 Network
Answe r: A

220. .As shown, RTA as PPPoE client sends PADImessage to server A,Server A replies PADO message

'l:O. S\·"iA .el\'tf A

=.:..:i FAJC,:.

•:A:)1 IJ

=;.,!)1
--+

Thereinto.what frame the PADO message is?

D A.

Unicast (Right Answers>

0 8.Multicast D C.Broadcast D 0. Anycast

Answer: A

221. As shown in illustration,the Serial1/0/1interface in RTA uses command "IP address unnumbered interface loopback O" to
configure address to borrow,whic h the following description is correct? (Multiple Choice)
D A.the IP address of the RTA interface Serial 1/0/1is 10.1.1.1/24
D B.the IP address of the RTA interface Serial 1/011 is 10.1.1.1/32 (Right Answers ) D C.the routing table of RTA exist a 10.1.1.0/24
routing entry
0 D.the routing table of RTA does not exist a 10.1.1.0/24 routing entry (Right Answers >

Answer : BO

222. About the STP, what is the incorrect description as following? (Multiple Choice) D A There is only one designated switch in a
switched network (Right Answers ) D B All ports of the root SW1tch are the root ports (Right Answers>
D C.All ports of the root switch are the designated ports
D D The swithc W1th the mm1mum switch pnonty value m the switched network will be the non-root switch (Right Answers> Answer
:ABO

223. Through RIP, OSPF and static routing,a router has learned a routing to the same destination address from the three of them. By
default,what kind of routing learned from which protocol the VRP eventually will choose?
0 A. RIP
0 B OSPF (Right Answers >
0 C.Choose all the routing learnd from the three protocols
0 D. Static routing Answer: B

224. .Administrators want to configure a static floating route to achieve the route backup,then the correct implementation method is (
).
D A Administrator needs to configure different protocol priority values for mainly static routing and alternate static routing (Right
Answers>
D B.Administrator only need to configure two static routes
D C.Administrator needs to configure different TAG for mainly static routing and alternate static routing
D D.Administrator needs to configure different metrics for mainly static routing and alternate static routing Answer: A

225. .The full name ofVRP is (

). D A.Versatile Routine Platform D B.Virtual Routing Platform D C.Virtual Routing Plane
D D Versatile Routing Platform (Right Answers >

Answer: D

226. Port cost STP port bandwidth calc ulation and a certain relationship,that the greater the bandwidth,the ( ) the overhead .
D A Small (Right Answers)
D B.Large
D C.consistent
D D.is not sure Answer: A
227. After the network fault occurs ,the administrator through the investigation found that a router's configuration is changed,and
then what can the administrators do to prevent this situation from happening again? (Multiple Choice}
A administrators should configure all devices (except the account administrator) login privilege level 0 (Right Answers )
B administrators should configure AAA for authentication and authorization of users logging (Right Answers)
C administrators should configure the ACL to control only the administrator can log device (Right Answers ) D.The administrator should

enable port-securit y on the route of administration port

Answer: ABC

228: If the network address of a network is 192.1S8 .1.0,then its broadcast address must be 192.168.1.255.
QA. TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers> Answer: F

228. .The following figure shows the routingtable ofa router,when the router receives a packet which destination IP is 9.1.1.1,the
router will forward according to the 9.1.0.0/16 route,since the route matching the destination address 9.1 .1.1 has mo re digits.

<Huawei>displa y ip routing-ta ble

Route Fla gs: R - relay, D - downloa d to fib

0A.TRUE (Right Answers> OB.FALSE

Answer:T

230. VRP operating system commands divided into access , monitor,configure ,and manage grade 4 level Which level can run a
variety of business configuration commands but can not run operations of the file system? 0 A. Access Level
0 B. Monitoring level
0 C Configuration level (Right Answers >
0 D.Management Class Answer : C

231. On Huaweidevices £•if authorizing with AM authentication,when the remote server is not responding, it can authorize the
device from the network side .
0A TRUE (Right Answers>
OB. FALSE

Answer: T

232. When proceeding the configuration related to AAA. certified on Huawei AR G3 series routers,how many domains can be
configured at most?
D A.30 (Right Answers}
DB.31
0 c.32
0 D.33

Answe r: A

233. .A port of the switch is configured as a trunk port,now intends a host connected to the port to access the network. The following
operations are necessary ( ).
0 A.Delete multiple VLAN on the port in the global view
0 B.Delete multiple VLAN on the port in interface view
0 C.Close the interface,and then re-enable to restore the default configuration
0 D The interface is configured as an access port (Right Answers ) Answe r: D

234. .Port aggregation is aggregate multiple ports together to form an aggregation group,in order to achieve eac h member ports load
balancing.Port Aggregation is implemented on ().
D A.Physical Layer
D B.Data link layer (Right Answers)
D C.Network Layer
D D.Transport Layer Answer: B

235. .When configuring a AR2220 Router as a PPPoE client,which of the following configuration is not needed?
D A. Configure dial rule
D B.Configure dial interface
D C.Configure IP address on the dial interface (Right Answers)
D D.Configure password on the dial interface Answer: C

236.In the VRP operat ing system,how to enter the OSPF area 0 view? (Multiple Choice)
D A.[Huawei] ospf area 0
D B [Huawei-ospf-1] area 0 (Right Answers)
D C.[Huawei-ospf-1] area 0.0 0 0 (Right Answers)
D D.[Huawei-ospf-1] area 0 enable Answe r: BC

237.If using Gigabit optical modules to interconnec two Huawei S5710 switches ,the work pattern of network port is full- duplex mode by
default.
0A TRUE (Right Answers)
Q B.FALSE
Answer True
238.The broadcas t address of 192.168.1.0/25 su bnet is 192.168.1.128.
QA.TRUE
QB.FALSE (Right Answers )
Answe r: F

239. .Below is data packet encapsulation format in the IPsec VPN,which mode does this type of data packets use IPsec VPN to
encapsulate?

D 8.Transfer Mode
D C.Tunnel mode (Right Answers>
D D.The encapsulation False Answer : C

240. .If in the process of the PPP authentication,the authenticated sends a False username and password to the authenticator .what
type of packets will the authenticator sent to the authenticated?
D A.Authe nticate-Ack
DB.Authenticate-Nak (RightAnswers)
D C.Authe nticate-Reject
D D.Authenticate-Reply Answer: B

241. Link aggregation is the common technology in the enterprise network.

Which of the following description is the advantage of link aggregation? (Multiple Choice)
0 A.implement load sharing (Right Answers) 0 B increase the bandwidt h (Right Answers) 0 C improve reliability (Right Answers )
D D.improve security

Answer: ABC

242. As shown,the switch uses the default parameters to run STP,which of the following ports will be elected to specified port?

Answer: A

243 .After the adminstrator via Telnet login to the router successfully,and find that it cannot configure the router's interface IP
address,what's the possible reason?
D A.Telnet terminal software that the administrator uses does not allow the corresponding operat ion
D B.Telnet user's authentication way is wrong
D C.Telnet user's level configuration is wrong (Right Answers )
D D.SNMP parameter configuration is wrong Answe r: C

244. Whic h of following 1Pv6 address can be manually configured on the router interface? D A.fe80 ·13dc:-1/64 (Right
Answers)
D B.ffll0:8a3c:9b/64 D c.:1/128
DD.2001·12e3:1b02:21/64 (RightAnswers)

Answer: AD

245. .VLSM's role is:on the class's basis of the IP address ,divide corresponding bits fro m the host portion and take it as the network
bits.However,when deploying on the router,you need routing protocols support.
0A.TRUE (Right Answers ) OB.FALSE

Answer: T
246 .About 1Pv6 address 2031:0000:720C:0000:0000:09E0:839A:1308, Whic h of th e following abbreviations are correct?(Multip
0 A 2031:0:720C:0·0:9E0:839A:1308 (Right Answers >
D B. 2031:0:720C:0:0:9E:839A:130B
D C.2031::720C::9E0:839A:130B
D D. 2031:0:720C::9E0·839A:130B (Right Answers)

Answer: AD

247.<Huawei>
Warning:Aute>-Config is working.Before configuring the device £ stop Auto-Config.If you perform configurations when Auto-Co nfig is
running £
the OHCP £
routing £
ONS £
and VTY configurations will be lost. Do you
want to stop Auto Config? [y n) £0 108
Administrators find the above equipment pop-up message,about the information,which is correct?
0 A.If you want to enable automatic configuration,the administrator needs to select y
D 8.If you do not enable automatic configuration,the administrator need to select n
0 C.When the device is first started.the automatic configuration feature is enabled (Right Answers )
D 0.When the device is first started,the automatic configuration feature is disabled
Answer C

248. .When using ping command on VRP platform,if you need to specify the IP address as the echo request message's source address
,which of the following parameters should be used?
D A -a (Right Answers )
D B. S
D c.-cl
D D.-n

Answer: A

249. Configuring a Frame Relay PVC on the router,finding not valid.What are the possible reasons? (Multiple Choice)
0 A.configure the same DLCI on the same router
0 B LMItype configuration error (Right Answers>
0 C the configuration of frame Relay encapsulation type is wrong (Right Answers >
0 D DLCIconfiguration 1s wrong (Right Answers) Answer: BCD

250. .Known that a route(s routing table has the following two entries £
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface

9.0.0.0/8 OSPF 10 50 1.1.1.1 SerialO

9.1.0.0/16 RIP 100 5 2.2.2.2 EthemetO
If the router wants to forward the message whose destination address is 9.1.4.5,then which of the following state ment is correct?
D A.Select the first item as the best match, because OSPF protocol has higher priority
D B.Select the seconditem as the best match,because of the smallvalue of the RIP generation
D C.Select the second item as the best match,because EthternetO is faster than SerialO's speed
D D Select the second item as the best match,because the route entry for the destination address of 9 14.5,it is more accurate match (Right
Answers) Answe r: D

251. Which of the following contents can be used to filter on Huawei device's advanced ACL? (Multiple choice)
D A network traffic based on a specific source address (Right Answers)
D B.the traffic based on the specific applications, such as QQ
D C network traffic based on a specific destination address (Right Answers)
D D network traffic based on the specific port numbers (Right Answers )
D E.network traffic based on a specific user name Answer: ACD

252. A network segment 150.25.0.0 subnet mask is 255.255.224.0,so which is a valid host address in the network segment.(Multiple
Choice)
D A. 150.25.0.0
D B. 150.25 1.255 (Right Answers)
D C. 150 25.2.24 (Right Answers)
D D.150.15.3.30

Answer : BC

253. As shown,the running RIP between R1 and R2,R1 can not learn 2.2.2.2/32 or 2.0.0 0/8 route
Rl R2
GE0/0/0 GE0/0/0

LoopbackO: 1.1.1.1/32 [Rl)rip1

[Rl-rip-l)version 2
[Rl-rip-l]network 10.0.0.0
[Rl-rip-l]net\vork 1.0.0.0
0A TRUE (Right Answers )
OB.FALSE
Answer: T

loopbackO: 2.2.2.2/32
[R2]rip 1 [R2-rip-1}network 10.0.0.0
[R2-rip-1]network 2.0.0.0

254. About the description of PPP link esta blishment procedure,which of the following statement is wrong? (Multiple choice)
D A.Dead phase is also called the physical layer unavailable stage.When both ends of the communication line is detected physical lin
activation,it will move fro m stage to Esta blish Dead phase, also means the link establishment phase
D B.In the Establish phase,PPP link carries out the LCP parameter negotiation.The negotiation involves the Maximum Receive Unit
MRU,authentication mode, magic words and other options D C.In the Network phase, PPP links carries out NCP negotiation.To select and
configure a network layer protocol by the NCP negotiation,and proceed the network layer parameter negotiation D D after NCP
negotiation is successful PPP link will remain communication state,and enter the Terminate phase (Right Answers)
D E.PPP link supports half-duplex and full-duplex modes (Right Answers )

Answer: DE

255. .Administrator configures OSPF on a router,but it doesn'tconfigure the loopback interface on the router.Which description about
the Router ID is correct?
D A.The minimum IP address of the router's physical interface will become Router ID
D B.The maximum IP address of the router's physical interface will become Router ID (Right Answers)
D C.The IP address of the router management interface will become Router ID
D D.The router's priority will be Router ID Answe r: B

256. DHCP OFFER packets can carry DNS address , but can only carry one DNS address.
QA. TRUE
QB.FALSE (Right Answers>

Answer: F

257. UDP is connectionless.whic h you must use to provide transmiss ion reliability.249
D A.Internet Protocol
D B Application Layer protocol ·(Right Answers)
D C.Network Layer Protocol
D D.Transmission Control Protocol Answe r: B

258. .The rule to create VLAN on Huawei switches is that you can't create VLAN4095 ,and you can not delete VLAN1.
0A TRUE (Right Answers>
OB.FALSE

Answe r: T

259.Whenconfiguring DHCPv6 in the VRP system,which of DUIDformats can be configurated? (Multiple Choice)
0 A DUID-LL (Right Answers > D B DUID-LLT (Right Answers ) 0 C.DUID-EN
0 D.OUID-LLC

Answer: AB

260. Refer to the following output configuration result,about RIP description,which is correct?
<Huawei> display rip Public VPN-instance : RIP process:34
RIP version:1 Preference:100
Checkzero:Enabled Default-cost: 1
Summary:Disabled Host-route:Enabled
Maximum number of balanced paths·4 Update time:30 sec
Age time: 180 sec
Garbage-collect time·120 sec Graceful restart:Disabled
Silent-interfaces ·None Default-route:Enabled Default route cost: 2 Verify-source:Enabled
Networks:34.0.0.0 12.0 0 0
0 A. auto-summary is enabled
D B.RIP process number is 1
0 C.RIP routing update packet's transm1ss1on interval 1s 30s (Right Answers)
0 D.RIP routing's spam timeout is 180s Answer :C

261. As shown,in private network,one Web server needs to provide HTIP service to public network users,so the network
administrator needs to configure NAT on the gateway router RTA to achieve demand,so which of the following configuration can meet
the needs?

D A (RTA-Serial1/0/1) nat server protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1 www inside 192.168.1.1 8080 (Right Answers)
D 8_ [RTA-Serial1/0/1) nat server protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1www inside 192.10.10.1 8080
D C.[RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1) nat serve r protocol tcp global 202.10.10.1www inside 192.168.1.1 8080
D D.[RTA-Gigabitethernet0/0/1) nat serve r protocol tcp global 192.168.1.1www inside 202.10.10.18080 Answe r: A

262. A company has 50 Private IP addresses.The administrator access to the public network using NAT technology,and the company
has only one public network address available,which of the following NAT conversion ways can meet the requirement?
0 A.Static Transfer
0B.Dynamic Conversion
0 C easy-ip ·(Right Answers)
0 D.NAPT

Answer: C

263. As shown,RTA as PPPoE client send PADI message to seiver A,which of the following way PADI message will use?

D A.Unicast D B.Multicast
D C Broadcast (Right Answers > D D.anycast

Answer: C

264. .STP meanwhile in improving the reliability of the network,but also can solve the loop problem of switched network.
0A_ TRUE (Right Answers)
OB.FALSE

Answer:T

265.Onthe router,which command can be used to display the mapping relationship between the networkaddress andthe DLCI?
DA.display fr interface
D B.display fr
D C display fr map-info (Right Answers >
D D.display fr brief Answer : C

266. Which address does 192.168.1.127/25 represent?

0 A Host
08.network
0 C multicast
0 D Broadcast (Right Answers) Answer: D

267. Which of ICMP timeout message will Tracert Diagnostic Tool record,thereby providing packet reaches the destination IP
address to the user?
D A.Destination port
D B.Source port
D C.Destination IPAddress
D D Source IP address (Right Answers ) Answer: D

201.Under the Huawei AR router's command line interface,the role of the Save command is to save the current systemtime.
QA. TRUE
0B FALSE (Right Answers> Answe r: F